Home

ProSafe Managed Switch Web Management User Manual

1. s s Tee te s e 2 tee me ves tsis tsas t Tewe aame oee Saal a ane tece oe dasme tere tranas sere x t ene boo vee gaat 32ra fe beme ee re a ene Deea al ieee one mw ee ree th sea x tore t wn vane tase Taree man Teme eee ee Dene Dienai t pae see ee sen tree bee ry xx tes toese uwr ease sees aed toso ae nw Lead tre t case ow ma Doarme mee trate veem stoese ae tae vas sass sass o aene De me a De Deasa CEN lone tosse ssa ame tve e tome easa tas te wet gone sone ee te Dace gt eamo beera be Dase 3300 te rene Cae e e t aoe trees end verte tase tart o aane toe Saar woe rece bar Da new pae PT 333 Taseise tore 4de Doiie Pae t aee 3700 we tee weve aaee gaat ed tree Same ate rene me Denm irea bremse ver sene geen ae te t se gt tae boere vn LETTI 2ste aao tem Dee Dewees irere i Derm ot toere s tore ete teere toane z oo tome O eee gaat ioar Teea teos Demme esve were Dema 1280 bas 22 tet seue e mse aae vee taere coe ro te toe va vu LESS Tee poe cated b Dem iiaei 3 s tee mo ane me tm 200 tee tes su ease Teee wan eshe oome Proce man oa oo brae Desire tare me zuon me a tame ewe 11900 teos tame teas sate cee iamm ame eai aos Laatse toetse me Derne e e teaa taes toe sere esre Tease teve ame amme se a to ed te pan see prone see mane tee e tne cone me
2. Fig escrito O O Hardware Management Preference The hardware management preference of the switch The hardware management preference can be disabled or unassigned Switch Status Displays the status of the selected unit The possible values are e OK e Unsupported e Code Mismatch e Config Mismatch e Not Present Management Status Displays whether the selected switch is the management unit or a normal stacking member or on standby The following table describes the Basic Stack Status fields Table 2 28 Field Description Unit ID Unit Id of the specific switch Switch Description The description for the unit can be configured by the user Serial Number Up Time Configured Model Identifier Plugged in Model Identifier Expected Code Type The unique box serial number for this switch Displays the relative time since the last reboot of the This field displays the model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the device This field displays the model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the plugged in device This field indicates the expected code type on this unit Running Code Version This field indicates the detected version of code on this unit Code Version in Flash Displays the Release number and version number of the code stored in flash Click REFRESH to update the information on the page 82 Ch
3. GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabir Loyer 3 Mosoged Stockoble Switch wih 4 10 Gigobit Siors tosour DHCP Server Msgs Client Ifc Mismatch Received eeeseoecseoesesoeesecee gt CULAR REPEL Sie Field Description Interface The untrusted and snooping enabled interface for which statistics to be displayed MAC Verify Failures Client Ife Mismatch DHCP Server Msgs Received The number of Server messages that are dropped on an un trusted port Number of packets that were dropped by DHCP Snooping as there is no matching DHCP Snooping binding entry found The number of DHCP messages that are dropped based on source MAC address and client HW address verification Click CLEAR to clear all interfaces statistics Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest statistics 502 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IP Source Guard The IP Source Guard folder contains links to the following features e IP Source Guard Interface Configuration on page 503 e IP Source Guard Binding Configuration on page 504 IP Source Guard Interface Configuration To display the IP Source Guard Interface Configuration page click Security gt Control gt IP Source Guard gt Interface Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S ne 48 Port Gigabit Layer J Mosoged Stockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Slory tosour System Swit
4. Port Supplicant Authertication Port User MAC Session Filler VLAN VLAN Session Termination Name Time 1D 1D Assigned Timeout Action Port Summary Address Chem Summary 1 AB REFRESH Table 6 95 jet fasten The port to be displayed User Name This field displays the User Name representing the identity of the supplicant device Supplicant Mac Address This field displays supplicant s device Mac Address Session Time This field displays the time since the supplicant as logged in seconds Filter ID This field displays policy filter id assigned by the authenticator to the supplicant device Vlan ID This field displays vlan id assigned by the authenticator to the supplicant device Vlan Assigned This field displays reason for the vlan id assigned by the authenticator to the supplicant device Session Timeout This field displays Session Timeout set by the Radius Server to the supplicant device Termination Action This field displays Termination Action set by the Radius Server to the supplicant device 480 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Traffic Control From the Traffic Control link you can configure MAC Filters Storm Control Port Security and Protected Port settings To display the page click the Security gt Traffic Control tab The Traffic Control folder contains links to the following
5. e Dynamic e Manual Network Address Specifies the subnet address for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool Network Mask Specifies the subnet number for a DHCP address of Network Prefix Length Client Name a dynamic pool Either Network Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both Specifies the subnet number for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool Either Network Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both Valid Range is 0 to 32 Specifies the Client Name for DHCP manual Pool Hardware Address Specifies the MAC address of the hardware platform of the DHCP client Hardware Address Type Specifies the protocol of the hardware platform of the DHCP client Valid types are ethernet and ieee802 Default value is ethernet Client ID Specifies the Client Identifier for DHCP manual Pool Host Number Specifies the IP address for a manual binding to a DHCP client Host can be set only if at least one among of Client Identifier or Hardware Address is specified Deleting Host would delete Client Name Client ID Hardware Address for the Manual Pool and set the Pool Type to Unallocated Host Mask Host Prefix Length Lease Time Specifies the subnet mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client Either Host Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both Specifies the subnet mask for a manual binding to a DHC
6. 3 Use Configuration Name to specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used It may be up to 32 alphanumeric characters 4 Use Configuration Revision Level to specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used The values allowed are between 0 and 65535 The default value is 0 5 Use Forward BPDU while STP Disabled to specify whether spanning tree BPDUs should be forwarded or not while spanning tree is disabled on the switch Value is enabled or disabled 6 Use BPDU Guard to specify whether the BPDU guard feature is enabled The STP BPDU guard allows a network administrator to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the active topology consistent and predictable The switches behind the edge ports that have STP BPDU guard enabled will not be able to influence the overall STP topology At the reception of BPDUs the BPDU guard operation disables the port that is configured with this option and transitions the port into disable state This would lead to administrative disable of the port 7 Use BPDU Filter to specify whether the BPDU Filter feature is enabled STP BPDU filtering applies to all operational edge ports Edge Port in an operational state is supposed to be connected to hosts that typically drop BPDUs If an operational edge port receives a BPDU it immediately loses its operational status In that case if BPDU filtering is enabled on this port then it drops the BPDUs receiv
7. Chapter 8 Maintenance 587 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual File Download To display the File Download page click Maintenance gt Download gt File Download NETGEAR GSM73525 tw 4 9 it Loyer J Managed Stockoble Switch with 4 1O Gigabit Sior socour AAR penned File Download gt HTTP File File Download Download File Type Image Name Transter Mode Server Address Type Server Address Remote File Name Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to transfer Archive Specify archive STK code when you want to upgrade the operational flash e Image1 Specify the code image1 you want to download e Image2 Specify the code image2 you want to download CLI Banner Specify CLI Banner when you want a banner to be displayed before the login prompt Configuration Specify configuration when you want to update the switch s configuration If the file has errors the update will be stopped Text Configuration Specify configuration in text mode when you want to update the switch s configuration If the file has errors the update will be stopped Use Config Script to specify script configuration file Use SSH 1 RSA Key File to specify SSH 1 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File Use SSH 2 RSA Key PEM File to specify SSH 2 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File PEM Encoded Use SSH 2 DSA Key PEM File to specify SSH 2 Digital Signature Algorithm DSA
8. OCP Pool Type of bndang Opens Network Address ONCE Server Statatcs OCP Bedings Information Cheat Nome Pool Karme Reterorh Mash Network Prefs Length OHCP Conflicts Hardware Ad rwss taformation Martwere Address type DHCP Relay gt DHCP L Relay gt UDP Relay gt DHCPV6 Server tasot Mask gt DNCPV6 Relay Hest Prelis Length Cheat 10 Misst Rewrrebeer Lease Tene Oe ours Meutes Nett tOS Node type b Nesl berver Address Oemnae Name Rowttee The following table describes the DHCP Pool Configuration fields Table 2 17 Fes escrito O O Pool Name For a user with read write permission this field would show names of all the existing pools along with an additional option Create When the user selects Create another text box Pool Name appears where the user may enter name for the Pool to be created For a user with read only permission this field would show names of the existing pools only Pool Name This field appears when the user with read write permission has selected Create in the Drop Down list against Pool Name Specifies the Name of the Pool to be created Pool Name can be up to 31 characters in length 54 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information Table 2 17 Field ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Description Type of Binding Specifies the type of binding for the pool e Unallocated
9. Designated Port Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port 166 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual STP Statistics Use the Spanning Tree Statistics page to view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units BPDUs transmitted and received on each port To display the Spanning Tree Statistics page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt STP Statistics NETGEAR GSM7352S Sh Pon Gigabit Layer J Managed trochoble Switch with 4 10 Gugabs Horm Maintenance Help Index tocos gt Basic STP Statistics Advasced STP Configuration CST Configuration 1 LAGS All STP Statistics CST Port s STP Corfguraten dace BFDUs STE UDUS z x BPOUs CST Port Stews Received amnad Socovos neceived MST Configuration MST Port Status STP Stabatcs o eecececeesco 9 0 c 0 c 0 6 o 0 a 0 9 0 o 0 o gt AL tLe Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 167 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the information available on the STP Statistics page Table 3 60 Fig escrito O O O Interface Selects one of the physical or port channel interfaces of the switch
10. Keys Present Displays which keys RSA DSA or both are present if any Key Generation In Progress Displays which key is being generated if any RSA DSA or None 460 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Host Keys Download Use this menu to transfer a file to or from the switch To display the Host Keys Download page click Security gt Access gt SSH gt Host Keys Download NETGEAR GSM7352S Port Groda Lover 2 Maneged bobis Switch with 4 1OGigobit Slots tOGOUT Host Keys Download Host Keys Download ile Type Transfer Mode Server Address Type Server Address Remate tthe Mame 1 Use File Type to specify the type of file you want to transfer e SSH 1 RSA Key File SSH 1 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File e SSH 2 RSA Key PEM File SSH 2 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File PEM Encoded e SSH 2 DSA Key PEM File SSH 2 Digital Signature Algorithm DSA Key File PEM Encoded 2 Use Transfer Mode to specify the protocol to use to transfer the file e TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol e SFTP Secure File Transfer Program e SCP Secure Copy 3 Use Server Address Type to specify either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate the format of the TFTP SFTP SCP Server Address field The factory default is IPv4 4 Use Server Address to enter the IP address of the server in accordance with the format indicated by the Server Address
11. Table 18 Field Description Neighbor State Specifies the state of the neighbor cache entry Following are the states for dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache e Incmp Address resolution is being performed on the entry A neighbor solicitation message has been sent to the solicited node multicast address of the target but the corresponding neighbor advertisement message has not yet been received e Reach Positive confirmation was received within the last Reachable Time milliseconds that the forward path to the neighbor was functioning properly While in REACH state the device takes no special action as packets are sent e Stale More than ReachableTime milliseconds have elapsed since the last positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly While in STALE state the device takes no action until a packet is sent e Delay More than ReachableTime milliseconds have elapsed since the last positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly A packet was sent within the last DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds If no reachability confirmation is received within DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds of entering the DELAY state send a neighbor solicitation message and change the state to PROBE e Probe A reachability confirmation is actively sought by resending neighbor solicitation messages every RetransTimer milliseconds until a reachability confirmation is
12. Table 7 112 Field Description Total Transmit Packets Discarded Single Collision Frames Multiple Collision Frames The sum of single collision frames discarded multiple collision frames discarded and excessive frames discarded A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Excessive Collision Frames A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions Port Membership Discards The number of frames discarded on egress for this port due to egress filtering being enabled Dropped Transmit Frames Dropped Receive Frames Number of transmit frames discarded at the selected port Number of Receive frames discarded at the selected port STP BPDUs Received Number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port STP BPDUs Transmitted RSTP BPDUs Received Number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port Number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port RSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port MSTP BPDUs Received MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port Number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected po
13. The description for the unit can be configured by the user The unique box serial number for this switch Displays the relative time since the last reboot of the switch Configured Model Identifier This field displays the model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the device Plugged in Model Identifier This field displays the model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the plugged in device Expected Code Type This field indicates the expected code type on this unit Running Code Version Code Version in Flash This field indicates the detected version of code on this unit Displays the Release number and version number of the code stored in flash 84 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Stack Port Configuration To display the Stack Port Configuration page click System gt Stacking gt Advanced gt Stack Port Configuration A screen similar to the following displays Stack Port Configuration flack Port asliga stian init 100 Port Type 1 Configured Stack Mode Specify the operating mode of the port to be either ethernet or stacking The default value is set to stacking The following table describes Stack Port Configuration fields Table 2 31 Field Description Unit ID Displays the unit Port Displays the stackable interfaces on the given unit Ru
14. To access the Port Configuration page click Switching gt Ports gt Port Configuration GSM7 3525 Oot Seeks tere momaped aa aes x ae x aie aan ase To configure port settings 1 2 9 D Use Port to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured Use STP Mode to select the Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode for the port or LAG The possible values are e Enable Select this to enable the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port e Disable Select this to disable the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port Use the Admin Mode pull down menu to select the Port control administration state You must select enable if you want the port to participate in the network The factory default is enabled Use LACP Mode to select the Link Aggregation Control Protocol administration state The mode must be enabled in order for the port to participate in Link Aggregation May be enabled or disabled by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field The factory default is enabled Use the Physical Mode pull down menu to select the port s speed and duplex mode If you select auto the duplex mode and speed will be set by the auto negotiation process Note that the port s maximum capability full duplex and speed will be advertised Otherwise your selection will determine the port s duplex mode and transmission rate The factory default is auto Use the Link Trap object to determine
15. i Use Interface to specify the list of all the ports on which LLDP 802 1AB frames can be transmitted 108 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the LLDP Local Device Information fields Table 2 35 Field Chassis ID Subtype Chassis ID Description Specifies the string that describes the source of the chassis identifier Specifies the string value used to identify the chassis component associated with the local system Port ID Subtype Specifies the string describes the source of the port identifier Port ID Specifies the string that describes the source of the port identifier System Name System Description Port Description Specifies the system name of the local system Specifies the description of the selected port associated with the local system Specifies the description of the selected port associated with the local system System Capabilities Supported Specifies the system capabilities of the local system System Capabilities Enabled Management Address Management Address Type Specifies the system capabilities of the local system which are supported and enabled Specifies the advertised management address of the local system Specifies the type of the management address Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 1
16. on page B 608 e Access Control Lists ACLs on page B 610 e Differentiated Services DiffServ on page B 613 e 802 1X on page B 617 e MSTP on page B 620 Virtual Local Area Networks VLANs A local area network LAN can generally be defined as a broadcast domain Hubs bridges or switches in the same physical segment or segments connect all end node devices End nodes can communicate with each other without the need for a router Routers connect LANs together routing the traffic to the appropriate port A virtual LAN VLAN is a local area network with a definition that maps workstations on some basis other than geographic location for example by department type of user or primary application To enable traffic to flow between VLANs traffic must go through a router just as if the VLANs were on two separate LANs A VLAN is a group of PCs servers and other network resources that behave as if they were connected to a single network segment even though they might not be For example all marketing personnel might be spread throughout a building Yet if they are all assigned to a single VLAN they can share resources and bandwidth as if they were connected to the same segment The resources of other departments can be invisible to the marketing VLAN members accessible to all or accessible only to specified individuals depending on how the IT manager has set up the VLANs VLANs have a number of advantages
17. soooet gt MFDS Multicast Router Configuration Gt Snooping Multicast Router Configuration Configuration Intertace a LAGS AN Go Te taterfae Corhguraten gt IGMP VLAN Corfiguraton MARDE Router Configuration Multicast Router VLAN Corfigurabon 5 2 0 1 o 1 o L o 1 A L Jogo a 1 Use Interface to select the physical interface for which you want Multicast Router to be enabled 2 Use Multicast Router to enable or disable Multicast Router on the selected interfaces 178 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Multicast Router VLAN Configuration This page configures the interface to only forward the snooped IGMP packets that come from VLAN ID lt vlanid gt to the multicast router attached to this interface The configuration is not needed most of the time since the switch will automatically detect the presence of a multicast router and forward IGMP packets accordingly It is only needed when you want to make sure that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network To access the Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Multicast Router VLAN Configuration GSM7352S ogee 48 Pert Gigabit Lave oble Switch with 4 10 topov Multicast Router VLAN Configuration Multicast Router VLAN Configuration interface
18. Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the Trap Log information displayed on the screen The page also displays information about the traps that were sent Click Clear Counters to clear all the counters This resets all statistics for the trap logs to the default values Table 7 116 Field Description Number of Traps Since Last Reset Trap Log Capacity Number of Traps since log last viewed Log The number of traps that have occurred since the switch last reboot The maximum number of traps stored in the log If the number of traps exceeds the capacity the entries will overwrite the oldest entries The number of traps that have occurred since the traps were last displayed Displaying the traps by any method terminal interface display Web display upload file from switch etc will cause this counter to be cleared to 0 The sequence number of this trap System Up Time The time at which this trap occurred expressed in days hours minutes and seconds since the last reboot of the switch Trap Information identifying the trap Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 567 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Event Logs This panel displays the event log which contains error messages from the system Event log is not cleared on a system reset To access the Event Log page click Monito
19. Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS capable network With this in mind all elements of the network must be QoS capable The presence of at least one node which is not QoS capable creates a deficiency in the network path and the performance of the entire packet flow is compromised Class of Service The Class of Service CoS queueing feature lets you directly configure certain aspects of switch queueing This provides the desired QoS behavior for different types of network traffic when the complexities of DiffServ are not required The priority of a packet arriving at an interface can be used to steer the packet to the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a mapping table CoS queue characteristics that affect queue mapping such as minimum guaranteed bandwidth or transmission rate shaping are user configurable at the queue or port level Eight queues per port are supported Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 398 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual From the Class of Service link under the QoS tab you can access the following pages e Basic on page 399 e Advanced on page 401 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e CoS Configuration on page 399 CoS Configuration To display the CoS Configuration page click QoS gt CoS gt Basic gt CoS Configuration GSM73525 48 Port Gigabe L Managed hablo Swit
20. Per I Meroged Stub Area Configuration OSPTv3 Stub Area Configuration 1 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects 2 Use Import Summary LSAs to select enable or disable If you select enable summary LSAs will be imported into areas Defaults to Enable 3 Use Default Cost to enter the metric value you want applied for the default route advertised into the stub area Valid values range from 1 to 16 777 215 This value is applicable only to Stub areas 4 Click ADD to configure the area as a stub area 5 Click DELETE to delete the stub area designation The area will be returned to normal state 304 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 39 Field Description SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum Type of Service The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums co
21. ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer I Man Mocktoble twitch with 4 1O Gigabi Canet ath nner System Switching Routing Security Monitoring Maintenance Help Index rosou Archive wnagel Ttrro v 1Pv4 se 0 0 0 0 584 Chapter8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To upload a file from the switch to the TFTP server 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to upload e Archive Specify archive STK code when you want to retrieve from the operational flash e Image1 Specify the code image1 when you want to retrieve e Image2 Specify the code image2 when you want to retrieve e CLI Banner Specify CLI Banner when you want retrieve the CLI banner file e Startup Configuration Specify configuration when you want to retrieve the stored configuration e Text Configuration Specify configuration in text mode when you want to retrieve the stored configuration Script File Specify script file when you want to retrieve the stored configuration Error Log Specify error log to retrieve the system error persistent log sometimes referred to as the event log e Buffered Log Specify buffered log to retrieve the system buffered in memory log e Trap Log Specify trap log to retrieve the system trap records e Tech Support Specify Tech Supp
22. STP BPDUs Received Number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port STP BPDUs Transmitted Number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port RSTP BPDUs Received Number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port RSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port MSTP BPDUs Received Number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port Multicast Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses which range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 From the Multicast link you can access the following pages e MFDB on page 168 e IGMP Snooping on page 172 e MLD Snooping on page 184 MFDB From the MFDB link you can access the following pages e MFDB Table on page 169 e MFDB Statistics on page 171 168 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MFDB Table The Multicast Forwarding Database holds the port membership information for all active multicast address entries The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and MAC address pair Entries may contain data for more than one protocol To display the MFDB Table page click Switching gt Multicast gt MFDB gt MFDB Table GSM7352S saa MFDB Table WON Tae MFDB Table gt MFO Statance Search
23. To display the Port Security Configuration page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Port Security gt Port Administration NETGEAR Switching Routing s MAC Filter Port Security Configuration Port Security Por Admunistration Imerfoce Configuration Oynama MAC Address Static MAC Address gt Private Group gt Protected Port gt Storm Control Port Security Settings Port Security Mode Port Security Violations To configure the global port security mode GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer J Mosoged Srockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Siors Monitoring Maintenance Help Index tocour Osobie O Enadie VLAN 10 REPRE Set 1 Inthe Port Security Mode field select the appropriate radio button to enable or disable port security on the switch 484 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The Port Security Violation table shows information about violations that occurred on ports that are enabled for port security The following table describes the fields in the Port Security Violation table Table 6 97 Field Description Port Displays the physical interface for which you want to display data Last Violation MAC Displays the source MAC address of the last packet that was discarded at a locked port VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID corresponding to the Last Violation MAC address
24. e 2 0 0 0 0 0 usec 0 usec 0 usec e 3 0 0 0 0 0 usec 0 usec 0 usec e Hop Count w Last TTL z Test attempt x Test Success y To display the Traceroute IPv4 page click Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt Traceroute IPv4 NETGEAR GSM7352S ete 7 ps 4 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Mana Stackable Switch with 4 1O Gigabit Sots Holp Index tocour gt Ping IPv4 TraceRoute gt Ping IPVO TraceRoute v Traceroute IPs Traceroute IPv6 IP Address Hostname Probes Per Hop Max Inem Maxfall Interval secs Port Sue Results Chapter 8 Maintenance 599 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure the Traceroute settings and send probe packets to discover the route to a host on the network 1 Use IP Address Hostname to enter the IP address or Hostname of the station you want the switch to discover path The initial value is blank The IP Address or Hostname you enter is not retained across a power cycle 2 Optionally configure the following settings Probes Per Hop Enter the number of probes per hop The initial value is default The Probes per Hop you enter is not retained across a power cycle MaxTTL Enter the maximum TTL for the destination The initial value is default value The MaxTTL you enter is not retained across a power cycle InitTTL Enter the initial TTL to be used The initial value is default value The InitTTL you enter is n
25. e Itis easy to do network segmentation Users that communicate most frequently with each other can be grouped into common VLANs regardless of physical location Each group s Appendix B Configuration Examples 608 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual traffic is contained largely within the VLAN reducing extraneous traffic and improving the efficiency of the whole network They are easy to manage The addition of nodes as well as moves and other changes can be dealt with quickly and conveniently from a management interface rather than from the wiring closet They provide increased performance VLANs free up bandwidth by limiting node to node and broadcast traffic throughout the network They ensure enhanced network security VLANs create virtual boundaries that can be crossed only through a router So standard router based security measures can be used to restrict access to each VLAN Packets received by the switch are treated in the following way When an untagged packet enters a port it is automatically tagged with the port s default VLAN ID tag number Each port has a default VLAN ID setting that is user configurable the default setting is 1 The default VLAN ID setting for each port can be changed in the Port PVID Configuration screen See Port PVID Configuration on page 3 139 When a tagged packet enters a port the tag for that packet is unaffected by the default VLAN I
26. gogogo H F iii iiiki g oogogogogoge i GSM7352S 44 For Gigabit Layer J Managed Yrochoble Switch with 4 10 Cogabs Hom Maintenance Help Index iocos Interface Select the interface for which you want Multicast Router to be enabled 2 Use Multicast Router to enable or disable Multicast Router on the selected interface 188 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Multicast Router VLAN Configuration To access the Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Multicast Router VLAN Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S St Port Gigabit Layer 3 Mansoed a Switch with 4 10 Gigabe Som Leoson Multicast Router VLAN Configuration Multicast Router VLAN Configuration Interface Multicast Router VLAN Configuration 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which you want Multicast Router to be enabled 2 Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID for which the Multicast Router Mode is to be Enabled or Disabled 3 Use Multicast Router to enable or disable the multicast router for the Vlan ID Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 189 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD Snooping Querier Configuration Use this menu to configure the parameters for MLD Snooping Querier Note that only a user with Read Write
27. querier Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 181 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration Use this page to configure IGMP queriers for use with VLANs on the network To access this page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Querier VLAN Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S trackable Soma wit 4 1O ageb tom IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration IGMP Seooping Querier VLAN Configuration To configure Querier VLAN settings 1 To create a new VLAN ID for IGMP Snooping select New Entry from the VLAN ID field and complete the following fields User can also set pre configurable Snooping Querier parameters e VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID for which the IGMP Snooping Querier is to be enabled e Querier Election Participate Mode Enable or disable Querier Participate Mode e Disabled Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN the snooping querier moves to the non querier state Enabled The snooping querier participates in querier election in which the least IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN The other querier moves to non querier state e Snooping Querier VLAN Address Specify the Snooping Querier IP Address to be used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries sent on the specified VLAN 2 Click Apply to apply the new settings to the switch Configurati
28. x Test Success y To display the Traceroute IPv6 page click Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt Traceroute IPv6 NETGEAR GSM73525 i S Port Gigabit Layer 3 Manage Stackable Switch with 4 1O Gigabit Slots Holp index tocou gt Ping IPwa Traceroute IPv6 gt Ping Pv gt Traceroute IPv4 v Traceroute IPVG IPve Address Host Mame Poort Traceroute IPv6 1 Use IPv6 Address Hostname to enter the IPv6 address or Hostname of the station you want the switch to discover path The initial value is blank The IPv6 Address or Hostname you enter is not retained across a power cycle 2 Use Port to enter the UDP Dest port in probe packets The initial value is default value The port you enter is not retained across a power cycle Chapter 8 Maintenance 601 Help Use the features available from the Help tab to connect to online resources for assistance The Help tab contains a link to Online Help Online Help The Online Help includes the following pages e Support on page 602 e User Guide on page 603 Support Use the Support page to connect to the Online Support site at netgear com To access the Support page click Help gt Online Help gt Support NETGEAR GSM7352S 40 Port Gigabit Loyer J Monoged Srockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigabir Slors System Switching Routing f Securi intenonc index socour Support Support Please click APPLY below to be taken to the Online Support site at n
29. 1 Use Reboot Unit No to select the unit to reset Select all to run reset for all units 2 Select the Save prior to reboot radio button and click the APPLY button to reboot the switch Prior to reboot the unit the current configuration will be saved first 3 Select the Don t save prior to reboot radio button and click the APPLY button to reboot the switch This option permits the user to reboot the unit without saving the current configuration Chapter 8 Maintenance 581 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Factory Default Use the Factory Default page to reset the system configuration to the factory default values Note If you reset the switch to the default configuration the IP address is reset to 169 254 100 100 and the DHCP client is enabled If you lose network connectivity after you reset the switch to the factory defaults see Web Access on page 9 To access the Factory Defaults page click Maintenance gt Reset gt Factory Default NETGEAR GSM7352S oli oped 48 Port Gigobit Loyer I Man Seackable Switch with 4 10 Gigabin Siers System Switching Routing 20S Security onitorin aintenone Help Index socour gt Device Reboot Factory Default Factory Defeult Factory Default gt Password Reset Check this box and click APPLY below to reboot all units and reture af configuration settings to default values To reset the switch to the factory default settin
30. 14 Use Authentication Key ID to enter the ID to be used for authentication You will only be prompted to enter an ID when you select Encrypt as the authentication type The ID is a number between 0 ad 255 inclusive 15 Use Metric Cost to enter the link cost OSPF uses this value in computing shortest paths The range is from 1 to 65 535 Table 32 Field Description IP Address The IP address of the interface Subnet Mask The network mask indicating the portion of the IP LSA Ack Intervian secs address that identifies the attached network The number of seconds to wait before sending a delayed acknowledgement Chapter 4 Routing 281 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 32 Field Description The current state of the selected router interface One of e Down This is the initial interface state In this state the lower level protocols have indicated that the interface is unusable In this state interface parameters will be set to their initial values All interface timers will be disabled and there will be no adjacencies associated with the interface e Loopback In this state the router s interface to the network is looped back either in hardware or software The interface is unavailable for regular data traffic However it may still be desirable to gain information on the quality of this interface either through sending ICMP ping
31. 4 If you enable the Client DB Full field the SNMP agent sends a trap each time an entry cannot be added to the client database because it is full 5 If you enable the Client Disconnect field the SNMP agent sends a trap when a client disconnects from a captive portal 522 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Captive Portal Client To display the Captive Portal Client page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Client NETGEAR gt poner s ng Captive Portal Client IP Source Guord Captive Portal Client 1P MAC Address Address Drops Sesseon of Verification Time GSM73525S 48 Part Gigabit Loyer J Managed Srechable Swich with 4 15 Gigeba Siors ioco CPi User Bytes Bytes Packets Packets Interface 1D Name Received Transmitted Received Transmitted CILAR ALraL om Table 6 107 Field Description MAC Address Identifies the MAC address of the client IP Address Drops Identifies the IP address of the client if applicable Protocol Verification Session Time Shows the current connection protocol which is either HTTP or HTTPS Shows the current account type which is Guest Local or RADIUS Shows the amount of time that has passed since the client was authorized Bytes Received Interface Identifies the interface the client is using CP ID The ID of the Captive Portal
32. 93 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Community Configuration By default two SNMP Communities exist e Private with Read Write privileges and status set to Enable e Public with Read Only privileges and status set to Enable These are well known communities Use this page to change the defaults or to add other communities Only the communities that you define using this page will have access to the switch using the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c protocols Only those communities with read write level access can be used to change the configuration using SNMP Use this page when you are using the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c protocol If you want to use SNMP v3 you should use the User Accounts menu 94 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To display this page click System gt SNMP gt SNMP V1 V2 gt Community Configuration A screen similar to the following displays 1 Use Community Name to reconfigure an existing community or to create a new one Use this pull down menu to select one of the existing community names or select Create to add a new one A valid entry is a case sensitive string of up to 16 characters 2 Client Address Taken together the Client Address and Client IP Mask denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access this device If either Client Addr
33. Addresses in order of preference NetBIOS Name Server Addresses Specifies the list of NetBIOS Name Server Addresses for the pool The user may specify up to 8 NetBIOS Name Server Addresses in order of preference NetBIOS Node Type Specifies the NetBIOS node type for DHCP clients b node Broadcast p node Peer to Peer m node Mixed h node Hybrid Next Server Address Specifies the Next Server Address for the pool Domain Name Bootfile Specifies the domain name for a DHCP client Domain Name can be up to 255 characters in length Specifies the name of the default boot image for a DHCP client File Name can be up to 128 characters in length Use ADD to create the Pool Configuration Use APPLY to change the Pool Configuration Sends the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Use DELETE to delete the Pool This field is not visible to a user with read only permission 56 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Pool Options To display the DHCP Pool Options page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Pool Options A screen similar to the following displays _ GSM7352 DHCP Pool Options DHCP Pool Options gt DHCP O Relay gt UDP Relay gt DNCPV6 Server gt DHCPV6 Relay 1 Use Pool Name to select the Pool Name 2 Option Code specifies
34. Advanced 1 all a Ein Bi aE Ei Ja Pi Bii D 1 Interface Specifies the Auto VolP configurable interfaces 2 Use Auto VolP Mode to enable or disable the Auto VolP mode Auto VolP Mode can only be one of the following e Enable e Disable Default Table 5 74 Field Description Traffic Class Displays the Traffic Class used for VoIP traffic Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 411 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e DiffServ Configuration on page 412 DiffServ Configuration Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria The filtering criteria is defined by aclass The processing is defined by a policy s attributes Policy attributes may be defined on a per class instance basis and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class Then one or more classes are added to a policy Policies are then added to interfaces Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet The all class type option defines that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class The any class type option defines that at least one match criteria must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class Classes are tested in the ord
35. Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IP Rules Use these screens to configure the rules for the IP Access Control Lists created using the IP Access Control List Configuration screen What is shown on this screen varies depending on the current step in the rule configuration process Note There is an implicit deny all rule at the end of an ACL list This means that if an ACL is applied to a packet and if none of the explicit rules match then the final implicit deny all rule applies and the packet is dropped To display the IP Rules page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IP Rules NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Mosaged Stackable Switch with 4 10 lt higabit Mets Maintenance Help Index tocon gt Basic IP Rules v Advanced IP ACL IP Rufes IP Extended Rules Basic ACL Rule Table IP Sadno IP Rules ACL 10 NAME Cerhigurabce Rube Binding Table ad Action Logging To configure rules for an IP ACL 1 To add an IP ACL rule select the ACL ID to add the rule to complete the fields described in the following list and click Add Only displays ACL IDs from 1 to 99 e Rule ID Specify a number from 1 12 to identify the IP ACL rule You can create up to 12 rules for each ACL e Action Selects the ACL forwarding action which is one of the following e Permit Forwards packets which meet
36. Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest DAI statistics Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 511 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Captive Portal The Captive Portal folder contains links to the following features Captive Portal Global Configuration on page 513 Captive Portal Configuration on page 515 Captive Portal Binding Configuration on page 517 Captive Portal Binding Table on page 518 Captive Portal Group Configuration on page 519 Captive Portal User Configuration on page 520 Captive Portal Trap Flags on page 522 Captive Portal Client on page 523 512 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Captive Portal Global Configuration Using the Captive Portal Global Configuration page you can control the administrative state of the CP feature and configure global settings that affect all captive portals configured on the switch To display the Captive Portal Global Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Global Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pon Gigabit Layer J Mosoged Srochoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Slom tosour gt DHCP Snooping CA Ptive Portal Global Configuration gt IP Scerce Guard Captive Portal Global Configuration gt Dynamic ARP Inspection Admin Mode Captive Portal Operational Status CP Global Disabled
37. Field Definition Port Specifies the list of all the ports on which LLDP MED is enabled Management Address Specifies the advertised management address of the remote system MAC Address Specifies the MAC Address associated with the remote system System Model Specifies model name of the remote device Software Revision Specifies Software version of the remote device ISDP From the ISDP link you can access the following pages e Basicon page 121 e Advanced on page 124 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 121 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Global Configuration on page 123 122 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Global Configuration To display this page click System gt ISDP gt Basic gt Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM73525 meneget Global Configuration Global C snfiger stion Adasan Modo Tener mohi hoe Verwes Atrortmemerts ecghbors tadis last time chaoged Oewee 10 Devus 10 Formet Copetetty Downe 10 Fewmet 1 Use Admin Mode to specify whether the ISDP Service is to be Enabled or Disabled The default value is Enabled 2 Use Timer to specify the period of time between sending new ISDP packets The range is 5 to 254
38. Guest VLAN RADIUS assigned VLANs Double VLANs Spanning Tree Protocol STP STP Operation Mode Optional STP Features STP Bridge Priority Multiple Spanning Tree Link Aggregation LACP System Priority Routing Mode OSPF Admin Mode OSPF Router ID IP Helper and UDP Relay RIP VRRP Tunnel and Loopback Interfaces IPv6 Routing DHCPv6 Default Enabled Disabled 300 seconds Dynamic Addresses Disabled 1 Default Disabled Leave 60 centiseconds Leave All 1000 centiseconds Join 20 centiseconds Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Disabled 32768 Enabled No Link Aggregation Groups LAGs configured 1 Disabled Enabled 0 0 0 0 Enabled Enabled Disabled None Disabled Disabled 606 Appendix A Default Settings ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 9 Default Settings Continued Feature Default OSPFv3 Enabled DiffServ Enabled Auto VoIP Enabled Auto VoIP Traffic Class 6 Bridge Multicast Filtering Disabled MLD Snooping Disabled IGMP Snooping Disabled IGMP Snooping Querier Disabled GMRP Disabled IPv4 Multicast Disabled IPv6 Multicast Disabled Licensing Support GSM72xxPS and GSM73xxSv1 Appendix A Default Settings 607 Configuration Examples This appendix contains information about how to configure the following features e Virtual Local Area Networks VLANs
39. Key File PEM Encoded Use SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File to specify SSL Trusted Root Certificate File PEM Encoded Use SSL Server Certificate PEM File to specify SSL Server Certificate File PEM Encoded Use SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File to specify SSL Diffie Hellman Weak Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded 588 Chapter 8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Use SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File to specify SSL Diffie Hellman Strong Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded e License Key Specify license key in order to support licensing features The factory default is Image1 Note To download SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions Note To download SSL PEM files SSL must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions 2 Use Transfer Mode to specify what protocol to use to transfer the file TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol e SFTP Secure File Transfer Program e SCP Secure Copy 3 Use Server Address Type to specify either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate the format of the TFTP SFTP SCP Server Address field The factory default is IPv4 4 Use Server Address to enter the IP address of the server in accordance with the format indicated by the Server Address Type The factory default is the IPv4 address 0 0 0 0 5 Use Remote File Name to enter t
40. Ports gt EAP Statistics Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 557 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the EAP statistics displayed on the screen Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions e Toclear all the EAP counters for all ports on the switch select the check box in the row heading and click Clear The button resets all statistics for all ports to default values e Toclear the counters for a specific port select the check box associated with the port and click Clear e Click Refresh to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current statistics Table 7 113 Field Description Selects the port to be displayed When the selection is changed a screen refresh will occur causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected port All physical interfaces are valid PAE Capabilities EAPOL Frames Received EAPOL Frames Transmitted This displays the PAE capabilities of the selected port This displays the number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this authenticator This displays the number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this authenticator EAPOL Start Frames Received This displays the number of EAPOL start frames that have been received by this authenticator EAPOL Logoff Frames Received This displays the number
41. Routing 243 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Neighbor Table Use the IPv6 Neighbor Table page to display IPv6 neighbor details for a specified interface To display the IPv6 Neighbor Table page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Neighbor Table GSM73525 A Pen Grt Saver 7 menage IPv Neighbor Tabte IPwe Meighhar adie 1 Use Search By to search for IPv6 routes by IPv6 address or interface e Searched by IPv6 Address Select IPv6 Address from pull down menu enter the 128 byte hexadecimal IPv6 Address in four digit groups separated by colons for example 2001 231F 1 Then click Go If the address exists that entry will be displayed An exact match is required e Searched by Interface Select Interface from pull down menu enter the interface ID in Unit Slot Port for example 2 1 1 Then click Go If the IPv6 route exists the entry will be displayed Table 18 Field Description Specifies the interface whose settings are displayed in the current table row Specifies the IPv6 address of neighbor or interface MAC Address Specifies MAC address associated with an interface IsRtr Indicates whether the neighbor is a router If the neighbor is a router the value is TRUE If the neighbor is not a router the value is FALSE 244 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual
42. See Port Security Configuration on page 6 484 This example uses the default values for the port authentication settings but there are several additional settings that you can configure For example the EAPOL Flood Mode field allows you to enable the forwarding of EAPoL frames when 802 1X is disabled on the device From the RADIUS Server Configuration screen configure a RADIUS server with the following settings e Server Address 192 168 10 23 e Secret Configured Yes e Secret secret123 e Active Primary For more information see RADIUS on page 6 433 Click Add From the Authentication List screen configure the default List to use RADIUS as the first authentication method See Authentication List Configuration on page 6 443 This example enables 802 1 X based port security on ProSafe Managed Switches and prompts the hosts connected on ports g5 g8 for an 802 1 X based authentication The switch passes the authentication information to the configured RADIUS server Appendix B Configuration Examples 619 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol STP runs on bridged networks to help eliminate loops If a bridge loop occurs the network can become flooded with traffic IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP supports multiple instances of Spanning Tree to efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces Each ins
43. Sent Packets Received Packets Descards Bad Version Virtual Link Not Found Area Mismatch Invalid Destination Address No Neighbor at Source Address Invalid OSPF Packet Type Hellos Ignored Mellos sent Hellos Received DD Packets Sent DD Packets Received LS Requests Sent LS Requests Received LS Updates Sent LS Updates Received 1s Acknowledgements Sent LS Acknowledgements Received 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed Chapter 4 Routing 313 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 42 Feis escrito O O OSPFv3 Area ID Area Border Router Count AS Border Router Count Area LSA Count IPv6 Address The OSPFv3 area to which the selected router interface belongs An OSPFv3 Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which the interface connects The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass The total number of Autonomous System border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs The IPv6 address of the interface Interface Events The number of times the specified OSPFv3 interface has changed its state or an error has occurred
44. SiG Gigi GiGi gi GRR gia I 1415141414141411111424111111 11101 Aga t FE EIGIGiEIEIE g PETE EE EE RETIRE EEE EEE TOU UU UU UU UU UU UU DUO if f t DUO UU UU EEUU DUE UU UU Ul HiH tate tote taa peie toe a tea _ oe teu t co tera te taia te twee trot t tene tee tune man toote t a tee t an ie t trete tone en toena an tete _ tom HERNREHENNNNNNENEENNNENNREENE TRA PETER CET EET pgogggi ikiii A 7 To configure CST port settings 1 Interface One of the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST 2 Use Port Priority to specify the priority for a particular port within the CST The port priority is set in multiples of 16 For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 15 it will be set to O If it is tried to be set to any value between 16 and 2 16 1 it will be set to 16 and so on Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 159 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 3 Use Admin Edge Port to specify if the specified port is an Edge Port within the CIST It takes a value of TRUE or FALSE where the default value is FALSE 4 Use Port Path Cost to set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the common and internal
45. Supported MIBs This page displays all the MIBs supported by the switch To access this page click System gt SNMP gt SNMP V1 V2 gt Supported MIBs SNMP Supported MIBS The SNMP Management Architecture NIB The Netfication MIB Medule The managemert informaben sefeubens fer the SNMP User based Securty Medel Industry Standard Discovery Protocol MIB Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP IP besed internets MIB I The Bridge MIB Extension module for managing Pronty end Multicast Filtering defined by IEEE 802 10 2998 Erthy MIB Verson 2 Oefintors of Managed Obyects for the Ethernet like Interface Types Unit and Slot configuration Pert Securty MIB LLOP bese MIE Netgear FastPoth Rodrs MIS RADIUS Authenbcaten Chent HIB Netgear Provate MIB for FestPath Mgmt Secunty RIP Version 2 MIS Extension The HIB module to describe trees for the OSPF Verson 2 Protocol FASTPATH Roubng Layer 3 _FASTPATH QOS MIB FASTPATH Flex QOS Support FASTPATH QOS ACL MIS FASTPATH Flex QOS ACL FASTPATH QOS AUTOVOIP MIB FASTPATH Flex QOS VOIP REC 3289 OIFFSERV MIS Management Informaton Bese for the Ovferentioted Services Archvtecture FASTPATH QOS OIFFSERV PRIVATE MIS FASTPATH Flex QOS DiffServ Private MISS definitions MGMD MIS inchades IGNAS and MLOw2 OVMRP STO MIS Ostance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol MIS REC 2465 PVE NiS Management Information Base for IP Version 6 Textual Convertions and Gener
46. This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network Valid values range from 1 to 65 535 The default is 10 seconds 7 Use Dead Interval to enter the OSPFv3 dead interval for the specified interface in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network This value should a multiple of the Hello Interval e g 4 Valid values range from 1 to 65535 The default is 40 8 Use Iftransit Delay Interval to enter the OSPFv3 Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default value is 1 second 9 Use MTU Ignore to disable OSPFv3 MTU mismatch detection on receiving packets Default value is Disable 10 Use Passive Mode to make an interface passive to prevent OSPF from forming an adjacency on an interface OSPF advertises networks attached to passive interfaces as stub networks Interfaces are not passive by default 11 Use Interface Type to set the interface type to broadcast mode or point to point mode The default interface type is broadcast 12 Use Metric Cost to enter the value on this interface for the cost TOS type of service The range for the metric cost is between 1 and 65 535 Metric Cost i
47. between Nominal and Threshold Power values The threshold power value is effected by changing System Usage Threshold Consumed Power Total amount of a power which is currently being delivered to all ports 90 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PoE Port Configuration Use the PoE Port Configuration page to configure per port PoE settings To display this page click System gt PoE gt Advanced gt PoE Port Configuration A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR amras Paes nar bes s me sone nee oe PETRI RIEL RITE EEL ELE PIFCTETETE PL ere eigil FRING RING BGRGRLRIEGRIE GSN RER igi 1 Unit Displays the Current PoE Unit You can change the PoE Unit by selecting another unit ID listed here 2 Use Admin Mode to enable disable the ability of the port to deliver a power 3 Use Port Priority to determine which ports can deliver power when total power delivered by the system crosses a certain threshold The switch may not be able to supply a power to all connected devices Priority is used to determine which ports can supply power The lower numbered port which is one of the ports of the same priority will have a higher priority e low Low priority e high High priority e critical Critical priority 4 Use High Power Mode to specify one of the following e Disable value means that a port is
48. gt Enable Password GSM7352S 48 Port Gigadi Loye 3 masaged Sreckable Switch with 4 1OGigobit Slots tocour Enable Password Configuration Enable Password Configuration Paewword Cont Paseword 1 Use Password to specify a password Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters 2 Use Confirm Password to enter the password again to confirm that you entered it correctly Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 431 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Line Password Configuration To display the Line Password Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt Line Password NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Loyer 3 Managed pockable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Slots tocour Local User Line Password Configuration Enable Password Lime Password gt RADIUS Conste Paseword Line Password Configuration gt TACACS Cont Conssle Password gt Aathentication Telnet Password List Login Sessions Confirm Telnet Password 33H Pesvword Confer SSH Paneer 1 Use Console Password to enter the Console password Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters 2 Use Confirm Console Password to enter the password again to confirm that you entered it correctly 3 Use Telnet Password to enter the Telnet password Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters 4 Use Confirm Telnet Password to enter the password again t
49. gt Diffserv Wizard Service Interface Configuration gt Auto VoIP Service Interface Coafiguration 1 all Ca To letertace Class Configuration Pobcy Configuration Service Interface Configuration Service Statuncs CIC gpogogogogog inm gao To configure DiffServ policy settings on an interface 1 Use Interface to select the interface on which you will configure the DiffServer service 2 Policy Name Lists all the policy names from which one can be selected This field is not shown for Read Write users where inbound service policy attachment is not supported by the platform Table 5 78 Fea O Deepon O O Direction Shows that the traffic direction of this service interface is In Operational Status Shows the operational status of this service interface either Up or Down 424 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Service Statistics This screen displays class oriented statistical information for the policy which is specified by the interface and direction The Member Classes drop down list is populated on the basis of the specified interface and direction and hence the attached policy if any Highlighting a member class name displays the statistical information for the policy class instance for the specified interface and direction To display the Service Statistics page click QoS gt Dif
50. if it was received on a routed VLAN Since a port can be configured to belong to more than one VLAN VLAN routing might be enabled for all of the VLANs on the port or for a subset VLAN Routing can be used to allow more than one physical port to reside on the same subnet It could also be used when a VLAN spans multiple physical networks or when additional segmentation or security is required This section shows how to configure the NETGEAR switch to support VLAN routing A port can be either a VLAN port or a router port but not both However a VLAN port may be part of a VLAN that is itself a router port From the VLAN link you can access the following pages e VLAN Routing Wizard on page 251 e VLAN Routing Configuration on page 252 250 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual VLAN Routing Wizard The VLAN Routing Wizard creates a VLAN adds selected ports to the VLAN The VLAN Wizard gives the user the option to add the selected ports as a Link Aggregation LAG The Wizard will Create a VLAN and generate a unique name for VLAN Add selected ports to the newly created VLAN and remove selected ports from the default VLAN Create a LAG add selected ports to a LAG then add LAG to the newly created VLAN Enable tagging on selected ports if the port is in another VLAN Disable tagging if a selected port does NOT exist in another VLAN Exclude ports NOT selected f
51. no other method will be tried even if you have specified more than one method The options are e Local The user s locally stored ID and password will be used for authentication e Radius The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally e Tacacs The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the TACACS server e None The user will not be authenticated 3 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear second in the selected authentication login list This is the method that will be used if the first method times out If you select a method that does not time out as the second method the third method will not be tried Note that this parameter will not appear when you first create a new login list 4 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear third in the selected authentication login list 5 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear forth in the selected authentication login list 448 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual HTTPS Authentication List You use this page to configure HTTPS lists A login list specifies the authentication method s you want used to validate switch or port access through HTTPS for the users associated with the list To display the HTTPS Authentication List page click Security gt
52. tocou Policy Class Configuration Class Information Policy Mame Pokey Type Mermdes lass Name Policy Attribute Service interface Configuration Pokey Atirdute Assign Queue ow O Drop Servce Statabes a O Mark VLAN Cos o O Mark IP Precedence 0 O Merk iP Oscr afit O Simpie Poky Color Mede Committed Rate Comstted Durst Sire Costorm Acton Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 421 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 2 Select the queue to which packets will of this policy class will be assigned This is an integer value in the range 0 to 7 3 Configure the policy attributes Drop Select the drop radio button This flag indicates that the policy attribute is defined to drop every inbound packet Mark VLAN CoS This is an integer value in the range from 0 to 7 for setting the VLAN priority Mark IP Precedence This is an IP Precedence value in the range from 0 to 7 Mark IP DSCP This lists the keywords for the known DSCP values from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the remaining values Simple Policy Use this attribute to establish the traffic policing style for the specified class This command uses single data rate and burst size resulting in two outcomes conform and violate 4 If you select the Simple Policy attribute you can configure the following fields Color Mode This lists the color mode The
53. 0 to 3600 The default value is 3 5 To specify the DNS server to which the switch sends DNS queries enter an IP address in standard IPv4 dot notation in the DNS Server Address and click Add The server appears in the list below You can specify up to eight DNS servers The precedence is set in the order created 46 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 6 To remove a DNS server from the list select the check box next to the server you want to remove and click Delete If no DNS server is specified the check box is global and will delete all the DNS servers listed 7 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 8 Click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 9 Click ADD to add the specified DNS Server to the List of DNS Servers Configuration changes take effect immediately 10 Click Delete to delete the specified DNS Server from the list of DNS Servers If no DNS Server is specified then it will delete all the DNS Servers DNS Server Configuration The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information Table 2 13 Field Description Serial No The sequence number of the DNS server Preference Shows the preference of the DNS Server The preference is determined by the order they were
54. 4 15 eray m Stub Area Configuration 1 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects 2 Use Import Summary LSAs to select enable or disable If you select enable summary LSAs will be imported into stub areas 3 Use Default Cost to enter the metric value you want applied for the default route advertised into the stub area Valid values range from 1 to 16 777 215 4 Click ADD to configure the area as a stub area 5 Click DELETE to delete the stub area designation The area will be returned to normal state 274 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 30 Field Description SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is typically done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum Type of Service The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 lin
55. 6 Unknown status Last Updated The last sysUpTime that this neighbor has been updated Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 37 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Time ProSafe Managed Switches software supports the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP You can also set the system time manually SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server ProSafe Managed Switches software operates only as an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems Time sources are established by Stratums Stratums define the accuracy of the reference clock The higher the stratum where zero is the highest the more accurate the clock The device receives time from stratum 1 and above since it is itself a stratum 2 device The following is an example of stratums Stratum 0 A real time clock is used as the time source for example a GPS system Stratum 1 A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used Stratum 1 time servers provide primary network time standards Stratum 2 The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path For example a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link via NTP from a Stratum 1 server Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and ser
56. 6 Click ADD to add a new static route to the switch 7 Click DELETE to delete the multicast static routes selected 370 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Admin Boundary Configuration The definition of an administratively scoped boundary is a mechanism to stop the ingress and egress of multicast traffic for a given range of multicast addresses on a given routing interface To display the Admin Boundary Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast Admin Boundary Configuration 4 5 GSM73525 Use Interface to select the router interface for which the administratively scoped boundary is to be configured Use Group IP to enter the multicast group address for the start of the range of addresses to be excluded The address must be in the range of 239 0 0 0 through 239 255 255 255 Use Group Mask to enter the mask to be applied to the multicast group address The combination of the mask and the Group IP gives the range of administratively scoped addresses for the selected interface Click ADD to add a new administratively scoped boundary Click DELETE to delete the administratively scoped boundary selected IPv6 Multicast From the IPv6 Multicast link you can access the following pages Mroute Table on page 372 IPv6 PIM DM on page 374 IPv6 PIM SM on page 377 MLD on page 385 Static Routes Configuration on page 397 Chapter 4 Routing 3
57. A wim 41D Goba thet ISDP Interface Configuration Intertace Configuration i 3 LAGS a Fifi d s TART 5 s s EEF s ifi s 1 Use Port to select the port on which the admin mode is configured 2 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable ISDP on the port The default value is enable 126 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ISDP Neighbor ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To display this page click System gt ISDP gt Advanced gt Neighbor A screen similar to the following displays ISDP Nesghbor ISD Meonghter ee ee GSM73S25 ar 3 th fete Tee aye tet ot brenent ge kt Seve 28 coce eseme ot Ler sess tase thers tnp Stt IG hoad p a y DOme tetts Sec enens The following table describes the ISDP Neighbor fields Table 2 45 Field Description Device ID The device ID of the ISDP neighbor Interface The interface on which the neighbor is discovered Address Displays the address of the neighbor Capability Displays the capability of the neighbor These are supported e Router e Trans Bridge e Source Route e Switch e Host e IGMP e Repeater Platform Display the model type of the neighbor 0 to 32 Port ID Display the port ID on the neighbor Hold Time Displays the hold time for ISDP packets that the neighbor transmits Advertisement Version Displays the ISDP version sending from the neighbor Entry Las
58. Address to enter the IP address of the server in accordance with the format indicated by the Server Address Type The factory default is the IPv4 address 0 0 0 0 5 Use Remote File Name to enter the name on the TFTP server of the file you want to download You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 457 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual SSH From the SSH link you can access the following pages e SSH Configuration on page 458 e Host Keys Management on page 460 e Host Keys Download on page 461 SSH Configuration To display the SSH Configuration page click Security gt Access gt SSH gt SSH Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 46 Port Gigoda Lover Stackable Switch with 4 12Gigobit Slots osour SSH Configuration 3 SSH Configuration SS Configuration SSM Admn Mode Cradle C Host Keys SSH Version 1 Orsedie Management SSH Version 2 o Hont Keys ASH Sessien Penecut Cownioad gt Telnet gt Comsele Pert Cusrewat Member of NLM Sessoms gt Dental of Service Keys Present Regen Authemtu stion Lost Mascon Number of SSH Sessea table Asthentu shon List 458 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use SSH Admin Mode to Enable or Disable the administrative mode of SSH The currently configured value is shown when the
59. Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 485 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Port Security Interface Configuration A MAC address can be defined as allowable by one of two methods dynamically or statically Both methods are used concurrently when a port is locked Dynamic locking implements a first arrival mechanism for Port Security You specify how many addresses can be learned on the locked port If the limit has not been reached then a packet with an unknown source MAC address is learned and forwarded normally When the limit is reached no more addresses are learned on the port Any packets with source MAC addresses that were not already learned are discarded You can effectively disable dynamic locking by setting the number of allowable dynamic entries to zero Static locking allows you to specify a list of MAC addresses that are allowed on a port The behavior of packets is the same as for dynamic locking only packets with an allowable source MAC address can be forwarded To display the Port Security Interface Configuration page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Port Security gt Interface Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S oct with 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Monoged Stochoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Sior tecour System Switching Routing Security Monitoring Maintenance Help Index Management Security Access Port Auth gt MAC Filter Port Security Interface Configuratio
60. Configuration Advanced VLAN Configuration MAC Based VLAN Configuration abe VLAN Membership MAC Address VLAN ED 1 MAC Address Valid MAC Address which is to be bound to a VLAN ID This field is configurable only when a MAC Based VLAN is created 2 Use VLAN ID to specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093 3 Click ADD to add an entry of MAC Address to VLAN mapping 4 Click DELETE to delete and entry of MAC Address to VLAN mapping Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 141 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IP Subnet Based VLAN IP Subnet to VLAN mapping is defined by configuring an entry in the IP Subnet to VLAN table An entry is specified via a source IP address network mask and the desired VLAN ID The IP Subnet to VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device To display the MAC Based VLAN page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt IP Subnet Based VLAN NETGEAR sooo gt Basic IP Subnet Based VLAN Configuration irae IP Submet Based VLAN Configuration VLAN Configuration VLAN Membertho gt WAN Status Port PVID Cenfiguraten IP Subnet Based VLAN Port OVLAN Configuration Protocol Based VLAN Grove Configuraber Protocol Based VLAN Grove Membersivp ioe VLAN Conhguraton GARP Switch Configuration GARP Pert Configuration 1 Use IP Address to specify a valid IP Address
61. Configuration Badge Prorty Braige Max Age sexs Bridge Melle Time sees Bradge Forward Delay secs Sparano Tres Manimum Hops Apoenmy tree Te Held suet CST Status Uraige dentdver Time ence Topetegy heage Topology Change Count Topology Change Designated Root Root Path Cost Rost Port L entifier Max Age secs Forward Coley sens Meld There sees CST Regional Root CST Path Coat To configure CST settings 1 Specify values for CST in the appropriate fields Bridge Priority When switches or bridges are running STP each is assigned a priority After exchanging BPDUs the switch with the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge Specifies the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal Spanning Tree CST The valid range is 0 61440 The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096 If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096 the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096 For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095 it will be set to 0 The default priority is 32768 e Bridge Max Age secs Specifies the bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal Spanning Tree CST which indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits before implementing a topological change The valid range is 6 40 and the value must be less than or equal to 2 Bridge Forward Delay 1 and greater than or equal to 2 Bridg
62. DHCPV6 Se l nw ccc teen eae ne eee wea RDN EE 71 DHCPV6 Relay erac eaa e dwt eeekedeved E a AREA 79 SlACKING tas peta bia a i E Pe Rtn dees Ranh due O A E Boe 79 BASIC on iets oh gaan are ace On eh at ee eae 80 Advanced iann ds Sh Soka a a b Rae be Gens dae ww Bede ads dese 83 POE aed E EE E os Sa Sa ho oe he base a ae eee 86 BASIC epena araectan cd dq e Aap tend E a eee tons 86 INGVOMCOG Sg d ish Grate dvidesersg Bemiraeyatsenae Gord had Grit ade pen ab Seay whe E 89 SNMP ee ic ae tree ts ais ae Sd hee aa ic ee Soke dhe wie ta nd ie Ree al Thal 93 VIP WiVot tues cie ae 6 stack mamma Mas ceed eee a 93 SNME Vo eb niaci aiton Grea id hate elaine dAnob sila tla cede oh aed aiden AR 101 BECDP eani austen aire sae ah tecaietohes E at Rica te at ah ak oa ae Geom eae 102 TD Pans secon ae eee dvd pt acti ea grad acre Sa eee eh ae as eee acer aed 103 Table of Contents 3 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LE DP ME Dren asco 2 cuiah otras deh een oar e dk anh Gah dod tea ee eee 113 ISDP kos kueoe xm Gea wane aid hat anys Gide kd Rede a aes meee ane 121 BASIC Sig dee cae 485 2 Scthadlereiosod quetcara a Ranh d g buh ave actedobnceyfun Eeue aoa dee aon 121 PROVINCE ee E E Biot God God dys Retard Gude etna eee EEE TE E EE 124 WIEANS iinet etd de ee ea Cone gee eae ee eee ee aeons 130 BaSiCsiice6 bs09 i ebb Phe eee eee Pe ese abaes 131 POVAING OO sce Svs a deluged Pack dulce DS dine
63. DM protocol on this interface The IP address of the selected interface Neighbor Count The number of PIM neighbors on the selected interface Designated Router The designated router on the selected PIM interface For point to point interfaces this will be 0 0 0 0 360 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM DM Neighbor To display the PIM DM Neighbor page click Routing gt Multicast PIM DM gt Neighbor Configuration terme table Gletal Configurateen Interface Cortes atone ovnar wr e oe Mieta Cartrger emer G5M73525 0 Aot Gigeh gt begor Managed A h 106 Table 66 Field Description Interface The physical interface on which PIM DM is enabled Neighbor IP The IP address of the PIM neighbor for which this entry contains information Up Time The time since this PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the local router Expiry Time The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor will be aged out Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with latest PIM DM neighbor information Chapter 4 Routing 361 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SM From the PIM SM link you can access the following pages PIM SM Global Configuration on page 362 PIM SSM Configuration on page 363 PIM SM Interface Configuration on page 364 PIM SM Neighb
64. Diagnostics fields Table 2 32 Fes efit O OSO Port Displays the stackable interface on the given unit Port Diagnostics Info Displays three text fields 80 character strings populated by the driver containing debug and status information PoE From the PoE link under the System tab you can view and configure PoE settings for the switch From the PoE link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 86 e Advanced on page 89 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e PoE Configuration on page 87 86 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PoE Configuration Use the PoE Configuration page to view global PoE power information and to configure PoE SNMP trap settings To display this page click System gt PoE gt Basic gt PoE Configuration A screen similar to the following displays PoE Configuration Unit Setection Una Pot Configuration Formwere Versen Power Salus Total Power Mem AC Total Power RPS Power Source Threshold Power Consumed Perwer System Usage Threshold Power Managerent Mode Asto Reset Mode Trops 48 Port GE L2 Managed Stackable PoE Switch wah 2 10GE SFP ports yooout 1 Unit Displays the Current PoE Unit You can change the PoE Unit by selecting another unit ID listed here 2 Use System Usage Threshold to set a threshold level at wh
65. Field Description Group Name This field identifies the name for the protocol based VLAN you selected It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long including blanks Current Members This button can be click to show the current numbers in the selected protocol based VLAN Group 146 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Voice VLAN Configuration Use this menu to configure the parameters for Voice VLAN Configuration Note that only a user with Read Write access privileges may change the data on this screen To display the Voice VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt Voice VLAN Configuration NETGEAR GSM73525 Voice VLAN Configuration Voice VLAN Ghobal Adame AAN Cortar see VLAN members Adam Mose a VLAN Status Port PVID Lerhgec ener MiC imet WLAN FP Siina beset van Pert DAAN Cardaper ar Promecet Booed VLAN it Daste Seaton Desne Darte Dwere Dastu Oaet HRH THH ti 5 atietan Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 147 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for Voice VLAN for the switch The default is disable 2 Use Interface to select the physical interface for which you want to configure data Use Interface Mode to select the Voice VLAN mode
66. Gegeetet Hou touve table PIM SM Candidate RP Configuration ies PUP cee pie e Batertoce Ket hen Ome sei Gebel Cortqures Imerias e Pt SM Candidate RP Configeration 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed 2 Use Group Address to specify the group IPv6 address prefix transmitted in Candidate RP Advertisements 3 Use Prefix Length to specify the group IPv6 Prefix Length transmitted in Candidate RP Advertisements 4 Click ADD to add a new Candidate RP Address for the PIM SM router 5 Click DELETE to delete an extant Candidate RP Address for the PIM SM router 382 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SM BSR Candidate Configuration To display the IPv6 PIM SM BSR Candidate Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast PIM SM gt BSR Candidate Configuration GSM73525S bb Per Gigebr inpw 2 Managed gett le VIM SM BSR Candidate Configuration tvome Cable Wusan PIM SM NSR Candidate Configuration Reet teetitr eg Messegei t ser sa Reet i ondeto BF Abueriisementi ha aa ee 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Priority to enter the priority of C BSR 3 Use Hash Mask Length to enter the C BSR hash mask length to be advertised in bootstrap messages This hash mask length will be used in the hash algorithm for selecting the RP for a particular group The va
67. ICMP destination unreachable communication administratively prohibited messages received by the interface The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received by the interface The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the interface The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages Received The number of ICMP Echo request messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages Received The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages Received ICMPv6 Router Advertisement Messages Received ICMPV6 Neighbor Solicit Messages Received The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the interface The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received by the interface The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received by the interface Chapter 4 Routing 241 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 17 Field Description ICMPV6 Neighbor Advertisement Messages Received ICMPv6 Redirect Messages Received ICMPv6 Group Membership Query Messages Received The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received by the interface The number of ICMPv6 Redirect messaged received by the interface The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Group Mem
68. IGMP Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is 0 to 3600 seconds Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN and remove it from the list select the check box next to the VLAN ID and click Delete To modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN select the check box next to the VLAN ID update the desired values and click Apply Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 177 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Multicast Router Configuration This page configures the interface as the one the multicast router is attached to All IGMP packets snooped by the switch will be forwarded to the multicast router reachable from this interface The configuration is not needed most of the time since the switch will automatically detect the presence of multicast router and forward IGMP packet accordingly It is only needed when you want to make sure the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network To access the Multicast Router Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Multicast Router Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Por Gigabit Layer J Managed feockoble Switch with 4 10 Cgobe tom
69. IPv6 Route Table page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Route Table NETGEAR IPvG Route Table tPvb Roste Tabhe Rector Deeteved eet ot Memton 1 Use Routes Displayed to display GSM7352S w Maneged pales the e Configured Routes Shows the routes configured by the user Best Routes Shows only the best active routes All Routes Shows all active IPv6 routes 2 Click REFRESH to show the latest IP information Table 19 Field Description Number of Routes Displays the total number of active routes in the route table IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length Protocol Displays the Network Prefix for the Active Route Displays the Prefix Length for the Active Route Displays the Type of Protocol for the Active Route Next Hop Interface Displays the Interface over which the Route is Active For a Reject Route the next hop would be a Nullo interface Next Hop IP Address Displays the Next Hop IPv6 Address for the Active Route Preference Displays the Route Preference of the Configured Route Chapter 4 Routing 247 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Route Preferences Use this panel to configure the default preference for each protocol These values are arbitrary values in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics Most routing protocols use a route metric to determine the shortest p
70. Id on the interface Guest VLAN Period This input field allows the user to enter the guest Vlan period for the selected port The guest Vlan period is the value in seconds of the timer used by the GuestVlan Authentication The guest Vlan time out must be a value in the range of 1 and 300 The default value is 90 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the Apply button is pressed Unauthenticated VLAN id This input field allows the user to enter the Unauthenticated Vlan Id for the selected port The valid range is 0 3965 The default value is 0 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the Submit button is pressed Enter 0 to clear the Unauthenticated Vlan Id on the interface Supplicant Timeout This input field allows the user to enter the supplicant time out for the selected port The supplicant time out is the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to time out the supplicant The supplicant time out must be a value in the range of 1 and 65535 The default value is 30 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the Apply button is pressed Server Timeout This input field allows the user to enter the server time out for the selected port The server time out is the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator on this port to time out the authentication server The server time out must be a value in the range of 1 and 65535 The
71. Ignored The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the packet s destination IP address is not the address of the ingress interface and is not the AllDrRouters or AllSpfRouters multicast addresses The number of OSPFv3 packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender s IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the packet type field in the OSPFv3 header is not a known type The number of received Hello packets that were ignored by this router from the new neighbors after the limit has been reached for the number of neighbors on an interface or on the system as a whole Hellos Sent Hellos Received DD Packets Sent DD Packets Received The number of Hello packets sent on this interface by this router The number of Hello packets received on this interface by this router The number of Database Description packets sent on this interface by this router The number of Database Description packets received on this interface by this router LS Requests Sent The number of LS Requests sent on this interface by this router LS Requests Received The number of LS Requests received on this interface by this router LS Updates Sent LS Updates Received LS Acknowledgements Sent LS Acknowledgements Received The number of LS updates sent on this interface by this router The numbe
72. LLDP 802 1AB notification mode for the selected interface Use Transmit Management Information to specify whether management address is transmitted in LLDP frames for the selected interface Optional TLV s e Use System Name to include system name TLV in LLDP frames e Use System Description to include system description TLV in LLDP frames e Use System Capabilities to include system capability TLV in LLDP frames Use Port Description to include port description TLV in LLDP frames Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 105 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LLDP Statistics To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP gt Statistics A screen similar to the following displays GSM7352S O Pet Gopi Loves J managed Fingan Bon LLDP Statistics LLOP Statistics iest optete tota isasrts Tetas Omentane Teew Cepe Ta Regents LOP Statistics The following table describes the LLDP Statistics fields Table 2 34 Field Description Last Update Specifies the time when an entry was created modified or deleted in the tables associated with the remote system Total Inserts Specifies the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point MSAP has been inserted into tables associated with the remote systems Total Deletes Specifies the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a
73. Leaves Received Leaves Sent The number of valid MLD leaves sent by the router Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest MLD traffic Click CLEAR to clear all the MLD traffic Chapter 4 Routing 391 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD Proxy Interface Configuration To display the MLD Proxy Interface Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast MLD gt Proxy Interface Configuration GSM73525S Pere Gaguh gt isyo 2 Managed at Pee Qi iesisbis jomit ast 4 10 Cysta Non MLD Proxy Interface Configuration MLD Proxy Intertop Configuration 1 Use Interface to select the interface to be configured 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of MLD Proxy on the selected interface The default is disable Routing MLD and Multicast global admin modes should be enabled to enable MLD Proxy interface mode 3 Use Version to enter the version of MLD you want to configure on the selected interface Valid values are 1 to 2 and the default value is 3 This field is configurable only when MLD Proxy interface mode is enabled 4 Use Unsolicited Report Interval to enter the unsolicited time interval value in seconds The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group Valid values are from 1 to 260 The default value is 1 392 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 M
74. MST Configuration Table With this allocation we ensure that every VLAN is assigned to one and only one MSTI The CIST is also an instance of spanning tree with a MSTID of 0 An instance may occur that has no VIDs allocated to it but every VLAN must be allocated to one of the other instances of spanning tree The portion of the active topology of the network that connects any two bridges in the same MST Region traverses only MST bridges and LANs in that region and never Bridges of any kind outside the Region in other words connectivity within the region is independent of external connectivity MSTP Example Configuration This example shows how to create an MSTP instance from the GSM7352Sv1 or GSM7352Sv2 switch The example network has three different ProSafe Managed Switches that serve different locations in the network In this example ports 1 0 1 1 0 5 are connected to host stations so those links are not subject to network loops Ports 1 0 6 1 0 8 are connected across switches 1 2 and 3 Appendix B ConfigurationExamples 621 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Ports 1 0 1 1 0 5 Connected to Hosts Ports 1 0 1 1 0 5 Connected to Hosts Ports 1 0 6 1 0 8 Connected to Switch 2 and 3 Ports 1 0 6 1 0 8 1 0 1 1 0 5 Switch 1 Connected to Switch 1 and 3 Root Bridge Ports 1 0 6 1 0 8 Connected to Switch 2 and Ports 1 0 1 1 0 5 Connected to Hosts Perf
75. Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Rules Use these screens to configure the rules for the IPv6 Access Control Lists which is created using the IPv6 Access Control List Configuration screen By default no specific value is in effect for any of the IPv6 ACL rules To display the IPv6 Rules page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IPv6 Rules NETGEAR GSM7352S ered with were A APPONI Gigadii Layer D Siachkadie Managed Sen ch with 2 106 SIP Ports socour Help Index System gt Basic IPv6 Rules if alent 1P v6 Rules IP ACL IP Rules IP Extended Rules D6 ACL IPV6 Rules IP Sinding Configeration Binding Tobie Vien Birding Table No Iv ACLs are configured Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 539 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use the ACL Name pull down menu to select the IPv6 ACL for which to create or update a rule 2 Use Rule ID to enter a whole number in the range of 1 to 12 that will be used to identify the rule An IP ACL may have up to 12 rules 3 Use Action to specify what action should be taken if a packet matches the rule s criteria The choices are permit or deny 4 Use Logging to enable logging for this ACL rule subject to resource availability in the device If the Access List Trap Flag is also enabled this will cause periodic traps to be generated indicating the number of times
76. Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the LLDP MED Local Device Information fields Table 2 40 Field Description Network Policy Information Specifies if network policy TLV is present in the LLDP frames Media Application Type Specifies the application type Types of application types are unknown voicesignaling guestvoice guestvoicesignalling softphonevoice videoconferencing streammingvideo vidoesignalling Each application type that is received has the VLAN id priority DSCP tagged bit status and unknown bit status A port may receive one or many such application types If a network policy TLV has been transmitted only then would this information be displayed Inventory Specifies if inventory TLV is present in LLDP frames Hardware Revision Specifies hardware version Firmware Revision Specifies Firmware version Software Revision Specifies Software version Serial Number Specifies serial number Manufacturer Name Specifies manufacturers name Model Name Specifies model name Asset ID Specifies asset id Location Information Specifies if location TLV is present in LLDP frames Sub Type Specifies type of location information Location Information Specifies the location information as a string for given type of location id Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 117 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stacka
77. Management Security gt Authentication List gt HTTPS Authentication List NETGEAR GSM7352S ABP Gigabit Loyw 2 Monopod Srackable Switch wih 4 1OGigobit Slots ocour gt Local User HTTPS Authentication List gt Enable Password HTTPS Authentication List gt Line Password RADIUS gt TACACS Authentication List Authentication List HTTP Authertcadon tist HTTPS Autherticaton Ust Logia Sessions 1 List Name Select the HTTPS list name for which you want to configure data 2 Use the dropdown menu to select the method that should appear first in the selected authentication login list If you select a method that does not time out as the first method such as local no other method will be tried even if you have specified more than one method The options are e Local The user s locally stored ID and password will be used for authentication e Radius The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally e Tacacs The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the TACACS server e None The user will not be authenticated 3 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear second in the selected authentication login list This is the method that will be used if the first method times out If you select a method that does not time out as the second method the third method will not be tried Note that this parameter will not appe
78. Metre Mariman Paths Aula asi Relerentie Randwalth Oela Passive betting Default Route Advertise 1 Use Default Information Originate to enable or disable Default Route Advertise Note that the values for Always Metric and Metric Type can only be configured after Default Information Originate is set to enable If Default Information Originate is set to enable and values for Always Metric and Metric Type are already configured then setting Default Information Originate back to disable will set the Always Metric and Metric Type values to default 2 Use Always to set the router advertise when set to True 3 Use Metric to specify the metric of the default route The valid values are 0 to 16777214 4 Use Metric Type to set the metric type of the default route Valid values are External Type 1 and External Type 2 Chapter 4 Routing 299 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual OSPFv3 Configuration 1 Use Router ID to specify the 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS If you want to change the Router ID you must first disable OSPFv3 After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPF v3 to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not a valid Router ID 2 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable OSPFv3 will be
79. ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 6 94 Field Description Backend State Vlan Assigned Vlan Assigned Reason Key Transmission Enabled Session Timeout This field displays the current state of the backend authentication state machine Possible values are Request Response Success Fail Timeout Initialize Idle This field displays the vlan id assigned to the selected interface by the Authenticator This field is displayed only when the port control mode of the selected interface is not mac based This field is not configurable This field displays reason for the vlan id assigned by the authenticator to the selected interface This field is displayed only when the port control mode of the selected interface is not mac based This field is not configurable Possible values are Radius Unauth Default Not Assigned This field displays if key transmission is enabled on the selected port This is not a configurable field The possible values are true and false If the value is false key transmission will not occur Otherwise Key transmission is supported on the selected port This field displays Session Timeout set by the Radius Server for the selected port This field is displayed only when the port control mode of the selected port is not mac based Session Termination Actio
80. Regulatory Compliance Information This section includes user requirements for operating this product in accordance with National laws for usage of radio spectrum and operation of radio devices Failure of the end user to comply with the applicable requirements may result in unlawful operation and adverse action against the end user by the applicable National regulatory authority This product s firmware limits operation to only the channels allowed in a particular Region or Country Therefore all options described in this user s guide may not be available in your version of the product FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States FCC Information to User This product does not contain any user serviceable components and is to be used with approved antennas only Any product changes or modifications will invalidate all applicable regulatory certifications and approvals This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body This transmitter must not be co located or ope
81. Searched by MAC Address Select MAC Address from pull down menu enter the 6 byte hexadecimal MAC Address in two digit groups separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB Then click on the Go button If the address exists that entry will be displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining greater mac addresses An exact match is required e Searched by VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from pull down menu enter the VLAN ID for example 100 Then click on the Go button If the address exists the entry will be displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining greater mac addresses e Searched by Port Select Port from pull down menu enter the port ID in Unit Slot Port for example 2 1 1 Then click on the Go button If the address exists the entry will be displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining greater mac addresses Table 3 69 Field Description Total MAC Address Displaying the number of total MAC addresses learned or configured MAC Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information The format is a 6 byte MAC Address that is separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB The VLAN ID associated with the MAC Address The port upon which this address was learned The status of this entry The meanings of the values are e Static the value of the corresponding instance was added by the system or a user and cannot be re
82. Security gt Access gt HTTPS gt Certificate Download Downloading SSL Certificates Before you download a file to the switch the following conditions must be true e The file to download from the TFTP server is on the server in the appropriate directory e The file is in the correct format e The switch has a path to the TFTP server RERE par phies p h with 4 10 Gigai Ses an Certificate Download Certificate Downtesd Fike type 456 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure the certificate download settings for HTTPS sessions 1 Use File Type to specify the type of file you want to transfer SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File SSL Trusted Root Certificate File PEM Encoded e SSL Server Certificate PEM File SSL Server Certificate File PEM Encoded e SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File SSL Diffie Hellman Weak Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded e SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File SSL Diffie Hellman Strong Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded 2 Use Transfer Mode to specify the protocol to use to transfer the file e TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol e SFTP Secure File Transfer Program e SCP Secure Copy 3 Use Server Address Type to specify either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate the format of the TFTP SFTP SCP Server Address field The factory default is IPv4 4 Use Server
83. Siors Monitoring Maintenance Help index rosor DHCP Snooping CP Group Configuration IP Source Guard CP Group Configuration gt Dynamic ARP Inspection Captive Portal CP Gicbal Configuration CP Configuration CP Binding Configuration CP Binding Table CP Grow Configuration CP User BCefouk Configuration CP Trap lage CP Chent 1 Use the Group ID pull down menu to select the Group ID for which to create or update a group 2 Use Group Name to enter the name of the user group Name can contain 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters 3 Click ADD to add a new group 4 Click DELETE to remove the currently selected group Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 519 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Captive Portal User Configuration When you click Add from the CP User Configuration page the screen refreshes and you can add a new user to the Local User database To display the Captive Portal User Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP User Configuration Shown in following two figures NETGEAR GSM73525 Cent R doch See eee Switching Routing Securi Maintenance Help LLOSOUT CP User Configuration gt IP Source Guard gt Dynamic ARP Inspection Contirm Season idle Captive Portal Password GrouP Timeout Timeout CP Global 4 l l t t t 4 4 Corhgu awon CP Configuration H ee
84. Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Interface The interface for which data is to be configured or to be displayed 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM SM in the router The default is disable 3 Use Hello Interval secs to enter the time in seconds between the transmission of which PIM Hello messages on this interface The valid values are from 0 to 18000 The default value is 30 4 Use Join Prune Interval secs to enter the frequency at which PIM Join Prune messages are transmitted on this PIM interface The valid values are from 0 to 18000 The default value is 60 5 Use BSR Border to set BSR border status on the selected interface 6 Use DR Priority to enter the DR priority for the selected interface The valid values are from 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 1 Table 67 Field Description Protocol State IP Address The state of PIM SM in the router either operational or non operational The IPv4 address of the selected PIM interface Designated Router The Designated Router on the selected PIM interface Neighbor Count The number of PIM neighbors on the selected interface Chapter 4 Routing 365 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SM Neighbor To display the PIM SM Neighbor page click Routing gt Multicast PIM SM gt PIM SM Neighbor mense oy GSM7352S
85. Switch Type to specify the type of switch hardware when creating a new switch in the stack 4 Admin Management Preference is a 2 byte field that indicates whether the administrator wants this unit to become a management unit in preference to another unit The default value for this setting is one If the preference level is set to zero then the device cannot become a management unit This field is non configurable for users with read only access 5 Click ADD to add a unit to the stack with the specific switch type 6 Click DELETE to remove the selected unit from the stack Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 83 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the Stack Configuration fields Table 2 29 Fig escrito O O Hardware Management Preference The hardware management preference of the switch The hardware management preference can be disabled or unassigned Switch Status Displays the status of the selected unit The possible values are e OK e Unsupported e Code Mismatch e Config Mismatch e Not Present Management Status Displays whether the selected switch is the management unit or a normal stacking member or on standby Stack Status The following table describes the Stack Status fields Table 2 30 Fes escrito O O Unit ID Unit Id of the specific switch Switch Description Serial Number Up Time
86. Switches Software Administration Manual Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 545 Monitoring the System Use the features available from the Monitoring tab to view a variety of information about the switch and its ports and to configure how the switch monitors events The Monitoring tab contains links to the following features e Ports on page 546 e Logs on page 560 e Port Mirroring on page 571 e sFlowon page 573 Ports The pages available from the Ports link contain a variety of information about the number and type of traffic transmitted from and received on the switch From the Ports link you can access the following pages e Port Statistics on page 546 Port Detailed Statistics on page 549 e EAP Statistics on page 557 e Cable Test on page 559 Port Statistics The Port Statistics page displays a summary of per port traffic statistics on the switch To access the Port Statistics page click Monitoring gt Ports gt Port Statistics Chapter 7 Monitoringthe System 546 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pert Gigabit Lever 2 Maveged Stackable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Slot System Switchiag Rowting QoS Index Comet a eerie Port Statistics Status 1 au Total Packets Packets Broad ast Transnet since transmetted received Packets Packet counters without without received f rrors Lest Errors Errors cleared 9 day 23 he 35
87. Switching gt LAG gt LAG Membership GSM7352S 44 Por Gigabit Layer Managed ble Switch with 4 10 Cigob Hon to0091 gt LAG LAG Membership Configuration LAG Membership LAG Membership 1 Use LAG ID to select the identification of the LAG 2 Use LAG Name to enter the name you want assigned to the LAG You may enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters A valid name has to be specified in order to create the LAG 3 Use LAG Description to enter the Description string to be attached to a LAG It can be up to 64 characters in length 4 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable from the pull down menu When the LAG is disabled no traffic will flow and LACPDUs will be dropped but the links that form the LAG will not be released The factory default is enable 5 Use Link Trap to specify whether you want to have a trap sent when link status changes The factory default is enable which will cause the trap to be sent 6 Use STP Mode to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the LAG The possible values are e Disable Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG e Enable Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG 7 Use Static Mode to select enable or disable from the pull down menu When the LAG is enabled it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs i e the member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it may receive are dropped The factory default is
88. System Capabilities Supported System Capabilities Enabled Time to Live Management Address Specifies the system capabilities of the remote system Specifies the system capabilities of the remote system which are supported and enabled Specifies the Time To Live value in seconds of the received remote entry e Management Address Specifies the advertised management address of the remote system e Type Specifies the type of the management address Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 111 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LLDP Remote Device Inventory To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP gt Remote Device Inventory A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S 4b Perr Gigabit Loyer 2 Managed Stackable Switch with 4 19 Gigabit Slots Help wooour LLDP Remote Device Inventory LLOP Remote Device Inventory Search Dy leterface Pert Management Address sem Ma Remote Port 1D LDP MED ETEC The following table describes the LLDP Remote Device Inventory fields Table 2 37 Fes escrito O O Port Specifies the list of all the ports on which LLDP frame is enabled Management Address Specifies the advertised management address of the remote system MAC Address Specifies the MAC Address associated with the remote system System Name Specifies model name of the remote device R
89. TCS Special treatment can be applied to out of profile packets that are either in excess of the conformance specification or are non conformant The DiffServ feature supports the following types of traffic policing treatments actions e drop The packet is dropped e mark cos The 802 1p user priority bits are re marked and forwarded e mark dscp The packet DSCP is re marked and forwarded e mark prec The packet IP Precedence is re marked and forwarded e send the packet is forwarded without DiffServ modification Color Mode Awareness Policing in the DiffServ feature uses either color blind or color aware mode Color blind mode ignores the coloration marking of the incoming packet Color aware mode takes into consideration the current packet marking when determining the policing outcome An auxiliary traffic class is used in conjunction with the policing definition to specify a value for one of the 802 1p Secondary 802 1p IP DSCP or IP Precedence fields designating the incoming color value to be used as the conforming color The color of exceeding traffic may be optionally specified as well e Counting Updating octet and packet statistics to keep track of data handling along traffic paths within DiffServ In this DiffServ feature counters are not explicitly configured by the user but are designed into the system based on the DiffServ policy being created See the Statistics section of this document for more details e Assignin
90. TX 256 511 Octets Packets RX and TX 512 1023 Octets Packets RX and TX 1024 1518 Octets Packets RX and TX 1519 2047 Octets Packets RX and TX 2048 4095 Octets Packets RX and TX 4096 9216 Octets Octets Received Indicates whether or not the port will send a trap when link status changes The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitt
91. This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default is 5 seconds 7 Use Authentication Type to select an authentication type other than none by clicking on the Configure Authentication button You will then see a new screen where you can select the authentication type from the pull down menu The choices are e None This is the initial interface state If you select this option from the pull down menu on the second screen you will be returned to the first screen Chapter 4 Routing 293 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Simple If you select Simple you will be prompted to enter an authentication key This key will be included in the clear in the OSPF header of all packets sent on the network All routers on the network must be configured with the same key Encrypt If you select Encrypt you will be prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID Encryption uses the MD5 Message Digest algorithm All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID 8 Use Authentication Key to enter the OSPF Authentication Key for the specified interface If you do not choose to use authentication you will not be prompted to enter a key If you choose simple authentication you cannot use a key of more than eight octets If you choose
92. Topology change count Number of times topology has changed for the CST Topology change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST It takes a value if True or False Designated root The bridge identifier of the root bridge It is made up from the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Root Path Cost Path Cost to the Designated Root for the CST Root Port Identifier Port to access the Designated Root for the CST Max Age secs Path Cost to the Designated Root for the CST Forward Delay secs Derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay parameter Hold Time secs Minimum time between transmission of Configuration BPDUs CST Regional Root Priority and base MAC address of the CST Regional Root CST Path Cost Path Cost to the CST tree Regional Root 158 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual CST Port Configuration Use the Spanning Tree CST Port Configuration page to configure Common Spanning Tree CST and Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch To display the Spanning Tree CST Port Configuration page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt CST Port Configuration CST Port Configuration ON Pon Configerstiee an TERRE EET SHERI SS RSS Re es St ws TET THREE EEE
93. Type The factory default is the IPv4 address 0 0 0 0 5 Use Remote File Name to enter the name on the TFTP server of the file you want to download You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank 6 Click APPLY to start to download the Host Key file Note that to download SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 461 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Telnet To display the Telnet page click Security gt Access gt Telnet NETGEAR GSM7352S ato 4 TELNET Authentication List Logi Authentication Lat Enable Authentication List Inbound Telnet Albrw new leleet servens Session hmesut Masuricm Mower of esssons Current Member of Sessoms Outbound Telnet Alom new teleet ressons Sersion mesut Manmim Number ct serseas Current Member of Sermons Telnet Authentication List This page allows you to select the login and enable authentication list available The login list specifies the authentication method s you want used to validate switch or port access for the users associated with the list The enable list specifies the authentication method s you want used to validate privileged EXEC access for the users associated with the list These list can be created by Authentication List page under Management Security 1 Use Login Authentication List to specify which aut
94. Use IP Address Host Name to enter the IP address or Hostname of the station you want the switch to ping The initial value is blank The IP Address or Hostname you enter is not retained across a power cycle 2 Optionally configure the following settings e Count Enter the number of echo requests you want to send The initial value is default value The Count you enter is not retained across a power cycle e Interval secs Enter the Interval between ping packets in seconds initial value is default value The Interval you enter is not retained across a power cycle e Datagram Size Enter the Size of ping packet initial value is default value The Size you enter is not retained across a power cycle 3 PING displays the result after the switch sends a Ping request to the specified address 4 Click Cancel to cancel the operation on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click Apply to send the ping The switch sends the number of pings specified in the Count field and the results are displayed below the configurable data in the Ping area Chapter 8 Maintenance 597 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Ping IPv This screen is used to send a Ping request to a specified Hostname or IPv6 address You can use this to check whether the switch can communicate with a particular IPv6 station Once you Click the Apply button the switch will sen
95. Use Interface to specify CoS configuration settings based per interface or specify all CoS configurable interfaces 2 Specify which internal traffic class to map the corresponding 802 1p value The queue number depends on the specific hardware The 802 1p Priority row contains traffic class selectors for each of the eight 802 1p priorities to be mapped The priority goes from low 0 to high 3 For example traffic with a priority of 0 is for most data traffic and is sent using best effort Traffic with a higher priority such as 3 might be time sensitive traffic such as voice or video The values in each drop down menu represent the traffic class The traffic class is the hardware queue for a port Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue position Before traffic in a lower queue is sent it must wait for traffic in higher queues to be sent 3 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 4 If you make changes to the page click Apply to apply the changes to the system 402 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IP DSCP to Queue Mapping Use the IP DSCP to Queue Mapping page to specify which internal traffic class to map the corresponding DSCP value To display the IP DSCP Queue Mapping page click QoS gt CoS gt Advanced gt IP DSCP to Queue Mapp
96. Use Router ID to specify a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS To change the Router ID you must first disable OSPF After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPF to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not a valid Router ID 2 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable OSPF will be activated for the switch The default value is disable You must configure a Router ID before OSPF can become operational see step 1 or by issuing the CLI command Config router router id Chapter 4 Routing 267 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages OSPF Configuration on page 269 Common Area Configuration on page 272 Stub Area Configuration on page 274 NSSA Area Configuration on page 276 Area Range Configuration on page 278 Interface Configuration on page 279 OSPF Interface Statistics on page 284 OSPF Neighbor Table on page 288 Link State Database on page 291 Virtual Link Configuration on page 293 Route Redistribution on page 295 268 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual OSPF Configuration Use the OSPF Configuration page to enable OSPF on a router and to configure the related OSPF settings To display the OSPF Configura
97. Use this function to temporarily protect the network during unexpected events such as denial of service attacks If the Verification Mode is Local or RADIUS use Group to assign an existing User Group to the captive portal All users who belong to the group are permitted to access the network through this portal The User Group list is the same for all CP configurations on the switch Use Idle Timeout to enter the number of seconds to wait before terminating a session A user is logged out once the idle time out is reached If the value is set to 0 then the time out is not enforced The valid range is 0 to 86400 seconds and the default value is 0 Use User Logout to allow the authenticated client to deauthenticate from the network Use Radius Auth Server to enter the IP address of the RADIUS server used for client authentications The switch acts as the RADIUS client and performs all RADIUS transactions on behalf of the clients Use Redirect URL to specify the URL to which the newly authenticated client is redirected The max length for the URL is 512 alphanumeric characters Use Background Color to specify the value of the background color Example BFBFBF Use Foreground Color to specify the value of the foreground color Example 999999 Use Separator Color to specify the value of the separator color Example 46008F Use Max Bandwidth Down to specify the maximum rate Rate in bytes per seconds at which a client can receive data from t
98. are supported e External Type 1 External Type 2 Default is External Type 2 Chapter 4 Routing 269 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual OSPF Configuration 1 10 11 Use Router ID to specify the 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS If you want to change the Router ID you must first disable OSPF After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPF to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not a valid Router ID Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable OSPF will be activated for the switch The default value is disable You must configure a Router ID before OSPF can become operational see step 1 or by issuing the CLI command Config router router id Enable or disable RFC 1583 Compatibility to specify the preference rules that will be used when choosing among multiple AS external LSAs advertising the same destination If you select enable the preference rules will be those defined by RFC 1583 If you select disable the preference rules will be those defined in Section 16 4 1 of the OSPF 2 standard RFC 2328 which will prevent routing loops when AS external LSAs for the same destination have been originated from different areas The default value is enable All routers in the OSPF domain must be configured the same If all OSPF
99. bound to VLAN ID Enter the IP Address in dotted decimal notation 2 Use Subnet Mask to specify a valid Subnet Mask of the IP Address Enter the Subnet mask in dotted decimal notation 3 Use VLAN ID to specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093 4 Click ADD to add a new IP subnet based VLAN 5 Click DELETE to delete the IP subnet based VLAN selected 142 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Port DVLAN Configuration To display the Port DVLAN Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt Port DVLAN Configuration Configuration MAC Based VLAN IP Subnet Based VLAN Port OVLAN Corfiguration Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration Protocol Based VLAN Grove Membersixp gt Voice VLAN Configuration GARP Sarih _ GSM7352S sooow Port DVLAN Configuration Global Configuration Ghobal Etherlype OVLAN Configuration 1 al Go To Leterface 1 Use Interface to select the physical interface for which you want to display or configure data Select All to set the parameters for all ports to same values 2 Use Admin Mode to specify the administrative mode via which Double VLAN Tagging can be enabled or disabled The default value for this is Disabled 3 Use the 2 byte hex Global EtherType as the first 16 bits of the DVlan tag e 802 1Q Tag Commonly used ta
100. capability otherwise the only option is Import External LSAs e Import External LSAs Import and propagate external LSAs e Import No LSAs Do not import and propagate external LSAs SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is typically done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers Import Summary LSAs The summary LSAs will be enabled disabled imported into this area Click ADD to configure the area as a common area Click DELETE to delete the common area Chapter 4 Routing 273 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Stub Area Configuration To display the Stub Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Stub Area Configuration GSM7352S S fomh DA
101. classes to track on an ingress interface You can define simple BA classifiers DSCP and a wide variety of multi field MF classifiers e Layer 2 Layers 3 4 IP only e Protocol based e Address based You can combine these classifiers with logical AND or OR operations to build complex MF classifiers by specifying a class type of all or any respectively That is within a single class multiple match criteria are grouped together as an AND expression or a sequential OR expression depending on the defined class type Only classes of the same type can be nested class nesting does not allow for the negation i e exclude option of the referenced class To configure DiffServ you must define service levels namely the forwarding classes PHBs identified by a given DSCP value on the egress interface These service levels are defined by configuring BA classes for each Creating Policies Use DiffServ policies to associate a collection of classes that you configure with one or more QoS policy statements The result of this association is referred to as a policy From a DiffServ perspective there are two types of policies e Traffic Conditioning Policy a policy applied to a DiffServ traffic class e Service Provisioning Policy a policy applied to a DiffServ service level You must manually configure the various statements and rules used in the traffic conditioning and service provisioning policies to achieve the desired Traffic Condition
102. config error state change if state change neighbor state change virtif state change virtneighbor state change OSPF Trapt Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disadle Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable O Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Q Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disadle Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable O Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable O Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 97 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure the trap flags 1 Use Authentication to enable or disable activation of authentication failure traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is enabled 2 Use Link Up Down to enable or disable activation of link status traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The facto
103. default is Color Blind Color Blind e Color Aware Color Aware mode requires the existence of one or more color classes that are valid for use with this policy instance A valid color class contains a single non excluded match criterion for one of the following fields provided the field does not conflict with the classifier of the policy instance itself e CoS IP DSCP e IP Precedence Committed Rate This value is specified in the range 1 to 4294967295 kilobits per second Kbps Committed Burst Size This value is specified in the range 1 to 128 KBytes The committed burst size is used to determine the amount of conforming traffic allowed Conform Action This lists the actions to be taken on conforming packets per the policing metrics from which one can be selected The default is send Violate Action This lists the actions to be taken on violating packets per the policing metrics from which one can be selected The default is send For each of the above Action Selectors one of the following actions can be taken e Drop These packets are immediately dropped e Mark IP DSCP These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP value before being presented to the system forwarding element This selection requires that the DSCP value field be set e Mark CoS These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value before being presented to the system forwarding element This selection re
104. default value is 30 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed Maximum Requests This input field allows the user to enter the maximum requests for the selected port The maximum requests value is the maximum number of times the authenticator state machine on this port will retransmit an EAPOL EAP Request Identity before timing out the supplicant The maximum requests value must be in the range of 1 and 10 The default value is 2 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed PAE Capabilities This field selects the port access entity PAE functionality of the selected port Possible values are Authenticator or Supplicant Periodic Reauthentication This select field allows the user to enable or disable reauthentication of the supplicant for the specified port The selectable values are true and false If the value is true reauthentication will occur Otherwise 474 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual reauthentication will not be allowed The default value is false Changing the selection will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed e Reauthentication Period This input field allows the user to enter the reauthentication period for the selected port The reauthentication period is the value in seconds of the timer us
105. discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter s value The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent 218 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 8 Field Description IcmpOutParmProbs The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent IcmpOutSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent IcmpOutRedirects The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent For a host this object will always be zero since hosts do not send redirects IcmpOutEchos IcmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo request messages sent The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent IcmpOutTimestamps The number of ICMP Timestamp request messages IcmpOutTimestampReps The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent IcmpOutAddrMasks IcmpOutAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent Chapter 4 Routing 219 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e IP Configuration on page 220 e IP Statistics on page 222 IP Interface Con
106. enables received Hello Packets to be rejected i e neighbor relationships will not even start to form if there is a mismatch in certain crucial OSPF capabilities Router Priority The OSPF priority for the specified interface The priority of an interface is a priority integer from 0 to 255 A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network 288 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 34 Field Description Neighbor Interface Index A Unit Slot Port identifying the neighbor interface index State Events Permanence The state of a neighbor can be the following e Down This is the initial state of a neighbor conversation It indicates that there has been no recent information received from the neighbor On NBMA networks Hello packets may still be sent to Down neighbors although at a reduced frequency e Attempt This state is only valid for neighbors attached to NBMA networks It indicates that no recent information has been received from the neighbor but that a more concerted effort should be made to contact the neighbor This is done by sending the neighbor Hello packets at intervals of Hello Interval e Init In this state a Hello packet has recently been seen from the neighbor However bidirectional communication has not yet been established with the neighbor i e the r
107. encrypt the key may be up to 16 octets long The key value will only be displayed if you are logged on with Read Write privileges otherwise it will be displayed as asterisks 9 Use Authentication ID to enter the ID to be used for authentication You will only be prompted to enter an ID when you select Encrypt as the authentication type The ID is a number between 0 ad 255 inclusive 10 Click ADD to add a new virtual link to the switch 11 Click DELETE to remove the specified virtual link from the switch configuration Table 36 Field Description _ o O Neighbor State The OSPF interface state it can be these values e Down This is the initial interface state In this state the lower level protocols have indicated that the interface is unusable In this state interface parameters will be set to their initial values All interface timers will be disabled and there will be no adjacencies associated with the interface e Waiting The router is trying to determine the identity of the Backup Designated Router by monitoring received Hello Packets The router is not allowed to elect a Backup Designated Router or a Designated Router until it transitions out of Waiting state This prevents unnecessary changes of Backup Designated Router e Point to Point The interface is operational and is connected either to the virtual link On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router Hello
108. equal to the number of configured IPv4 ACLs plus the number of configured MAC ACLs To configure a MAC ACL 1 To add a MAC ACL specify a name for the MAC ACL in the Name field and click Add The name string may include alphabetic numeric dash underscore or space characters only The name must start with an alphabetic character Each configured ACL displays the following information e Rules Displays the number of rules currently configured for the MAC ACL e Direction Displays the direction of packet traffic affected by the MAC ACL which can be Inbound or blank To delete a MAC ACL select the check box next to the Name field then click Delete To change the name of a MAC ACL select the check box next to the Name field update the name then click Apply Click ADD to add a new MAC ACL to the switch configuration Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 525 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MAC Rules Use the MAC Rules page to define rules for MAC based ACLs The access list definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or discarded A default deny all rule is the last rule of every list To display the MAC Rules page click Security gt ACL gt Basic gt MAC Rules Following two figures GSM73525S pobet inyer anogodd wA with a 1O Opaka Siats Ier GSM73525 Port Cigabet layer tensged biscbab
109. field only when the Create Filter option is selected from the MAC Filter menu c In the MAC Address field specify the MAC address of the filter in the format 00 01 1A B2 53 4D You can change this field when you have selected the Create Filter option You cannot define filters for the following MAC addresses e 00 00 00 00 00 00 e 01 80 C2 00 00 00 to 01 80 C2 00 00 0F e 01 80 C2 00 00 20 to 01 80 C2 00 00 21 e FF FF FF FF FF FF d Click the orange bar to display the available ports and select the port s to include in the inbound filter If a packet with the MAC address and VLAN ID you specify is received on a port that is not in the list it will be dropped e Click the orange bar to display the available ports and select the port s you to include in the outbound filter Packets with the MAC address and VLAN ID you selected will be transmitted only out of ports that are in the list Destination ports can be included only in the Multicast filter 2 To delete a configured MAC Filter select it from the menu and then click Delete 3 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 4 If you make changes to the page click Apply to apply the changes to the system MAC Filter Summary 482 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MAC Filter Summary Use the MAC Filter Summar
110. for selected interface Disable Default value None Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic VLAN ID Configure the phone to send tagged voice traffic dotip Configure Voice Vian 802 1p priority tagging for voice traffic When this is selected please enter the dotip value in the Value field Untagged Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic 4 Use Value to enter the VLAN ID or dot1p value This is enable only when VLAN ID or dot1p is selected as Interface Mode 5 Use CoS Override Mode to select the Cos Override mode for selected interface The default is disable Table 3 52 Field Description Operational State This is the operational status of the voice vlan on the given interface 148 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual GARP Switch Configuration Note It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take effect To display the GARP Switch Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt GARP Switch Configuration m M73525 NETGEAR apis n an CES Stockable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Slon voeour gt Basie GARP Switch Configuration pavenced GARP Switch Coafiguration VLAN Configuration VLAN Membership VLAN Status CMRP Mode Pon PvID Configuration MAC Based VLAN DF Subnet Based VLAN Pert DAAN Confi
111. in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network This value should a multiple of the Hello Interval e g 4 Valid values range from 1 to 65535 The default is 40 5 Use Iftransit Delay Interval to specify the OSPFv3 Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default value is 1 second 6 Use Retransmit Interval to specify the OSPFv3 retransmit interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default is 5 seconds 7 Click ADD to add a new virtual link to the switch 8 Click DELETE to remove the specified virtual link from the switch configuration Chapter 4 Routing 321 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 45 Fes escrito O O Neighbor State The state of the Virtual Neighbor Relationship State The state of the interface e Down This is the initial interface state In this state the
112. ingress interface is in a non backbone area and the OSPF header identifies the packet as belonging to the backbone but OSPF does not have a virtual link to the packet s sender Chapter 4 Routing 285 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 33 Field Description Area Mismatch The number of OSPF packets discarded because the area ID in the OSPF header is not the area ID configured on the ingress interface Invalid Destination Address The number of OSPF packets discarded because the packet s destination IP address is not the address of the ingress interface and is not the AllDrRouters or AllSpfRouters multicast addresses Wrong Authentication Type The number of packets discarded because the authentication type specified in the OSPF header does not match the authentication type configured on the ingress interface Authentication Failure The number of OSPF packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender s IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor No Neighbor at Source Address The number of OSPF packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender s IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor Invalid OSPF Packet Type The number of OSPF packets discarded because the packet type field in the OSPF header is not a known type Hellos Ig
113. instance User Name Displays the user name or Guest ID of the connected client Total bytes the client has received Bytes Transmitted Total bytes the client has transmitted Packets Received Packets Transmitted Total packets the client has received Total packets the client has transmitted Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 523 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Configuring Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACLs ensure that only authorized users have access to specific resources while blocking off any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources ACLs are used to provide traffic flow control restrict contents of routing updates decide which types of traffic are forwarded or blocked and above all provide security for the network ProSafe Managed Switches software supports IPv4 and MAC ACLs You first create an IPv4 based or MAC based ACL ID Then you create a rule and assign it to a unique ACL ID Next you define the rules which can identify protocols source and destination IP and MAC addresses and other packet matching criteria Finally use the ID number to assign the ACL to a port or to a LAG The Security gt ACL folder contains links to the following features Basic The Basic folder contains links to the following features e MAC ACL on page 524 e MAC Rules on page 526 e MAC Binding Configuration on page 528 e M
114. it will log the Invalid ARP Packets information If this object is set to Disable Dynamic ARP Inspection logging is disabled 4 Use ARP ACL Name to specify a name for the ARP Access list A vlan can be configured to use this ARP ACL containing rules as the filter for ARP packet validation The name can contain up to lt 1 31 gt alphanumeric characters 5 Use Static Flag to determine whether the ARP packet needs validation using the DHCP snooping database in case ARP ACL rules don t match If the flag is enabled then the ARP Packet will be validated by the ARP ACL Rules only If the flag is disabled then the ARP Packet needs further validation by using the DHCP Snooping entries The factory default is disable 506 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DAI Interface Configuration To display the DAI Interface Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI Interface Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabir Layer J Mosoged Srockoble Switch wih 4 10 Gigobit Siors Monitoring Maintenance Help index 1osour DHCP Snooping Dynamic ARP Inspection Interface Configuration IP Source Guard Dynamic ARP Inspection 1 aul Go To Interface DAI DAI Interface Configuration Rate Limit pes Burst Interval secs Coefiguration T T DAI VLAN Coefiguration DAJ Irterface Configuration DAI ACL Con
115. lower level protocols have indicated that the interface is unusable In this state interface parameters will be set to their initial values All interface timers will be disabled and there will be no adjacencies associated with the interface e Waiting The router is trying to determine the identity of the Backup Designated Router by monitoring received Hello Packets The router is not allowed to elect a Backup Designated Router or a Designated Router until it transitions out of Waiting state This prevents unnecessary changes of Backup Designated Router e Point to Point The interface is operational and is connected either to the virtual link On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router Hello Packets are sent to the neighbor every Hellolnterval seconds e Designated Router This router is itself the Designated Router on the attached network Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node The network LSA will contain links to all routers including the Designated Router itself attached to the network e Backup Designated Router This router is itself the Backup Designated Router on the attached network It will be promoted to Designated Router if the present Designated Router fails The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network The Backup Designated Router
116. may in fact be working Cable Length The estimated length of the cable in meters The length is displayed as a range between the shortest estimated length and the longest estimated length Unknown is displayed if the cable length could not be determined The Cable Length is only displayed if the cable status is Normal Failure Location The estimated distance in meters from the end of the cable to the failure location The failure location is only displayed if the cable status is Open or Short Logs The switch may generate messages in response to events faults or errors occurring on the platform as well as changes in configuration or other occurrences These messages are stored locally and can be forwarded to one or more centralized points of collection for monitoring purposes or long term archival storage Local and remote configuration of the logging capability includes filtering of messages logged or forwarded based on severity and generating component The Monitoring gt Logs tab contains links to the following folders e Buffered Logs on page 561 Command Log Configuration on page 563 e Console Log Configuration on page 564 e SysLog Configuration on page 565 e Trap Logs on page 566 e Event Logs on page 568 e Persistent Logs on page 570 560 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Buffered Logs To access the Buffered Logs page cli
117. metrics that are comparable to the OSPF metric Non comparable Cost External Type 2 metrics that are assumed to be larger than the cost of the OSPF metric Use Translate Role to select the translator role of the NSSA e always Cause the router to assume the role of the translator the instant it becomes a border router e candidate Cause the router to participate in the translator election process when it attains border router status Use Translate Stability Interval to configure the translator of the NSSA The value is the period of time that an elected translation continues to perform its duties after it determines that its translator status has been deposed by another router Use No Redistribute Mode to configure the NSSA ABR so that learned external routes will not be redistributed to the NSSA Click ADD to configure the area as a NSSA area 276 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 8 Click DELETE to delete the NSSA area designation The area will be returned to normal state Table 31 Field Description SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is typically done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LS
118. of EAPOL logoff frames that have been received by this authenticator EAPOL Last Frame Version EAPOL Last Frame Source EAPOL Invalid Frames Transmitted EAPOL Length Error Frames Received This displays the protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame This displays the source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame This displays the number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized This displays the number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized EAP Response ID Frames Received This displays the number of EAP response identity frames that have been received by this authenticator EAP Response Frames Received This displays the number of valid EAP response frames other than resp id frames that have been received by this authenticator EAP Request ID Frames Transmitted EAP Request Frames Transmitted This displays the number of EAP request identity frames that have been transmitted by this authenticator This displays the number of EAP request frames other than request identity frames that have been transmitted by this authenticator 558 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Cable Test To display the Cable Test page click Monito
119. of the following methods e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver e Connect the equipment into an electrical outlet on a circuit different from that which the radio receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Modifications made to the product unless expressly approved by NETGEAR Inc could void the user s right to operate the equipment Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus GSM7352S ProSafe 48 4 Gigabit Ethernet L3 Managed Stackable Switch does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications European Union The GSM7352S ProSafe 48 4 Gigabit Ethernet L3 Managed Stackable Switch complies with essential requirements of EU EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC as supported by applying the following test methods and standards e EN55022 2006 A1 2007 e EN55024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 e EN60950 1 2005 2nd Edition e EN 61000 3 2 2006 e EN 61000 3 3 1995 w A1 2001 A2 2005 Appendix C Notification of Compliance 625 Index Numerics 802 1X 433 468 470 example configuration 617 A access control ACL example configuration 610 ACLs 524 authentication 802 1X 466 617 enable 17 port base
120. of the ingress port This process is also used for cases where a trusted port mapping is unable to be honored such as when a non IP packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP DSCP value To configure global CoS settings 1 Use Global to specify all CoS configurable interfaces The option Global represents the most recent global configuration settings 2 Use Interface to specify CoS configuration settings based per interface Use Global Trust Mode to specify whether to trust a particular packet marking at ingress Global Trust Mode can only be one of the following Default value is trust dotip e untrusted e trust dotip e trust ip dscp 4 Use Interface Trust Mode to specify whether to trust a particular packet marking at ingress Interface Trust Mode can only be one of the following Default value is untrusted e untrusted e trustdotip e trust ip dscp 5 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 6 If you change any of the settings on the page click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch 400 Chapter5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages CoS Configuration on page 401 802 1p to Queue Mapping on page 402 Advanced IP DSCP to Queue Mapping on page 403 Advanced C
121. on a port channel LAG by selecting one of the links in the channel over which to transmit specific packets The link is selected by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet and associating that pattern with a particular link e Src MAC VLAN EType incoming port Source MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 201 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port Destination MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet e Src Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port Source Destination MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet e Src IP and Src TCP UDP Port fields Source IP and Source TCP UDP fields of the packet e Dest IP and Dest TCP UDP Port fields Destination IP and Destination TCP UDP Port fields of the packet Src Dest IP and TCP UDP Port Fields Source Destination IP and source destination TCP UDP Port fields of the packet 3 Use Link Trap to specify whether you want to have a trap sent when link status changes The factory default is enable which will cause the trap to be sent 4 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable from the pull down menu When the LAG is disabled no traffic will flow and LACPDUs will be dropped but the links that form the LAG will not be released The factory default is enable 5 Use STP Mo
122. one of the state Non member state does not belong to the group on the interface Delaying member state host belongs to the group on the interface and report timer running The report timer is used to send out the reports Idle member state host belongs to the group on the interface and no report timer running The group filter mode Include Exclude None for the specified group on the MLD Proxy interface Number of Sources The number of source hosts present in the selected multicast group Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest MLD proxy membership information 396 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Static Routes Configuration To display the Static Routes Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt Static Routes Configuration GSM7352S Part Gigab boye Managed tomeer tahle irys Pin on Det rim n mp aes Bees oot eat 1 Use Source IP to enter the IP Address that identifies the multicast packet source for the entry you are creating 2 Use Prefix Length to enter the Prefix Length to be applied to the Source IPv6 address 3 Use RPF Neighbor to enter the IP address of the neighbor router on the path to the source 4 Use Metric to enter the link state cost of the path to the multicast source The range is 0 255 and the default is 1 You can change the metric for a configured route b
123. or tracked route Table 49 Field Description Tracked Interface state The state of the tracked interface Reachable The reachability of the tracked Route 332 Chapter 4 Routing Virtual Router Statistics ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Use the Virtual Router Statistics page to display statistics for a specified virtual router To display the Virtual Router Statistics page click Routing gt VRRP gt Advanced gt Statistics Virtinal Houten Stetinties Ustasi Seattontes ea ee a cs tee Rewer WELL Hommes statin Table 50 Field Description Router Checksum Errors Router Version Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRRP checksum value The total number of VRRP packets received with an unknown or unsupported version number Router VRID Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRID for this virtual router VRRP ID Interface Up Time State Transitioned to Master The VRID for the selected Virtual Router The Unit Slot Port for the selected Virtual Router The time in days hours minutes and seconds that has elapsed since the virtual router transitioned to the initialized state The total number of times that this virtual router s state has transitioned to Master Advertisement Received The total number of VRRP advertisements received by this virtual rou
124. performs slightly different functions during the Flooding Procedure as compared to the Designated Router e Other Designated Router The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers have been selected to be the Designated Router and Backup Designated Router either The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the Designated Router and the Backup Designated Router Moric The mato value used by the Virtual Link 322 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Route Redistribution This screen can be used to configure the OSPFv3 Route Redistribution parameters The allowable range for each field is displayed next to it If an invalid value is entered in one or multiple fields an alert message will be displayed with the list of all the valid values To display the Route Redistribution page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Route Redistribution GSM73525 mh with 4 19 Gigebe Son Route Redistribution ONPI v Auten Redovtriteteon Wetetrvbete e Use Source to select those Source Protocols that have already been configured for redistribution by OSPF v3 The valid values are Static and Connected e Use Redistribute Option to enable or disable the redistribution for the selected source protocol e Use Metric to set the metric value to be used as the metric of redistributed routes This field displays the metric if the
125. port information displayed on the screen To view information about a different port select the port number from the Interface menu Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions e Click Clear to clear all the counters This resets all statistics for this port to the default values e Click Refresh to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current statistics Table 7 112 Field Description iflndex This object indicates the iflndex of the interface table entry associated with this port on an adapter Port Type For normal ports this field will be normal Otherwise the possible values are e Mirrored This port is a participating in port mirroring as a mirrored port Look at the Port Mirroring screens for more information e Probe This port is a participating in port mirroring as the probe port Look at the Port Mirroring screens for more information e Trunk Member The port is a member of a Link Aggregation trunk Look at the Port Channel screens for more information Port Channel ID If the port is a member of a port channel the port channel s interface ID and name are shown Otherwise Disable is shown Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree The port role will be one of the following values Root Port Designated Port Alternate Port Backup Port Master Port or Disabled Port STP Mode STP St
126. port into disable state This would lead to administrative disable of the port 7 Use BPDU Filter to specify whether the BPDU Filter feature is enabled STP BPDU filtering applies to all operational edge ports Edge Port in an operational state is supposed to be connected to hosts that typically drop BPDUs If an operational edge port receives a BPDU it immediately loses its operational status In that case if BPDU filtering is enabled on this port then it drops the BPDUs received on this port Table 3 54 Field Description S SOS Configuration digest key Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used MST ID Table consisting of the MST instances including the CST and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them VID ID Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID associated with each of them FID ID Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them 156 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual CST Configuration Use the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page to configure Common Spanning Tree CST and Internal Spanning Tree on the switch To display the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt CST Configuration GSM7352S 8 Port Gigeber Lap Dis Swikh woh d 1 NETGEAR CST Configuration CST
127. possible values are ICMP IGMP IP TCP and UDP TCP Flag Specify that a packet s TCP flag is a match condition for the selected IP ACL rule The TCP flag values are URG ACK PSH RST SYN FIN Each TCP flag has these possible values below and can be set separately e Ignore A packet matches this ACL rule whatever the TCP flag in this packet is set or not e Set A packet matches this ACL rule if the TCP flag in this packet is set e Clear A packet matches this ACL rule if the TCP flag in this packet is not set Src IP Address Enter an IP address using dotted decimal notation to be compared to a packet s source IP Address as a match criteria for the selected IP ACL rule Src IP Mask Specify the IP Mask in dotted decimal notation to be used with the Source IP Address value Src L4 Port Specify a packet s source layer 4 port as a match condition for the selected extended IP ACL rule This is an optional configuration The possible values are DOMAIN ECHO FTP FTPDATA HTTP SMTP SNMP TELNET TFTP and WWW Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of the port range Dst IP Address Enter an IP address using dotted decimal notation to be compared to a packet s destination IP Address as a match criteria for the selected extended IP ACL rule Dst IP Mask Specify the IP Mask in dotted decimal notation to be used with the Destination IP Address value Dst L4
128. powered in the IEEE 802 3af mode e Legacy value means that a port is powered using high inrush current used by legacy PDs whose power requirement is more than 15W from powerup e Pre 802 3at value means that a port is powered in the IEEE 802 3af mode initially switched to the high power IEEE 802 3at mode before 75msec This mode needs to be used if PD is NOT performing Layer 2 Classification Or PSE is performing 2 Event Layer 1 Classification e 802 3at value means that a port is powered in the IEEE 802 3at mode i e if class detected by PSE is not the class4 then the PSE port will not power up the PD Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 91 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 5 Use Power Limit Type to describe or control the maximum power that a port can deliver Dot3AF value means that the port power limit is equal to the dot3af class of the PD attached User value means that the port power limit is equal to the value specified by Power Limit None value means that there is no power provided to the port 6 Use Power Limit to define the maximum power which can be delivered by a port 7 Use Detection Type to describe a PD detection mechanism performed by the PSE port e None value means that no detection is done e Legacy Only value means that only legacy capacitive detection scheme is used e 802 3af 4point Only value means that the IEEE 802 3af 4point detection
129. represents the number of LSAs originated by this router LSAs Received The number of LSAs link state advertisements received that were determined to be new instantiations This number does not include newer instantiations of self originated LSAs Chapter 4 Routing 271 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Common Area Configuration The OSPF Common Area Configuration page lets you create a Common Area Configuration once you have enabled OSPF on an interface At least one router must have OSPF enabled for this web page to display To display the Common Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Common Area Configuration GSM73525 ror Ademnaped gede Lite 16 Common Area Configuration 272 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects Table 29 Field Description Aging Interval The Link State Advertisement LSA aging timer interval External Routing A definition of the router s capabilities for the area including whether or not AS external LSAs are flooded into throughout the area If the area is a stub area then these are the possible options for which you may configure the external routing
130. router originates one or more intra areaprefix Isas to advertise the link s prefixes throughout the area A router may originate multiple intra area prefix Isas for a given area to advertise its own prefixes and those of its attached stub links The Link State ID identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement s LS type The time since the link state advertisement was first originated in seconds The sequence number field is a signed 32 bit integer It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements The larger the sequence number the more recent the advertisement The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being flooded or while it is being held in a router s memory This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement except the LS age field Chapter 4 Routing 319 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 44 Field Description The Options field in the link state advertisement header indicates which optional capabilities are associated with the advertisement The options are e Q This enables support for QoS Traffic Engineering E This describes the way AS external LSAs are flooded e MC This describes the way IP multicast datagrams are forwarded accor
131. routers are capable of operating according to RFC 2328 RFC 1583 Compatibility should be disabled Set the Opaque LSA Status parameter to enable if OSPF should store and flood opaque LSAs An opaque LSA is used for flooding user defined information within an OSPF router domain Use Exit Overflow Interval secs to specify how long OSPF must wait before attempting to leave overflow state When the number of non default external LSAs exceeds a configured limit the router enters an overflow state as defined in RFC 1765 In overflow state OSPF cannot originate non default external LSAs If the Exit Overflow Interval is 0 OSPF will not leave overflow state until it is disabled and re enabled The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647 seconds Use SPF DelayTime secs to specify the number of seconds from when OSPF receives a topology change to the start of the next SPF calculation Delay Time is an integer from 0 to 65535 seconds The default time is 5 seconds A value of 0 means that there is no delay that is the SPF calculation is started upon a topology change Use SPF HoldTime secs to specify the minimum time in seconds between two consecutive SPF calculations The range is 0 to 65 535 seconds The default time is 10 seconds A value of 0 means that there is no delay that is two SPF calculations can be done one immediately after the other Use External LSDB Limit to set the number of the external LSDB limit for OSPF If the value is 1 then there i
132. s MED Classification There are four different kinds of devices three of them represent the actual end points classified as Class Generic IP Communication Controller etc Class II Media Conference Bridge etc Class III Communication IP Telephone etc The fourth device is Network Connectivity Device which is typically a LAN Switch Router IEEE 802 1 Bridge IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point etc 114 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LLDP MED Interface Configuration To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525 0 Pont gabe ime a LLDP MEO interlace Configeration F 5 HNENNNENN E E a HERRNNNNN I PTET ETT EE PVPURVEV RUE EU EY Et B uy te cae fh ee Tress h oea te Tew Poewe pa os team r peie ouea gt w ta ine w paw ee e ra iee w a irca 1 Use Interface to specify the list of ports on which LLDP MED 802 1AB can be configured 2 Use MED Status to specify whether LLDP MED mode is enabled or disabled on this interface 3 Use Notification Status to specify the LLDP MED topology notification mode of the interface 4 Use Transmit Type Length Values to specify which optional type length values TLVs in the LLDP MED will be transmitted in the LLDP PDUs frames for the
133. s locally stored ID and password will be used for authentication e Radius The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally e Line The line password will be used for authentication Enable The privileged EXEC password will be used for authentication e Tacacs The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the TACACS server e None The user will not be authenticated 3 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear second in the selected authentication login list This is the method that will be used if the first method times out If you select a method that does not time out as the second method the third method will not be tried Note that this parameter will not appear when you first create a new login list 4 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear third in the selected authentication login list 5 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear forth in the selected authentication login list 6 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear fifth in the selected authentication login list 7 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear sixth in the selected authentication login list 8 Click ADD to add a new login list to the switch 9 Click DELETE to remove the selected authentication login list from the configuration The delete
134. sare sott Teee teatse iad tree a ne iiaa tewe tone Dasme t se Dasbie Sesite toe t e lt a tere veu tase tars aome rono Dame seese reve os neee Lamet Pare ae ke de betarte o Use Port to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured Use Description to enter the Description for the interface Use IP Address to enter the IP address for the interface Use Subnet Mask to enter the subnet mask for the interface This is also referred to as the subnet network mask and defines the portion of the interface s IP address that is used to identify the attached network Use Routing Mode to enable or disable routing for an interface The default value is enable 6 Use Administrative Mode to enable disable the Administrative Mode of the interface The default value is enable This mode is not supported for Logical VLAN Interfaces 7 Use Forward Net Directed Broadcasts to select how network directed broadcast packets should be handled If you select enable from the pull down menu network directed E a gl Chapter 4 Routing 227 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual broadcasts will be forwarded If you select disable they will be dropped The default value is disable 8 Use Encapsulation Type to select the link layer encapsulation type for packets transmitted from the specified interface from the pull down menu The possible values are Ethernet and SNAP The default i
135. seconds Default value is 30 seconds 3 Use Hold Time to specify the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits The hold time specifies how long a receiving device should store information sent in the ISDP packet before discarding it The range 10 to 255 seconds Default value is 180 seconds 4 Use Version 2 Advertisements to enable or disable the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device The default value is Enabled The following table describes the ISDP Basic Global Configuration fields Table 2 43 Field Description Neighbors table last time changed Specifies if Device ID Displays the device ID of this switch Device ID format capability Displays the device ID format capability Device ID format Displays the device ID format Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 123 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e Global Configuration on page 124 e Interface Configuration on page 126 e ISDP Neighbor on page 127 e ISDP Statistics on page 128 Global Configuration To display this page click System gt ISDP gt Advanced gt Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM7352S Pure Gogubs Layer 3 Ahenaged bam tebie bort wom Global Configuration Global Canfiger ation 1 Use Admin Mode to specify whether the ISDP Service is to be Enabl
136. selected authentication login list 6 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear fifth in the selected authentication login list 7 Click ADD to add a new login list to the switch 8 Click DELETE to remove the selected authentication enable list from the configuration You can only use this button if you have Read Write access The change will not be retained across a power cycle unless you perform a save 446 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Dot1x Authentication List You use this page to configure dot1x lists A dot1x list specifies the authentication method s you want to be used to validate port access for the users associated with the list Only one dot1x can be supported To display the Dot1x Authentication List page click Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List gt Dot1x Authentication List GSM73525S 48 Perr Gigabit Loye 2 Managed babie Switch with 4 1 Gigabit Slots Dot lx Authentication List gt Local User gt Enable Password Dot1x Authentication List gt Line Password gt RADIUS a a gt TACACS g doen Authentication List Logn Authentication PAP OTOCIION UR Dotix Authenboston List HTTP Authenticabon tist gt HTTES sathecbication UR Login Sessions 1 List Name Select the dot1x list name for which you want to configure data 2 Use the drop
137. spanning tree It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000 5 Use External Port Path Cost to set the External Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the spanning tree It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000 6 Use BPDU Filter to configure the BPDU Filter which filters the BPDU traffic on this port when STP is enabled on this port The possible values are Enable or Disable 7 Use BPDU Flood to configure the BPDU Flood which floods the BPDU traffic arriving on this port when STP is disabled on this port The possible values are Enable or Disable 8 Use Auto Edge to configure the auto edge mode of a port which allows the port to become an edge port if it does not see BPDUs for some duration The possible values are Enable or Disable 9 Use Root Guard to configure the root guard mode which sets a port to discard any superior information received by the port and thus protect against root of the device from changing The port gets put into discarding state and does not forward any packets The possible values are Enable or Disable 10 Use Loop Guard to configure the loop guard on the port to protect layer 2 forwarding loops If loop guard is enabled the port moves into the STP loop inconsistent blocking state instead of the listening learning forwarding state 11 Use TCN Guard to configure the TCN guard for a port restricting the port from propagating any topology change information received through that port Th
138. stations on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions This information is viewed by a network manager to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on the LAN From the LLDP link you can access the following pages e LLDP on page 103 e LLDP MED on page 113 LLDP is a one way protocol there are no request response sequences Information is advertised by stations implementing the transmit function and is received and processed by stations implementing the receive function The transmit and receive functions can be enabled disabled separately per port By default both transmit and receive are disabled on all ports The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine appropriately based on the configured status and operational state of the port 102 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an enhancement to LLDP with the following features e Auto discovery of LAN policies such as VLAN Layer 2 Priority and DiffServ settings enabling plug and play networking e Device location discovery for creation of location databases e Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints e Inventory management enabling network administrators to track their network devices and determine their char
139. support licensing features The factory default is Archive 2 If you are downloading a GSM7352Sv1 or GSM7352Sv2 image Archive select the image on the switch to overwrite This field is only visible when Archive is selected as the File Type Note It is recommended that you not overwrite the active image The system will display a warning that you are trying to overwrite the active image 3 Click Browse to open a file upload window to locate the file you want to download 4 Click Cancel to cancel the operation on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click the Apply button to initiate the file download Note After a file transfer is started please wait until the page refreshes When the page refreshes the Select File option will be blanked out This indicates that the file transfer is done Note To download SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions Note To download SSL PEM files SSL must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions 6 Use Select File to browse give name along with path for the file you want to download You may enter up to 80 characters The factory default is blank 7 Download Status Displays the status during transfer file to the switch Chapter 8 Maintenance 591 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual USB File Download Use this m
140. tab the features for that tab appear as links directly under the tabs The feature links in the blue bar change according to the navigation tab that is selected The configuration pages for each feature are available as links in the page menu on the left side of the page Some items in the menu expand to reveal multiple configuration pages as the following figure shows When you click a menu item that includes multiple configuration pages the item becomes preceded by a down arrow symbol and expands to display the additional pages System Information Switch Statistics System Resource tf Slot Information Loopback Interface Network Interface Page Link Configuration Pvda Network Pages OT figu ator IPv6 Network Configuration gt IPv6 amp Network Neighbor gt Time gt DNS 12 Chapter1 Getting Started ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Configuration and Monitoring Options The area directly under the feature links and to the right of the page menu displays the configuration information or status for the page you select On pages that contain configuration options you can input information into fields or select options from drop down menus Each page contains access to the HTML based help that explains the fields and configuration options for the page Each page also contains command buttons Table 1 shows the command buttons that are used throughout the pag
141. the MAC address being added Click ADD to add a new static MAC address to the switch Click DELETE to delete a existing static MAC address from the switch g Pon gt Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 489 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Private Group The Private Group folder contains links to the following features e Private Group Configuration on page 490 e Private Group Membership on page 491 Private Group Configuration To display the Private Group Configuration page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Private Group gt Private Group Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabir Loyer 3 monopod Srockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobir Siors index socour gt MAC Filter Private Group Configuration gt Port Security Private Group Private Group Configuration gt Private Group Configuration Prevate Group Membership gt Protected Port Storm Control 1 Use Group Name to enter the Private Group name to be configured The name string can be up to 24 bytes of non blank characters 2 Use the optional Group ID field to specify the private group identifier If not specified a group id not used will be assigned automatically The range of group id is 1 to 192 3 Use Group Mode to configure the mode of private group The group mode can be either isolated or community When in isolated mode the member port in the group cannot for
142. the OSPF Interface Statistics page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt OSPF Interface Statistics OSPF Interface Statistics OSPF Interface Selection Interface L 170 1 m OSPF Interface Statistics OSPF Area ID Area Border Router Count AS Border Router Count Area LSA Count IP Address Interface Events Virtual Events Neighbor Events External LSA Count Sent Packets Received Packets Discards Bad Version Source Not On Local Subnet Virtual Link Not Found Area Mismatch Invalid Destination Address Wrong Authentication Type Authentication Failure No Neighbor at Source Address Invalid OSPF Packet Type Hellos Ignored Hellos Sent Hellos Received DD Packets Sent DD Packets Received LS Requests Sent LS Requests Received LS Updates Sent LS Updates Received LS Acknowledgements Sent LS Acknowledgements Received Interface Selects the interface for which data is to be displayed 284 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 33 Field Description OSPF Area ID The OSPF area to which the selected router interface belongs An OSPF Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which the interface connects Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass AS Border Router Count The to
143. the Static ARP Cache page click Routing gt ARP gt Advanced gt ARP Create GSM73525 0 Pat Gigek ioyor Maneged Static ARP Cache ARP Stetk Contigerstion ARP Static Configuration Use this screen to add an entry to the Address Resolution Protocol table 1 Use IP Address to enter the IP address you want to add It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch s existing routing interfaces 2 Use MAC Address to specify the unicast MAC address of the device Enter the address as six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons for example 00 06 29 32 81 40 3 Click ADD to add a new static ARP entry to the switch Click DELETE to delete an existing static ARP entry from the switch 5 Click APPLY to change the MAC Address mapping to the IP Configuration changes take effect immediately gt Chapter 4 Routing 255 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual ARP Cache Use this screen to show ARP entries in the ARP Cache Table 22 Fld oesorpton SCs Port The associated Unit Slot Port of the connection IP Address Displays the IP address It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch s existing routing interfaces MAC Address The unicast MAC address of the device The address is six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons for example 00 06 29 32 81 40 Click REFRESH to sho
144. the users associated with the list The pre configured users admin and guest are assigned to a pre configured list named defaultList which you may not delete All newly created users are also assigned to the defaultList until you specifically assign them to a different list To display the Login Authentication List page click Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List gt Login Authentication List gt Local User gt Enable Password gt Line Password gt RADIUS gt TACACS Authentication List Logn Asth erdcaton et Enable Aatherbcation Ust Dotix Aatherdcation List HTTP Authentication List HTTES setherbcaten Us gt Logia Sessions Login Authentication List Login Authentication List GSM73525 wng ipedit Lere 2 Maneged Srachable twitch with 4 1OGigobit Slots woour Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 443 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 List Name If you are creating a new login list enter the name you want to assign It can be up to 15 alphanumeric characters long and is not case sensitive 2 Use the dropdown menu to select the method that should appear first in the selected authentication login list If you select a method that does not time out as the first method such as local no other method will be tried even if you have specified more than one method The options are e Local The user
145. the version to be configured on the selected interface Valid values are 1 to 2 The default value is 2 4 Use Query Interval to enter the frequency in seconds at which MLD host query packets are to be transmitted on this interface Valid values are from 1 to 1800 The default value is 125 5 Use Query Max Response Time to enter the maximum query response time to be advertised in MLDv2 queries on this interface in milliseconds Valid values are from 0 to 65535 The default value is 10000 milliseconds 6 Use Robustness to specify the robustness parameter for the selected interface This variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet If a subnet is expected to be lossy the robustness variable may be increased MLD is robust to robustness variable 1 packet losses 7 Use Startup Query Interval to specify the value that indicates the configured interval in seconds between General Queries sent by a Querier on startup 8 Use Startup Query Count to specify the value that indicates the configured number of Queries sent out on startup separated by the Startup Query Interval 9 Use Last Member Query Interval to enter the last member query interval in milliseconds This is the maximum response time to be inserted into group specific queries sent in response to leave group messages and is also the amount of time between group specific query messages Valid values are from 0 to 65535 The default value is 1000 milliseconds 10 Us
146. this VLAN will be tagged All the ports will be included in the VLAN e Remove All All the ports that may be dynamically registered in this VLAN via GVRP This selection has the effect of excluding all ports from the selected VLAN 3 Use Port List to add the ports you selected to this VLAN Each port has three modes e Tagged Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN will be tagged The ports that are selected will be included in the VLAN e U Untagged Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN will be untagged The ports that are selected will be included in the VLAN e BLANK Autodetect Select the ports that may be dynamically registered in this VLAN via GVRP This selection has the effect of excluding a port from the selected VLAN 136 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 3 48 Field Definition VLAN Name This field identifies the name for the VLAN you selected It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long including blanks VLAN ID 1 always has a name of Default VLAN Type This field identifies the type of the VLAN you selected The VLAN type Default VLAN ID 1 always present Static a VLAN you have configured Dynamic a VLAN created by GVRP registration that you have not converted to static and that GVRP may therefore remove Chapter 3 Confi
147. this rule was hit during the current report interval A fixed 5 minute report interval is used for the entire system A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval This field is visible for a Deny Action 5 Use Assign Queue ID to specify the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all packets matching this IPv6 ACL rule Valid range of Queue IDs is 0 to 6 This field is visible for a Permit Action 6 Use Mirror Interface to specify the specific egress interface where the matching traffic stream is copied in addition to being forwarded normally by the device This field cannot be set if a Redirect Interface is already configured for the ACL rule This field is visible for a Permit Action 7 Use Redirect Interface to specify the specific egress interface where the matching traffic stream is forced bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the device This field cannot be set if a Mirror Interface is already configured for the ACL rule This field is visible for a Permit Action 8 Use Match Every to select true or false from the pull down menu True signifies that all packets will match the selected IPv6 ACL and Rule and will be either permitted or denied In this case since all packets match the rule the option of configuring other match criteria will not be offered To configure specific match criteria for the rule remove the rule and recreate it or reconfigure Match E
148. to be specified is the next hop IP address otherwise each field needs to be specified 2 Network Address displays the IP route prefix for the destination 3 Subnet Mask indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network This is also referred to as the subnet network mask 4 Next Hop IP Address displays the outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router if any in the path towards the destination The next router will always be one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network 5 Preference displays an integer value from 1 to 255 The user can specify the preference value sometimes called administrative distance of an individual static route Among routes to the same destination the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database By specifying the preference of a static route the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination 6 Use Identifier to specify the description of this route that identifies the route 7 Click ADD to add a new static route entry to the switch 8 Click DELETE to delete a existing static route entry from the switch Chapter 4 Routing 207 ProSafe Gig
149. to enter the time in seconds between the transmission of advertisement packets by this virtual router Enter a number between 1 and 255 The default value is 1 second Chapter 4 Routing 329 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 7 Use Primary IP Address to enter the IP Address associated with the Virtual Router The default is 0 0 0 0 8 Use Authentication Type to select the type of Authentication for the Virtual Router from the pull down menu The default is None The choices are e 0 None No authentication will be performed e 1 Simple Authentication will be performed using a text password 9 Authentication Data If you selected simple authentication enter the password 10 Use Status to select active or inactive to start or stop the operation of the Virtual Router The default is inactive 11 Click ADD to add a new Virtual Router to the switch configuration 12 Click DELETE to delete the selected Virtual Router Note that the router can not be deleted if there are secondary addresses configured Table 47 Field Description Interface IP Address Indicates the IP Address associated with the selected interface Owner Set to True if the Virtual IP Address and the Interface IP Address are the same otherwise set to False If this parameter is set to True the Virtual Router is the owner of the Virtual IP Address and will always win an election for mas
150. value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to define periods of time in which it will not attempt to acquire a supplicant The quiet period is the period for which the authenticator does not attempt to acquire a supplicant after a failed authentication exchange with the supplicant The quiet period must be a number in the range of 0 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 473 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual and 65535 A quiet period value of 0 means that the authenticator state machine will never acquire a supplicant The default value is 60 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed Transmit Period This input field allows the user to configure the transmit period for the selected port The transmit period is the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on the specified port to determine when to send an EAPOL EAP Request Identity frame to the supplicant The transmit period must be a number in the range of 1 and 65535 The default value is 30 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed GuestVLAN ld This field allows the user to configure Guest Vlan Id on the interface The valid range is 0 3965 The default value is 0 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the Apply button is pressed Enter 0 to clear the Guest Vlan
151. web page is displayed The default value is Disable 2 Use SSH Version 1 to Enable or Disable Protocol Level 1 for SSH The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Enable 3 Use SSH Version 2 to Enable or Disable Protocol Level 2 for SSH The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Enable 4 Use SSH Session Timeout to configure the inactivity time out value for incoming SSH sessions to the switch The acceptable range for this value is 1 160 minutes 5 Use Maximum Number of SSH Sessions to configure the maximum number of inbound SSH sessions allowed on the switch The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The range of acceptable values for this field is 0 5 6 Use Login Authentication List to select an authentication list from the pull down menu This list is used to authenticate users who try to login the switch 7 Use Enable Authentication List to select an authentication list from the pull down menu This list is used to authenticate users who try to get enable level privilege 8 Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest SSH Sessions Table 6 89 Field Description Current Number of SSH Sessions Displays the number of SSH connections currently in use in the system Keys Present Displays which keys RSA DSA or both are present if any Chapter 6 Managin
152. will age out and be removed from the table RPF Neighbor The IP address of the Reverse Path Forwarding neighbor Chapter 4 Routing 335 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 51 Field Description Protocol The multicast routing protocol which created this entry The possibilities are e PIM DM e PIM SM e DVMRP Flags The value displayed in this field is valid if the multicast routing protocol running is PIMSM The possible values are RPT or SPT For other protocols an is displayed Multicast Global Configuration To display the Multicast Global Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast Global Configuration NETOLAR GSM73525 Preste tatie Global Configuration tanl t t ogee ee Ghebal Configuration tetertore e wt bomen Adnan Cae Demer Postarat tote tomer Fabio Moser istry omnt Pin on rm sn Mate Routes emt eee atise Bremer et bobis tetry Comet Adinia Basmi ary Comte wtona 1 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of Multicast Forwarding in the router The default is disable Table 52 Fig escrito O O Protocol State The operational state of the multicast forwarding module Table Maximum Entry Count The maximum number of entries in the IP Multicast routing table Protocol The multicast routing protocol presently activated on the router if any Table Entry Count The
153. will fail if the selected login list is assigned to any user including the default user for system login You can only use this button if you have Read Write access The change will not be retained across a power cycle unless you perform a save 444 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Enable Authentication List You use this page to configure enable lists A enable list specifies the authentication method s you want to be used to validate privileged EXEC access for the users associated with the list The pre configured users admin and guest are assigned to a pre configured list named defaultList which you may not delete All newly created users are also assigned to the defaultList until you specifically assign them to a different list To display the Enable Authentication List page click Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List gt Enable Authentication List GSM7352S itra Gigedit Loye 2 rrp ae Srochable Switch with 4 19 Gigobir Slots ooour gt Local User Enable Authentication List es Enable Authentication List Line Password gt RADIUS gt TACACS Authentication L st Login Authenteation Ust asbie MAR ee caan oe Detix Aatherbcavion List HTTP Authentication Ust WTTeS Aatherbcation UR gt Logia Sessions Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 445 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stack
154. 0 to 7 140 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MAC Based VLAN The MAC Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet A MAC to VLAN mapping is defined by configuring an entry in the MAC to VLAN table An entry is specified via a source MAC address and the desired VLAN ID The MAC to VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device i e there is a system wide table that has MAC address to VLAN ID mappings When untagged or priority tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the MAC to VLAN table the source MAC address of the packet is looked up If an entry is found the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet If the packet is already priority tagged it will maintain this value otherwise the priority will be set to zero The assigned VLAN ID is verified against the VLAN table if the VLAN is valid ingress processing on the packet continues otherwise the packet is dropped This implies that the user is allowed to configure a MAC address mapping to a VLAN that has not been created on the system To display the MAC Based VLAN page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt MAC Based VLAN GSM7352S Ae Pen Gogoda Lever 2 Managed Siochobie wirh wth 4 10 Gigebs Von topovi gt Basic Mac Based VLAN Group
155. 01 v1 0 October 27 2010 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Getting Started Switch Management Interface 20 000 cee ee 9 WED ACCESS cc idaxrcrtoratiiexeiekde ieee Lede eee heed bee e de 9 Understanding the User Interfaces 0 00 00ers 10 Using the Web Interface 2 0002 eee 10 USMO SNMP tes2 e tau pes eaaa eee Ghd dette ae ee Ss 17 Interface Naming Convention 0 0000 eee 18 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information MANAGEMON sh seas 268 andir Dre a acs Re SERN RAMA e Re ae Red 19 System INMOMMANON nyepi araga a a a aw a dan dee ee 20 SWIC Stat SCS wii cesta 3 ate a E A A NA 26 System RESOUTCE 225 cui prope Laces eee aE bee eee 29 SOT MOMMALTOMN es 05 crea ane don ace era Sees mutans al heme R 30 Loopback InerfaCe earne arid tonr divente bade centad bawa a Reaae 32 Network Interface 0 0 ee eee eee 33 WME Re tian eet AE E eke bie ace er he ee eee eee 38 POI Saeed arene E uc isda binder inane aed A ae 46 LICENSE 25 4 5 5 g d a eh ace Waar een dea a Re Ra E A A ah weenie amp 49 SHOW LICENSE cancia acee Siena aw inoan eiT wa derw a aoapd lene a wear Bike Gok a 49 License FeatureS 2 0 ee eee 50 SOIWICES i ciate and Ga ashe aie A whe a ea ae Sh dcliaa a ate Sean alee a 50 DAG SGVel accaunbi e comhueiwoe cus eadenaa eae webs deena 5i DHCP RGA nyisi mrak mes aera a ae n a r EPE 62 DHCP L2 Relay esis stig sce ciate mal tds hins tnu adalat REE EEE SENS 64 UDP Relay sieten a E a 67
156. 09 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LLDP Remote Device Information This page displays information on remote devices connected to the port To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP gt Remote Device Information A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S A on Gigabit Layer J Managed Stackable Swich with 4 10 Gigeba Slon LLDP Remote Device Information LLOP Interface Selection Interface Ke LLDP date har been wnnerend on thie isiarfate ULOP MTO ALTRLSH 1 Use Interface to select the local ports which can receive LLDP frames 110 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the LLDP Remote Device Information fields Table 2 36 Field Chassis ID Subtype Description Specifies the source of the chassis identifier Chassis ID Specifies the chassis component associated with the remote system Port ID Subtype Port ID System Name Specifies the source of port identifier Specifies the port component associated with the remote system Specifies the system name of the remote system System Description Specifies the description of the given port associated with the remote system Port Description Specifies the description of the given port associated with the remote system
157. 108 Field Description Direction Displays selected packet filtering direction for ACL ACL Type Displays the type of ACL assigned to selected interface and direction ACL ID Displays the ACL Number in case of IP ACL or ACL Name in case of MAC ACL identifying the ACL assigned to selected interface and direction Sequence Number Displays the Sequence Number signifying the order of specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to selected interface and direction 530 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced The Advanced folder contains links to the following features IP ACL on page 531 IP Rules on page 533 IP Extended Rules on page 535 IPv6 ACL on page 538 IPv6 Rules on page 539 IP Binding Configuration on page 542 IP Binding Table on page 544 IP ACL An IP ACL consists of a set of rules which are matched sequentially against a packet When a packet meets the match criteria of a rule the specified rule action Permit Deny is taken and the additional rules are not checked for a match On this menu the interfaces to which an IP ACL applies must be specified as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic Rules for the IP ACL are specified created using the IP ACL Rule Configuration menu To display the IP ACL page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IP ACL GSM73525S orn Gigebit Loyer 3 e h wi
158. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 204 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information Routing The Routing tab contains links to the following features e Routing Table on page 205 e IP on page 213 e IPv6 on page 229 e VLAN on page 250 e ARP on page 252 e RIP on page 258 e OSPF on page 266 e OSPFv3 on page 296 e Router Discovery on page 323 e VRRP on page 325 e Multicast on page 334 e IPv6 Multicast on page 371 Routing Table The Routing Table collects routes from multiple sources static routes RIP routes OSPF routes and local routes The Routing Table may learn multiple routes to the same destination from multiple sources The Routing Table lists all routes From the Routing Table link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 205 e Advanced on page 209 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages Chapter 4 Routing 205 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Route Configuration on page 206 Route Configuration To display the Route Configuration page click Routing gt Routing Table gt Basic gt Route Configuration GSM73525S 206 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Route Configuration 1 Use the Route Type field to specify default or static If creating a default route all that needs
159. 3 Specifies the number of age outs that occurred on a given port An age out is the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point MSAP has been deleted from tables associated with the remote entries because information timeliness interval had expired Specifies the number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port Specifies the number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which were not recognized by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port Specifies the total number of LLDP MED TLVs received on the local ports Specifies the total number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which are of type 802 1 Specifies the total number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which are of type 802 3 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 107 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LLDP Local Device Information To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP gt Local Device Information A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S Ab Pon Gigabit Loyer 2 Man Srocheble Swick with 4 10 Gagabit Slon socout LLDP Local Device Information LLDP Interface Selection interface Local Device Information Chaves tD Subtype Cess tO Post 1D Subtype Port 1D GSMT3S25 NetGear GSMT3525 48 GE 4 TENGIG crdgze router cndge 7 34 1s
160. 3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 78 Field Description Source Hosts This parameter shows source addresses which are members of this multicast address Source Address Expiry Time This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address which are members of this multicast group This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with latest MLD groups information MLD Traffic To display the MLD Traffic page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast MLD gt MLD Traffic NETGEAR GSM7352S rye managot sG imisbis jomt ot 2 10 Cogetet Hon MLD Trafic MLO Tratile Vets PO Patet Revered Vad MO Padet Sent Table 79 Field Description Valid MLD Packets Received The number of valid MLD packets received by the router Valid MLD Packets Sent The number of valid MLD packets sent by the router Queries Received The number of valid MLD queries received by the router Queries Sent The number of valid MLD queries sent by the router Reports Received The number of valid MLD reports received by the router Reports Sent The number of valid MLD reports sent by the router 390 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 79 Field Description The number of valid MLD leaves received by the router
161. 4 44404 bec panede eee 4 yee eae bee 481 MAG ES i eresrrnrsrn Be ape Sch db etic A dng heated aloha hse weer Ae 481 POM SECUN Ave cctentadwacadoee deen aesedAiae ea aow dese 484 Private Groups 4 ccvedintens avede dla ge eee dd gine eects 490 Protected Ports COntguration 3 caine ci nese cea ected a weeds cutee 492 Storm GONO sa tag dteawila a A oR ack Ma Ada ob deca ie Ad 493 COMI sca es emcee oad aaa eos Se aaee te Aisne ama 496 DHCP SNOOPING a 4cccc27 acs ciedisdvends e na ba paR 497 IPSS OUNCE QUANG erres sprecare yo one ate Sarath aed eHow wre A aa a 503 Dynamic ARP INSpeClON ti2sc eens ed Sees Ferd Hees Tweed 505 Captive Ponal cc oc dtd duit aiga dilaton be tek doe RG he 512 Configuring Access Control Lists 2 2 2 0 00 000 c eee eae 524 Ba IC Sen cron ck aed aad ai ace eed FG na E ane ees eee ae a 524 AOVANCED o icc de adc kes Ake eR A de wd tow da eRe ee 531 PONS ag didemed ase Matches Nm teh peda Reema 546 Pon Slalistcs g sgarar boete sag wend eh dee gpa 546 Port Detailed Statistics 0 0 0 0 0c cee eee 549 EAP Stats SS ag ea d died pe Ga ede aotes aed eee dae e 557 Cable TeSt ganes aE EN a EE a ENA sina pii ES 559 Ea EEE CERTA ae EE eee AAE EE eee bs 560 Buffered Logs ries o6 ha At nienie a a a dy Bh oD 561 Command Log Configuration so ssspirrerres pinsaia nia eee 563 Console Log Configuration sss sas eriees canna ded am ae naa 564 Syskog ConfigquratiOniic 2c rira koea ra aai 565 Tap LOJ Sara 24 coats a E E E E E
162. 598 e Traceroute IPv4 on page 599 e Traceroute IPv6 on page 601 Ping IPv4 Use this screen to tell the switch to send a Ping request to a specified IP address You can use this to check whether the switch can communicate with a particular IP station Once you click the APPLY button the switch will send specified number of ping requests and the results will be displayed If a reply to the ping is not received you will see e Tx Count Rx 0 Min Max Avg RTT 0 0 0 msec If a reply to the ping is received you will see e Received response for Seq Num 0 Rit xyz usec e Received response for Seq Num 1 Rtt abc usec e Received response for Seq Num 2 Rtt def usec e Tx Count Rx Count Min Max Avg RTT xyz abc def msec To access the Ping IPv4 page click Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt Ping IPv4 Chapter 8 Maintenance 595 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NETGEAR GSM73525 48 Port Gigabit Layer J Manoged Stackable Switch with 4 1O Gigabit shoes Security Monitoring Mointenonce Help Index tocou System Switching Routing be Management Ping IPv4 Ping gt Ping IPv Detalls gt Traceroute IP gt Traceroute IPv6 IP Ad rase iost Nomo Couet Interval eecs Datagram Sre 596 Chapter8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure the settings and ping a host on the network 1
163. 6 Global Configuration Use the Global Configuration page to enable IPv6 forwarding on the router and to enable the forwarding of IPv6 unicast datagrams To display the IPv6 Global Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Basic gt Global Configuration GSM73525 A tert Grob Lares manoga IP v6 Global Configuration IPye Global Configuration 1a nan pet Routing LOVE Feomertiong me 1CHP v4 Rate Limit Lyrae loterwe LEMP VE Rate Limet Burst tiee 1 Use IPv6 Unicast Routing to globally enable or disable IPv6 unicast routing on the entity 2 Use IPv6 Forwarding to enable or disable forwarding of IPv6 frames on the router 3 Use the Hop Limit option to define the unicast hop count used in IPv6 packets originated by the node The value is also included in router advertisements Valid values for lt hops gt are 1 64 inclusive The default not configured means that a value of zero is sent in router advertisements and a value of 64 is sent in packets originated by the node Note that this is not the same as configuring a value of 64 4 Use ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error Interval to control the ICMPv6 error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval By Default Rate limit is 100 packets sec i e burst interval is 1000 msec To disable ICMP Ratelimiting set this field to 0 Valid Rate Interval must be in the range 0 to 2147483647 5 Use ICMPv6 Rate Limit Burst Size to control t
164. 6 packets originated by the node The value is also included in router advertisements Valid values for lt hops gt are 1 64 inclusive The default not configured means that a value of zero is sent in router advertisements and a value of 64 is sent in packets originated by the node Note that this is not the same as configuring a value of 64 4 Use ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error Interval to control the ICMPv6 error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval By default Rate limit is 100 packets sec i e burst interval is 1000 msec To disable ICMP Rate limiting set this field to 0 Valid Rate Interval must be in the range 0 to 2147483647 5 Use ICMPv6 Rate Limit Burst Size to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval Default burst size is 100 packets When burst interval is 0 then configuring this field is not a valid operation Valid Burst Size must be in the range 1 to 200 234 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv Interface Configuration Use the Interface Configuration page to configure IPv6 interface parameters To display the IPv6 Interface Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Interface Configuration o ane a eam mae piii one sub mi tab msi ds a o am ne PUR RURIECEI ERI
165. 71 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Mroute Table This screen displays contents of the Mroute Table in tabular form To display the Mroute Table page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast Mroute Table GSM73525 A Pon Giguh lover shemnged i Ais bani ooh a 1D n eon Mroute Table Mraste i abse 372 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 70 Field Description Source IP The IP address of the multicast packet source to be combined with the Group IP to fully identify a single route whose Mroute table entry Group IP The destination group IP address Incoming Interface Outgoing Interface s The incoming interface on which multicast packets for this source group arrive The list of outgoing interfaces on which multicast packets for this source group are forwarded Up Time hh mm ss The time in seconds since the entry was created Expiry Time hh mmiss RPF Neighbor The time in seconds before this entry will age out and be removed from the table The IP address of the Reverse Path Forwarding neighbor Protocol The multicast routing protocol which created this entry The possibilities are e PIM DM e PIM SM Flags The value displayed in this field is valid if the multicast routing protocol running is PIMSM The possible values are RPT or SPT For other protoc
166. 8 Use Source Address to specify the desired source address The source address for this tunnel must be entered in dotted decimal notation Use Source Interface to specify the source interface for this tunnel The address associated with the selected interface will be used as the source address Use Destination Address to specify the destination address for this tunnel in dotted decimal notation Click ADD to allow the user to configure a new tunnel Click DELETE to delete the corresponding tunnel Click CANCEL to discard the changes made on the page and navigate back to the referring page Chapter 4 Routing 249 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual VLAN You can configure ProSafe Managed Switches software with some ports supporting VLANs and some supporting routing You can also configure the software to allow traffic on a VLAN to be treated as if the VLAN were a router port When a port is enabled for bridging default rather than routing all normal bridge processing is performed for an inbound packet which is then associated with a VLAN Its MAC Destination Address MAC DA and VLAN ID are used to search the MAC address table If routing is enabled for the VLAN and the MAC DA of an inbound unicast packet is that of the internal bridge router interface the packet is routed An inbound multicast packet is forwarded to all ports in the VLAN plus the internal bridge router interface
167. 8 802 1p to Queue Mapping 402 R RADIUS 427 server 433 reboot 580 reset configuration to defaults 582 switch 580 RSTP 151 S Simple Network Time Protocol 38 SNMP traps 96 using 17 v1 v2 93 SNTP 38 server configuration 43 server status 45 SSL 453 storm control 493 STP 151 example configuration 620 Status 153 155 Stratum 0 38 138 2 38 T T1 38 T2 38 T3 38 T4 38 TACACS folder 440 settings 441 technical support 2 time 38 levels 38 trademarks 2 traffic control 481 trap flags 97 U Unicast 38 upload configuration 583 V VLAN 130 example configuration 608 guest 617 ID 130 managing 130 Index 627 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Port VLAN ID 139 PVID 139 628 Index
168. 83 e Download File To Switch on page 587 File Management on page 592 e Troubleshooting on page 595 Save Configuration The Save Configuration menu contains links to the following options e Save Configuration on page 578 e Auto Install Configuration on page 580 Save Configuration To access the Save Configuration page click Maintenance gt Save Config gt Save Configuration Chapter 8 Maintenance 578 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NETGEAR GSM7352S lies 48 Post Gigabit Layer 3 Managed aa Srochoble Switch with 4 19 Qigobit Sots Maintenance Holp Index socour System Switching Routing Save Configuration Save Configuration Saving 28 applied hanges will cause all changes to configuration panels that were applied but not saved n to be saved thus retaining their new values across a System reboot gt Auto Install Configuration 1 Select the check box and click the APPLY button to have configuration changes you have made saved across a system reboot All changes submitted since the previous save or system reboot will be retained by the switch Chapter 8 Maintenance 579 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Auto Install Configuration To access the Auto Install Configuration page click Maintenance gt Save Config gt Auto Install Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer I Man
169. 9 e MAC Based VLAN on page 141 e IP Subnet Based VLAN on page 142 e Port DVLAN Configuration on page 143 e Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration on page 144 e Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership on page 146 e Voice VLAN Configuration on page 147 e GARP Switch Configuration on page 149 e GARP Port Configuration on page 150 134 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual VLAN Configuration To display the VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt VLAN Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 8 Port Gigeber Lap with with 4 10 Bask VLAN Configuration v Advanced VIAN Contiguratien gt VLAN Membershep Reset Costiguretion Reset Internal VLAN Configuration Internal VLAN Allocation Base Internat VLAN Allocation Policy VLAN ID VLAN Name a O Defor e Reset Configuration If you select this button and confirm your selection on the next screen all VLAN configuration parameters will be reset to their factory default values Also all VLANs except for the default VLAN will be deleted The factory default values are e All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1 All ports are configured with a PVID of 1 All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames All ports are configured with Ingress Filtering disabled e All ports are configured to transmit on
170. 9 1 9 f p i i 000 O08 600 009 9 g amp 9 H z S a g 9 g gt 1000 opg H i HRH f Mod a a h amp p o a Ce p to D k 6 p ke k o Orsebie Dasbie CJ D 6 gp a a nseni amp op 2 E g ca o io 150 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Interface to select the physical interface for which data is to be displayed or configured 2 Use Port GVRP Mode to choose the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol administrative mode for the port by selecting enable or disable from the dropdown list If you select disable the protocol will not be active and the Join Time Leave Time and Leave All Time will have no effect The factory default is disable 3 Use Port GMRP Mode to choose the GARP Multicast Registration Protocol administrative mode for the port by selecting enable or disable from the dropdown list If you select disable the protocol will not be active and Join Time Leave Time and Leave All Time have no effect The factory default is disable 4 Use Join Time centiseconds to specify the time between the transmission of GARP PDUs registering or re registering membership for a VLAN or multicast group in centiseconds Enter a number between 10 and 100 0 1 to 1 0 seconds The factory default is 20 centiseconds 0 2 seconds An instance of this timer exists fo
171. A Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum Translator State The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers The field tells you if and how the NSSA border router translates type 7 into type 5 e enabled The NSSA border router s translator role has been set to always e elected The candidate NSSA border router is translating type 7 LSAs into type 5 e disabled The candidate NSSA border router is NOT translating type 7 LSAs into type 5 Chapter 4 Routing 277 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Area Range Configuration Use the OSPF Area Range Configuration page to configure and display an area range for a specified NSSA To display the Area Range Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Area Range Configuration GSM73525 erg ee em opan a eae 1 Use Area ID to specify the area for which data is to be configured 2 Use IP address to enter the IP Address for the address range for the selected area 3 Use Subnet Mask to enter the Subnet Mask for the addre
172. AC Binding Table on page 530 MAC ACL A MAC ACL consists of a set of rules which are matched sequentially against a packet When a packet meets the match criteria of a rule the specified rule action Permit Deny is taken and the additional rules are not checked for a match On this menu the interfaces to which an MAC ACL applies must be specified as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic Rules for the MAC ACL are specified created using the MAC ACL Rule Configuration menu There are multiple steps involved in defining a MAC ACL and applying it to the switch 1 Use the MAC ACL page to create the ACL ID 2 Use the MAC Rules page to create rules for the ACL 3 Use the MAC Binding Configuration page to assign the ACL by its ID number to a port 4 Optionally use the MAC Binding Table page to view the configurations 524 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To display the MAC ACL page click Security gt ACL gt Basic gt MAC ACL NETGEAR GSM7352S igob Loyer 3 Mesoped le Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Store vosour ok MAC ACL AA MAC ACL MAC Rules MAC Binding Current Number of ACL Configuration Maximum ACL Binding Table gt Advanced MAC ACL Table The MAC ACL table displays the number of ACLs currently configured in the switch and the maximum number of ACLs that can be configured The current size is
173. AN Ids enabled for MLD snooping querier 190 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration To access the MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Querier VLAN Configuration i _ GSM7352S MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Coefiguration VLAN Configurabon Querier Cortguration Quener VLAN Comfigerabon VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID on which MLD Snooping Querier is administratively enabled and VLAN exists in the VLAN database Use Querier Election Participate Mode to enable or disable the MLD Snooping Querier participate in election mode When this mode is disabled up on seeing other querier of same version in the vlan the snooping querier move to non querier state Only when this mode is enabled the snooping querier will participate in querier election where in the least ip address will win the querier election and operates as the querier in that VLAN The other querier moves to non querier state Use Querier VLAN Address to specify the Snooping Querier Address to be used as source address in periodic MLD queries sent on the specified VLAN Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 191 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 3 68 id escrito
174. Administration Manual Dynamic ARP Inspection The Dynamic ARP Inspection DAI folder contains links to the following features DAI Configuration on page 505 DAI VLAN Configuration on page 506 DAI Interface Configuration on page 507 DAI ACL Configuration on page 508 DAI ACL Rule Configuration on page 509 DAI Statistics on page 510 DAI Configuration To display the DAI Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer J Mosoged Siochobie Switch wih 4 10 Gigobit Sior tocourt gt DHCP Snooping Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration IP Source Guard Dynamic ARP Inspection Vabdste Source MAC Dynamic ARP Inspection Global Configuration Ossable O Enable DAI Vabdate Destination MAC Otabie Enable Conhguration Valetate IP Disable Enable OAT VLAN Configuration DAI Interface Configuration OAT ACL Coefguration DAI ACL Rule Corfiguration QAI Statistics gt Captive Portal Use Validate Source MAC to choose the DAI Source MAC Validation Mode for the switch by selecting Enable or Disable radio button If you select Enable Sender MAC validation for the ARP packets will be enabled The factory default is disable Use Validate Destination MAC to choose the DAI Destination MAC Validation Mode for the switch by selecting Enable or Disable radio button If you select Enable Destination MAC validation fo
175. Authentication page click Security gt Port Authentication gt Advanced gt Port Authentication Note Use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the browser to view all the fields on the Port Authentication page Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 471 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Port Authentication Port Authentication All Guest Quiet Transmit Guest ULAN Unauthenticated Supplicant Server Period Period VLAN ID Meri VLAN ID Timeout Timeout erioc Control Mode 1 0 11 1 0 12 1 0 13 1 0 14 1 0 15 1 0 16 1 0 17 1 0 18 1 0 19 170 20 1 0 21 1 0 22 1 0 23 1 0 24 1 0 25 1 0 26 1 0 27 1 0 28 1 0 29 1 0 30 1 0 33 1 0 32 1 0 33 1 0 34 1 0 35 yyugyygguyuygyyi ce fa a amp a amp 3 gt 5S 5 ES 5 5 S R 6 6 5 6 8 S 5 E 8 amp 5 6 Goco Go no G onon o SSSsSesSEsSEsSsSeEsssSssessessesseses 2 SSSESE Ee ss o 1 0 41 1 0 42 1 0 43 1 0 44 1 0 45 1 0 46 1 0 47 1 0 48 1 0 49 1 0750 1 0 53 1 0 52 all Btssseseseses S268 g g JEA LCA ESA ES EJ LA EJ EF EJ LA ES ES EF LA EJ EJ LA LA ES EF LCA LA EJ EJ LA EJ eeoeoeoesevosecoeroeeseeseeoeeeseeseeseeoeseeeeseeseeseecsee Ss BSSERTESESRERTESES REBT EERE SBSSessessessSssessessesssssesse a a o m 0 0 QO o o 0 0 m o E o o o 0 0 m o D a o o 0 0 0 g a o 0 o m 0 0 B a o a o m o 0 g 0 o a 0
176. BPDU from a particular port 620 Appendix B Configuration Examples ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual An MST Region comprises of one or more MSTP Bridges with the same MST Configuration Identifier using the same MSTIs and which have no Bridges attached that cannot receive and transmit MSTP BPDUs The MST Configuration Identifier has the following components 1 Configuration Identifier Format Selector 2 Configuration Name 3 Configuration Revision Level 4 Configuration Digest 16 byte signature of type HMAC MD5 created from the MST Configuration Table a VLAN ID to MSTID mapping As there are Multiple Instances of Spanning Tree there is a MSTP state maintained on a per port per instance basis or on a per port per VLAN basis as any VLAN can be in one and only one MSTI or CIST For example port A can be forwarding for instance 1 while discarding for instance 2 The port states have changed since IEEE 802 1D specification To support multiple spanning trees a MSTP bridge has to be configured with an unambiguous assignment of VLAN IDs VIDs to spanning trees This is achieved by 1 Ensuring that the allocation of VIDs to FIDs is unambiguous 2 Ensuring that each FID supported by the Bridge is allocated to exactly one Spanning Tree Instance The combination of VID to FID and then FID to MSTI allocation defines a mapping of VIDs to spanning tree instances represented by the
177. CP Fragment GSM7352S 48 Port Gigod Lover Srockable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Slots Monitoring Maintenance Help ocout Cveadle Eradle Oitadie Enable Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 465 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Denial of Service Min TCP Header Size to specify the Min TCP Hadr Size allowed If DoS TCP Fragment is enabled the switch will drop these packets e First TCP fragments that has a TCP payload P_Payload_Length IP_Header_Size lt Min _TCP_Header_ Size The factory default is disabled 2 Use Denial of Service L4 Port to enable L4 Port DoS prevention causing the switch to drop packets having source TCP UDP port number equal to destination TCP UDP port number The factory default is disabled 3 Use Denial of Service First Fragment to enable First Fragment DoS prevention causing the switch to check DoS options on first fragment IP packets when switch are receiving fragmented IP packets Otherwise switch ignores the first fragment IP packages The factory default is disabled 4 Use Denial of Service ICMP to enable ICMP DoS prevention causing the switch to drop ICMP packets that have a type set to ECHO_REQ ping and a size greater than the configured ICMP Pkt Size The factory default is disabled 5 Use Denial of Service Max ICMP Packet Size to specify the Max ICMP Packet Size allowed This includes the ICMP header size of 8 bytes
178. Configuration To display the UDP Relay Interface Configuration page click System gt Services gt UDP Relay gt UDP Relay Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525S y 419 Doda Han UDP Relay Interlace Configuration UDP Relay interface Configeration 1 Use Interface to select an Interface to be enabled for the UDP Relay 2 Use Server Address to specify the UDP Relay Server Address in x x x x format 3 Use UDP Port to specify UDP Destination Port The following ports are supported DefaultSet Relay UDP port 0 packets This is specified if no UDP port is selected when creating a Relay server dhcp Relay DHCP UDP port 67 packets domain Relay DNS UDP port 53 packets isakmp Relay ISAKMP UDP port 500 packets mobile ip Relay Mobile IP UDP port 434 packets nameserver Relay IEN 116 Name Service UDP port 42 packets netbios dgm Relay NetBIOS Datagram Server UDP port 138 packets netbios ns Relay NetBIOS Name Server UDP port 137 packets ntp Relay network time protocol UDP port 123 packets pim auto rp Relay PIM auto RP UDP port 496 packets rip Relay RIP UDP port 520 packets tacacs Relay TACACS UDP port 49 packet tftp Relay TFTP UDP port 69 packets time Relay time service UDP port 37 packets Other If this option is selected the UDP Port Other Value is enabled This option permits the user to enter their own UDP port in UDP Port Other Va
179. Configuration on page 262 e Route Redistribution on page 265 RIP Configuration Use the RIP Configuration page to enable and configure or disable RIP in Global mode To display the RIP Configuration page click Routing gt RIP gt Advanced gt RIP Configuration GSM73525 Pee Gagan lever Managed Insbebie tomt with 4 10 Gigebe Don gt a RIP Configuration 260 Chapter4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Use RIP Admin Mode to enable or disable RIP for the switch The default is enable Use Split Horizon Mode to select none simple or poison reverse from the radio buttons Split horizon is a technique for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was originally learned The options are e None No special processing for this case e Simple A route will not be included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned e Poison reverse A route will be included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned but the metric will be set to infinity The default is simple Use Auto Summary Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable groups of adjacent routes will be summarized into single entries in order to reduce the total number of entries The default is disable Use Host Routes Accept Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable the router will be accept host route
180. Configuration on page 498 e DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration on page 499 e DHCP Snooping Binding Configuration on page 500 e DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration on page 501 e DHCP Snooping Statistics on page 502 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 497 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Snooping Global Configuration To display the DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page click Security gt Control gt DHCP Snooping gt Global Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pon Gigodit Loyer 3 Mosoged Stockoble Switch we 4 10 Gigabit Slon System Switching QoS curi Monitoring Maintenance Help Index toaovr DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Global Configuration Ghb DHCP Snooping Global Configuration Configuration gt Interface DHCP Snooping Mode Osabie O Enable Corfiguration MAC Address Validation Citable fnsdie Binding Configuration VLAN Configuration Persistent Coefiguraton Statistics gt IP Source Guard gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt Captive Portal VLAN ID DHCP Snooping Mode DHCP Snooping Configuration 1 Use DHCP Snooping Mode to enable or disable the DHCP Snooping feature The factory default is disabled 2 Use MAC Address Validation to enable or disable the validation of sender MAC Address for DHCP Snooping The factory default is enabled DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration 1 Use VLAN ID to enter the VLAN for which the DHCP Snoopin
181. D setting The packet proceeds to the VLAN specified by its VLAN ID tag number If the port through which the packet entered does not have membership with the VLAN specified by the VLAN ID tag the packet is dropped If the port is a member of the VLAN specified by the packet s VLAN ID the packet can be sent to other ports with the same VLAN ID Packets leaving the switch are either tagged or untagged depending on the setting for that port s VLAN membership properties A U for a given port means that packets leaving the switch from that port are untagged Inversely a T for a given port means that packets leaving the switch from that port are tagged with the VLAN ID that is associated with the port The example given in this section comprises numerous steps to illustrate a wide range of configurations to help provide an understanding of tagged VLANs VLAN Example Configuration This example demonstrates several scenarios of VLAN use and describes how the switch handles tagged and untagged traffic In this example you create two new VLANs change the port membership for default VLAN 1 and assign port members to the two new VLANs 1 In the Basic VLAN Configuration screen see VLAN Configuration on page 3 132 create the following VLANs e AVLAN with VLAN ID 10 e AVLAN with VLAN ID 20 In the VLAN Membership screen see VLAN Configuration on page 3 132 specify the VLAN membership as follows Appendix B Conf
182. Dy MAC Address IGMP Snooping gt KLD Shoopiso 1 Use Search by MAC Address to enter a MAC Address whose MFDB table entry you want displayed Enter six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons for example 00 01 23 43 45 67 Then click on the GO button If the address exists that entry will be displayed An exact match is required Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 169 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 3 61 Fes escrito O O MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which you requested data VLAN ID The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related Type This displays the type of the entry Static entries are those that are configured by the end user Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol Component This is the component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database Possible values are IGMP Snooping GMRP Static Filtering and MLD Snooping Description The text description of this multicast table entry Possible values are Management Configured Network Configured and Network Assisted ForwardingInterfaces The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces 170 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabi
183. EGER PU IRUN RRR Hfififififi i ipifii 0S 0 09 te i 88 be 0d Le a PELELELELEL ELE EL EL ELE TPUELELEREE EI ELEE EEE 1 Use Interface to select the interface to be configured or displayed All physical interfaces are valid 2 Use IPv6 Mode to enable disable IPv6 mode When IPv6 mode is enabled interface is capable of IPv6 operation without a global address In this case an EUI 64 based link local address is used This selector lists the two options for IPv6 mode enable and disable Default value is disable 3 Use Routing Mode to enable disable routing mode of an interface Default value is disable 4 Use Admin Mode to enable disable the Administrative Mode of the interface The default value is enable This mode is not supported for Logical VLAN Interfaces 5 Use MTU to specify the maximum transmit unit on an interface If the value is 0 then this interface is not enabled for routing It is not valid to set this value to 0 if routing is enabled Range of MTU is 1280 to 1500 6 Use Duplicate Address Detection Transmits to specify the number of duplicate address detections transmits on an interface DAD transmits values must be in range 0 to 600 7 Use Life Time Interval to specify the router advertisement lifetime field sent from the interface This value must be greater than or equal to the maximum advertisement interval 0 means do not use the router as the default router The range of router lifetime is 0 to 9000 8
184. ETGEAR GSM7352S Aton Gegatet Layer Managed ible Switch with 4 1O Chgabe Sem adex VLAN Configuration Reset Reset Configeration Internal VLAN Configuration Interaal VLAN Allocation Base Intereal VLAN Allocation Pobcy VLAN Configuration VLAN ID VLAN Name a O Defaut 1 Reset Configuration If you select this checkbox and click the APPLY button all VLAN configuration parameters will be reset to their factory default values Also all VLANs except for the default VLAN will be deleted The factory default values are All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1 All ports are configured with a PVID of 1 All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames All ports are configured with Ingress Filtering disabled All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared 132 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Internal VLAN Configuration This section displays the allocation base and the allocation mode of internal VLAN The internal VLAN is reserved by port based routing interface and invisible to the end user Once these internal VLANs are allocated by port based routing interface they are cannot be assigned to a routing VLAN interface 1 Use Internal VLAN Allocation Base to specify the VLAN Allocation Base for th
185. Ea 566 Ev n LOGS 4 050 detwy dt ante EEE bade eee EE A 568 POISISIGML LO rsrsrsr dhre hae deeg tate ee dotd ba ne a dated doe 4 570 OMIM INVOKING 5 3 cae site dm pled aie oil dep ip FA esis eGR ate sia Wee A RR Si 571 Muktiple Port Mirroring oso 224 fcddasteat ied Gee ee he bedee wees 571 SHOW sce se ee coats ere chee S nET REEERE A a ais hone ORE aa 573 e EE E E E A tee fis hd EE E EE TE 573 AVANCO oe eae EA EO ETEA EER KR EEEN 575 Chapter 8 Maintenance Save COMIGUIAUON ss s depi caw naan ea aa a ia a GA 578 Save Confiqurationi 128 arar aa e a E a E 578 Auto Install Configuration 00 cee ee 580 6 Contents ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Roco cust hieeN Pose te ee eRe he Lee ee Eder en E 580 Device eDOO xs iccdesc ctwade rams Eswadannt S RERE RAEN 580 Facto Default seadsid egram idg a ad a eum ans a 582 PassWord ReSet i tirrer ieoi tni tnp D RE ee a ED DREE N E a 583 Upload File From SWuUch 2s5 00tscc ele Gphdeeehes Peed Meee oes 583 Pile WG AG it Seda anren a eben dateae T dvs Sahgh bebe 583 HTP File Uplod oi tdi etcea eee penki cdot Ea ad dee ee 586 VSB File Upload ies raet cnt dor ace ge a de eta eae ta eden d 587 Download File To Switch 0 000 ccc eee 587 File DOWnIOaG s 302tox Peebles eon ee Geka ea eae ee es ees 588 ATIF File Downoad wesc ccc ae donut age ttnt ad ORR REE Rise ES 589 USB File DOWNRIG AGL eredes areca aaa a Na a a i 592 Fi
186. From the MLD link you can access the following pages e MLD Global Configuration on page 385 e MLD Routing Interface Configuration on page 386 e MLD Routing Interface Statistics on page 388 e MLD Groups on page 389 e MLD Traffic on page 390 e MLD Proxy Interface Configuration on page 392 e MLD Proxy Interface Statistics on page 394 e MLD Proxy Membership on page 395 MLD Global Configuration To display the MLD Global Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast MLD gt Global Configuration GSM73525 bh Aat Gigab irpo 2 Man yw 9 Managed Sageto tons 330er MLD Global Configuration 1 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of MLD in the router to active or inactive The default is disable Chapter 4 Routing 385 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD Routing Interface Configuration To display the MLD Routing Interface Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt MLD gt Routing Interface Configuration MLD Rowling Interlace Configuration FEE ifii te te te i TETE Si fi ipi B j 386 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be configured or displayed 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of MLD on the selected interface The default value is disable 3 Use Version to enter
187. Fv3 Admin Mode but they will have no effect until you enable Admin Mode The following information will be displayed only if the Admin Mode is enabled State Designated Router Backup Designated Router Number of Chapter 4 Routing 309 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Link Events LSA ACK Interval and Metric Cost For OSPFv3 to be fully functional the interface must have a valid IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length This can be done through the CLI using the IPv6 address command in the interface configuration mode Note Once OSPF v3 is initialized on the router it will remain initialized until the router is reset 4 Use Router Priority to enter the OSPF v3 priority for the selected interface The priority of an interface is specified as an integer from 0 to 255 The default is 1 which is the highest router priority A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network 5 Use Retransmit Interval to enter the OSPFv3 retransmit interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets Valid values range from 0 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default is 5 seconds 6 Use Hello Interval to enter the OSPFv3 hello interval for the specified interface in seconds
188. G EEEE E EAE E ees EE SEE T neat aaas as E aoe rman eos eens 229 BAGG agar deeper twice ace here eae Ga ea aed ee aera E 230 PROMANNC OG ah are dase Ge hse actos ced laud on kta Gain E E E Bre eared 233 VEAN 333 4450 bb is edi eat oe ra wis oo eee aed hveku re ses 250 VLAN Routing Wizard 00 0000 cece 251 VLAN Routing Configuration 0 0002 e eee eee 252 ARP bast at eredrccanitd tate hited i obs ae Aerpho tad E e ted luh dese apn chet Aik 252 PAS IG ah vaesas Bote ged Sucks dv dered wh Ataneaiphad desde dink ahaa raul Pedade Raw Silva dees ale Geo ad 253 PAV ANG OG spectra ace sade cds ginny aoa hak FRA Ee Sedge wa ieee EA dea walenaccant 255 E REITE a dean es 4 aotedue ease dae eens a ead a aonb oueaen 258 BASICE areke aidus ane datd Grote wiavecd ea a aid ea e iene aAA 258 AQVANCOQh E TEE E E Pak ee Ree TRE Rse HERE RRew A 260 OSPF 3525 66S oid Gea be a a ee See eo ees ba ae es 266 BASIC ogo satosates etek ernie ke acd dite r yadaok E E E mm aed 267 4 Contents ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual AGVANCE gcc 2850 22tea eRe eee Pal Gedstadtcahed RES 268 OS PIV G navn ae Raabe BUA Mis BEER gsEe Bats ease CEEE 296 BASICS az aes ht t dod kamareaes a a Bead he ee ea dll Ae tad weathered 296 AVANCE o iioi o tata a dae kote sub e a ee dda O a 298 Router DISCOVElY ieericens vedere Peers Cea dee be deed eee Ee ees 323 Router Discovery Configuration 0000 cec
189. HTTPS Admin mode is disabled 2 Use SSL Version 3 to Enable or Disable Secure Sockets Layer Version 3 0 The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Enable 3 Use TLS Version 1 to Enable or Disable Transport Layer Security Version 1 0 The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Enable 4 Use HTTPS Port to set the HTTPS Port Number The value must be in the range of 1 to 65535 Port 443 is the default value The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed 5 Use HTTPS Session Soft Timeout Minutes to set the inactivity time out for HTTPS sessions The value must be in the range of 1 to 60 minutes The default value is 5 minutes The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed 6 Use HTTPS Session Hard Timeout Hours to set the hard time out for HTTPS sessions This time out is unaffected by the activity level of the session The value must be in the range of 1 to 168 hours The default value is 24 hours The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed 7 Use Maximum Number of HTTPS Sessions to set the maximum allowable number of HTTPS sessions The value must be in the range of 0 to 16 The default value is 16 The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed Table 6 87 Fig escrito O O Certificate Present Displays whether there is a certi
190. ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent 226 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IP Interface Configuration Use the IP Interface Configuration page to update IP interface data for this switch To display the IP Interface Configuration page click Routing gt IP gt Advanced gt IP Interface Configuration TP Intertace Conlquratson ee O se tame asie eadie teaa se 23 t bee ves sais LEES iame treme im woe mee few aad t s we coe sie tree tee sone 33900 tee toee ve gaat gaat Tee Decu Cee pee a Deere HoR seve te smm ace me toene se 00 tm tee i vas LEE EJ sone a eel Lense uamo osa t Dena idena a4 aae teve soa Dase row tere eee 28000 te tee ves asis Base ee peene Faroe eed Doere taos soe Deste Pree toeea one 2x te trese vew seat goat ere be i am meee Pese ad nee toese me ame toee t e se bam tm C weer sare tase oaee ewe Date eae tesa tae Seeve Eisd tove tawe se toane ame aene tee tome wo a te tane awe tase soet _ trate oe See cee taa ieper tas st so eee t se sms Desie t ene e zaoa iosa tee vess ease rore Tamro trose Deme aene teora tee IEMA tw tas rece tene bme Sebe iera bosam mea x toee Vee O ve un EEES T aaaedl I Demn demme free i Demm LEO foe toe seue tere am Sate re tae ese 2200 tm toese von LETE Dose Ead tan ae Pea Teee Lt aeel
191. ID Firmware Version Boot Version Seral Number RPS Not Present Not Present Power Module PoE Version Operations Operational 4 0 MAX PoE OFF The following table describes the Device Status information Table 2 4 Field Description Firmware Version The release version maintenance build number of the code currently running on the switch For example if the release was 8 the version was 0 the maintenance number was 3 and the build number was 11 the format would be 8 0 3 11 Boot Version The version of the boot code which is in the flash memory to load the firmware into the memory CPLD Version The version of the software for CPLD Serial Number The serial number of this switch 24 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 2 4 Field Description RPS Indicates the status of the RPS The status has three Power Module possible values e Not Present RPS bank not connected e OK RPS bank connected e FAIL RPS is present but power is failed Indicates the status of the internal power module PoE Version Version of the PoE controller FW image MAX PoE Indicates the status of maximum PoE power available on the switch as follows e ON Indicates less than 7W of PoE power available for another device e OFF Indicates at least 7W of PoE power available fo
192. If ICMP DoS prevention is enabled the switch will drop ICMP ping packets that have a size greater then this configured Max ICMP Packet Size minus the ICMP header size of 8 bytes The factory default is 512 6 Use Denial of Service SIP DIP to enable SIP DIP DoS prevention causing the switch to drop packets that have a source IP address equal to the destination IP address The factory default is disabled 7 Use Denial of Service TCP FLAG to enable TCP Flag DoS prevention causing the switch to drop these packets e TCP SYN flag 1 amp source port lt 1024 e TCP control flag 0 amp sequence number 0 e TCP FIN URG PSH bits set amp sequence number 0 e TCP SYN amp FIN bits set The factory default is disabled 8 Use Denial of Service TCP Fragment to enable TCP Fragment DoS prevention causing the switch to drop packets First TCP fragments that has a TCP payload P_Payload_Length IP_Header_Size lt Min _TCP_Header_ Size The factory default is disabled Port Authentication In port based authentication mode when 802 1X is enabled globally and on the port successful authentication of any one supplicant attached to the port results in all users being able to use the port without restrictions At any given time only one supplicant is allowed to attempt authentication on a port in this mode Ports in this mode are under bidirectional control This is the default authentication mode 466 Chapter 6 Managing Device Secur
193. MP is enabled by default The System gt Management gt System Information Web page which is the page that displays after a successful login displays the information you need to configure an SNMP manager to access the switch Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMPv38 protocol but for authentication and encryption the switch supports only one user which is admin therefore there is only one profile that can be created or modified To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMPv3 admin profile by using the Web interface 1 Navigate to the System gt SNMP gt SNMPv3 gt User Configuration page 2 To enable authentication select an Authentication Protocol option which is either MD5 or SHA 3 To enable encryption select the DES option in the Encryption Protocol field Then enter an encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric characters in the Encryption Key field 4 Click Apply To access configuration information for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 click System gt SNMP gt SNMPv1 v2 and click the page that contains the information to configure Chapter 1 Getting Started 17 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Interface Naming Convention The ProSafe Managed Switches support physical and logical interfaces Interfaces are identified by their type and the interface number The physical ports are gigabit interfaces and are numbered on the front panel You co
194. Minimum Wait Time in seconds This value will be compared to the time stamp in the client s request packets which should represent the time since the client was powered up Packets will only be forwarded when the time stamp exceeds the minimum wait time The range is 0 to 100 Use Circuit ID Option Mode to enable or disable Circuit ID Option mode If you select enable Relay Agent options will be added to requests before they are forwarded to the server and removed from replies before they are forwarded to clients 62 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Relay Status The following table describes the DHCP Relay Status fields Table 2 21 Field Description Requests Received The total number of DHCP requests received from all clients since the last time the switch was reset Requests Relayed The total number of DHCP requests forwarded to the server since the last time the switch was reset Packets Discarded The total number of DHCP packets discarded by this Relay Agent since the last time the switch was reset Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 63 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP L2 Relay From the DHCP L2 Relay link you can access the following pages e DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration on page 64 e DHCP L2 Relay Interface Conf
195. Multicast Router VLAN Configuration 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which you want Multicast Router to be enabled or to be displayed 2 Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID for which the Multicast Router Mode is to be Enabled or Disabled 3 Use Multicast Router to enable or disable multicast router for the Vlan ID Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 179 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Snooping Querier IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end devices on the network to announce their multicast memberships This central device is the IGMP querier The IGMP query responses known as IGMP reports keep the switch updated with the current multicast group membership on a port by port basis If the switch does not receive updated membership information in a timely fashion it will stop forwarding multicasts to the port where the end device is located These pages enable you to configure and display information on IGMP snooping queriers on the network and separately on VLANs IGMP Snooping Querier Configuration Use this menu to configure the parameters for IGMP Snooping Querier Note that only a user with Read Write access privileges may change the data on this screen To access this page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Querier Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S aa 44 Port Gigabit Layer 2 Ma
196. N Configuration 1 Use VLAN ID to set the VLAN IDs for which MLD Snooping is enabled 2 Use Admin Mode to enable MLD Snooping for the specified VLAN ID 3 Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to enable or disable the MLD Snooping Fast Leave Mode for the specified VLAN ID 4 Use Group Membership Interval to set the value for group membership interval of MLD Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is Maximum Response Time 1 to 3600 5 Use Maximum Response Time to set the value for maximum response time of MLD Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is 1 to Group Membership Interval 1 Its value should be less than group membership interval value 6 Use Multicast Router Expiry Time to set the value for multicast router expiry time of MLD Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is 0 to 3600 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 187 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Multicast Router Configuration To access the Multicast Router Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Multicast Router Configuration 1 NETGEAR Multicast Router Configuration gt IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Configuration MED Snooping Configuration a LAGS AN Co le tatertee interface Corhgu ston MLO VLAN Corhiguration Moet Rotter Corto ston Multicast Router WLAN Configuration Quener Corfou aon Quener VLAN Corfiguaten
197. NETGEAR ProSafe Managed Switch Web Management User Manual ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 2010 NETGEAR Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form or by any means without the written permission of NETGEAR Inc Technical Support Thank you for choosing NETGEAR To register your product get the latest product updates or get support online visit us at http support netgear com Phone US amp Canada only 1 888 NETGEAR Phone Other Countries See Support information card Trademarks NETGEAR the NETGEAR logo ReadyNAS ProSafe Smart Wizard Auto Uplink X RAID2 and NeoTV are trademarks or registered trademarks of NETGEAR Inc Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other brand and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders Statement of Conditions To improve internal design operational function and or reliability NETGEAR reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice NETGEAR does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Revision History Publication Part Number Version Publish Date Comments 202 10757
198. NETGEAR GSM7352S Connect with 48 Port Gigabir Layer J Mosoged Srockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Slory System Switching Routing G Security Monitoring Maintenance Help Index tosowr rofix Control DHCP Snooping DYNamMIc ARP Inspection ACL Configuration IP Source Guard DAI ACL Configuration Dynamic ARP Inspection OA Coefgurahon DAI VLAN Coefiguration DAI Interface Configuration DAI ACL Configuration DAI ACL Rule Configuration DAI Statistics gt Captive Portal Use Name to create New ARP ACL for DAI Click ADD to add a new DAI ACL to the switch configuration Click DELETE to remove the currently selected DAI ACL from the switch configuration 508 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DAI ACL Rule Configuration This screen shows the Rules for selected DAI ARP ACL To display the DAI ACL Rule Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI ACL Rule Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer J Mosoged Srockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Siem Maintenance Help index tosour DHCP Snooping Dynamic ARP Inspection ACL Rules Configuration gt TP Source Guard Dynamic ARP Inspection QAI Corfiguration DAI VLAN Configuration OAL Interface Rules Nae ARP ACLs Found Configuration DAI ACL Configuration DAI ACL Rule Configuration OAL S
199. O O Operational State Specifies the operational state of the MLD Snooping Querier on a VLAN It can be in any of the following states e Querier Snooping switch is the Querier in the VLAN The Snooping switch will send out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query interval If the snooping switch sees a better querier in the VLAN it moves to non querier mode e Non Querier Snooping switch is in Non Querier mode in the VLAN If the querier expiry interval timer is expires the snooping switch will move into querier mode e Disabled Snooping Querier is not operational on the VLAN The Snooping Querier moves to disabled mode when MLD Snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is also not configured Operational Version Displays the operational MLD protocol version of the querier Last Querier Address Displays the IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN Last Querier Version Displays the MLD protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN Operational Max Response Time Displays maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the Snooping Querier Address Table From the Address Table link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 192 e Advanced on page 195 Basic From the Basic link you can access the follo
200. P Interface Configuration 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Send Version to select the version of RIP control packets the interface should send from the pull down menu The value is one of the following RIP 1 Send RIP version 1 formatted packets via broadcast e RIP 1c RIP version 1 compatibility mode Send RIP version 2 formatted packets via broadcast e _RIP 2 Send RIP version 2 packets using multicast The default is RIP 2 None No RIP control packets will be sent 3 Use Receive Version to select what RIP control packets the interface will accept from the pull down menu The value is one of the following e RIP 1 Accept only RIP version 1 formatted packets e RIP 2 Accept only RIP version 2 formatted packets The default is RIP 2 e Both Accept packets in either format e None No RIP control packets will be accepted 4 Use RIP admin mode to enable RIP for an interface The default is Disable 5 Use Authentication Type to select an authentication type other than none by clicking on the Configure Authentication button You will then see a new screen where you can select the authentication type from the pull down menu The choices are e None This is the initial interface state If you select this option from the pull down menu on the second screen you will be returned to the first screen and no authentication protocols will be run e Simple If you select S
201. P client Either Host Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both Valid Range is 0 to 32 Can be selected as Infinite to specify lease time as Infinite or Specified Duration to enter a specific lease period In case of dynamic binding infinite implies a lease period of 60 days and In case of manual binding infinite implies indefinite lease period Default Value is Specified Duration Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 55 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 2 17 Field Description Specifies the Number of Days of Lease Period This field appears only if the user has specified Specified Duration as the Lease time Default Value is 1 Valid Range is 0 to 59 Specifies the Number of Hours of Lease Period This field appears only if the user has specified Specified Duration as the Lease time Valid Range is 0 to 22 Minutes Specifies the Number of Minutes of Lease Period This field appears only if the user has specified Specified Duration as the Lease time Valid Range is 0 to 86399 Default Router Addresses Specifies the list of Default Router Addresses for the pool The user may specify up to 8 Default Router Addresses in order of preference DNS Server Addresses Specifies the list of DNS Server Addresses for the pool The user may specify up to 8 DNS Server
202. PIM SM Neighbor PIM St terghdor beent oy Inee tece Table 68 Field Description Interface The interface on which neighbor is displayed Neighbor IP The IP address of the PIM neighbor for this entry Up Time The time since this PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the local router Expiry Time The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor will be aged out Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest PIM SM neighbor information 366 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SM Candidate RP Configuration To display the PIM SM Candidate RP Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast PIM SM gt Candidate RP Configuration GSM73525 3 enged Cogais tom m bette emd ort PIM SM Candidate RP Conliguration PIN SH interfece Selection betartasa PIM SA Camdidete BY Comligeut stion 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed 2 Use Group Address to specify the group address transmitted in Candidate RP Advertisements 3 Use Group Mask to specify the group address mask transmitted in Candidate RP Advertisements 4 Click ADD to add a new Candidate RP Address for the PIM SM router 5 Click DELETE to delete an extant Candidate RP Address for the PIM SM router Chapter 4 Routing 367 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administratio
203. Packets are sent to the neighbor every Hellolnterval seconds e Designated Router This router is itself the Designated Router on the attached network Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node The network LSA will contain links to all routers including the Designated Router itself attached to the network e Backup Designated Router This router is itself the Backup Designated Router on the attached network It will be promoted to Designated Router if the present Designated Router fails The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network The Backup Designated Router performs slightly different functions during the Flooding Procedure as compared to the Designated Router e Other Designated Router The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers have been selected to be the Designated Router and Backup Designated Router either The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the Designated Router and the Backup Designated Router Neighbor State The state of the Virtual Neighbor Relationship 294 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Route Redistribution This screen can be used to configure the OSPF Route Redistribution parameters The allowable values for each fields are displayed next to the field If any inval
204. Port Specify the destination layer 4 port match conditions for the selected extended IP ACL rule The possible values are DOMAIN ECHO FTP FTPDATA HTTP SMTP SNMP TELNET TFTP and WWW Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of the port range This is an optional configuration Service Type Select a Service Type match condition for the extended IP ACL rule from the pull down menu The possible values are IP DSCP IP precedence and IP TOS which are alternative ways of specifying a match criterion for the same Service 536 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Type field in the IP header however each uses a different user notation After a selection is made the appropriate value can be specified IP DSCP Specify the IP DiffServ Code Point DSCP field The DSCP is defined as the high order six bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header This is an optional configuration Enter an integer from 0 to 63 The IP DSCP is selected by possibly selection one of the DSCP keyword from a dropdown box If a value is to be selected by specifying its numeric value then select the Other option in the dropdown box and a text box will appear where the numeric value of the DSCP can be entered IP Precedence The IP Precedence field in a packet is defined as the high order three bits of the Serv
205. RP Address to specify the IP Address of the RP to be created or deleted Use Group Address to specify the Group Address of the RP to be created or deleted Use Group Mask to specify the Group Mask of the RP to be created or deleted Use Override to indicate that if there is a conflict the RP configured with this option prevails over the RP learned by BSR Click ADD to add a new static RP address for one or more multicast groups 6 Click DELETE to delete the RP address selected Pe NM 9 Chapter 4 Routing 369 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Static Routes Configuration To display the Static Routes Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt Static Routes Configuration GSM7352S over Meameget mat t 1 Use Source IP to enter the IP Address that identifies the multicast packet source for the entry you are creating 2 Use Source Mask to enter the subnet mask to be applied to the Source IP address 3 Use RPF Neighbor to enter the IP address of the neighbor router on the path to the source 4 Use Metric to enter the link state cost of the path to the multicast source The range is 0 255 and the default is one You can change the metric for a configured route by selecting the static route and editing this field 5 Use RPF Interface to select the interface number This is the interface that connects to the neighbor router for the given source IP address
206. Reason Configuration CP IP Address CP Configuration CP Binding Addtional HITE Port Corfiguration Additional HTTP Secure Past CP Binding Table Authentication Timeout CP Group Supported Captive Portals Com iguration Configured Captive Portals CP User Comfiguration CP Trap Flags CP Client Local Supported Users Active Captive Portals System Supported Users Autheat ated Users 1 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable Captive Portal feature By default the Captive Portal feature is disabled 2 Use Additional HTTP Port to configure an additional port for HTTP traffic HTTP traffic uses port 80 but you can configure an additional port for HTTP traffic Enter a port number between 0 65535 excluding port 80 Enter 0 to unconfigure the Additional HTTP Port Default is 0 3 Use Additional HTTP Secure Port to configure an additional port for HTTP Secure traffic HTTP Secure traffic uses port 443 Enter a port number between 0 65535 excluding port 443 Enter 0 to unconfigure the Additional HTTP Secure Port Default is 0 4 Use Authentication Timeout to specify the number of seconds to keep the authentication session open with the client To access the network through a portal the client must first enter authentication information on an authentication Web page When the time out expires the switch disconnects any active TCP or SSL connection with the client The valid range is 60 to 600 seconds Default Authentic
207. SAKMP UDP port 500 packets e mobile ip Relay Mobile IP UDP port 434 packets e nameserver Relay IEN 116 Name Service UDP port 42 packets e netbios dgm Relay NetBIOS Datagram Server UDP port 138 packets e netbios ns Relay NetBIOS Name Server UDP port 137 packets e ntp Relay network time protocol UDP port 123 packets pim auto rp Relay PIM auto RP UDP port 496 packets e rip Relay RIP UDP port 520 packets e tacacs Relay TACACS UDP port 49 packet Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 67 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual tftp Relay TFTP UDP port 69 packets e time Relay time service UDP port 37 packets e Other If this option is selected the UDP Port Other Value is enabled This option permits a user to enter their own UDP port in UDP Port Other Value 4 Use UDP Port Other Value to specify a UDP Destination Port that lies between 0 and 65535 5 Click ADD to create an entry in UDP Relay Table with the specified configuration 6 Click DELETE to remove all entries or a specified one from UDP Relay Table The following table describes the UDP Relay Global Configuration fields Table 2 23 Field Description OOOO O Hit Count Show the number of UDP packets hitting the UDP port 68 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual UDP Relay Interface
208. ST Configuration MST Port Status STP Statistics MST ID Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 155 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Spanning Tree Admin Mode to specify whether spanning tree operation is enabled on the switch Value is enabled or disabled 2 Use Force Protocol Version to specify the Force Protocol Version parameter for the switch The options are IEEE 802 1d IEEE 802 1w and IEEE 802 1s 3 Use Configuration Name to specify the identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used It may be up to 32 alphanumeric characters 4 Use Configuration Revision Level to specify the identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used The values allowed are between 0 and 65535 The default value is 0 5 Use Forward BPDU while STP Disabled to specify whether spanning tree BPDUs should be forwarded while spanning tree is disabled on the switch Value is enabled or disabled 6 Use BPDU Guard to specify whether the BPDU guard feature is enabled The STP BPDU guard allows a network administrator to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the active topology be consistent and predictable The switches behind the edge ports that have STP BPDU guard enabled will not be able to influence the overall STP topology At the reception of BPDUs the BPDU guard operation disables the port that is configured with this option and transitions the
209. Safe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual FAN Status The screen shows the status of the fans in all units These fans remove the heat generated by the power CPU and other chipsets make chipsets work normally Fan status has three possible values OK Failure Not Applicable NA FAN Status Unit ID I Fant Pwa ox Fan cPu ox Fan3 SYS ox Fans Fan3 The following table describes the Fan Status information Table 2 2 Field Description UNIT ID The unit identifier is assigned to the switch which the fan belongs to FAN The working status of the fan in each unit Click REFRESH to refresh the system information of the switch Temperature Status The screen shows the current temperature of the CPU and MACs The temperature is instant and can be refreshed when the REFRESH button is pressed The maximum temperature of CPU and MACs depends on the actual hardware Temperature Status The following table describes the Temperature Status information Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 23 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 2 3 Fes escrito O O The current temperature of the CPU in the switch The current temperature of the MACs in the switch Click REFRESH to refresh the system information of the switch Device Status The screen shows the software version of each device Device Status Unit
210. Sessions are enabled new outbound telnet sessions can be established until there are no more sessions available If Allow New Telnet Sessions are disabled no new outbound telnet sessions are established An established session remains active until the session is ended or an abnormal network error ends the session 1 2 Use Allow New Telnet Sessions to specify whether the new Outbound Telnet Session is Enabled or Disabled Default value is Enabled Use Maximum Number of Sessions to specify the maximum number of Outbound Telnet Sessions allowed Default value is 5 Valid Range is 0 to 5 Use Session Timeout to specify the Outbound Telnet login inactivity time out Default value is 5 Valid Range is 1 to 160 Current Number of Sessions Displays the number of current sessions Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 463 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Console Port To display the Console Port page click Security gt Access gt Console Port NETGEAR GSM7352S a te Console Port Console Port Sensi Port Logn Tmecut menetes Osud Rate bps Character Sine bite Flow Control Meg Bas Party tegi Authentu stion Lat tnabie Asthentu ation irst 1 Use Serial Port Login Timeout minutes to specify how many minutes of inactivity should occur on a serial port connection before the switch closes the connection Enter a number between 0 and 160 the factory
211. Software Administration Manual For each configured instance the information described in the following table displays on the page le 3 58 Field Description Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Time Since Topology Change Topology Change Count Topology Change Designated Root The time n seconds since the topology of the selected MST instance last changed Number of times topology has changed for the selected MST instance The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected MST instance It takes a value if True or False The bridge identifier of the root bridge It is made up from the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Root Path Cost Path Cost to the Designated Root for this MST instance Root Portldentifier Port to access the Designated Root for this MST instance 164 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MST Port Status Use the Spanning Tree MST Port Status page to configure and display Multiple Spanning Tree MST settings on a specific port on the switch To display the Spanning Tree MST Port Status page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt MST Port Configuratio
212. Status MEE Fani PWR ox Fan2 CPU ox on NA Fan3 5Y5 Fans Fan5 NA Temperature Status zc se sec WA wa twa WA WA Device Status CC CC Firmware 29 2 41 8 0 3 5 Versia 29 Net Present Operational WA wa erres 20 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The System Information provides various statuses Switch Status System Information Switch Status Product Name GSM73525 NetGear GSM7S525 48 GE 4 TENGIG System Name System Location System Contact Login Timeout IPv4 Network Interface IPvO Network Interface IPv4 Loopback Interface IPv6 Loopback Interface System Date JUN 30 21 57 34 2010 UTC 0 00 System Up Time O days 23 hours 59 mins 39 secs System SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4526 100 1 4 System MAC Address 00 09 08 07 06 05 Supported Java Plagin Version 1 6 To define system information 1 Open the System Information page 2 Define the following fields a System Name Enter the name you want to use to identify this switch You may use up to 255 alphanumeric characters The factory default is blank b System Location Enter the location of this switch You may use up to 255 alphanumeric characters The factory default is blank c System Contact Enter the contact person for this switch You may use up to 25 alphanumeric characters The factory default is blank d Login Tim
213. T port configuration information displayed on the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page Table 3 59 Field Description Auto Calculated Port Path Cost Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated Enabled or not Disabled Path cost will be calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for Port Path Cost is zero The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port Port Uptime Since Last Clear Counters Time since the counters were last cleared displayed in Days Hours Minutes and Seconds Port Mode Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the port or port channel The possible values are Enable or Disable Port Forwarding State The Forwarding State of this port Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree The port role will be one of the following values Root Port Designated Port Alternate Port Backup Port Master Port or Disabled Port Designated Root Root Bridge for the selected MST instance It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Designated Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge
214. TP Server 1 Enter the appropriate SNTP server information in the available fields e Server Type Specifies whether the address for the SNTP server is an IP address IPv4 or hostname DNS Default value is IPv4 e Address Specify the address of the SNTP server This is a text string of up to 64 characters containing the encoded unicast IP address or hostname of a SNTP server Unicast SNTP requests will be sent to this address If this address is a DNS hostname then that hostname should be resolved into an IP address each time a SNTP request is sent to it Port Enter a port number on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent The valid range is 1 65535 The default is 123 Priority Specify the priority of this server entry in determining the sequence of servers to which SNTP requests will be sent The client continues sending requests to different servers until a successful response is received or all servers are exhausted This object indicates the order in which to query the servers A server entry with a precedence of 1 will be queried before a server with a priority of 2 and so forth If more than one server has the same priority then the requesting order will follow the lexicographical ordering of the entries in this table Allowed range is 1 to 3 Default value is 1 e Version Enter the NTP version running on the server The range is 1 4 The default is 4 2 Click Add Chapter 2 Configuring System In
215. The maximum ethernet frame size the interface supports or is configured including ethernet header CRC and payload 1518 to 9216 The default maximum frame size is 1518 Total Packets Transmitted Successfully The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Multicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a Multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to the Broadcast address including those that were discarded or not sent Total Transmit Errors Tx FCS Errors Underrun Errors The sum of Single Multiple and Excessive Collisions The total number of packets transmitted that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets The total number of frames discarded because the transmit FIFO buffer became empty during frame transmission Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 555 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual
216. U utilization per task Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 29 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Slot Information Use this page to display slot information and supported cards To display the Slot Information page click System gt Management gt Slot Information A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525S ot ana serGes GEM 120F9 24 GE 4 TINGS Jadot Gemt Laver Mpawe Meraged Batt oor 115 Fe pots at on Gena Lover 3 Pionai Mareged batih oth I 153 Fe pete Jadot GE De Magri Stackable Pet Seth wh F LOGE SPF e porte OT GE Lle Managed Stackable Pal Sann ach 1068 SIPs pons Slot Summary This screen displays details of the different slots in the different units in the stack The following table displays Slot Summary information Table 2 7 Fig escrito O O Slot Identifies the slot using the format unit slot Status Displays whether the slot is empty or full Administrative State Displays whether the slot is administratively enabled or disabled Power State Displays whether the slot is powered on of off Card Model ID Displays the model ID of the card configured for the slot Card Description Displays the description of the card configured for the slot 30 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Supported Cards The following table disp
217. UDP port number the server uses to verify the RADIUS accounting server authentication The valid range is 0 65535 If the user has READONLY access the value is displayed but cannot be changed 4 From the Secret Configured menu select Yes to add a RADIUS secret in the next field You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret After you add the RADIUS accounting server this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server has been configured 5 In the Secret field type the shared secret to use with the specified accounting server 6 From the Accounting Mode menu enable or disable the RADIUS accounting mode 7 To delete a configured RADIUS Accounting server click Delete 438 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security The following table describes RADIUS accounting server statistics available on the page ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Click CLEAR COUNTERS to clear the accounting server statistics Table 6 84 Field Description Accounting Server Address Identifies the accounting server associated with the statistics Round Trip Time secs Displays the time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server Accounting Requests Displays the number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent not including retransmissions A
218. Use Adv NS Interval to specify the retransmission time field of router advertisement sent from the interface A value of 0 means interval is not specified for router Range of neighbor solicit interval is 1000 to 4294967295 9 Use Adv Reachable Time to specify the router advertisement time to consider neighbor reachable after ND confirmation Range of reachable time is 0 to 3600000 Chapter 4 Routing 235 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 10 Use Adv Interval to specify the maximum time allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface Default value is 600 Range of maximum advertisement interval is 4 to 1800 11 Use Adv Managed Config Flag to specify the router advertisement managed address configuration flag When true end nodes use DHCPV6 When false end nodes auto configure addresses Default value of managed flag is disable 12 Use Adv Other Config Flag To specify router advertisement for other Stateful configuration flag Default value of other config flag is disable 13 Use Adv Suppress Flag to specify router advertisement suppression on an interface Default value of suppress flag is disable 14 Use Destination Unreachables to specify the Mode of Sending ICMPv 6 Destination Unreachables on this interface If Disabled then this interface will not send ICMPv6 Destination Unreachables By default IPv6 Destination Unreachables mode is enable Table 14 F
219. VLAN Configuration VLAN IDs Enabled for IGMP Snooping Quener Configuration Querer VIAN Corgu avon gt MLD Snooping To configure IGMP Snooping 1 Use the Admin Mode Enable Disable radio button to select the administrative mode for IGMP Snooping for the switch The default is disable 2 Use the Unknown Multicast Filtering Enable Disable radio button to select the unknown multicast filtering mode for the switch The default is disable The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status and statistics on the page Table 3 63 Field Description Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU Interfaces Enabled for IGMP Snooping A list of all the interfaces currently enabled for IGMP Snooping Data Frames Forwarded by the CPU The number of data frames forwarded by the CPU VLAN Ids Enabled For IGMP Snooping Displays VLAN Ids enabled for IGMP snooping Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 173 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration Use the IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration page to configure IGMP snooping settings on specific interfaces To access the IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Interface Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 44 Por Gigabit Layer J Marx S
220. VMRP Global Configuration DVMRAP Ginbal Configeration Adorea Moda Verw total Mambor of Mantes nes tobis Routes Contiqguration 1 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of DVMPP to active or inactive The default is disable Table 53 Field Description Version The current value of the DVMRP version string Total Number of Routes The number of routes in the DVMRP routing table Reachable Routes The number of routes in the DVMRP routing table that have a non infinite metric 338 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DVMRP Interface Configuration To display the DVMRP Interface Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast DVMRP gt Interface Configuration GSM7352S ot Part Gigot lever Mheneged A a tD Gogebit tate aen OVMRP Interface Configuration DVMEP Intertace Configuration 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Interface Mode to set the administrative mode of the selected DVMRP routing interface 3 Use Interface Metric to enter the DVMRP metric for the selected interface This value is sent in DVMRP messages as the cost to reach this network Valid values are from 1 to 31 The default value is 1 4 Click REFRESH to show the latest DVMRP interface information Chapter 4 Routing 339 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Admi
221. Vendor assigned unique ID based on Enterprise Number 00 02 enterprise number identifier enterprise number 32 bit integer reserved by IANA identifier Variable length data for each vendor c Link layer address 00 03 hardware type link layer address hardware type 16 bit hardware type reserved by IANA 1 means an Ethernet device _ link layer address The link layer address of a device generating the DUID 4 Use Client Name to specify client s name This is useful for logging or tracing only It may be up to 31 alphanumeric characters Use Valid Lifetime to specify the valid lifetime in seconds for delegated prefix Use Prefer Lifetime to specify the prefer lifetime in seconds for delegated prefix Click ADD to add a new delegated prefix for the selected pool Click DELETE to delete the delegated prefix for the selected pool oN ol 74 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCPv 6 Interface Configuration To display the DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCPv6 Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525 Hash son Do rer ochabhe buini wt d 10 Cagy DHCPv6 Interface Configuration DHCP v6 Intertace Configuration 1 Use Interface to specify the interface configured for DHCPv6 server functionality 2 Use Admin Mode to spe
222. Virtual Events The number of state changes or errors that have occurred on this virtual link Neighbor Events External LSA Count Sent packets Received packets The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred The number of external LS type 5 link state advertisements in the link state database The number of OSPFv3 packets transmitted on the interface The number of valid OSPFv3 packets received on the interface Discards The number of received OSPFv3 packets discarded because of an error in the packet or an error in processing the packet Bad Version Virtual Link Not Found The number of received OSPFv3 packets whose version field in the OSPFv3 header does not match the version of the OSPFv3 process handling the packet The number of received OSPFv3 packets discarded where the ingress interface is in a non backbone area and the OSPFv3 header identifies the packet as belonging to the backbone but OSPFv3 does not have a virtual link to the packet s sender 314 Chapter 4 Routing Table 42 Field ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Description Area Mismatch The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the area ID in the OSPFv3 header is not the area ID configured on the ingress interface Invalid Destination Address No Neighbor at Source Address Invalid OSPF Packet Type Hellos
223. a valid Router ID The ID of an OSPF v3 area to which one of the router interfaces is connected An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which an interface is connected 318 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 44 Field Description LSA Type LS ID Age Sequence Checksum The format and function of the link state advertisement One of the following e Router LSA A router may originate one or more router Isas for a given area Each router lsa originated in an area describes the collected states of all the router s interfaces to the area e Network LSA A network Isa is originated for every link having two or more attached routers by the designated router It lists all the routers attached to the link e Inter Area Router LSA This type describes a prefix external to the area yet internal to the autonomous system It is originated by an Area Border Router e AS External LSA This LSA type describes a path to a prefix external to the autonomous system and is originated by an Autonomous System Border Router e Link LSA A router originates a separate Link lsa for each attached link It provides router s link local address to routers attached to the link and also inform them of a list of IPv6 prefixes to associate with the link e Intra Area Prefix LSA A link s designated
224. abit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Learned Routes Table 4 Field Description Route Type This field can be either default or static If creating a default route all that needs to be specified is the next hop IP address otherwise each field needs to be specified Network Address The IP route prefix for the destination Subnet Mask Protocol Next Hop IP Address Also referred to as the subnet network mask this indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network This field tells which protocol created the specified route The possibilities are one of the following Local Static OSPF RIP The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router if any in the path towards the destination The next router will always be one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network Next Hop Interface Preference The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the destination Administrative cost of the path to the destination If no value is entered default is 1 The range is 0 255 The preference is an integer value from 0 to 255 The user can specify the preference value sometimes called administrative distance of an individual static route Among routes to the same destination the route with the lowest preference value is the route
225. abit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 6 104 Field Description VLAN The enabled VLAN ID for which statistics to be displayed DHCP Drops Number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as there is no matching DHCP Snooping binding entry found DHCP Permits Number of ARP packets that were forwarded by DAI as there is a matching DHCP Snooping binding entry found ACL Drops Number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as there is no matching ARP ACL rule found for this VLAN and the static flag is set on this VLAN ACL Permits Number of ARP packets that were permitted by DAI as there is a matching ARP ACL rule found for this VLAN Bad Source MAC Number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as the sender MAC address in ARP packet didn t match the source MAC in ethernet header Bad Dest MAC Number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as the target MAC address in ARP reply packet didn t match the destination MAC in ethernet header Invalid IP Number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as the sender IP address in ARP packet or target IP address in ARP reply packet is invalid Invalid addresses include 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP multicast addresses class E addresses 240 0 0 0 4 loopback addresses 127 0 0 0 8 Forwarded Number of valid ARP packets forwarded by DAI Dropped Number of invalid ARP packets dropped by DAI Click CLEAR to clear the DAI statistics
226. able 8 Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Field Description IcmpInErrors The number of ICMP messages which the entity received but determined as having ICMP cde errors bad ICMP checksums bad length etc IcmpInDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received IcmpInTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received IcmpInParmProbs The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received IcmpInSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received IcmpInRedirects IcmpInEchos IcmpInEchoReps IcmpInTimestamps The number of ICMP Redirect messages received The number of ICMP Echo request messages received The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received The number of ICMP Timestamp request messages received IcmpInTimestampReps The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received IcmpInAddrMasks The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received IcmpInAddrMaskReps IcmpOutMsgs IcmpOutErrors IcmpOutDestUnreachs IcmpOutTimeExcds The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received The total number of ICMP messages which this entity attempted to send Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages which this entity did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers This value should not include errors
227. able License Key allows user to configure functionality The following table describes the License Key fields Table 2 15 Field Description License date The date the license is purchased License copy The information about the number of license License Status Show whether License is Active Inactive Inactive means that user should download a license file and reboot a system Description Show status of License Key License Features To display the License Features page click System gt License gt License Features A screen similar to the following displays GSM7352S 45 Port Gigabit Loyer Managed Stackable Switch with 4 1O Gigabit Sors License Features License Features Table 2 16 Feature Deserptn o Displays list of features that require licensing Services From the Services link you can access the following pages e DHCP Server on page 51 50 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Relay on page 62 DHCP L2 Relay on page 64 UDP Relay on page 67 DHCPV6 Server on page 71 DHCPV6 Relay on page 79 DHCP Server From the DHCP Server link you can access the following pages DHCP Server Configuration on page 52 DHCP Pool Configuration on page 54 DHCP Pool Options on page 57 DHCP Server Statistics on page 58 DHCP Bindings Information on page 60 DHCP Conflicts Information on
228. able Switches Software Administration Manual 1 List Name If you are creating a new enable list enter the name you want to assign It can be up to 15 alphanumeric characters long and is not case sensitive 2 Use the dropdown menu to select the method that should appear first in the selected authentication login list If you select a method that does not time out as the first method such as local no other method will be tried even if you have specified more than one method The options are e Radius The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally e Line The line password will be used for authentication Enable The privileged EXEC password will be used for authentication e Tacacs The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the TACACS server e None The user will not be authenticated 3 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear second in the selected authentication login list This is the method that will be used if the first method times out If you select a method that does not time out as the second method the third method will not be tried Note that this parameter will not appear when you first create a new login list 4 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear third in the selected authentication login list 5 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear forth in the
229. abled No servers configured SNMP Enabled SNMPv1 SNMPv2 SNMPv3 SNMP Traps Enabled Auto Install Enabled Appendix A Default Settings 604 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 9 Default Settings Continued Feature Default Auto Save Disabled Stacking Enabled sFlow Enabled ISDP Enabled Versions 1 and 2 RMON Enabled TACACS Not configured RADIUS Not configured SSH SSL Disabled Telnet Enabled Denial of Service Protection Disabled Captive Portal Disabled Dot1x Authentication Disabled IEEE 802 1X MAC Based Port Security Access Control Lists ACL IP Source Guard IPSG DHCP Snooping Dynamic ARP Inspection Protected Ports Private Groups PoE Plus GSM7228PS and GSM7252PS Flow Control Support IEEE 802 3x Head of Line Blocking Prevention Maximum Frame Size Auto MDI MDIX Support Auto Negotiation Advertised Port Speed Broadcast Storm Control Port Mirroring All ports are unlocked None configured Disabled Disabled Disabled None None Enabled Enabled Disabled 1518 bytes Enabled Enabled Maximum Capacity Enabled Disabled Appendix A Default Settings 605 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 9 Default Settings Continued Feature LLDP LLDP MED MAC Table Address Aging DHCP Layer 2 Relay Default VLAN ID Default VLAN Name GVRP GARP Timers Voice VLAN
230. access privileges may change the data on this screen To access the MLD Snooping Querier Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Querier Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S so eee eae les meo MLD Snooping Querier Configuration MLD Snooping Querier Configuration Querer Adae Mode Querer Address MLD Version Query Interval seca Querer Expiry Interval secs VLAN Ids Enabled for MLD Snooping Querier 1 Use Querier Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for MLD Snooping for the switch The default is disable 2 Use Querier Address to specify the Snooping Querier Address to be used as source address in periodic MLD queries This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which query is being sent The supported IPv6 formats are x x x x x x x x and xx 3 Use MLD Version to specify the MLD protocol version used in periodic MLD queries MLD queries 4 Use Query Interval secs to specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries sent by the snooping querier The Query Interval must be a value in the range of 1 and 1800 The default value is 60 5 Use Querier Expiry Interval secs to specify the time interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed The Querier Expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 and 300 The default value is 60 Table 3 67 Fea Description O O VLAN Ids Enabled For MLD Snooping Querier Displays VL
231. ace mode Use Version to enter the version of IGMP you want to configure on the selected interface Valid values are 1 to 3 and the default value is 3 This field is configurable only when IGMP Proxy interface mode is enabled Use Unsolicited Report Interval to enter the unsolicited time interval value in seconds The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group Valid values are from 1 to 260 The default value is 1 354 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 62 Field Description IP Address The IP address of the IGMP Proxy interface Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the IP address of the IGMP Operational Mode Proxy interface The operational state of IGMP Proxy interface Number of Groups The current number of multicast group entries for the IGMP Proxy interface in the cache table Version 1 Querier Timeout Version 2 Querier Timeout Proxy Start Frequency The older IGMP version 1 querier timeout value in seconds The Older Version Querier Interval is the time out for transitioning a host back to IGMPv3 mode once an older version query is heard When an older version query is received hosts set their Older Version Querier Present Timer to Older Version Querier Interval The older IGMP version 2 querier timeout value in seconds The number of times the pr
232. ace table entry associated with this port on an adapter Total Packets Received Without Errors Packets Received With Error Broadcast Packets Received Packets Transmitted Without Errors The total number of packets received that were without errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment Transmit Packet Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Collision Frames Time Since Counters Last Cleared The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The elapsed time in days hours minutes and seconds since the statistics for this port were last cleared 548 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Port Detailed Statistics The Port Detailed Statistics page displays a variety of per port traffic statistics To access the Port Detailed page click Monitoring gt Ports gt Port Detailed Statistics Following two figures show some but not all of the fields on the Port Detailed Statistics page Port Detailed Statistics Port Detailed Statistics Interface v
233. acteristics manufacturer software and hardware versions serial asset number LLDP From the LLDP link you can access the following pages e LLDP Global Configuration on page 104 e LLDP Interface Configuration on page 105 e LLDP Statistics on page 106 e LLDP Local Device Information on page 108 e LLDP Remote Device Information on page 110 e LLDP Remote Device Inventory on page 112 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 103 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LLDP Global Configuration Use the LLDP Global Configuration page to specify LLDP parameters that are applied to the switch To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP gt Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S 4B Port Gigebit Loyer 3 Managed Sochable twitch with 4 10Gigobit Slots He dex tocour LLDP Global Configuration Global Configuration Tranamit Interval Trmescut Hoki Multipor Ke iaitaicatios Deley Nathu stern Interval To configure global LLDP settings i 2 gl gt Use Transmit Interval to specify the interval in seconds to transmit LLDP frames The range is from 5 to 32768 secs Default value is 30 seconds Use Transmit Hold Multiplier to specify the multiplier on Transmit Interval to assign TTL The range is from 2 to 10 secs Default value is 4 Use Re Initialization Delay to specify the delay before re initializati
234. activated for the switch The default value is enable You must configure a Router ID before OSPF v3 can become operational This can also be done by issuing the CLI command router id in the IPv6 router OSPF mode Note Once OSPFvs3 is initialized on the router it will remain initialized until the router is reset 3 Use Exit Overflow Interval to enter the number of seconds that after entering overflow state the router should wait before attempting to leave overflow state This allows the router to again originate non default AS external LSAs If you enter 0 the router will not leave Overflow State until restarted The range is 0 to 2147483647 seconds 4 Use External LSDB Limit to specify the maximum number of AS External LSAs that can be stored in the database A value of 1 implies there is no limit on the number that can be saved The valid range of values is 1 to 2147483647 5 Use Default Metric to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes This field displays the default metric if one has already been set or blank if not configured earlier The valid values are 1 to 16777214 6 Use Maximum Paths to configure the maximum number of paths that OSPFv3 can report to a given destination The valid values are 1 to 4 7 Use AutoCost Reference Bandwidth to configure the auto cost reference bandwidth to control how OSPF calculates default metrics for the interface The valid values are 1 to 4294967 8 Use Default Passive Set
235. address 1 From the IP ACL screen create a new IP ACL with an IP ACL ID of 1 See IP ACL on page 6 531 2 From the IP Rules screen create a rule for IP ACL 1 with the following settings e Rule ID 1 e Action Deny e Assign Queue ID 0 optional 0 is the default value e Match Every False e Source IP Address 192 168 187 0 e Source IP Mask 255 255 255 0 For additional information about IP ACL rules see IP Rules on page 6 533 3 Click Add 4 From the IP Rules screen create a second rule for IP ACL 1 with the following settings e Rule ID 2 e Action Permit e Match Every True 5 Click Add 6 From the IP Binding Configuration page assign ACL ID 1 to the interface gigabit ports 2 3 and 4 and assign a sequence number of 1 See IP Binding Configuration on page 6 542 By default this IP ACL is bound on the inbound direction so it examines traffic as it enters the switch 7 Click Apply 8 Use the IP Binding Table screen to view the interfaces and IP ACL binding information See IP Binding Table on page 6 544 The IP ACL in this example matches all packets with the source IP address and subnet mask of the Finance department s network and deny it on the Ethernet interfaces 2 3 and 4 of the switch The second rule permits all non Finance traffic on the ports The second rule is required because there is an explicit deny all rule as the lowest priority rule 612 Appendix B Configura
236. address range will be advertised outside the area via a Network Summary LSA The default is Enable 5 Click ADD to add the new address range to the switch 6 Click DELETE to remove the specified address range from the area configuration 308 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Interface Configuration Use the OSPF v3 Interface Configuration page to create and configure OSPFv3 interfaces To display the Interface Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Interface Configuration OSPI v3 interlace Conlaperatsan HERE Hii iii Pinte PIPER EERE EEL EEE PET EGEUELETE i PERN verf abide f i 7 E T f FHI H i A i i i m f z H aane Deste Deote r eee iworo iem ea Testas Teora Dee rd se eee Deere ee oo Sa ee eee tessa aata estro ose Pease za Destre io Dee ee Toetse osve rooted aswe estie meeta saia eee 1 Interface The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured 2 Use Area ID to enter the 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area to which the selected router interface connects If you assign an Area ID which does not exist the area will be created with default values 3 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable The default value is disable You can configure OSPFv3 parameters without enabling OSP
237. age The active image is loaded during subsequent switch restarts This feature reduces switch down time when upgrading or downgrading the ProSafe Managed Switches software The File Management menu contains links to the following options 592 Chapter8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Copy on page 593 e Dual Image Configuration on page 594 Copy To display the Copy page click Maintenance gt File Management gt Copy NETGEAR GSM73525S wet eth 48 Port Gigabit Layer J Managed Stackable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Sior socour Maintenance Help Index Copy Copy gt Dual Image Configuration Copy Source Image Stack Member Destination Image 1 Use Source Image to select the image1 or image2 as source image when copy occurs 2 Use Stack member to select the destination unit to which you are going to copy from master 3 Use Destination Image to select the image1 or image2 as destination image when copy occurs Chapter 8 Maintenance 593 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Dual Image Configuration The Dual Image feature allows switch to retain two images in permanent storage The user designates one of these images as the active image to be loaded during subsequent switch restarts This feature reduces switch down time when upgrading downgrading the image To display the Dual Image C
238. aged Srockoble wisch with 4 10 Gigabit Hots Lsocour Save Auto Install Configuration Configuration Auto Install Configuration v Auto Instali Configuration Avtetastall Mode AutoSave Mode Retry Couet 1 Use Auto Install to enable disable start stop auto install mode on the switch 2 Select the Auto Save check box and click the APPLY button to have configuration changes you have made saved across a system reboot All changes submitted since the previous save or system reboot will be retained by the switch 3 Use Auto Install Retry Count to specify the number of times the unicast TFTP tries should be made for the DHCP specified file before falling back for broadcast TFTP tries Reset The Reset menu contains links to the following options e Device Reboot on page 580 e Factory Default on page 582 e Password Reset on page 583 Device Reboot Use the Device Reboot page to reboot ProSafe Managed Switches To access the Device Reboot page click Maintenance gt Reset gt Device Reboot 580 Chapter 8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NETGEAR GSM7352S pact with y 48 Port Gigabit Layer Managed i 2 Srochoble deich with 4 10 Gigabit Hore Help Index rogov Device Reboot Device Reboot gt Factory Default Device Reboot gt Password Reset Reboot Unit Ne Seve prior to reboot Don t seve prior to reboot To reboot the switch
239. ages e PIM DM Global Configuration on page 359 e PIM DM Interface Configuration on page 360 e PIM DM Neighbor on page 361 PIM DM Global Configuration To display the PIM DM Global Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast PIM DM gt Global Configuration GSM7352S at Det Gaguh gt iopo Managed 9 gett kon fereute fable PIM DM Global Configuration Gadel Canfari PIM DM Globe Configuration 1 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM DM in the router The default is disable Chapter 4 Routing 359 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM DM Interface Configuration To display the PIM DM Interface Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast PIM DM gt Interface Configuration GSM7352S jigs iopo Managed PIM DM Interface Configuration PIM DM Interface Cantigeration So ta interfere 1 Interface The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured You must have configured at least one router interface before configuring or displaying data for a PIM DM interface 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM DM for the selected interface The default is disable 3 Use Hello Interval to enter the number of seconds between PIM hello messages transmitted from the selected interface The default value is 30 Valid values are from 10 to 3600 Table 65 Field Description The operational state of the PIM
240. al Group REC 3419 TRANSPORT ADORESS MIS Textual Conventions for Transport Addresses Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 99 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the SNMP Supported MIBs Status fields Table 2 33 Fig escrito O O Name The RFC number if applicable and the name of the MIB Description The RFC title or MIB description 100 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual SNMP V3 This is the configuration for SNMP v3 From the SNMP V3 link you can access the following pages e User Configuration on page 101 User Configuration To access this page click System gt SNMP gt SNMP V3 gt User Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM7352S Srochabie somh beh 4 TE Oipebn Son Help adex tocour gt SNMP vi v2 User Configuration SNMP V3 Veer Corfigeraton Weer Mame User Names User Configuration SNMP v3 Access Mode Autheatication Protocol Encryption Protocol Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 101 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure SNMPv3 settings for the user account 1 Use User Name to specify the user account to be configured 2 SNMP v3 Access Mode Indicates the SNMPv3 access privileges for the user account T
241. al new or changed password for the account It will not display as it is typed only asterisks will show Passwords are up to eight alpha numeric characters in length and are case sensitive Use Confirm Password to enter the password again to confirm that you entered it correctly This field will not display but will show asterisks Access Mode indicates the user s access mode The admin account always has Read Write access and all other accounts have Read Only access Click ADD to add a user account with Read Only access Click DELETE to delete the currently selected user account This button is only visible when you have selected a user account with Read Only access You cannot delete the Read Write user Table 6 80 Field Description Lockout Status Indicates whether the user account is locked out TRUE or FALSE Password Expiration Date Indicates the current password expiration date in date format Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 429 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual User Password Configuration To display the User Password Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt Local User gt User Password Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 40 Tor Gigabit Loye 3 Moneged Srochable Switch with 4 1 gt Gigabit Slots LocouT toed inir Password Configuration User Mansgemert Pas j Configurat
242. allows logging to any serial device attached to the host To access the Console Log Configuration page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Console Log Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pert Gigabit Lever 2 managed Stockable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Slots index tocour gt Buffered Logs Console Log Configuration Command Log Console Log Configuration Configuration Admon States Seventy titer Confeguration gt Trap Logs gt Event Logs gt Persistent Logs 1 A log that is Disabled shall not log messages A log that is Enabled shall log messages Enable or Disable logging by selecting the corresponding radio button 2 Severity Filter A log records messages equal to or above a configured severity threshold Select the severity option by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field These severity levels have been enumerated below Emergency 0 system is unusable Alert 1 action must be taken immediately Critical 2 critical conditions Error 3 error conditions Warning 4 warning conditions Notice 5 normal but significant conditions Informational 6 informational messages Debug 7 debug level messages 564 Chapter7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual SysLog Configuration To access the SysLog Configuration page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Sys Log Configuration Syslog Configuratio
243. ally by the device This field cannot be set if a Redirect Interface is already configured for the ACL rule This field is visible for a Permit Action e Redirect Interface Specifies the specific egress interface where the matching traffic stream is forced bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the device This field cannot be set if a Mirror Interface is already configured for the ACL rule This field is visible for a Permit Action e Source IP Address Requires a packet s source IP address to match the address listed here Type an IP Address in the appropriate field using dotted decimal notation The address you enter is compared to a packet s source IP Address e Source IP Mask Specify the IP Mask in dotted decimal notation to be used with the Source IP Address value 2 To delete an IP ACL rule select the check box associated with the rule and then click Delete 3 To update an IP ACL rule select the check box associated with the rule update the desired fields and then click Apply You cannot modify the Rule ID of an existing IP rule 4 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 If you change any of the settings on the page click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 534 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Swit
244. als To display the Captive Portal Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Configuration Shown in two figures below Captive Portal Conliguration Capire Parim ontiguer etme GSM73525 ot Pert Gaga eaneyed 1 Use the CP ID pull down menu to select the CP ID for which to create or update 2 Use CP Name to enter the name of the configuration Name can contain 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters 3 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable this CP instance 4 Use Protocol to choose whether to use HTTP or HTTPs as the protocol for the portal to use during the verification process HTTP Does not use encryption during verification e HTTPS Uses the Secure Sockets Layer SSL which requires a certificate to provide encryption The certificate is presented to the user at connection time Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 515 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Use Verification to select the mode for the CP to use to verify clients e Guest The user does not need to be authenticated by a database e Local The switch uses a local database to authenticated users e RADIUS The switch uses a database on a remote RADIUS server to authenticate users Use Block to control the blocked status If the CP is blocked users cannot gain access to the network through the CP
245. anaged Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 80 Field Description IPv6 Prefix The IPv6 address of the MLD Proxy interface Prefix Length Operational Mode The prefix length for the IPv6 address of the MLD Proxy interface The operational state of MLD Proxy interface Number of Groups The current number of multicast group entries for the MLD Proxy interface in the cache table Version 1 Querier Timeout Proxy Start Frequency The older MLD version 1 querier timeout value in seconds The Older Version Querier Interval is the time out for transitioning a host back to MLDv2 mode once an older version query is heard When an older version query is received hosts set their Older Version Querier Present Timer to Older Version Querier Interval The number of times the proxy was brought up Chapter 4 Routing 393 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD Proxy Interface Statistics To display the MLD Proxy Interface Statistics page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast MLD gt Proxy Interface Statistics GSM7352S 0 Sere Gigub isyu 2 Managed MLD Proxy Interface Statistics MLD Proxy Intertoce Statistics Table 81 Field Description O SOS Proxy Interface Displays the interface on which MLD Proxy packets received Version The version of MLD Proxy packets received Queries Received The number of MLD Proxy qu
246. andard From the VLAN link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 152 e Advanced on page 155 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e STP Configuration on page 153 152 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual STP Configuration The Spanning Tree Configuration Status page contains fields for enabling STP on the switch To display the Spanning Tree Configuration Status page click Switching gt STP gt Basic gt STP Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S rst 8 Port Gigeb Layer 3 Mesened Sractable Swinh wah 4 10 Gegabit Sion socour STP Configuration STP Configuration Speen Tree Adese Mode Forse Protocol Version IEEE 802 14 O HEEE t02 ta IEEE 202 1 00 06 08 07 06 05 Forward BOOY while STP Oinabled Oradea Enade POU Coord Owabie O Enable ARDOU Fiter Dssbie Enable Configuration Ongest Key Ouacd61 PSOISSed4ESISI GSadIEdes2 STP Status MST ID vip FID Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 153 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Spanning Tree Admin Mode to specify whether spanning tree operation is enabled on the switch Value is enabled or disabled 2 Use Force Protocol Version to specify the Force Protocol Version parameter for the switch The options are IEEE 802 1d IEEE 802 1w and IEEE 802 1s
247. anslator State The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers Translator State Enabled means that the NSSA router OSPFv3 Area NssA Translator Role has been set to always Translator State of Elected means a candidate NSSA Border router is translating type 7 LSAs into type 5 Disabled implies that a candidate NSSA Border router is NOT translating type 7 LSAs into type 5 Chapter 4 Routing 307 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Area Range Configuration Use the Area Range Configuration page to configure OSPFv3 area ranges To display the Area Range Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Area Range Configuration GSM73525 Stok Som 1 Oye Boy Pevcbable bet o 1 Use Area ID to specify the area for which data is to be configured 2 Use IPv6 Prefix to enter the IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length for the address range for the selected area 3 Use LSDB Type to select the type of Link Advertisement associated with the specified area and address range The default type is Network Summary 4 Use Advertise to select Enable or Disable If you select Enable the
248. aoOE 5 Wh 324 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Interface to select the router interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Advertise Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable Router Advertisements will be transmitted from the selected interface 3 Use Advertise Address to enter the IP Address to be used to advertise the router 4 Use Maximum Advertise Interval to enter the maximum time in seconds allowed between router advertisements sent from the interface 5 Use Minimum Advertise Interval to enter the minimum time in seconds allowed between router advertisements sent from the interface 6 Use Advertise Lifetime to enter the value in seconds to be used as the lifetime field in router advertisements sent from the interface This is the maximum length of time that the advertised addresses are to be considered as valid router addresses by hosts 7 Use Preference Level to specify the preference level of the router as a default router relative to other routers on the same subnet Higher numbered addresses are preferred You must enter an integer VRRP The Virtual Router Redundancy protocol is designed to handle default router failures by providing a scheme to dynamically elect a backup router The driving force was to minimize black hole periods due to the failure of the default gateway router during which all traff
249. apter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e Stack Configuration on page 80 e Stack Port Configuration on page 85 e Stack Port Diagnostics on page 86 Stack Configuration This page moves the Primary Management Unit functionality from one unit to another Upon execution the entire stack including all interfaces in the stack is unconfiugred and reconfigured with the configuration on the new Primary Management Unit After the reload is complete all stack management capability must be performed on the new Primary Management Unit To preserve the current configuration across a stack move please save the current configuration to the nvram before performing the stack move A stack move causes all routes and layer 2 addresses to be lost The administrator is prompted to confirm the management move To display the Stack Configuration page click System gt Stacking gt Advanced gt Stack Configuration A screen similar to the following displays 1 Use Management Unit Selected to select the unit to be managed unit and click APPLY to move the management to the selected unit 2 Unit ID Displays the list of units of the stack Details of the selected unit are displayed There is also an ADD option visible only to Admin users which can be used to pre configure new members of the stack 3 Use
250. ar when you first create a new login list 4 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear third in the selected authentication login list 5 Use the dropdown menu to select the method if any that should appear forth in the selected authentication login list Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 449 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Login Sessions To display the Login Sessions page click Security gt Management Security gt Login Sessions NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pers Gigabit beret 2 Managed Stackable Switch with 4 19 Gigabit Slots tocour gt Local User Login Sessions Enable Password gt Line Password RADIUS TACACS Authentecation List Login Sessions Login Sessions Table 6 85 Field eserpton Cd Shows the user name of user made the session Connection From Shows the user is connected from which machine Idle Time Shows the idle session time Shows the total session time Session Type Shows the type of session telnet serial or SSH Configuring Management Access From the Access page you can configure HTTP and Secure HTTP access to the ProSafe Managed Switches management interface The Security gt Access tab contains the following folders e HTTP on page 451 e HTTPS Configuration on page 453 e SSH on page 458 e Telnet on page 462 e Console Port on page 464 e Denial of Servi
251. arding traffic to the next router if any in the path towards the destination The next router will always be one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network Preference displays an integer value from 1 to 255 The user can specify the preference value sometimes called administrative distance of an individual static route Among routes to the same destination the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database By specifying the preference of a static route the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination Use Identifier to specify the description of this route that identifies the route Click ADD to add a new static route entry to the switch Click DELETE to delete a existing static route entry from the switch 210 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Learned Routes Table 5 Field Description Route Type This field can be either default or static If creating a default route all that needs to be specified is the next hop IP address otherwise each field needs to be specified Network Address The IP route prefix for the destination Subnet Mask Also referred to as
252. ards traffic only to the ports that request the multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance A traditional Ethernet network may be separated into different network segments to prevent placing too many devices onto the same shared media Bridges and switches connect these segments When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received the switch will forward a copy into each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the IEEE MAC Bridge standard Eventually the packet is made accessible to all nodes connected to the network This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be seen or processed by all connected nodes In the case of multicast packets however this approach could lead to less efficient use of network bandwidth particularly when the packet is intended for only a small number of nodes Packets will be flooded into network segments where no node has any interest in receiving the packet While nodes will rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets addressed to unrequested group addresses they are unable to transmit new packets onto the shared media for the period of time that the multicast packet is flooded The problem of wasting bandwidth is even worse when the LAN segment is not shared for example in full duplex links Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets is a creative effort to solve t
253. at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments Datagrams Failed To Reassemble The number of failures detected by the IPv6 reassembly algorithm for whatever reason timed out errors etc Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms notably the algorithm in RFC 815 can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments Datagrams Forwarded The number of output datagrams which this entity received and forwarded to their final destinations In entities which do not act as IPv6 routers this counter will include only those packets which were Source Routed via this entity and the Source Route processing was successful Note that for a successfully forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented Datagrams Locally Transmitted The number of datagrams which this entity has successfully transmitted from this output interface The number of datagrams which this entity failed to transmit successfully Datagrams Transmit Failed Datagrams Successfully Fragmented The number of IPv6 datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this output interface Datagrams Failed To Fragment The num
254. ate Admin Mode LACP Mode The Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the port or Port Channel The possible values are e Enable Spanning tree is enabled for this port e Disable Spanning tree is disabled for this port The port s current state Spanning Tree state This state controls what action a port takes on receipt of a frame If the bridge detects a malfunctioning port it will place that port into the broken state The other five states are defined in IEEE 802 1D e Disabled e Blocking e Listening e Learning e Forwarding e Broken The Port control administration state The port must be enabled in order for it to be allowed into the network The factory default is enabled Indicates the Link Aggregation Control Protocol administration state The mode must be enabled in order for the port to participate in Link Aggregation Chapter 7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 7 112 Field Description Physical Mode Physical Status Indicates The port speed and duplex mode In auto negotiation mode the duplex mode and speed are set from the auto negotiation process Indicates the port speed and duplex mode Link Status Indicates whether the Link is up or down Link Trap Packets RX and TX 64 Octets Packets RX and TX 65 127 Octets Packets RX and TX 128 255 Octets Packets RX and
255. ated statically Dynamic VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been created by GVRP registration VLAN Deletes The number of VLANs on this switch that have been created and then deleted since the last reboot Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time in days hours minutes and seconds since the statistics for this switch were last cleared Click CLEAR to clear all the counters resetting all switch summary and detailed statistics to default values The discarded packets count cannot be cleared 28 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual System Resource Use this page to display the system resources To display the System Resource page click System gt Management gt System Resource A screen similar to the following displays G5M73525 eim System CPU States CPU Memeory Satin ketai Byrne moemary troent me CU Aa atian Memory Utiilisstion Rep CPU Memory Status The following table describes CPU Memory Status information Table 2 6 Field Description Total System Memory The total memory of the switch in KBytes Available Memory The available memory space for the switch in KBytes CPU Utilization Information This page displays the CPU Utilization information which contains the memory information task related information and percentage of CP
256. ates sent containing new information Click REFRESH to show the latest RIP information 264 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Route Redistribution Use the RIP Route Redistribution page to configure which routes are redistributed to other routers using RIP The allowable values for each fields are displayed next to the field If any invalid values are entered an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values To display the Route Redistribution page click Routing gt RIP gt Advanced gt Route Redistribution RIP Route Redistribution Configuration This screen can be used to configure the RIP Route Redistribution parameters The allowable values for each fields are displayed next to the field If any invalid values are entered an alert message will be displayed with the list of all the valid values 1 The Source select box is a dynamic selector and is populated by only those Source Routes that have already been configured for redistribute by RIP Use Source to configure another Source Route from among the Available Source Routes The valid values are e Static e Connected e OSPF 2 Use Redistribute Mode to enable or disable RIP redistribute mode The default value is disable 3 Use Metric to specify the Metric of redistributed routes for the given Source Route 4 Use Distribute List to set the Access List that filters the rout
257. ath known to the protocol independent of any other protocol The best route to a destination is chosen by selecting the route with the lowest preference value When there are multiple routes to a destination the preference values are used to determine the preferred route If there is still a tie the route with the best route metric will be chosen To avoid problems with mismatched metrics you must configure different preference values for each of the protocols To display the IPv6 Route Preferences page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Route Preferences GSM7352S8 A tere Gigab Leger 3 Managed IPv6 Route Preferences Pvt Roste Preferemces DRPPN Coteweat 1 Use Static to specify the Static Route preference value for the router The default value is 1 The range is 1 to 255 2 Use OSPFv3 Intra to specify the OSPFv3 intra route preference value in the router The default value is 110 The range is 1 to 255 3 Use OSPFv3 Inter to specify the OSPFv3 inter route preference value in the router The default value is 110 The range is 1 to 255 4 Use OSPFv3 External to specify the OSPFv3 External route preference value in the router The default value is 110 The range is 1 to 255 Table 20 Field Description Local Local preference 248 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Tunnel Configuration ProSafe Managed Switches software prov
258. ation Manual If you click the graphic but do not click a specific port the main menu appears This menu contains the same option as the navigation tabs at the top of the page GSM73525S ab Pert Gagahi Laver managed Diekie Semt wth 4 1D Gngabir Dare Help Page Access Every page contains a link to the online help fa which contains information to assist in configuring and managing the switch The online help pages are context sensitive For example if the IP Addressing page is open the help topic for that page displays if you click Help 16 Chapter1 Getting Started ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual User Defined Fields User defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters unless otherwise noted on the configuration Web page All characters may be used except for the following unless specifically noted in for that feature Table 2 lt gt f Using SNMP The ProSafe Managed Switches software supports the configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage traps that the SNMP agent generates ProSafe Managed Switches use both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private MIBs that support additional switch functionality All private MIBs begin with a prefix The main object for interface configuration is in SWITCHING MIB which is a private MIB Some interface configurations also involve objects in the public MIB IF MIB SN
259. ation Timeout is 300 seconds Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 513 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 6 105 Fig Deseipion O O Operational Status Shows whether the CP feature is Enabled or Disabled Default is Disabled Disabled Reason If CP is disabled this field displays the reason which can be one of the following Administrator Disabled IP Address Not Configured No IP Routing Interface Routing Disabled CP IP Address Shows the captive portal IP address Supported Captive Portals Shows the number of supported captive portals in the system Configured Captive Portals Shows the number of captive portals configured on the switch Active Captive Portals Shows the number of captive portal instances that are operationally enabled System Supported Users Shows the number of authenticated users that the system can support Local Supported Users Shows the number of entries that the Local User database supports Authenticated Users Shows the number of users currently authenticated to all captive portal instances on this switch 514 Chapter6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Captive Portal Configuration By default the switch has one captive portal You can change the settings for that captive portal and you can also create and configure up to nine additional port
260. ay be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common non backbone area 2 Use Neighbor Router ID to enter the neighbor portion of a Virtual Link specification Virtual links may be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common non backbone area 3 Use Hello Interval to enter the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface in seconds This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network Valid values range from 1 to 65 535 The default is 10 seconds 4 Use Dead Interval to enter the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network This value should a multiple of the Hello Interval e g 4 Valid values range from 1 to 2147483647 The default is 40 5 Use Iftransit Delay Interval to enter the OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default value is 1 second 6 Use Retransmit Interval to enter the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface
261. ay be present on a point to point link The default network type for Ethernet interfaces is broadcast 280 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 12 Use Authentication Type to select an authentication type other than none You can select the authentication type from the pull down menu The choices are e None This is the initial interface state If you select this option from the pull down menu no authentication protocols will be run e Simple If you select Simple you will be prompted to enter an authentication key This key will be included in the clear in the OSPF header of all packets sent on the network All routers on the network must be configured with the same key Encrypt If you select Encrypt you will be prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID Encryption uses the MD5 Message Digest algorithm All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID 13 Use Authentication Key to enter the OSPF Authentication Key for the specified interface If you do not choose to use authentication you will not be prompted to enter a key If you choose simple authentication you cannot use a key of more than eight octets If you choose encrypt the key may be up to 16 octets long The key value will only be displayed if you are logged on with Read Write privileges otherwise it will be displayed as asterisks
262. be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a Multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to the Broadcast address including those that were discarded or not sent Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 27 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 2 5 Field Description Transmit Packets Discarded The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space Most Address Entries Ever Used The highest number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries that have been learned by this switch since the most recent reboot Address Entries in Use The number of Learned and static entries in the Forwarding Database Address Table for this switch Maximum VLAN Entries The maximum number of Virtual LANs VLANs allowed on this switch Most VLAN Entries Ever Used The largest number of VLANs that have been active on this switch since the last reboot Static VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been cre
263. ber of output datagrams that could not be fragmented at this interface Datagrams Fragments Created The number of output datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this output interface 240 Chapter 4 Routing Table 16 Field ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Description Multicast Datagrams Received The number of multicast packets received by the interface Multicast Datagrams Transmitted The number of multicast packets transmitted by the interface ICMPv6 Statistics Table 17 Field Description Total ICMPv6 Messages Received The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface which includes all those counted by ipv6lflcmpInErrors Note that this interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed which may not be necessarily the input interface for the messages ICMPv6 Messages With Errors Received The number of ICMP messages which the interface received but determined as having ICMP specific errors bad ICMP checksums bad length etc ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable Messages Received ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited Administratively Received ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages Received ICMPv6 Parameter Problem Messages Received ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages Received The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received by the interface The number of
264. bership Response Messages Received The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction Messages Received The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages received by the interface Total ICMPv6 Messages Transmitted The total number of ICMP messages which this interface attempted to send Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors ICMPv6 Messages Not Transmitted Due To Error ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable Messages Transmitted ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited Administratively Transmitted ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP messages which this interface did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter s value The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable Messages sent by the interface Number of ICMP destination unreachable communication administratively prohibited messages sent The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Parameter Problem Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Packet Too Big message
265. ble Discards Reserved Address Discards Broadcast Storm Recovery CFI Discards The number of frames discarded when a lookup in the multicast tree for a VLAN occurs while that tree is being modified The number of frames discarded that are destined to an IEEE 802 1 reserved address and are not supported by the system The number of frames discarded that are destined for FF FF FF FF FF FF when Broadcast Storm Recovery is enabled The number of frames discarded that have CFI bit set and the addresses in RIF are in non canonical format Upstream Threshold The number of frames discarded due to lack of cell descriptors available for that packet s priority level Received Packets Dropped including aborted The number of packets without any errors that are dropped at the time of their receive Total Packets Transmitted Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets transmitted on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization If greater precision is desired the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval 554 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System Table 7 112 Field ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Description Packets Transmitted 64 Octets The total number of packets includi
266. ble 6 83 Field Description Radius Server Display the address of the RADIUS server or the name of the RADIUS server for which to display statistics Round Trip Time The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from this RADIUS authentication server Access Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This number does not include retransmissions Access Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this server Access Accepts The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets including both valid and invalid packets that were received from this server Access Rejects The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets including both valid and invalid packets that were received from this server Access Challenges The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets including both valid and invalid packets that were received from this server Malformed Access Responses Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Timeouts The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticat
267. ble Switches Software Administration Manual LLDP MED Remote Device Information To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Remote Device Information A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S ee wth rw 48 Port Gigabit Loyer Maneged Srocheble buach with 4 10 Gegabit Shon Monitoring Maintenance Help Index seeour LLDP MED Remote Device Information LLDP MED Interface Selection Location Information 1 Use Interface to select the ports on which LLDP MED is enabled 118 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the LLDP MED Remote Device Information fields Table 2 41 Field Description Capability Information Specifies the supported and enabled capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port Supported Capabilities Specifies supported capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port Enabled Capabilities Specifies enabled capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port Device Class Specifies device class as advertised by the device remotely connected to the port Network Policy Information Specifies if network policy TLV is received in the LLDP frames on this port Media Application Type Specifies the application type Types of application types are unknown voicesignaling guestvoice guestvoicesignalling softpho
268. blocked until the RADIUS application returns a response 3 From the Accounting Mode menu select whether the RADIUS accounting mode is enabled or disabled on the current server 4 Use RADIUS Attribute 4 to enable or disable RADIUS attribute 4 Default value is Disable This is an optional field and can be seen only when RADIUS attribute 4 is enabled It takes IP address value in the format xx xx xx Xx Table 6 81 Fes escrito O O Current Server Address The Address of the current server This field is blank if no servers are configured Number of Configured Servers The number of RADIUS servers that have been configured This value will be in the range of 0 and 3 434 Chapter6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual RADIUS Server Configuration Use the RADIUS Server Configuration page to view and configure various settings for the current RADIUS server configured on the system To access the RADIUS Server Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt RADIUS gt Server Configuration link GSM73525 sre ewepee Server Configuration Server C omlig stien To configure a RADIUS server 1 To add a RADIUS server specify the settings the following list describes and click Add In the Radius Server IP Address field specify the IP address of the RADIUS server to add In the Radius Server Name field specify the Name o
269. cause Address the IPv6 address in their IPv6 header s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity This count includes invalid addresses e g 0 and unsupported addresses e g addresses with unallocated prefixes For entities which are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward datagrams this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Truncated The number of input datagrams discarded because Data datagram frame didn t carry enough data Received Datagrams Discarded Other The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re assembly Chapter 4 Routing 239 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 16 Field Description Received Datagrams Reassembly Required The number of IPv6 fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this interface Note that this counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments Datagrams Successfully Reassembled The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled Note that this counter is incremented
270. ccounting Retransmissions Displays the number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS accounting server Accounting Responses Displays the number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server Malformed Accounting Responses Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Timeouts Unknown Types Packets Dropped Displays the number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses Displays the number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets that contained invalid authenticators received from this accounting server Displays the number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response Displays the number of accounting timeouts to this server Displays the number of RADIUS packets of unknown type that were received from this server on the accounting port Displays the number of RADIUS packets that were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 439 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Configuring TACACS TACACS provides a centralized user management system while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and ot
271. ce OSPFv3 is initialized on the router it will remain initialized until the router is reset Chapter 4 Routing 297 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages OSPF v3 Configuration on page 299 Common Area Configuration on page 302 Stub Area Configuration on page 304 NSSA Area Configuration on page 306 Area Range Configuration on page 308 Interface Configuration on page 309 Interface Statistics on page 313 Neighbor Table on page 316 Link State Database on page 318 Virtual Link Configuration on page 321 Route Redistribution on page 323 298 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual OSPFv3 Configuration Use the OSPFv3 Configuration page to activate and configure OSPFv3 for a switch To display the OSPFv3 Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt OSPFv3 Configuration GSM7352S OSPF v3 Configuration Defaet Route Advertise Configuration Delas Information Ongmate sede C Abways True Fois Metru Metri Type OSPFVI Coeligeration Reuter 10 OSP Pv Admin Mode ASDR Mode ADA Status Interface Statatics Neighbor Tat Emt Overfiiow Interval secs Unk State External LSA Count Cetebese Exterasi LSA Checksum Virtual Lak New LSAs Originated Configurator Route Redstrdcon LSAs Received Exterasi LSDS Limot Oefeut
272. ce because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the Group Membership Interval in seconds The default is 10 seconds The configured value must be less than the Group Membership Interval Use Present Expiration Time to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait to receive a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds The default is 0 seconds A value of zero indicates an infinite time out i e no expiration Use Fast Leave Admin mode to select the Fast Leave mode for the a particular interface from the pull down menu The default is disable Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch If you make any configuration changes click Apply to apply the new settings to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 175 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP VLAN Configuration Use the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page to configure IGMP snooping settings for VLANs on the system To access the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP VLAN Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 44 For Gigabit Layer 3 msmoged S
273. ce on page 465 450 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual HTTP From the HTTP link you can access the following pages e HTTP Configuration on page 451 HTTP Configuration To access the switch over a web you must first configure it with IP information IP address subnet mask and default gateway You can configure the IP information using any of the following e BOOTP e DHCP e Terminal interface via the EIA 232 port Once you have established in band connectivity you can change the IP information using a Web based management Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 451 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To access the HTTP Configuration page click Security gt Access gt HTTP gt HTTP Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pert Gigabit lever 2 Maseged Stackable Switch with 4 19 Gigabit Slot Locour TTR HTTP Configuration wade HTTP Configuration Contiguration gt HTTPS MTTP Access gt SSH Jave Mode gt Telnet MTID bessien Saft Termewt Monetos gt Console Port gt Denial of Service HTIP Session Hard Timeout Hours Masmmem Number of HIIP essiens Auleriu ation Link To configure the HTTP server settings 1 Use HTTP Access to specify whether the switch may be accessed from a web browser If you choose to enable web mode you will be able to manage the swit
274. ch from a web browser The factory default is enabled Use Java Mode to enable or disable the java applet that displays a picture of the switch at the top right of the screen If you run the applet you will be able to click on the picture of the switch to select configuration screens instead of using the navigation tree at the left side of the screen The factory default is disabled Use HTTP Session Soft Timeout Minutes to set the inactivity time out for HTTP sessions The value must be in the range of 1 to 60 minutes The default value is 5 minutes The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed Use HTTP Session Hard Timeout Hours to set the hard time out for HTTP sessions This time out is unaffected by the activity level of the session The value must be in the range of 1 to 168 hours The default value is 24 hours The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed Use Maximum Number of HTTP Sessions to set the maximum allowable number of HTTP sessions The value must be in the range of 0 to 16 The default value is 16 The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed Table 6 86 Field Description Authentication List Shows the authentication list which HTTP are using 452 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual HTTPS From the HTTPS link you can access the followin
275. ch wih 4 CoS Configuration CoS Configuration Gobel an me Global Trust Mode interface vot Interface Trust Mode trust dotip Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 399 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Use the CoS Configuration page to set the class of service trust mode of an interface Each port in the switch can be configured to trust one of the packet fields 802 1p or IP DSCP or to not trust any packet s priority designation untrusted mode If the port is set to a trusted mode it uses a mapping table appropriate for the trusted field being used This mapping table indicates the CoS queue to which the packet should be forwarded on the appropriate egress port s Of course the trusted field must exist in the packet for the mapping table to be of any use so there are default actions performed when this is not the case These actions involve directing the packet to a specific CoS level configured for the ingress port as a whole based on the existing port default priority as mapped to a traffic class by the current 802 1p mapping table Alternatively when a port is configured as untrusted it does not trust any incoming packet priority designation and uses the port default priority value instead All packets arriving at the ingress of an untrusted port are directed to a specific CoS queue on the appropriate egress port s in accordance with the configured default priority
276. ched to an authenticator s controlled ports The result of the authentication process determines whether the supplicant is authorized to access services on that controlled port A Port Access Entity PAE is able to adopt one of two distinct roles within an access control interaction 1 Authenticator A Port that enforces authentication before allowing access to services available via that Port 2 Supplicant A Port that attempts to access services offered by the Authenticator Additionally there exists a third role 3 Authentication server Performs the authentication function necessary to check the credentials of the Supplicant on behalf of the Authenticator All three roles are required in order to complete an authentication exchange Gigabit L3 switches support the Authenticator role only in which the PAE is responsible for communicating with the Supplicant The Authenticator PAE is also responsible for submitting the information received from the Supplicant to the Authentication Server in order for the credentials to be checked which will determine the authorization state of the Port The Authenticator PAE controls the authorized unauthorized state of the controlled Port depending on the outcome of the RADIUS based authentication process Authenticator Switch Authentication Server RADIUS 192 i 10 23 618 Appendix B Configuration Examples ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Ma
277. ches Software Administration Manual IP Extended Rules Use these screens to configure the rules for the IP Access Control Lists created using the IP Access Control List Configuration screen What is shown on this screen varies depending on the current step in the rule configuration process Note There is an implicit deny all rule at the end of an ACL list This means that if an ACL is applied to a packet and if none of the explicit rules match then the final implicit deny all rule applies and the packet is dropped To display the IP extended Rules page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IP Extended Rules Prem Revere G5M7352S fb Pert Dyah Layer DM 1 mayest Extended ACL Rules W asies ac iajnas To configure rules for an IP ACL To add an IP ACL rule select the ACL ID to add the rule to select the check box in the Extended ACL Rule table and click Add The page displays the extended ACL Rule Configuration fields Configure the new rule 1 Rule ID Specify a number from 1 12 to identify the IP ACL rule You can create up to 12 rules for each ACL Action Selects the ACL forwarding action which is one of the following e Permit Forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria e Deny Drops packets which meet the ACL criteria Logging When set to Enable logging is enabled for this ACL rule subject to resource availability in the device If the Access List Trap Flag is also enab
278. ching QoS Securi Maintenance Help Index gt DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard Interface Configuration v IP Source Guard IP Source Guard Interface Configuration Interface Configuration 1 Al Go Te Interlace Binding Coefiguration gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt Captive Portal 1 Interface Selects the interface to enable IPSG 2 Use IPSG Mode to enable or disable validation of Sender IP Address on this interface If IPSG is Enabled Packets will not be forwarded if Sender IP Address is not in DHCP Snooping Binding database The factory default is disabled 3 Use IPSG Port Security to enable or disables the IPSG Port Security on the selected interface If IPSG Port Security is enabled then the packets will not be forwarded if the sender MAC Address is not in FDB table and it is not in DHCP snooping binding database To enforce filtering based on MAC address other required configurations are e Enable port security Globally e Enable port security on the interface level IPSG Port Security can t be Enabled if IPSG is Disabled The factory default is disabled Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 503 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IP Source Guard Binding Configuration To display the IP Source Guard Binding Configuration page click Security gt Control gt IP Source Guard gt Binding Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Monoged Stockoble Switc
279. cies will now appear in router LSAs and network LSAs The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred This variable displays the status of the entry dynamic and permanent refer to how the neighbor became known Hellos Suppressed This indicates whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neighbor Retransmission Queue Length Up Time Dead Time An integer representing the current length of the retransmission queue of the specified neighbor router Id of the specified interface Neighbor uptime how long since the adjacency last reached the Full state The amount of time in seconds to wait before the router assumes the neighbor is unreachable Chapter 4 Routing 289 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Click REFRESH to show the latest DHCP bindings information Click CLEAR to clear all the neighbors in the table 290 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Link State Database Use the OSPF Link State Database page to display OSPF link state information To display the Link State Database page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Link State Database GSM73525S yar a Link State Database OSPY tink State Octahane Table 35 Field Description EE aT Router ID The 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identi
280. cify DHCPv6 mode to configure server functionality DHCPv6 server and DHCPV6 relay functions are mutually exclusive 3 Use Pool Name to specify the DHCPv6 pool containing stateless and or prefix delegation parameters 4 Use the optional Rapid Commit parameter to allow abbreviated exchange between the client and server 5 Use Preference to specify the preference value used by clients to determine preference between multiple DHCPV6 servers The values allowed are between 0 to 4294967295 The default value is 0 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 75 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCPv 6 Bindings Information To display the DHCPv6 Bindings Information page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCPv6 Bindings Information A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pet Cigi Layer 3 Managed DHCP Server DHCPv6 Bindings Information DHCP Botey DHCP VG Himtings Information OMCE L Hokey VOF Raley Deere h Py Mdina IP The following table describes the DHCPv6 Bindings Information fields Table 2 25 Pld eserptn o Client Address Specifies the IPv6 address of the client associated with the binding Client Interface Specifies the interface number where the client binding occurred Client DUID Specifies client s DHCPv6 unique identifier Prefix PrefixLength Specifies the IPv6 address and mask length for delegated prefix a
281. ck Monitoring gt Logs gt Buffered Logs Guflered Loge Dettered Legs adoma saanee wetem Message Log latei semiar of Meseages ide oun OF prana 1857 Ere armen set anin 8 AN ng a Tene Or tae tinkotu oot e us so pana aea ze noremunant tests IDUNA et 1 pera rer mm Therese side au a 77961 Pari past anan iat SAS tamna 1e aaner Derg aet A metanet LUSE wr i z ree iota i seb atata ona ama rest c 8eT 1207 WS Lee ee LANI tre roe LJe An myst ramet uuega w i uviest ter ae ahem doe AUS EI bectgeet 12 27 LA a nt Sen Et SY Se nt 3 1AE 3 iS 53 68 1ST Thee 5 w of 82 oS Serge tow 13 AUD EL 19 2967 P IAI muamma sareh wam anet Liae NN meee Tt Daen Om aet Tiida ww emit i wc inanar aaan aea Mamet eet ot SA ea tener Omme eent Ptetwretae ery WE eet n e a ange a Iotetees es ade au E3 i3et g pet 11 Marmot peer pete OE lomotoreie wel LTT eet m amdi st weve gi Darge tamet eid eiD E tees iaar Aii aiiin iesea watt anini im SA ee me ae a imetusis wh LSI e gaa d aie Buffered Log Configuration This log stores messages in memory based upon the settings for message component and severity On stackable systems this log exists only on the top of stack platform Other platforms in the stack forward their messages to the top of stack log q 2 A log that is Disabled shall not log messages A log that is Enabled shall log messages Enable or Disable logging by selecting the corr
282. cket leaves as a tagged packet with VLAN ID 20 Access Control Lists ACLs ACLs ensure that only authorized users have access to specific resources while blocking off any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources ACLs are used to provide traffic flow control restrict contents of routing updates decide which types of traffic are forwarded or blocked and provide security for the network ACLs are normally used in firewall routers that are positioned between the internal network and an external network such as the Internet They can also be used on a router positioned between two parts of the network to control the traffic entering or exiting a specific part of the internal network The added packet processing required by the ACL feature does not affect switch performance That is ACL processing occurs at wire speed Access lists are a sequential collection of permit and deny conditions This collection of conditions known as the filtering criteria is applied to each packet that is processed by the switch or the router The forwarding or dropping of a packet is based on whether or not the packet matches the specified criteria Traffic filtering requires the following two basic steps 1 Create an access list definition 610 Appendix B Configuration Examples ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The access list definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the cri
283. ctets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with a non integral number of octets Rx FCS Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets Overruns Total Received Packets Not Forwarded Local Traffic Frames 802 3x Pause Frames Received Unacceptable Frame Type The total number of frames discarded as this port was overloaded with incoming packets and could not keep up with the inflow A count of valid frames received which were discarded i e filtered by the forwarding process The total number of frames dropped in the forwarding process because the destination address was located off of this port A count of MAC Control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in half duplex mode The number of frames discarded from this port due to being an unacceptable frame type VLAN Membership Mismatch The number of frames discarded on this port due to ingress filtering VLAN Viable Discards The number of frames discarded on this port when a lookup on a particular VLAN occurs while that entry in the VLAN table is being modified or if the VLAN has not been configured Multicast Tree Via
284. d Route Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest IP information 232 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Basic link you can access the following pages e IPv6 Global Configuration on page 234 e IPv6 Interface Configuration on page 235 e Pv6 Prefix Configuration on page 237 e Pv 6 Statistics on page 238 e Pv6 Neighbor Table on page 244 e Pv6 Route Configuration on page 246 e IPv6 Route Table on page 247 e IPv6 Route Preferences on page 248 e Tunnel Configuration on page 249 Chapter 4 Routing 233 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Global Configuration Use the Global Configuration page to enable IPv6 forwarding on the router and to enable the forwarding of IPv6 unicast datagrams To display the IPv6 Global Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Global Configuration GSM73525S AA Port Gopebet imrar Homoged IPv6 Global Configuration I v6 Ghsbal Comiguration IPNI Lime wot Rewteny IPye Ferwerdog Woe toeea TOMP yt Rate Limmat freee lnherwet LOND ys Kate Luma Beret Sipe 1 Use IPv6 Unicast Routing to globally enable or disable IPv6 unicast routing on the entity 2 Use IPv6 Forwarding to enable or disable forwarding of IPv6 frames on the router 3 Use the Hop Limit option to define the unicast hop count used in IPv
285. d The possible values are true and false If the value is true reauthentication will occur Otherwise reauthentication will not be allowed Control Direction This displays the control direction for the specified port The control direction dictates the degree to which protocol exchanges take place between Supplicant and Authenticator This affects whether the unauthorized controlled port exerts control over communication in both directions disabling both incoming and outgoing frames or just in the incoming direction disabling only the reception of incoming frames This field is not configurable on some platforms Protocol Version This field displays the protocol version associated with the selected port The only possible value is 1 corresponding to the first version of the 802 1x specification This field is not configurable PAE Capabilities Authenticator PAE State This field displays the port access entity PAE functionality of the selected port Possible values are Authenticator or Supplicant This field is not configurable This field displays the current state of the authenticator PAE state machine Possible values are e Initialize e Disconnected e Connecting e Authenticating e Authenticated e Aborting e Held e ForceAuthorized e ForceUnauthorized Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 477
286. d 466 RADIUS 433 SNMP 17 TACACS 440 C certificate 456 compliance 624 Configuration 802 1X 468 470 Access Control Lists 524 Class 416 Community 95 CoS 400 Differentiated Services 407 DNS 46 Dual Image 594 Dynamic Host 49 Global 173 IGMP Snooping 172 LAG 201 MAC Filter 481 Management Access 450 Policy 420 Port Security 484 Port VLAN ID 139 RADIUS Global 433 Secure HTTP 453 SNTP Server 43 Standard IP ACL Example 612 STP 151 TACACS 440 Trap 96 VLAN 132 VLAN example 609 CoS 400 D defaults CoS 611 DES 17 Device View 14 DiffServ 407 DNS 46 download from a remote system 587 E EAP 557 F file management 592 firmware download 587 G guest VLAN configuration 619 H help HTML based 13 HTTP 452 management interface access 9 secure 450 using to download files 589 HTTPS 453 IEEE 802 11x 617 IEEE 802 1AB 102 IEEE 802 1D 151 IEEE 802 1Q 130 152 Index 626 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IEEE 802 1s 152 IEEE 802 1w 151 IEEE 802 1X 433 IGMP 172 interface LAG 201 logical 18 naming convention 18 physical 18 queue configuration 406 IP DSCP 400 Mapping 403 L LAG VLAN 201 LAGPDUs 201 LAGs 201 Membership 203 Static 201 LLDP 102 LLDP MED 103 MAC 172 CPU Management Interface 18 filter summary 483 rules 526 MD5 38 MIBs 17 N navigation 12 P port authentication 466 summary 476 Q QoS 39
287. d Router is identified here by its router ID The value 0 0 0 0 means that there is no Designated Router This field is only displayed if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled Chapter 4 Routing 311 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 41 Field Description Backup Designated Router The identity of the Backup Designated Router for this network in the view of the advertising router The Backup Designated Router is identified here by its router ID Set to 0 0 0 0 if there is no Backup Designated Router This field is only displayed if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled Number of Link Events This is the number of times the specified OSPF v3 interface has changed its state This field is only displayed if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled 312 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Interface Statistics This screen displays statistics for the selected interface The information will be displayed only if OSPF v3 is enabled To display the Interface Statistics page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Interface Statistics OSPF v3 Interface Statistics OSPFv3 Interface Selection Interface OSPFv3 Interlace Statistics USPFvs Area 1D Area Border Router Count AS order Router Count Area LSA Count IPv6 Address Interface tvents Virtual Events Neighbor Events I xternal LSA Count
288. d as a filter to determine if incoming traffic meets the requirements to be a member of the class Set the DiffServ Class match criteria based on Traffic Type selection as below VOIP sets match criteria to UDP protocol HTTP sets match criteria to HTTP destination port FTP sets match criteria to FTP destination port Telnet sets match criteria to Telnet destination port Every sets match criteria all traffic Create a Diffserv Policy and add it to the DiffServ Class created If Policing is set to YES then DiffServ Policy style is set to Simple Traffic which conforms to the Class Match criteria will be processed according to the Outbound Priority selection Outbound Priority configures the handling of conforming traffic as below High sets policing action to markdscp ef Med sets policing action to markdscp af81 Low sets policing action to send If Policing is set to NO then all traffic will be marked as specified below High sets policy mark ipdscp ef Med sets policy mark ipdscp af31 Low sets policy mark ipdscp be Each port selected will be added to the policy created Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 409 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To display the DiffServ Wizard page click QoS gt DiffServ gt DiffServ Wizard NETGEAR _ GSM7352S 48 Pert Giga Monaged Srochoble Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Slots tosour Dilfserv Wizard D
289. d aud heed een 409 Auto VolP Configurations esce 2icceh400 samen odeia at baw aon 411 BCren a pea anie a tae ee teehee eae a ee at gee ae es 412 POWANCER ainena hia duke Rede doncwe wn moh acted T d Aone ds ew aac 414 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security Management Security Settings 00 000 c eee eee ee 427 Local USET ccc iect sien eye deer ee Ne beer ee eee ee 428 Enable Password Configuration 0 00 cece eee eee 431 Line Password Configuration 0020 cece eee eee 432 RADIUS 2334 0 1d hu Sees ea eee Eee ee eee es 433 Configuring TACACS 0 00 nag eaaa OE a a a SE 440 Authentication List Configuration s s s essan saaana 443 Login SESSIONS saga 2 arpaa EA Na 450 Configuring Management Access uuaa uaaa aaeeea 450 PATI gsp a E a T ee ede wet cae 451 Contents 5 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual RAMPS cho a oe ease ee a Racin ane Seal elena A 453 SSH seee ihgudacna nts T earn Ludi dad hades ane sends we ee aka 458 WING pa seriieran eae d dg 4 ere Sard dw a e eae ae ae eee 462 Console Fois sastreman ura d dapat keaton a apetntear ara dvdea a Bog adm Sow aad 464 Denial Of Sevice 2 0i2ci ende ou oie bod re e r Seed eee ee aes 465 Port Authentication 2 nananana aaaeeeaa 466 BAG Gaia ts gad aon dad be Kae ode et ae ba eae hk Sage 467 PROVING OG oo prici dt actscsg Bed Goes duties a ha dd Rie ee ok a 470 Tani CONWON j d49 4 4 4482
290. d three pings and the results will be displayed below the configurable data The output will be Send count 3 Receive count n from IPv6 Address Average round trip time n ms To access the Ping IPv6 page click Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt Ping IPv6 NETGEAR GSM73525 ote 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Managed Stackable Switch with 4 tO Gigabit Sion Help Index socourt gt Ping IPv4 Ping IPv6 v Ping IPv Ping I gt Traceroute IPv4 Pv gt Traceroute IPv6 Ping IPv6 Address Host Name Datagram Se Ping 1 Use Ping to select either global IPv6 Address Hostname or Link Local Address to ping 2 Use IPv6 Address Hostname to enter the IPv6 address or Hostname of the station you want the switch to ping The initial value is blank The IPv6 Address or Hostname you enter is not retained across a power cycle 3 Use Datagram Size to enter the datagram size The valid range is 48 to 2048 598 Chapter 8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Traceroute IPv4 Use this screen to tell the switch to send a TraceRoute request to a specified IP address or Hostname You can use this to discover the paths packets take to a remote destination Once you Click the Apply button the switch will send traceroute and the results will be displayed below the configurable data If a reply to the traceroute is received you will see e 1x y z w 9869 usec 9775 usec 10584 usec
291. d with a packet length less than the length of the VRRP header Click REFRESH to show the latest VRRP information Multicast From the Multicast link you can access the following pages e Mroute Table on page 335 e Multicast Global Configuration on page 336 e Multicast Interface Configuration on page 337 e DVMRP on page 338 e IGMP on page 346 e PIM DM on page 359 e PIM SM on page 362 e Static Routes Configuration on page 370 e Admin Boundary Configuration on page 371 334 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Mroute Table This screen displays contents of the Mroute Table in tabular form To display the Mroute Table page click Routing gt Multicast gt Mroute Table NETGEAR Mroute Table Mreste Tabie GSM73525 4 Pes Gg oye Meanegae A anh 6 DOr Bee Table 51 Field Description Source IP The IP address of the multicast packet source to be combined with the Group IP to fully identify a single route whose Mroute table entry Group IP The destination group IP address Incoming Interface Outgoing Interface s Up Time hh mmi ss The incoming interface on which multicast packets for this source group arrive The list of outgoing interfaces on which multicast packets for this source group are forwarded The time in seconds since the entry was created Expiry Time hh mmiss The time in seconds before this entry
292. de to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the LAG The possible values are e Disable Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG e Enable Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG 6 Use Static Mode to select enable or disable from the pull down menu When the LAG is enabled it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs i e the member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it may receive are dropped The factory default is disable 7 Click DELETE to remove the currently selected configured LAG All ports that were members of this LAG are removed from the LAG and included in the default VLAN Table 3 73 Field Description O OSOS LAG Description Enter the Description string to be attached to a LAG It can be up to 64 characters in length LAG ID Identification of the LAG Configured Ports Indicate the ports that are members of this port channel Active Ports Indicates the ports that are actively participating in the port channel 202 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LAG Membership Use the LAG Membership page to select two or more full duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group LAG which is also known as a port channel The switch can treat the port channel as if it were a single link To access the LAG Membership page click
293. de to set the administrative status of PIM DM for the selected interface The default is disable 3 Use Hello Interval to enter the number of seconds between PIM hello messages transmitted from the selected interface The default value is 30 Valid values are from 10 to 3600 Table 71 Field Description Protocol State The operational state of the PIM DM protocol on this interface IPv6 Prefix Length The IPv6 Address Prefix and the Length of the selected interface Neighbor Count The number of PIM neighbors on the selected interface Designated Router The designated router on the selected PIM interface For point to point interfaces this will be 0 0 0 0 Chapter 4 Routing 375 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM DM Neighbor To display the IPv6 PIM DM Neighbor page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt PIM DM gt PIM DM Neighbor GSM7352S Pes Giguhs lover Ahemngad A ooh 6 10 Cagee Bae Irve rin sa mo Stata Rautoe Cont mper atina Table 72 Fig escrito O O Interface The physical interface on which PIM DM is enabled Neighbor IP The IP address of the PIM neighbor for which this entry contains information Up Time The time since this PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the local router Expiry Time The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor will be aged out Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the la
294. ded or while it is being held in a router s memory This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement except the LS age field Options The Options field in the link state advertisement header indicates which optional capabilities are associated with the advertisement The options are e Q This enables support for QoS Traffic Engineering e E This describes the way AS external LSAs are flooded e MC This describes the way IP multicast datagrams are forwarded according to the standard specifications e O This describes whether Opaque LSAs are supported e V This describes whether OSPF extensions for VPN COS are supported Click REFRESH to show the latest OSPF Link State information 292 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Virtual Link Configuration Use the OSPF Virtual Link Configuration page to create or configure virtual interface information for a specific area and neighbor A valid OSPF area must be configured before this page can be displayed To display the Virtual Link Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Virtual Link Configuration Virtual Link Configuration OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Neighbor Router Hello Iftransit Dela Area ID Dead Interval a ID Interval Interval Retransmit Authentication Interval Type 1 Use Area ID to enter the area ID of the OSPF area Virtual links m
295. default is 5 Entering 0 disables the time out 2 Use Baud Rate bps to select the default baud rate for the serial port connection from the pull down menu You may choose from 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 baud The factory default is 9600 baud 3 Use Login Authentication List to specify which authentication list to use when you login through Telnet The default value is defaultList 4 Use Enable Authentication List to specify which authentication list you are using when going into the privileged EXEC mode The default value is enableList Table 6 91 Fig escrito O O Character Size bits The number of bits in a character This is always 8 Flow Control Whether hardware flow control is enabled or disabled It is always disabled Stop Bits The number of stop bits per character Its is always 1 Parity The parity method used on the serial port It is always None 464 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Denial of Service To display the Denial of Service page click Security gt Access gt Denial of Service NETGEAR System Denial of Service Denial of Service Domai of Service Min TCP Meader Sue Dental of Service L4 Port Deomal of Service Dust Fragment Dental of Service ICMP Oeris of Service Max PONP Packet Sire Dorsal of Servise SIP DIP Derisi of Service TCP Flag Dorel of Service T
296. ding to the standard specifications e O This describes whether Opaque LSAs are supported e V This describes whether OSPF extensions for VPN COS are supported Router Options The router specific options Click REFRESH to show the latest OSPFv3 Link State information 320 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Virtual Link Configuration Use the Virtual Link Configuration page to define a new or configure an existing virtual link To display this page a valid OSPFv3 area must be defined via the OSPFv3 Area Configuration page To display the Virtual Link Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Virtual Link Configuration 1 Use Area ID to specify the Area ID portion of the virtual link identification for which data is to be displayed The Area ID and Neighbor Router ID together define the virtual link 2 Use Neighbor Router ID to specify the neighbor portion of the virtual link identification Virtual links may be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common non backbone area 3 Use Hello Interval to specify the OSPFv3 hello interval for the specified interface in seconds This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network Valid values range from 1 to 65 535 The default is 10 seconds 4 Use Dead Interval to specify the OSPFv3 dead interval for the specified interface
297. disable 8 Use Hash Mode to select the load balancing mode used on a port channel LAG Traffic is balanced on a port channel LAG by selecting one of the links in the channel over which to transmit specific packets The link is selected by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet and associating that pattern with a particular link Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 203 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Src MAC VLAN EType incoming port Source MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet e Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port Destination MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet e Src Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port Source Destination MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet Src IP and Src TCP UDP Port fields Source IP and Source TCP UDP fields of the packet e DestIP and Dest TCP UDP Port fields Destination IP and Destination TCP UDP Port fields of the packet e Src Dest IP and TCP UDP Port fields Source Destination IP and source destination TCP UDP Port fields of the packet 9 Use the Port Selection Table to select the ports as members of the LAG LAG Membership LAG Membership LAG ID None LAG Description Admin Mode Link Trap STP Mode Static Mode Hash Mode Port Selection Table Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
298. dmin you can use the User Accounts screen to assign passwords and set security parameters for the default accounts and to add and delete accounts other than admin up to the maximum of six Only a user with Read Write privileges may alter data on this screen and only one account may be created with Read Write privileges 428 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To display the User Management page click Security gt Management Security gt Local User gt User Management v Local Geer User Management User Managemert User Password ae Corfiguration gt Enable Password gt Une Password gt RADIUS gt TACACS gt Authentication List Logis Sessions _ GSM7352S Sachets aker e reg a LocouT P Expiration Status Date 1 Use User Name to enter the name you want to give to the new account You can only enter data in this field when you are creating a new account User names are up to eight characters in length and are not case sensitive Valid characters include all the alphanumeric characters as well as the dash and underscore _ characters User name default is not valid User names once created cannot be changed modified Set the Edit Password field to Enable only when you want to change the password The default value is Disable Use Password to enter the option
299. down menu to select the method that should appear first in the selected authentication login list The options are e Local The user s locally stored ID and password will be used for authentication e Radius The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally e None The user will not be authenticated Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 447 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual HTTP Authentication List You use this page to configure HTTP lists A HTTP list specifies the authentication method s you want used to validate switch or port access through HTTP To display the HTTP Authentication List page click Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List gt HTTP Authentication List NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Lever 2 Managed Srechable Switch with 4 1 Gigabit Slots weoour gt Local User HTTP Authentication List p Enable Posswand HTTP Authentication List Line Password gt RADIUS Lint Name i gt TACACS O pus v Authentication List Logn Authentication HTTP Authenticebon Let HTTPS satherhcation Uist gt Login Sessions 1 List Name Select the HTTP list name for which you want to configure data 2 Use the dropdown menu to select the method that should appear first in the selected authentication login list If you select a method that does not time out as the first method such as local
300. e None No special processing for this case e Simple A route will not be included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned e Poison reverse A route will be included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned but the metric will be set to infinity The default is simple Use Auto Summary Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable groups of adjacent routes will be summarized into single entries in order to reduce the total number of entries The default is disable Use Host Routes Accept Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable the router will be accept host routes The default is enable Use Default Information Originate to enable or disable Default Route Advertise Use Default Metric to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes This field displays the default metric if one has already been set or blank if not configured earlier The valid values are 1 to 15 Table 24 Field Description Global Route Changes Global queries The number of route changes made to the IP Route Database by RIP This does not include the refresh of a route s age The number of responses sent to RIP queries from other systems Chapter 4 Routing 259 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages RIP Configuration on page 260 e interface
301. e Comparable Cost External Type 1 metrics that are comparable to the OSPFv3 metric e Non comparable Cost External Type 2 metrics that are assumed to be larger than the cost of the OSPFv3 metric Use Translator Role to specify the NSSA Border router s ability to perform NSSA translation of type 7 LSAs into type 5 LSAs The valid values are Always and Candidate Use Translator Stability Interval to specify the number of seconds after an elected translator determines its services are no longer required that it should continue to perform its translation duties The valid range of values is 0 to 3600 Use No Redistribute Mode to enable or disable the No Redistribute Mode Click ADD to configure the area as a NSSA area Click DELETE to delete the NSSA area designation The area will be returned to normal state 306 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 40 Field Description SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum Tr
302. e Hello Time 1 The default value is 20 e Bridge Hello Time secs Specifies the bridge Hello time for the Common and Internal Spanning Tree CST which indicates the amount of time in seconds a root Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 157 Table 3 55 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual bridge waits between configuration messages The value is fixed at 2 seconds The value must be less than or equal to Bridge Max Age 2 1 The default hello time value is 2 Bridge Forward Delay secs Specifies the bridge forward delay time which indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before forwarding packets The value must be greater or equal to Bridge Max Age 2 1 The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds The default value is 15 Spanning Tree Maximum Hops Specifies the maximum number of bridge hops the information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded The valid range is 1 127 Spanning Tree Tx Hold Count Configures the maximum number of bpdus the bridge is allowed to send within the hello time window The default value is 6 Field Description Bridge identifier The bridge identifier for the CST It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Time since topology change The time in seconds since the topology of the CST last changed
303. e Last Member Query Count to enter the number of queries to be sent on receiving a leave group report Valid values are from 1 to 20 The default value is 2 Table 76 Field Description Operational Mode The operational status of MLD on the Interface Chapter 4 Routing 387 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD Routing Interface Statistics To display the MLD Routing Interface Statistics page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt MLD gt Routing Interface Statistics GSM73525 ot lgees Lares gt menago MLD Routing Interlace Statistics MLD Booey beterfece Statics Table 77 Field Description Interface The interface for which data is to be displayed Querier Status This value indicates whether the interface is a MLD querier or non querier on the subnet it is associated with Querier IP The address of the MLD querier on the IP subnet to which the selected interface is attached Querier Up Time The time in seconds since the MLD interface querier was last changed Querier Expiry Time The time in seconds remaining before the other querier present timer expires If the local system is the querier this will be zero Wrong Version Queries Received Indicates the number of queries received whose MLD version does not match the MLD version of the interface Number of Joins Received The number of times a group membership has been added on t
304. e Priority to specify the order in which the TACACS servers are used It should be within the range 0 65535 3 Use Port to specify the authentication port It should be within the range 0 65535 4 Use Key String to specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS communications between the device and the TACACS server The valid range is 0 128 characters The key must match the encryption used on the TACACS server 5 Use Connection Timeout to specify the amount of time that passes before the connection between the device and the TACACS server time out The range is between 1 30 6 Click ADD to add a new server to the switch This button is only available to READWRITE users These changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed 7 Click DELETE to delete the selected server from the configuration 442 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Authentication List Configuration The Authentication List folder contains links to the following features Login Authentication List on page 443 Enable Authentication List on page 445 Dot1x Authentication List on page 447 HTTP Authentication List on page 448 HTTPS Authentication List on page 449 Login Authentication List You use this page to configure login lists A login list specifies the authentication method s you want to be used to validate switch or port access for
305. e The operational state of IGMP on the selected interface Querier IP The address of the IGMP querier on the IP subnet to which the selected interface is attached Querier Status Indicates whether the selected interface is in querier or non querier mode Querier Up Time The time in seconds since the IGMP interface querier was last changed Querier Expiry Time The time in seconds remaining before the other querier present timer expires If the local system is the querier this will be zero Wrong Version Queries Received Number of Joins Received The number of queries that have been received on the selected interface with an IGMP version that does not match the IGMP version configured for the interface over the lifetime of the entry IGMP requires that all routers on a LAN be configured to run the same version of IGMP Therefore a configuration error is indicated if any queries are received with the wrong version number The number of times a group membership has been added on the selected interface that is the number of times an entry for this interface has been added to the cache table This gives an indication of the amount of IGMP activity on the interface Number of Groups The current number of entries for the selected interface in the cache table Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest IGMP interface statistics 350 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gi
306. e class criteria 2 Policy Create policies associate classes with policies and define policy statements 3 Service Add a policy to an inbound interface Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria The classification criteria is defined by aclass The processing is defined by a policy s attributes Policy attributes may be defined on a per class instance basis and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs A policy can contain multiples classes When the policy is active the actions taken depend on which class matches the packet Packet processing begins by testing the class match criteria for a packet A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found The Differentiated Services menu page contains links to the various Diffserv configuration and display features From the DiffServ link under the QoS tab you can access the following pages e DiffServ Wizard on page 409 e Auto VoIP Configuration on page 411 e Basic on page 412 e Advanced on page 414 408 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DiffServ Wizard The DiffServ Wizard enables DiffServ on the switch by creating a traffic class adding the traffic class to a policy and then adding the policy to the ports selected on DiffServ Wizard page The DiffServ Wizard will Create a DiffServ Class and define match criteria use
307. e eee eee 324 VRRP occ cdorroead tc heed ete ae EE PREE A EESE A shaw getee 325 Gln gene bead Gah a vce bean edied exye ENS BGM amp a tugs gaye E d 325 AQVANCEG 204228802 beh eee Beedew eee eH Ee Lede ee 329 TE it ec mths cue Behan ee Gad deta aga bbe Ree eed 334 route Table s cok snwaia dats nae dood as Re acne OS mule eRe ESRA 335 Multicast Global Configuration 000 00 eee eee 336 Multicast Interface Configuration 000 0c eee eee 337 DV MRPs 2 tinct eat oleae ghee ite eee ah sede ead cece eee eed 338 IGMP sk ccgase ngrinte T aia s NAT GS Rew eRe aoa eee LEE 346 PIM DM tcescuvteciwade ba thot ieam e Letedawia ERA 359 PINES M n a ae E am E E E eee ae Ppaatts 362 Static Routes Configuration 00 20 aa esnean 370 Admin Boundary Configuration assess saasaa aeaaaee 371 IPV6 MUINICESt r otocctateh iva geet beeen ad eaa a E ee 371 Mroute Table issa naeia aae a R E ws eae Bitte 372 IPV6 PIM DM u iaeoe draine kp e ega iaa a E EE i ai e E 374 IPye PIM SMimu praune a n a a hea asa ee KES 377 MED sc cneaee a EE ees eas A eee SSE 385 Static Ro tes Configuratio m sssr ssis de veudoiu gale edaadieeee 397 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service Class Of SeMViCS sis parrean n a iE a AE Smad eae 398 BAST Gia pripi p E PEE A Pak uk pa Goad eRe aed 399 ONEI 63 cise cic descd eure Wl ard Hee eae BG een dk ees 401 Differentiated Services 0 0 0c ee eae 407 DiffServ Wizard eroa dx adapt renan ona r a Oarew
308. e for which data is configured IP Address Displays the IP Address of the router interface Send Version Receive Version Admin Mode Displays the version of RIP control packets the interface should send from the pull down menu The value is one of the following e RIP 1 send RIP version 1 formatted packets via broadcast e RIP 1c RIP version 1 compatibility mode Send RIP version 2 formatted packets via broadcast e RIP 2 send RIP version 2 packets using multicast The default is RIP 2 e None no RIP control packets will be sent Displays what RIP control packets the interface will accept from the pull down menu The value is one of the following e RIP 1 accept only RIP version 1 formatted packets e RIP 2 accept only RIP version 2 formatted packets The default is RIP 2 e Both accept packets in either format e None no RIP control packets will be accepted Enables RIP for an interface The default is Disable Link State Bad Packets Received Bad Routes Received Updates Sent Indicates whether the RIP interface is up or down The number of RIP response packets received by the RIP process which were subsequently discarded for any reason The number of routes in valid RIP packets which were ignored for any reason e g unknown address family or invalid metric The number of triggered RIP updates actually sent on this interface This explicitly does NOT include full upd
309. e is considered active if it the link is up and it is in forwarding state OSPF Admin Mode Displays OSPF admin mode of the interface The default value is disable Click DELETE to delete the IP Address from the selected interface Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest IP information 228 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Secondary IP Address To display the Secondary IP Address page click Routing gt IP gt Advanced gt Secondary IP GSM73525S geht Lon Secondary 1P Address Routing Intectacw Leterfae Seconery IP Address 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured 2 Use Secondary IP Address to add a secondary IP address to the selected interface 3 Use Secondary IP Subnet Mask to enter the subnet mask for the interface This is also referred to as the subnet network mask and defines the portion of the interface s IP Address that is used to identify the attached network This value is read only once configured 4 Click ADD to add a Secondary IP Address for the selected interface 5 Click DELETE to delete the Secondary IP Address from the selected interface Table 12 Field Description VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the displayed or configured interface Primary IP Address The Primary IP Address for the Interface IPv6 IPv6 is the next generatio
310. e order of specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to selected interface and direction Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 543 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IP Binding Table Use the IP Binding Table page to view or delete the IP ACL bindings To display the IP Binding Table click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt Binding Table NETGEAR GSM7352S ron Gisedi Lares 3 Moneged Siochobie Switch with 4 10 tocour IP ACL Binding Table IP ACL Binding Table p D Extended Rules IP Binding Configuration Binding Table The following table describes the information displayed in the MAC Binding Table To delete an IP ACL to interface binding select the check box next to the interface and click Delete Table 6 110 Fig escrito O O Interface Displays selected interface Direction Displays selected packet filtering direction for ACL ACL Type Displays the type of ACL assigned to selected interface and direction ACL ID Name Displays the ACL Number in the case of IP ACL or ACL Name in the case of ae IP ACL and IPv6 ACL identifying the ACL assigned to selected interface and direction Sequence Number Displays the Sequence Number signifying the order of specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to selected interface and direction 544 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable
311. e possible values are Enable or Disable 12 Use Port Mode to enable disable Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the port or port channel The possible values are Enable or Disable Table 3 56 Field Description Auto Calculated Port Path Cost Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated Enabled or not Disabled Path cost will be calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for Port Path Cost is zero Hello Timer Displays the value of the parameter for the CST Auto Calculated External Port Path Cost Displays whether the external path cost is automatically calculated Enabled or not Disabled External Path cost will be calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for External Port Path Cost is zero BPDU Guard Effect Display the BPDU Guard Effect it disables the edge ports that receive BPDU packets The possible values are Enable or Disable Port Forwarding State The Forwarding State of this port 160 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual CST Port Status Use the Spanning Tree CST Port Status page to display Common Spanning Tree CST and Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch To display the Spanning Tree CST Port Status page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt CST Port Status S da te oe pon
312. e routing interface The default base of the internal VLAN is 1 to 4093 2 Use the optional Internal VLAN Allocation Policy field to specify a policy for the internal VLAN allocation There are two policies supported ascending and descending VLAN Configuration 1 Use VLAN ID to specify the VLAN Identifier for the new VLAN The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093 2 Use the optional VLAN Name field to specify a name for the VLAN It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long including blanks The default is blank VLAN ID 1 always has a name of Default 3 Click ADD to add a new VLAN to the switch 4 Click DELETE to delete a selected VLAN from the switch Table 3 47 Field Description VLAN Type This field identifies the type of the VLAN you are configuring You cannot change the type of the default VLAN VLAN ID 1 it is always type Default When you create a VLAN using this screen its type will always be Static A VLAN that is created by GVRP registration initially has a type of Dynamic When configuring a Dynamic VLAN you can change its type to Static Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 133 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e VLAN Configuration on page 132 e VLAN Membership on page 136 e VLAN Status on page 138 e Port PVID Configuration on page 13
313. e same manner as multicast mode but uses a local broadcast address instead of a multicast address The broadcast address has a single subnet scope while a multicast address has Internet wide scope Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 39 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Default value is Disable 2 Use Port to specify the local UDP port to listen for responses broadcasts Allowed range is 1 to 65535 Default value is 123 3 Use Unicast Poll Interval to specify the number of seconds between unicast poll requests expressed as a power of two when configured in unicast mode Allowed range is 6 to 10 Default value is 6 4 Use Broadcast Poll Interval to specify the number of seconds between broadcast poll requests expressed as a power of two when configured in broadcast mode Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded Allowed range is 6 to 10 Default value is 6 5 Use Unicast Poll Timeout to specify the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP response when configured in unicast mode Allowed range is 1 to 30 Default value is 5 6 Use Unicast Poll Retry to specify the number of times to retry a request to an SNTP server after the first time out before attempting to use the next configured server when configured in unicast mode Allowed range is 0 to 10 Default value is 1 7 When using SNTP NTP time servers to update the switch s clock the time da
314. e system operation log The system operation log stores the last N messages received during system operation To access the Persistent Logs page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Persistent Logs NETGEAR sna cu 973525 ert Gigabit Lor ha gt Buffered Logs Persistent Logs gt Command Leg Persistent Logs Configuration gt Console Lee Admin Mote Confeguration Behavior gt Sys Log Configuration Messege Log Trap Logs gt Event Logs apama AA Tetel number of Messages lt 1 A log that is Disabled shall not log messages A log that is Enabled shall log messages Enable or Disable logging by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field 2 Behavior A log records messages equal to or above a configured severity threshold Select the severity option by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field These severity levels have been enumerated below Emergency 0 system is unusable Alert 1 action must be taken immediately Critical 2 critical conditions Error 3 error conditions Warning 4 warning conditions Notice 5 normal but significant conditions Informational 6 informational messages Debug 7 debug level messages 3 Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest messages in the persistent log 570 Chapter7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Format
315. e the MST values and click Add MST ID Specify the ID of the MST to create Valid values for this are between 1 and 4094 This is only visible when the select option of the MST ID select box is selected Priority Specifies the bridge priority value for the MST When switches or bridges are running STP each is assigned a priority After exchanging BPDUs the switch with the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096 If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096 the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096 For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095 it will be set to 0 The default priority is 32768 The valid range is O 61440 VLAN ID This gives a combo box of each VLAN on the switch These can be selected or unselected for re configuring the association of VLANs to MST instances To delete an MST instance select the check box next to the instance and click Delete To modify an MST instance select the check box next to the instance to configure update the values and click Apply You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 163 Tab ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches
316. e two possible power sources Main AC or RPS Threshold Power System can powerup one port if consumed power is less than this power i e Consumed power can be between Nominal and Threshold Power values The threshold power value is effected by changing System Usage Threshold Consumed Power Total amount of a power which is currently being delivered to all ports 88 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e PoE Configuration on page 89 e PoE Port Configuration on page 91 PoE Configuration Use the PoE Configuration page to view global PoE power information and to configure PoE SNMP trap settings To display this page click System gt PoE gt Advanced gt PoE Configuration A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR oaune 48 Port GE L2 Managed Stackable PoE Switch with 2 10GE SFP ports 1ocour PoE Configuration Unit Selection Ust Pot Configuration birmmare Version Power States Total Power main AC Total Power RPS Memor Sour Thewaheekd Pererer 1 Unit Displays the Current PoE Unit You can change the PoE Unit by selecting another unit ID listed here 2 Use System Usage Threshold to set a threshold level at which a trap is sent if consumed power is greater than threshold power 3 Use Power Management Mode to de
317. e valid values are from 1 to 20 The default value is 2 9 Use Last Member Query Interval to enter the last member query interval in tenths of a second This the maximum response time to be inserted into group specific queries sent in response to leave group messages and is also the amount of time between group specific query messages Valid values are from 0 to 255 The default value is 10 This value is not used for IGMP version 1 10 Use Last Member Query Count to enter the number of queries to be sent on receiving a leave group report Valid values are from 1 to 20 The default value is 2 348 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Routing Interface Statistics To display the IGMP Routing Interface Statistics page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt Routing Interface Statistics NETGEAR GSM7352S marj d apa tsitako som im a 10 apaa Se IGMP Routing Interlace Statistics ICMP Roasting trtertacn Statisti s va Vays vv um ver vw ven veu veri uw REBEBEBi BEES ECELE kikiki BGE Chapter 4 Routing 349 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 59 Fes escrito O O Interface The interface on which the IGMP is enabled IP Address The IP address of the selected interface Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the IP address of the selected interface Protocol Stat
318. ecause all of its default gateways are down The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity The number of IP datagrams successfully re assembled IpReasmFails IpFragOKs IpFragFails IpFragCreates IpRoutingDiscards The number of failures detected by the IP re assembly algorithm for whatever reason timed out errors etc Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be e g because their Don t Fragment flag was set The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity The number of routing entries which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up buffer space for other routing entries IcmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages which the entity received Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors Chapter 4 Routing 217 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed T
319. ected The switch supports only the Class Type value All which means all the various match criteria defined for the class should be satisfied for a packet match All signifies the logical AND of all the match criteria Only when a new class is created this field is a selector field After class creation this becomes a non configurable field displaying the configured class type 2 To rename an existing class select the check box next to the configured class update the name and click Apply 3 To remove a class click the check box beside the Class Name then click Delete Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch 5 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch After creating a Class click the class link to the Class page e 416 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure the class match criteria 1 Click the class name for an existing class tts a aad System Maintenance GSM73525 48 Port Gigabr Layer 3 Managed Srochable Swixh wah 4 10 Gigabit Store voeour The class name is a hyperlink The following figure shows the configuration fields for the class NETGEAR Service Interface Configuration Service Statabes Class Configuration Class Information Clase Nare Class Tyee DilfSe
320. ed ment hester beta morcegos ao awed HMO e Bester Revertinement Messogrs hei ered LCM Oye Menghbne eht Messepes Rec ered 16a mergiber Rivertiewment Mestages Re awed PLN e6 Reteert Messages Reread 1M ee Lemme Merntnersty Geary Mecteges Ran smed PMO O Lene Member whey Nespmnse Merteges Ber ered LMP ee Lemme Meente sia Medes thes Meceeges Ca emed Fetal ICMP et Meveeges Namemetted LIMOS Resceges Bet Troremtted Ime Te Freee TMD Ve Deetmetine meee hobis Mecteges T onermattad FINO 6e Mevceges Prottetead Aimenntretionty Iremaemttad FLW We tane es eeded Messages Inemeenattod peua Poremeter ebien Messages tsenamethed Lee Packer tee Dg Meseeges Irecseumted M mena tiho Request Mesneger Memnmetter 1 MOO Coho Rept Mescogas trememetted HeLa hester tote Morcegos Irecermatiod VME ee Baster Adeerteermant Messages To ememetind FLO Menghen eked Mevsepes 1 emmmntted ULM ee Meeghbns RMdvertawerent Messages 1 onsi t at PLM ee Retort Messages Nrecemmod LO ee Crome Memberthy Qeery Mestages anermarted 1 Mee Comes Merberthy Meaposce Messages Trememtred LCM ee orome Merterehee Medes tens Menceges Irememetted EMO ee Degte ate Ratrwen Outen te 1 Use Interface to select the interface to be configured When the selection is changed a screen refresh will occur causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected port 238 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Stat
321. ed as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic Rules for the IP ACL are specified created using the IP ACL Rule Configuration menu To display the IPv6 ACL page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IPv6 ACL NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Stackable Managed Swich with 2 286 SPP Porte ndex Losout Advanced gt IP ACL IP Rules IP Extended Rules Maximum ACL PPv ACL fPv Rules IPv6 ACL Table IP Binding Cenfiguratien Binding Table Vian Binding Table IPv6 Configuration Current Nember of ACL IPvt ACL 1 IP ACL is the IP ACL ID or IP ACL Name which is dependent on the IP ACL Type IP ACL ID must be an integer from 1 to 99 for an IP basic ACL and from 100 to 199 for an IP Extended ACL IPv6 ACL Name string includes alphanumeric characters only The name must start with an alphabetic character 2 Click ADD to add a new IP ACL to the switch configuration 3 Click DELETE to remove the currently selected IP ACL from the switch configuration Table 7 Field Description The current number of the IP ACLs configured on the switch The maximum number of IP ACL can be configured on the switch it depends on the hardware Rules The number of the rules associated with the IP ACL Type The the ACL type basic IP ACL with id from 1 to 99 and Extended IP ACL with id from 100 to 199 538 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3
322. ed that were between 1519 and 2047 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 2048 and 4095 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 4096 and 9216 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization If greater precision is desired the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval Packets Received 64 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 552 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System Table 7 112 Field ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Description Packets Received 65 127 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 128 255 Octets The total number of packets includi
323. ed by the authenticator state machine on this port to determine when reauthentication of the supplicant takes place The reauthentication period must be a value in the range of 1 and 65535 The default value is 3600 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed e User Privileges This select field allows the user to add the specified user to the list of users with access to the specified port or all ports e Max Users This field allows the user to enter the limit to the number of supplicants on the specified interface 3 Click INITIALIZE to begin the initialization sequence on the selected port This button is only selectable if the control mode is auto If the button is not selectable it will be grayed out Once this button is pressed the action is immediate It is not required to press the APPLY button for the action to occur 4 Click REAUTHENTICATE to begin the reauthentication sequence on the selected port This button is only selectable if the control mode is auto If the button is not selectable it will be grayed out Once this button is pressed the action is immediate It is not required to press the APPLY button for the action to occur Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 475 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Port Summary Use the Port Summary page to view information about the port access control settings ona specific por
324. ed on this port Table 3 53 Field Description S OSOS Configuration digest key Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used MST ID Table consisting of the MST instances including the CST and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them VID ID Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID associated with each of them FID ID Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them 154 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e STP Configuration on page 155 e CST Configuration on page 157 e CST Port Configuration on page 159 e CST Port Status on page 161 e MST Configuration on page 163 e MST Port Status on page 165 e STP Statistics on page 167 STP Configuration The Spanning Tree Configuration Status page contains fields for enabling STP on the switch To display the Spanning Tree Configuration Status page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt STP Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 8 Por Giger Layer 3 Monaged Stackable Switch wah 4 10 Gigabit Slon socout gt Gask STP Configuration v Advanced STP Configuration STP Configuraten CST Configuration Speening Tree Admin Mode CST Port Forse Protec al Version Configuratcn CST Port Status M
325. ed or Disabled The default value is Enabled 2 Use Timer to specify the period of time between sending new ISDP packets The range is 5 to 254 seconds Default value is 30 seconds 3 Use Hold Time to specify the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits The hold time specifies how long a receiving device should store information sent in the ISDP packet before discarding it The range 10 to 255 seconds Default value is 180 seconds 4 Use Version 2 Advertisements to enable or disable the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device The default value is Enabled 124 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the ISDP Advanced Global Configuration fields Table 2 44 Field Neighbors table last time changed Description Displays when the Neighbors table last changed Device ID Displays the device ID of this switch Device ID format capability Device ID format Displays the device ID format capability Displays the device ID format Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 125 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Interface Configuration To display this page click System gt ISDP gt Advanced gt Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525 40 Pert Gog Lapor 3 Atenaged
326. ed protocol The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re assembly lplnDelivers lpOutRequests The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols including ICMP The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user protocols including ICMP supplied to IP in requests for transmission Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams 216 Chapter 4 Routing Table 8 Field ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Description IpOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this discretionary discard criterion IpOutNoRoutes IpReasmTimeout lpReasmReqds IpReasmOKs The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams which meet this no route criterion Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route b
327. ee Mok aie ae reece eed 617 802 1X Example Configuration 2 064 inerraseeP cde d acne hence ad 619 MST 2522658 aae idee oped does aed pene ga cued pee 620 MSTP Example Configuration 0 0 00 0 sirsa nage niis 621 Appendix Notification of Compliance Contents 7 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Index 8 Contents Getting Started This chapter provides an overview of starting your NETGEAR ProSafe Managed Switches and accessing the user interface This chapter contains the following sections e Switch Management Interface on page 9 e Web Access on page 9 e Web Access on page 9 e Understanding the User Interfaces on page 10 Interface Naming Convention on page 18 Switch Management Interface The NETGEAR ProSafe Managed Switches contain an embedded Web server and management software for managing and monitoring switch functions ProSafe Managed Switches function as simple switches without the management software However you can use the management software to configure more advanced features that can improve switch efficiency and overall network performance Web based management lets you monitor configure and control your switch remotely using a standard Web browser instead of using expensive and complicated SNMP software products From your Web browser you can monitor the performance of your switch and optimize its configuration for your network You can c
328. eee eee EE CP Ending Corfiguration CP Binding Table CP User Configuration CP Greup Corfou aon CP User CP Trap Flags CP Chert NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pert Gigedit Lore 2 Moreged Stackable Switch with 4 19 Gigabit Slots System Switching Routing Securs Monitoring Maintenonce tocour gt DHCP Smooping gt IP Source Guard gt Dynamic ARP Inspection Session event ty Captive Portal Growp Timeout Tina Bandwssth Bandwidth Max Input Max Output Max Total CP Global 1 1 J 1 Ue J Corfiguraton gt nie ee eee eee CF tending Cortiguraton CP Binding Table rO Grea Corfou aron O User CP Trap Flags 520 Chapter6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 10 11 12 13 User ID identifies the name of the user Use User Name to enter the name of the user Name can contain 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters User names once created cannot be changed modified Set Edit Password to Enable only when you want to change the password The default value is Disable Use Password to enter a password for the user The password length can be from 8 to 64 characters Use Confirm Password to enter the password for the user again Use Group to assign the user to at least one User Group To assign a user to more than one group press the Ctrl key and click each group New users are assigned to the 1 Default u
329. een create a new policy with the following settings e Policy Selector Policy1 e Member Class Class1 For more information about this screen see Policy Configuration on page 5 420 Click Add to add the new policy Click the Policy1 hyperlink to view the Policy Class Configuration screen for this policy Configure the Policy attributes as follows e Assign Queue 3 e Policy Attribute Simple Policy e Color Mode Color Blind e Committed Rate 1000000 Kbps e Committed Burst Size 128 KB e Confirm Action Send e Violate Action Drop For more information about this screen see Policy Configuration on page 5 420 From the Service Configuration screen select the check box next to interfaces g7 and g8 to attach the policy to these interfaces and then click Apply See Service Interface Configuration on page 5 424 616 Appendix B Configuration Examples ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual All UDP packet flows destined to the 192 12 2 0 network with an IP source address from the 192 12 1 0 network that have a Layer 4 Source port of 4567 and Destination port of 4568 from this switch on ports 7 and 8 are assigned to hardware queue 3 On this network traffic from streaming applications uses UDP port 4567 as the source and 4568 as the destination This real time traffic is time sensitive so it is assigned to a high priority hardware queue By default data traffic u
330. electing Enable or Disable from the pull down menu If you select enable the Community Name must be unique among all valid Community Names or the set request will be rejected If you select disable the Community Name will become invalid 6 Click ADD to add the currently selected community to the switch 7 Click DELETE to delete the currently selected Community Name Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 95 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Trap Configuration This page displays an entry for every active Trap Receiver To access this page click System gt SNMP gt SNMP V1 V2 gt Trap Configuration GSM7352S or gt tanned 1 To add a host that will receive SNMP traps enter trap configuration information in the available fields described below and then click Add a Community Name Enter the community string for the SNMP trap packet to be sent to the trap manager This may be up to 16 characters and is case sensitive b Version Select the trap version to be used by the receiver from the pull down menu e SNMP v1 Uses SNMP v1 to send traps to the receiver e SNMP v2 Uses SNMP v2 to send traps to the receiver c Protocol Select the protocol to be used by the receiver from the pull down menu Select the IPv4 if the receiver s address is IPv4 address or IPv6 if the receiver s address is IPv6 d Address Enter the IPv4 address in x x x x format or IPv6 add
331. em Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To display the Stack Configuration page click System gt Stacking gt Basic gt Stack Configuration A screen similar to the following displays IOO POET de moiset Pete Oat Bene mt FLEET FPS eee A Same poan ee eee TSE 1 Use Management Unit Selected to select the unit to be managed unit and click APPLY to move the management to the selected unit 2 Unit ID displays the list of units of the stack Details of the selected unit are displayed There is also an ADD option visible only to Admin users which can be used to pre configure new members of the stack 3 Use Switch Type to specify the type of switch hardware when creating a new switch in the stack 4 Admin Management Preference is a 2 byte field that indicates whether the administrator wants this unit to become a management unit in preference to another unit The default value for this setting is one If the preference level is set to zero then the device cannot become a management unit This field is non configurable for users with read only access 5 Click ADD to add a unit to the stack with the specific switch type 6 Click DELETE to remove the selected unit from the stack Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 81 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the Stack Configuration fields Table 2 27
332. em SNTP Global Configuration Inforenatoon SNTP Global Configuration Switch Statistics System Resource Cheat Mode Stot information fon Loophack Ure ast Pol interval Intertace Network Intartaca Vestee Tt ow Teme June Meme Brosdrest Pell Interval Ur eet Pell Fimea Ure ost Pell Retry Offeet Hours BNT Serwer Off ewt Manuten SNTP Global States Vereen Supported Mose Lest Updete Time kesi Attempt Tene Leet Attempt 5tstwe herves IP Adiross Address Tyee Server Straten Relerence Chock le Berve Mode Veer ost Berver Man tetries Vowcest Server Current Catrien Broad sst Count SNTP Global Configuration SNTP stands for Simple Network Time Protocol As its name suggests it is a less complicated version of Network Time Protocol which is a system for synchronizing the clocks of networked computer systems primarily when data transfer is handled via the Internet 1 Use Client Mode to specify the mode of operation of SNTP Client An SNTP client may operate in one of the following modes e Disable SNTP is not operational No SNTP requests are sent from the client nor are any received SNTP messages processed e Unicast SNTP operates in a point to point fashion A unicast client sends a request to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can determine the time and optionally the round trip delay and local clock offset relative to the server Broadcast SNTP operates in th
333. emote Port ID Specifies the port component associated with the remote system 112 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LLDP MED From the LLDP MED link you can access the following pages e LLDP MED Global Configuration on page 113 e LLDP MED Interface Configuration on page 115 e LLDP MED Local Device Information on page 116 e LLDP MED Remote Device Information on page 118 e LLDP MED Remote Device Inventory on page 121 LLDP MED Global Configuration Use the LLDP MED Global Configuration page to specify LLDP MED parameters that are applied to the switch To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525S 48 Port Gigabit bere 2 Managed Srochable Switch with 4 19 Gigabit Slots vooour LLDP MED Global Configuration Global Configuration Fest Mart Kepeet Count Dewtee Class 1 Use Fast Start Repeat Count to specify the number of LLDP PDUs that will be transmitted when the protocol is enabled The range is from 1 to 10 Default value of fast repeat count is 3 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 113 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the LLDP MED Global Configuration fields Table 2 38 Fig escrito O O Device Class Specifies local device
334. en click Apply See MAC Binding Configuration on page 6 528 You can assign an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list relative to other access lists if any are already assigned to this interface and direction 4 The MAC Binding Table displays the interface and MAC ACL binding information See MAC Binding Table on page 6 530 The ACL named Sales_ACL looks for Ethernet frames with destination and source MAC addresses and MAC masks defined in the rule Also the frame must be tagged with VLAN ID 2 which is the Sales department VLAN The CoS value of the frame must be 0 which is the default value for Ethernet frames Frames that match this criteria are permitted on interfaces Appendix B ConfigurationExamples 611 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 6 7 and 8 and are assigned to the hardware egress queue 0 which is the default queue All other traffic is explicitly denied on these interfaces To allow additional traffic to enter these ports you must add a new permit rule with the desired match criteria and bind the rule to interfaces 6 7 and 8 Standard IP ACL Example Configuration The following example shows how to create an IP based ACL that prevents any IP traffic from the Finance department from being allowed on the ports that are associated with other departments Traffic from the Finance department is identified by each packet s network IP
335. ent to all the ports on a single switch When you use a VLAN users can be grouped by logical function instead of physical location Each VLAN in a network has an associated VLAN ID which appears in the IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN An end station may omit the tag or the VLAN portion of the tag in which case the first switch port to receive the packet may either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID A given port may handle traffic for more than one VLAN but it can only support one default VLAN ID From the VLAN link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 131 e Advanced on page 134 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 130 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e VLAN Configuration on page 132 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 131 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual VLAN Configuration Use the VLAN Configuration page to define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership table Each switch in the ProSafe Managed Switches family supports up to 1024 VLANs Only one VLAN is created by default VLAN 1 is the only one created VLAN 1 is the default VLAN of which all ports are members To display the VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Basic gt VLAN Configuration N
336. entered Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 47 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Host Configuration Use this page to manually map host names to IP addresses or to view dynamic DNS mappings To access this page click System gt Management gt DNS gt Host Configuration NETGEAR GSM73525 Sb Port Gigabit ayer 2 Mesoped Seckable Switch with 4 1OGigabet Slon 1osour gt System DNS Host Configuration Information Switch Statistics System Resource Slot Information DNS Host Configuration To add a static entry to the local DNS table 1 Specify the static host name to add Its length can not exceed 255 characters and it is a mandatory field for the user 2 Specify the IP address in standard IPv4 dot notation to associate with the hostname 3 Click Add The entry appears in the list below 4 To remove an entry from the static DNS table select the check box next to the entry and click Delete 5 To change the hostname or IP address in an entry select the check box next to the entry and enter the new information in the appropriate field and then click Apply 6 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 48 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The Dynamic Host Ma
337. entered into the forwarding database By specifying the preference of a static route the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination 208 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest learned routes Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e Route Configuration on page 209 e Route Preferences on page 212 Route Configuration To display the Route Configuration page click Routing gt Routing Table gt Advanced gt Route Configuration GSM7352S is Seah Sam 6 1b Giger Bem Chapter 4 Routing 209 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Route Configuration 1 Use the Route Type field to specify default or static If creating a default route all that needs to be specified is the next hop IP address otherwise each field needs to be specified Network Address displays the IP route prefix for the destination Subnet Mask indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network This is also referred to as the subnet network mask Next Hop IP Address displays the outgoing router IP address to use when forw
338. ently in use for this interface and direction will be used The valid range is 1 4294967295 3 Click the appropriate orange bar to expose the available ports or LAGs The Port Selection Table provides a list of all available valid interfaces for ACL binding All non routing physical interfaces vlan interface and interfaces participating in LAGs are listed e To add the selected ACL to a port or LAG click the box directly below the port or LAG number so that an X appears in the box e To remove the selected ACL from a port or LAG click the box directly below the port or LAG number to clear the selection An X in the box indicates that the ACL is applied to the interface 4 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click Apply to save any changes to the running configuration Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 529 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MAC Binding Table Use the MAC Binding Table page to view or delete the MAC ACL bindings To display the MAC Binding Table click Security gt ACL gt Basic gt Binding Table GSM7352S a 10 Ogia thers MAC Binding Table MAC finding Table The following table describes the information displayed in the MAC Binding Table To delete a MAC ACL to interface binding select the check box next to the interface and click Delete Table 6
339. enu to download a file to the switch from a USB device To display this page click Maintenance gt Download gt USB File Download NETGEAR GSM7352S ort Gipabm Layer 3 Stackable Managed Switch with 2 166 SIPs Ports socour gt File Download Download File From USB gt HTTP File Download USt File Downlond Fe Tvee Image Name Download File From USB USO File 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to transfer a Use Archive to specify archive STK code when you want to download to the operational flash e Image1 Specify the code image1 when you want to download e Image2 Specify the code image2 when you want to download b Use Text Configuration to specify configuration in text mode when you want to update the switch s configuration If the file has errors the update will be stopped The factory default is Image1 2 Use USB File to specify a name along with path for the file you want to download You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank 3 Download Status displays the status during transfer file to the switch 4 The last row of the table is used to display information about the progress of the file transfer The screen will refresh automatically until the file transfer completes File Management The system maintains two versions of the ProSafe Managed Switches software in permanent storage One image is the active image and the second image is the backup im
340. eout Specify how many minutes of inactivity should occur on a serial port connection before the switch closes the connection Enter a number between 0 and 160 the factory default is 5 Entering 0 disables the timeout 3 Click Apply to send the updated screen to the switch and cause the changes to take effect on the switch These changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 21 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the status information the System Page displays Table 2 1 Field Description OOOO OSOS Product Name The product name of this switch IPv4 Network Interface The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the network interface IPv6 Network Interface The IPv6 prefix and prefix length assigned to the network interface IPv4 Loopback Interface The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the loopback interface IPv6 Loopback Interface The IPv6 prefix and prefix length assigned to the loopback interface System Date The current date System Up time The time in days hours and minutes since the last switch reboot System SNMP OID The base object ID for the switch s enterprise MIB System Mac Address Universally assigned network address Supported Java Plugin Version The supported version of Java plugin 22 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information Pro
341. er 5 Configuring Quality of Service 405 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Interface Queue Configuration Use the Interface Queue Configuration page to define what a particular queue does by configuring switch egress queues User configurable parameters control the amount of bandwidth used by the queue the queue depth during times of congestion and the scheduling of packet transmission from the set of all queues on a port Each port has its own CoS queue related configuration The configuration process is simplified by allowing each CoS queue parameter to be configured globally or per port A global configuration change is automatically applied to all ports in the system To display the Interface Queue Configuration page click the QoS gt CoS gt Advanced gt Interface Queue Configuration NETGEAR GSM73525S 48 Pert Gigabst Layer I Managed Srechable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Sere vosour Interface Queue Configuration Interface Queue Configuration CoS Configuration 02 10 Queve 1 all Go To Intestace Maceng gt IF OSCE Queue Interface Macpng CoS irterface Configuartion interfece Queue Cantiguraten O a o o o o g J 3 a Oo O i g gogog 406 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure CoS queue settings for an int
342. er in which they were added to the policy A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found To display the DiffServ Configuration page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Basic gt DiffServ Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Menoged Srechable Switch wah 4 10 Gigabir Siete vocout gt Olffsery Wizard Diffserv Configuration gt Auto VolP our Contig Oil fers Adron Made gt Advanced 412 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 5 75 Field Description DiffServ Admin Mode The options mode for DiffServ The default value is enable While disabled the DiffServ configuration is retained when saved and can be changed but it is not activated When enabled Diffserv services are activated Class table Displays the number of configured DiffServ classes out of the total allowed on the switch Class Rule table Displays the number of configured class rules out of the total allowed on the switch Policy table Policy Instance table Policy Attributes table Service table Displays the number of configured policies out of the total allowed on the switch Displays the number of configured policy class instances out of the total allowed on the switch Displays the number of configured policy attributes attached to the policy class instanc
343. er of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval By Default Rate limit is 100 packets sec i e burst interval is 1000 msec To disable ICMP Ratelimiting set this field to 0 Valid Rate Interval must be in the range 0 to 2147483647 Use ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval By Default burst size is 100 packets When burst interval is 0 then configuring this field is not a valid operation Valid Burst Size must be in the range 1 to 200 Table 9 Field Default Time to Live Description The default value inserted into the Time To Live field Maximum Next Hops The maximum number of hops supported by the of the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch if a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol switch This is a compile time constant Chapter 4 Routing 221 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IP Statistics The statistics reported on this screen are as specified in RFC 1213 To display the IP Statistics page click Routing gt IP gt Advanced gt IP Statistics IP Statistics IP Statistics IpInReceves IpInt rErrors IpInAddrErrors IpForwDatagrams IpInUeknownProtos IpinDiecerds IptnDelwers TompInMegs lompintrror LomplnDestUnreachs lomplatimel xeds TempInParmPrabs TompinSecQuenchs TompInRedirects TompInEch
344. erface 1 Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure You can select multiple ports and LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces Select the check box in the heading row to apply a trust mode or rate to all interfaces 2 Configure any of the following settings e Queue ID Use the menu to select the queue to be configured platform based Use Minimum Bandwidth to specify the minimum guaranteed bandwidth allotted to this queue Setting this value higher than its corresponding Maximum Bandwidth automatically increases the maximum to the same value Default value is 0 Valid Range is 0 to 100 in increments of 1 The value 0 means no guaranteed minimum Sum of individual Minimum Bandwidth values for all queues in the selected interface cannot exceed defined maximum 100 e Use Scheduler Type to specify the type of scheduling used for this queue Options are Weighted and Strict Defining on a per queue basis allows the user to create the desired service characteristics for different types of traffic e Weighted Weighted round robin associates a weight to each queue This is the default e Strict Services traffic with the highest priority on a queue first 3 Queue Management Type displays the Queue depth management technique used for queues on this interface This is only used if device supports independent settings per queue Queue Management Type can only be taildrop All packets on a queue are safe u
345. eries received Report Received The number of MLD Proxy reports received Reports Sent The number of MLD Proxy reports sent Leaves Received The number of MLD Proxy leaves received Leaves Sent The number of MLD Proxy leaves sent Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest MLD Proxy interface statistics 394 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD Proxy Membership To display the MLD Proxy Membership page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast MLD gt Proxy Membership GSM73525S IA 7 gt iry 2 Managed Grgas Shem abet MLD Proxy Membership MLD Proxy Membership Chapter 4 Routing 395 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 82 Fes escrito O O Group IP The IPv6 multicast group address Source Hosts This parameter shows source addresses which are members of this multicast address Last Reporter The IPv6 address of the source of the last membership report received for the IPv6 Multicast group address on the MLD Proxy interface Up Time Expiry Time Filter Mode The time elapsed since this entry was created This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address which is a member of this multicast group This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out The state of the host entry A Host can be in
346. es network resources are apportioned based on traffic classification and priority giving preferential treatment to data with strict timing requirements Gigabit L3 switches support DiffServ The DiffServ feature contains a number of conceptual QoS building blocks you can use to construct a differentiated service network Use these same blocks in different ways to build other types of QoS architectures There are 3 key QoS building blocks needed to configure DiffServ e Class e Policy e Service i e the assignment of a policy to a directional interface Class You can classify incoming packets at layers 2 3 and 4 by inspecting the following information for a packet e Source destination MAC address e EtherType e Class of Service 802 1p priority value first only VLAN tag e VLAN ID range first only VLAN tag e Secondary 802 1p priority value second inner VLAN tag e Secondary VLAN ID range second inner VLAN tag Appendix B Configuration Examples 613 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e IP Service Type octet also known as ToS bits Precedence value DSCP value e Layer 4 protocol TCP UDP etc e Layer 4 source destination ports Source destination IP address From a DiffServ point of view there are two types of classes e DiffServ traffic classes e DiffServ service levels forwarding classes DiffServ Traffic Classes With DiffServ you define which traffic
347. es out of the total allowed on the switch Displays the number of configured services attached to the policies on specified interfaces out of the total allowed on the switch Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 413 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced e Diffserv Configuration on page 414 e Class Configuration on page 416 e Policy Configuration on page 420 e Service Interface Configuration on page 424 e Service Statistics on page 425 Diffserv Configuration Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria The filtering criteria is defined by aclass The processing is defined by a policy s attributes Policy attributes may be defined on a per class instance basis and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class Then one or more classes are added to a policy Policies are then added to interfaces Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet The all class type option defines that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class The any class type option defines that at least one match criteria must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class Classes are tested in the order in which they were added to the policy A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within tha
348. es in the Web interface Table 1 Button Function Add Clicking Add adds the new item configured in the heading row of a table Apply Clicking the Apply button sends the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Cancel Clicking Cancel cancels the configuration on the screen and resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Delete Clicking Delete removes the selected item Refresh Clicking the Refresh button refreshes the page with the latest information from the device Logout Clicking the Logout button ends the session Chapter 1 Getting Started 13 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Device View The Device View is a Java applet that displays the ports on the switch This graphic provides an alternate way to navigate to configuration and monitoring options The graphic also provides information about device ports current configuration and status table information and feature components The Device View is available from the System gt Device View page The port coloring indicates whether a port is currently active Green indicates that the port is enabled red indicates that an error has occurred on the port or red indicates that the link is disabled The Device View of the switch is shown below GSM7352S 46 Fort gebit Ley er J Stackedle Mereged Switch with 2 106 SFP4 Poets NETGEAR Monitorin
349. es to be redistributed by the destination protocol Only permitted routes are redistributed If this command refers to a non existent access list all routes are permitted The valid values for Access List IDs are 1 to 199 When used for route filtering the only fields in an access list that get used are e Source IP Address and netmask e Destination IP Address and netmask Action permit or deny All other fields source and destination port precedence tos etc are ignored Chapter 4 Routing 265 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The source IP address is compared to the destination IP address of the route The source IP netmask in the access list rule is treated as a wildcard mask indicating which bits in the source IP address must match the destination address of the route Note that a 1 in the mask indicates a don t care in the corresponding address bit When an access list rule includes a destination IP address and netmask an extended access list the destination IP address is compared to the network mask of the destination of the route The destination netmask in the access list serves as a wildcard mask indicating which bits in the route s destination mask are significant for the filtering operation RIP Route Redistribution Summary This screen displays the RIP Route Redistribution Configurations Table 27 Field Description Source The Source R
350. esponding radio button Behavior Indicates the behavior of the log when it is full It can either wrap around or stop when the log space is filled Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest messages in the log Click CLEAR to clear the buffered log in the memory Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 561 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Message Log This help message applies to the format of all logged messages which are displayed for the message log persistent log or console log Format of the messages Messages logged to a collector or relay via syslog have an identical format of either type If system is not stacked e lt 15 gt Aug 24 05 34 05 STKO MSTP 21 10 mspt_api c 318 237 Interface 12 transitioned to root state on message age timer expiry The above example indicates a message with severity 7 15 mod 8 debug on a system that is not stack and generated by component MSTP running in thread id 2110 on Aug 24 05 34 05 by line 318 of file mstp_api c This is the 237th message logged If the system is stacked e lt 15 gt Aug 24 05 34 05 0 0 0 0 1 MSTP 2110 mspt_api c 318 237 Interface 12 transitioned to root state on message age timer expiry The above example indicates a message with severity 7 15 mod 8 debug on a system that is stacked and generated by component MSTP running in thread id 2110 on Aug 24 05 34 05 by line 318 of file mstp_api c Th
351. ess and netmask e Action permit or deny All other fields source and destination port precedence tos and so on are ignored Chapter 4 Routing 295 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The source IP address is compared to the destination IP address of the route The source IP netmask in the access list rule is treated as a wildcard mask indicating which bits in the source IP address must match the destination address of the route Note that a 1 in the mask indicates a don t care in the corresponding address bit When an access list rule includes a destination IP address and netmask an extended access list the destination IP address is compared to the network mask of the destination of the route The destination netmask in the access list serves as a wildcard mask indicating which bits in the route s destination mask are significant for the filtering operation OSPFv3 OSPF v3 is the Open Shortest Path First routing protocol for IPv6 It is similar to OSPF v2 in its concept of a link state database intra inter area and AS external routes and virtual links It differs from its IPv4 counterpoint in a number of respects including the following peering is done via link local addresses the protocol is link based rather than network based and addressing semantics have been moved to leaf LSAs which eventually allow its use for both IPv4 and IPv6 Point to point links are also suppo
352. ess field to input the secondary IP address for this interface in dotted decimal notation This input field is visible only when Add Secondary is selected This option only visible when IPv4 loopback is selected 6 Use the Secondary Subnet Mask field to input the secondary subnet mask for this interface in dotted decimal notation This input field is visible only when Add Secondary is selected This option only visible when IPv4 loopback is selected 7 Use the IPv6 Mode field to enable IPv6 on this interface using the IPv6 address This option is only configurable prior to specifying an explicit IPv6 address This option only visible when IPv6 loopback is selected 8 Use the IPv6 Address field to enter the IPv6 address in the format prefix length This option only visible when IPv6 loopback is selected 9 Use the EUI64 field to optionally specify the 64 bit extended unique identifier EUI 64 This option only visible when IPv6 loopback is selected 32 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Network Interface From the Network Interface link you can access the following pages e Pv4 Network Configuration on page 33 e Pv6 Network Configuration on page 35n e Pv6 Network Neighbor on page 37 IPv4 Network Configuration To display the IPv4 Network Configuration page click System gt Management gt Network Interface gt IPv4 Network C
353. ess or IP Mask value is 0 0 0 0 access is allowed from any IP address Otherwise every client s address is ANDed with the mask as is the Client Address and if the values are equal access is allowed For example if the Client Address and Client IP Mask parameters are 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 then any client whose address is 192 168 1 0 through 192 168 1 255 inclusive will be allowed access To allow access from only one station use a Client IP Mask value of 255 255 255 255 and use that machine s IP address for Client Address 3 Client IP Mask Taken together the Client Address and Client IP Mask denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access this device If either Client Address or IP Mask value is 0 0 0 0 access is allowed from any IP address Otherwise every client s address is ANDed with the mask as is the Client Address and if the values are equal access is allowed For example if the Client Address and Client IP Mask parameters are 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 then any client whose IP address is 192 168 1 0 through 192 168 1 255 inclusive will be allowed access To allow access from only one station use a Client IP Mask value of 255 255 255 255 and use that machine s IP address for Client Address 4 Use Access Mode to specify the access level for this community by selecting Read Write or Read Only from the pull down menu 5 Use Status to specify the status of this community by s
354. estination layer 4 ports from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the unnamed ports IP DSCP This lists the keywords for the known DSCP values from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the remaining values 418 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Precedence Value This lists the keywords for the IP Precedence value in the range 0 to 7 e IP ToS Configure the IP ToS field e TOS Bits This is the Type of Service octet value in the range 00 to ff to compare against e ToS Mask This indicates which ToS bits are subject to comparison against the Service Type value 5 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 6 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 419 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Policy Configuration Use the Policy Configuration page to associate a collection of classes with one or more policy statements After creating a Policy click the policy link to the Policy page To display the page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Advanced gt Policy Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pert Gigabe Layer snonnged Srechable Sw
355. etgear com To connect to the NETGEAR support site for ProSafe Managed Switches click Apply Chapter9 Help 602 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual User Guide Use the User Guide page to access the ProSafe Managed Switch the guide you are now reading that is available on the NETGEAR Website To access the User Guide page click Help gt Online Help gt User Guide NETGEAR GSM7352S anec wits f 48 Port Gigabit Loyer J Mo neged Srockable Switch with 4 10 Gigobir Slots Index soot S Switching User Guide User Guide Please click APPLY below to view the POF User Guide You will need Adobe Acrobat Reader to view the Guide To access to the User Guide that is available online click Apply Chapter 9 Help 603 Default Settings This appendix describes the default settings for many of the NETGEAR 7000 series Managed Switch software features Table 9 Default Settings Feature Default IP address 169 254 100 100 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Protocol DHCP Management VLAN ID Minimum password length 1 8 characters IPv6 management mode Enabled SNTP client Enabled SNTP server time d netgear com Global logging Enabled CLI command logging Disabled Console logging RAM logging Persistent FLASH logging Enabled Severity level debug and above Enabled Severity level debug and above Disabled DNS En
356. etwork LSAs for those networks This value represents the number of LSAs originated by this router LSAs Received The number of LSAs link state advertisements received that were determined to be new instantiations This number does not include newer instantiations of self originated LSAs Chapter 4 Routing 301 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Common Area Configuration Use the Common Area Configuration page to create and configure an OSPF v3 area To display the Common Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Common Area Configuration 48 Pon Gigabit Layer J Managed thochable Switch with 4 10 Cagabe tom NETGEAR GSM7352S Monitoring Maintenance Help Index sooowt Common Area Configuration OSPT v3 Common Area Configuration Summary LSA s Configuration NSSA Aree 0 0 0 0 impon External LSAs Onginate and erepepate summary LSAs Configuranon Ares Range Configuration imerfoce Configurator Interface Statetics Negba Table Unk State Database Virtual Lak Configuration Route Redstrdvton 1 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects 2 Click ADD to configure the area as a common area 3 Click DELETE to delete the common area 302 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe G
357. eways this counter will include only those packets which were Source Routed via this entity and the Source Route option processing was successful IpInUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol IpInDiscards IpInDelivers The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re assembly The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols including ICMP lpOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user protocols including ICMP supplied to IP in requests for transmission Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams Chapter 4 Routing 223 Table 10 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Field Description IpOutDiscards IpOutNoRoutes The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this discretionary discard criterion The number of IP da
358. f the server being added Use Port to specify the UDP port used by this server The valid range is 0 65535 Secret Configured The Secret will only be applied if this option is yes If the option is no anything entered in the Secret field will have no affect and will not be retained Use Secret to specify the shared secret for this server Use Primary Server to set the selected server to the Primary or Secondary server Use Message Authenticator to enable or disable the message authenticator attribute for the selected server 2 Click ADD to add a new server to the switch This button is only available to READWRITE users These changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed 3 Click DELETE to remove the selected server from the configuration This button is only available to READWRITE users These changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed Table 6 82 Field Description Current Indicates if this server is currently in use as the authentication server Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 435 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the RADIUS server statistics available on the page Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions e Click Clear Counters to clear the authentication server and RADIUS statistics to their default values Ta
359. fServ gt Advanced gt Service Statistics GSM7352S NETGEAR 48 Pert Gigabit Leyes 2 Moneged Srechable Switch with 4 10 Cigebit Sors socourt gt Olftsery Wizard Service Statistics gt Ate VolP Statistics Type Selection gt Basic v Advanced Counter Mode Sede tur OfServ Configuration Service Statistics Class Configurator Pobcy Configuration Service eterfoce interface Direction POMCY Operational Member Offered Discarded Sent Name Status Glasses Packets Octets Packets Octets Packets Octets Search ty Ceehgurabon Servce Rotate ir etan Counter Mode Selector specifies the format of the displayed counter values which must be either Octets or Packets The default is Octets Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 425 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the information available on the Service Statistics page Table 5 79 Fig escrito O O Interface List of all valid slot number and port number combinations in the system that have a DiffServ policy currently attached in In direction Direction List of the traffic direction of interface as In Only shows the direction s for which a DiffServ policy is currently attached Policy Name Name of the policy currently attached to the specified interface and direction Operational Status Operational status of the policy currently attached to the
360. face Chapter 4 Routing 287 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual OSPF Neighbor Table This screen displays the OSPF neighbor table list When a particular neighbor ID is specified detailed information about a neighbor is given The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled To display the OSPF Neighbor Table page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt OSPF Neighbor Table GSM73525 Table 34 Field Description Displays the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured Slot 0 is the base unit Router ID A 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format representing the neighbor interface Neighbor IP Address The IP address of the neighboring router s interface to the attached network It is used as the destination IP address when protocol packets are sent as unicasts along this adjacency Also used in router LSAs as the Link ID for the attached network if the neighboring router is selected to be designated router The Neighbor IP address is learned when Hello packets are received from the neighbor For virtual links the Neighbor IP address is learned during the routing table build process The area ID of the OSPF area associated with the interface Options An integer value that indicates the optional OSPF capabilities supported by the neighbor The neighbor s optional OSPF capabilities are also listed in its Hello packets This
361. fault value is 110 The range is 1 to 255 The OSPF specification RFC 2328 requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned via OSPF in the following order intra lt inter lt type 1 lt type 2 4 Use OSPF Inter to specify the OSPF inter route preference value in the router The default value is 110 The range is 1 to 255 The OSPF specification RFC 2328 requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned via OSPF in the following order intra lt inter lt type 1 lt type 2 5 Use OSPF External to specify the OSPF external route preference value in the router The default value is 110 The range is 1 to 255 The OSPF specification RFC 2328 requires that preference value must be the same for all the OSPF external route types like type1 type2 nssa1 nssa2 212 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 6 Field Description Local This field displays the local route preference value The IP folder contains links to the following web pages that configure and display IP routing data e Basicon page 213 e Advanced on page 220 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e IP Configuration on page 213 e Statistics on page 215 IP Configuration Use this menu to configure routing parameters for the switch as opposed to an interface To display the IP Configuration page click Routing gt IP gt Basic g
362. features e MAC Filter on page 481 e Port Security on page 484 e Private Group on page 490 e Protected Ports Configuration on page 492 e Storm Control on page 493 MAC Filter The MAC Filter folder contains links to the following features e MAC Filter Configuration on page 481 e MAC Filter Summary on page 483 MAC Filter Configuration Use the MAC Filter Configuration page to create MAC filters that limit the traffic allowed into and out of specified ports on the system To display the MAC Filter Configuration page click Security gt Traffic Control gt MAC Filter gt MAC Filter Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352 enun Stechable Hnrai r ae Monitoring Maintenance Help Index socour MAC Filter Configuration MAC Filter Config gt Port Security gt Private Group gt Protected Port gt Storm Control Destination Port Members Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 481 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure MAC filter settings 1 Select Create Filter from the MAC Filter menu a This is the list of MAC address and VLAN ID pairings for all configured filters To change the port mask s for an existing filter select the entry you want to change To add a new filter select Create Filter from the top of the list b From the VLAN ID menu select the VLAN to use with the MAC address to fully identify packets you want filtered You can change this
363. ficate present on the device Authentication List Displays authentication list for HTTPS 454 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Certificate Management Use this menu to generate or delete certificates To display the Certificate Management page click Security gt Access gt HTTPS gt HTTPS Certificate Management Certificate Management Certificate Management O hee Gonerats Corti stes Cotes Cartitc ates Certificate Generation Status Cardcate Goneration Staten 1 Use None to specify there is no certificate management This is the default selection 2 Use Generate Certificates to begin generating the Certificate files 3 Use Delete Certificates to delete the corresponding Certificate files if present Table 6 88 Field Description Certificate Generation Status Displays whether SSL certificate generation is in progress Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 455 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Certificate Download Use this menu to transfer a certificate file to the switch For the Web server on the switch to accept HTTPS connections from a management station the Web server needs a public key certificate You can generate a certificate externally for example off line and download it to the switch To display the Certificate Download page click
364. field is 256 to 1664 The default value for Cache Size is 1664 5 Use Dynamic Renew to control whether the ARP component automatically attempts to renew ARP Entries of type Dynamic when they age out The default setting is Enable 6 Use Remove from Table to remove certain entries from the ARP Table The choices listed specify the type of ARP Entry to be deleted All Dynamic Entries All Dynamic and Gateway Entries e Specific Dynamic Gateway Entry Selecting this allows the user to specify the required IP Address e Specific Static Entry Selecting this allows the user to specify the required IP Address Chapter 4 Routing 257 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e None Selected if the user does not want to delete any entry from the ARP Table 7 Use Remove IP Address to enter the IP Address against the entry that is to be removed from the ARP Table This appears only if the user selects Specific Dynamic Gateway Entry or Specific Static Entry in the Remove from Table Drop Down List Table 23 Fes escrito O O Total Entry Count Total number of Entries in the ARP table Peak Total Entries Highest value reached by Total Entry Count This counter value is restarted whenever the ARP table Cache Size value is changed Active Static Entries Total number of Active Static Entries in the ARP table Configured Static Entries Total number of Configured Static Entries in
365. fies the router within the autonomous system AS The Router ID is set on the IP Configuration page If you want to change the Router ID you must first disable OSPF After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPF to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not a valid Router ID Area ID The ID of an OSPF area to which one of the router interfaces is connected An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which an interface is connected LSA Type The format and function of the link state advertisement One of the following e Router Links e Network Links e Network Summary e ASBR Summary e AS external Chapter 4 Routing 291 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 35 Field Description The Link State ID identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement s LS type The time since the link state advertisement was first originated in seconds Sequence The sequence number field is a signed 32 bit integer It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements The larger the sequence number the more recent the advertisement Checksum The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being floo
366. figuration DAI ACL Rule Corfiguration DAI Statistics gt Captive Portal ogogo pogo 1 Interface Selects the physical interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Trusted State to indicate whether the interface is trusted for Dynamic ARP Inspection purpose If this object is set to Enable the interface is trusted ARP packets coming to this interface will be forwarded without checking If this object is set to Disable the interface is not trusted ARP packets coming to this interface will be subjected to ARP inspection The factory default is disable 3 Use Rate Limit pps to specify rate limit value for Dynamic ARP Inspection purpose If the incoming rate of ARP packets exceeds the value of this object for consecutively burst interval seconds ARP packets will be dropped If this value is None there is no limit The factory default is 15pps packets per second 4 Use Burst Interval secs to specify the burst interval value for rate limiting purpose on this interface If the rate limit is None burst interval has no meaning shows it as N A The factory default is 1 second Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 507 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DAI ACL Configuration This screen shows the ARP ACLs configured To display the DAI ACL Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI ACL Configuration
367. figuration on page 227 e Secondary IP Address on page 229 IP Configuration Use this menu to configure routing parameters for the switch as opposed to an interface To display the IP Configuration page click Routing gt IP gt Advanced gt IP Configuration NETGEAR GSM73525 4 8 Part Gigabit Lever 2 Masaged Stockeble Switch with 4 1O Gigebit Sistas Switching o Securi Monitoring Mointenonce Help Index L1osourt gt Baste IP Configuration v Advanced IP Configuration Statics IP interface Rerateng Masla Enable Disable Configuration ICMP Ecko Reptes Enable Disable Secondary P IP Configuration Delault Time te Live ICMP Redwests Enable Disable ICMP Rate Limit Interval 1000 ICMP Rate Limit Rurst Size 100 Maxime Next Haps lt 220 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Use Routing Mode to select enable or disable You must enable routing for the switch before you can route through any of the interfaces The default value is disable Use ICMP Echo Replies to select enable or disable If it is enable then only the router can send ECHO replies By default ICMP Echo Replies are sent for echo requests Use ICMP Redirects to select enable or disable If it is enabled globally and on interface level then only the router can send ICMP Redirects Use ICMP Rate Limit Interval to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the numb
368. figuration page Global Flow Control IEEE 802 3x Mode Enable or disable this option by selecting the corresponding line on the radio button The factory default is disabled Broadcast Storm Control All Enable or disable the Broadcast Storm Recovery mode on all ports by clicking the corresponding radio button When you specify Enable for Broadcast Storm Recovery and the broadcast traffic on any Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the broadcast traffic The factory default is enabled Multicast Storm Control All Enable or disable the Multicast Storm Recovery mode on all ports by clicking the corresponding radio button When you specify Enable for Multicast Storm Recovery and the multicast traffic on any Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the multicast traffic The factory default is disabled Unknown Unicast Storm Control All Enable or disable the Unicast Storm Recovery mode on all ports by clicking the corresponding radio button When you specify Enable for Unicast Storm Recovery and the Unicast traffic on any Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the unicast traffic The factory default is disabled 494 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Storm Control Interface Configuration To display the Storm Control Interface Configurat
369. formation 43 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 3 Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers You can configure up to three SNTP servers 4 Toremoving an SNTP server select the check box next to the configured server to remove and then click Delete The entry is removed and the device is updated 5 To change the settings for an existing SNTP server select the check box next to the configured server and enter new values in the available fields and then click Apply Configuration changes take effect immediately 6 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 7 Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch 44 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual SNTP Server Status The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers configured on your switch The following table describes the SNTP Global Status fields The following table displays SNTP Server Status information Table 2 12 Field Description Address Specifies all the existing Server Addresses If no Server configuration exists a message saying No SNTP server exists flashes on the screen Last Update Time Specifies the local date and time UTC that the response from this
370. formation seen on the network periodically refreshed to determine if an address still exists or removed from the cache if the entry has not been identified as a sender of an ARP packet during the course of an ageout interval usually specified via configuration From the ARP link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 253 e Advanced on page 255 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e ARP Cache on page 254 Chapter 4 Routing 253 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual ARP Cache Use this screen to show ARP entries in the ARP Cache To display the ARP Cache page click Routing gt ARP gt Basic gt ARP Cache z GSM73525 a 1 Use Port to select the associated Unit Slot Port of the connection 2 IP Address displays the IP address It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch s existing routing interfaces 3 MAC Address displays the unicast MAC address of the device The address is six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons for example 00 06 29 32 81 40 4 Click REFRESH to show the latest IP information 254 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e Static ARP Cache on page 255 e ARP Table Configuration on page 257 Static ARP Cache To display
371. formed Packets Received Specifies the number of Malformed Packets Received DHCPv6 Packets Discarded Specifies the number of Packets Discarded Messages Sent Specifies the aggregate of all interface level statistics for messages sent Total DHCPv6 Packets Sent Specifies the total number of Packets Transmitted DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Transmitted Specifies the number of Advertisements DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted Specifies the number of Replies DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets Transmitted Specifies the number of Reconfigurations DHCPv6 Relay forward Packets Transmitted Specifies the number of Relay forwards DHCPv6 Relay reply Packets Transmitted Specifies the number of Relay Replies 78 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCPv 6 Relay To display the DHCPv6 Relay page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Relay A screen similar to the following displays GSM7352S Abhor Gigebst Layer 3 Meseged Stackable Swich wath 4 10 Gigebit Slon index wosour gt DHCP Server DHCPv6 Relay Configuration Joslin DHCPv6 Relay Configeration gt DHCP L2 Relay gt UDP Relay 1 a Ge to Interface DHOPV6 Server DNCPV6 Relay 4 5 L t o L gogc ogo JOogog 1 Use Interface to specify interface configured for DHCPv6 Relay functionality 2 Use Admin Mode to specify DHCPv6 mode to configure DHCPv6 Relay funct
372. g e Terminal interface via the EIA 232 port e Terminal interface via telnet e SNMP based management e Web based management Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 35 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the IPv6 network interface on the switch The default value is enable 2 Use IPv6 Address Auto Configuration Mode to set the IPv6 address for the IPv6 network interface in auto configuration mode if this option is enabled The default value is disable Auto configuration can be enabled only when IPv6 Auto config or DHCPv6 are not enabled on any of the management interfaces 3 Use Current Network Configuration Protocol to configure the IPv6 address for the IPv6 network interface by DHCPV6 protocol if this option is enabled The default value is None DHCPV6 can be enabled only when IPv6 Auto config or DHCPv6 are not enabled on any of the management interfaces 4 Use DHCPVv6 Client DUID to specify an Identifier used to identify the client s unique DUID value This option only displays when DHCPVE6 is enabled 5 Use IPv6 Gateway to specify the gateway for the IPv6 network interface The gateway address is in IPv6 global or link local address format 6 Use IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length to add the IPv6 prefix and prefix length to the IPv6 network interface The address is in global address format 7 Use EUI64 to specify whether to format the IPv6 add
373. g Device Security 459 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Host Keys Management Use this menu to generate or delete RSA and DSA keys To display the Host Keys Management page click Security gt Access gt SSH gt Host Keys Management NETGEAR ____GSM7352S Host Keys Management RSA Keys Management Neve Coserate RSA Keys Delete RSA Keys OSA Keys Management None Generate OSA Keys gt Denisi of Service aaa Host Keys Status Keys Present Key Generation in Progress 1 Host Keys Management None is the default selection 2 Use Generate RSA Keys to begin generating the RSA host keys Note that to generate SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions 3 Use Delete RSA Keys to delete the corresponding RSA key file if it is present 4 DSA Keys Management None is the default selection 5 Use Generate DSA Keys to begin generating the DSA host keys Note that to generate SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions 6 Use Delete DSA Keys to delete the corresponding DSA key file if it is present 7 Click APPLY to start to download the Host Key file Note that to download SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions 8 Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest SSH Sessions Table 6 90 Field Description
374. g Maintenance Help ndex waou reTeT ET ey erases isis gt acretan 14 Chapter 1 Getting Started ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Click the port you want to view or configure to see a menu that displays statistics and configuration options Click the menu option to access the page that contains the configuration or monitoring options NETGEAR Pen Contigurates Cates Test Port Oeteted Stateics Fort Summar Statstcs Doudie VLAN Tunnetng Epara Tita Pact Conspurabon Depares Tree Pot Contguraten Satur VLAN Pott Corga aton GARE Part Contpuranen IGMP Shocoing MLO Snocord Poet Secu tartsa Contguraten wtetece Comtgursicn btoas Router Contgurston GSM7352S Nerinine pe grey sek deren Tere Maintenance Help Indes mua Uvstcast Asut Lati Contgurston Per Secaty State f Post Security Ornamic Bort Locust victaton Mish IP ontertace Conigaraton MOP wee tace Corga ston OUP ritertave CEGA Ion OSPF NUB Lit CAJE ION OSPS teeronoer Tien Wve tenate C oneguneea OSPF wturtace Comiguraecn DOSPEO Newnece Tazio Port Access Conte Carhigurater Port Access Conbol Stabatcs OVURP betace CoaBguiahen IGUP Whetace Confjuiaban MCAST tilartace Configurabon Prd tetace Contgurancn PMSA enertace Contourszon Socket conmected te 1027 7 Chapter 1 Getting Started 15 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administr
375. g Mode is to be enabled 2 Use DHCP Snooping Mode to enable or disable the DHCP Snooping feature for entered VLAN The factory default is disabled 3 Click APPLY to apply the new configuration and cause the changes to take effect These changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save configuration is performed 498 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration To display the DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration page click Security gt Control gt DHCP Snooping gt Interface Configuration GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer Monaged Srocheble Switch with 4 10 Gigebit Sets socour DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration Nee See DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration Irtertace Configuration 1 alt Go To taterfave bedog Configu ation gt IP Source Guard gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt Captive Portal a Ein Ein 9 oppogogogi 1 Interface Selects the interface for which data is to be configured 2 If Trust Mode is enabled DHCP snooping application considers as port trusted The factory default is disabled 3 If Logging Invalid Packets is enabled DHCP snooping application logs invalid packets on this interface The factory default is disabled 4 Use Rate Limit pps to specify rate limit value for DHCP Snooping purpose If the incoming rate of DHCP packets exceeds the value
376. g QoS Queue Directs traffic stream to the specified QoS queue This allows a traffic classifier to specify which one of the supported hardware queues are used for handling packets belonging to the class e Redirecting Forces classified traffic stream to a specified egress port physical or LAG This can occur in addition to any marking or policing action It may also be specified along with a QoS queue assignment Appendix B Configuration Examples 615 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DiffServ Example Configuration To create a DiffServ Class Policy and attach it to a switch interface follow these steps 1 From the QoS Class Configuration screen create a new class with the following settings e Class Name Class1 e Class Type All For more information about this screen see Class Configuration on page 5 416 Click the Class1 hyperlink to view the DiffServ Class Configuration screen for this class Configure the following settings for Class1 e Protocol Type UDP e Source IP Address 192 12 1 0 e Source Mask 255 255 255 0 e Source L4 Port Other and enter 4567 as the source port value e Destination IP Address 192 12 2 0 e Destination Mask 255 255 255 0 e Destination L4 Port Other and enter 4568 as the destination port value For more information about this screen see Class Configuration on page 5 416 Click Apply From the Policy Configuration scr
377. g a new value before the old one expires Allowed range is 0 to 4294967295 secs A value of zero sets the selected receiver configuration to its default values 4 Use Maximum Datagram Size to specify the maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram The manager should set this value to avoid fragmentation of the sFlow datagrams Default Value 1400 Allowed range is 200 to 9116 5 Use Receiver Address to specify the IP address of the sFlow collector If set to 0 0 0 0 no sFlow datagrams will be sent 6 Use Receiver Port to specify the destination port for sFlow datagrams Allowed range is 1 to 65535 Table 7 121 Field Description Receiver Datagram Version The version of sFlow datagrams that should be sent 576 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual sFlow Interface Configuration sFlow agent collects statistical packet based sampling of switched flows and sends them to the configured receivers A data source configured to collect flow samples is called a sampler sFlow agent also collects time based sampling of network interface statistics and sends them to the configured sFlow receivers A data source configured to collect counter samples is called a poller To display the sFlow Interface Configuration page click Monitoring gt sFlow gt Advanced gt sFlow Interface Configuration slow Interface Configu
378. g pages e HTTPS Configuration on page 453 e Certificate Management on page 455 e Certificate Download on page 456 HTTPS Configuration Secure HTTP enables the transmission of HTTP over an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer SSL or Transport Layer Security TLS connection When you manage the switch by using a Web interface secure HTTP can help ensure that communication between the management system and the switch is protected from eavesdroppers and man in the middle attacks Use the Secure HTTP Configuration page to configure the settings for HTTPS communication between the management station and the switch To display the Secure HTTP Configuration page click Security gt Access gt HTTPS gt HTTPS Configuration GSM73525S 48 Port Gigodit Loyer 3 Srockable Switch with 4 19 Gigobit Slots 1OGOUT HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Coafigeration MTIPS Admin Mode SSL Version TAS Verson i MITES Port HTIPS Session Soft Timesut Minuten HTTPS Session Hard Timeost Heures Masimo Mumbar of MIIPS Sessions Corti ate Prevent Authertu stion Lat Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 453 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure HTTPS settings 1 Use HTTPS Admin Mode to Enable or Disable the Administrative Mode of Secure HTTP The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Disable You can only download SSL certificates when the
379. g representing 0x8100 e vMAN Tag Commonly used tag representing 0x88A8 e Custom Tag Configure the EtherType in any range from 0 to 65535 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 143 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration You can use a protocol based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets By default if you do not configure any port IEEE 802 1Q or protocol based VLANs untagged packets will be assigned to VLAN 1 You can override this behavior by defining either port based VLANs or protocol based VLANs or both Tagged packets are always handled according to the IEEE 802 1Q standard and are not included in protocol based VLANs If you assign a port to a protocol based VLAN for a specific protocol untagged frames received on that port for that protocol will be assigned the protocol based VLAN ID Untagged frames received on the port for other protocols will be assigned the Port VLAN ID either the default PVID 1 ora PVID you have specifically assigned to the port using the Port VLAN Configuration screen You define a protocol based VLAN by creating a group Each group has a one to one relationship with a VLAN ID can include one to three protocol definitions and can include multiple ports When you create a group you will choose a name and a Group ID will be assigned automatically To display the Protocol Based VLAN Group Conf
380. gabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DVMRP Route To display the DVMRP Route page click Routing gt Multicast DVMRP gt DVMRP Route NETGEAR teuta table DVMRP Route betel oatiquretian DVNEP Reate taterface Table 58 GSM73525 w 9 managed sha Ios Field Description Source Address Source Mask Upstream Neighbor The network address that is combined with the source mask to identify the sources for this entry The subnet mask to be combined with the source address to identify the sources for this entry The address of the upstream neighbor e g RPF neighbor from which IP datagrams from these sources are received Interface The interface on which IP datagrams sent by these sources are received A value of 0 typically means the route is an aggregate for which no next hop interface exists Metric The distance in hops to the source subnet Expiry Time The minimum amount of time remaining before this entry will be aged out Up Time The time since the route represented by this entry was learned by the router Chapter 4 Routing 345 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP From the IGMP link you can access the following pages IGMP Global Configuration on page 346 IGMP Routing Interface Configuration on page 347 IGMP Routing Interface Statistics on page 349 IGMP Groups on page 351 IGMP Membe
381. gabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Groups To display the IGMP Groups page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt IGMP Groups GSM73525 ba Pert Gags eee 2 stars iT Chapter 4 Routing 351 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 60 Feis escrito O O Interface The interface which data is to be displayed Multicast Group IP The IP multicast group address for which data is to be displayed Last Reporter The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for the IP Multicast group address on the selected interface Up Time The time elapsed since this entry was created Expiry Time The minimum amount of time remaining before this entry will be aged out Version 1 Host Timer The time remaining until the local router will assume that there are no longer any IGMP version 1 members on the IP subnet attached to this interface When an IGMPv1 membership report is received this timer is reset to the group membership timer While this timer is non zero the local router ignores any IGMPv2 leave messages for this group that it receives on the selected interface This field is displayed only if the interface is configured for IGMP version 1 Version 2 Host Timer The time remaining until the local router will assume that there are no longer any IGMP version 2 members on the IP subnet attached to this inte
382. ge Last Attempt Status Specifies the status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and broadcast modes If no message has been received from a server a status of Other is displayed These values are appropriate for all operational modes e Other None of the following enumeration values e Success The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated e Request Timed Out A directed SNTP request timed out without receiving a response from the SNTP server e Bad Date Encoded The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid e Version Not Supported The SNTP version supported by the server is not compatible with the version supported by the client e Server Unsynchronized The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers This is indicated via the leap indicator field on the SNTP message e Server Kiss Of Death The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to be sent to this server This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message received from a server Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the server for the last received valid packet If no message has been received from any server an empty string is shown Address Type Specifies the address type of the SNTP Server address for the last received valid packet Server Stratum Reference Clock Id Specifies the claimed stratum of the server for the last received val
383. ge Inmated 0 Interface wis p 1 0 37 2010 Unk Ue AJG 02 37 02 20 2010 AUG 02 36 53 43 2010 ALG 02 16 3 43 2010 AUG 02 36 93 43 2010 AUG OF 16 53 39 2010 AIS OF 35 25 49 2020 AUG O2 35 25 47 2010 AG 02 25 25 45 2010 AIG OF 15 25 43 2010 AUG O2 23 46 29 2010 AUG 02 33 46 27 2010 AUG O2 23 46 25 2010 AUG 02 13 46 23 2010 AUG 02 13 41 11 2010 sium onm eee ee Spenning Tree Topology Charge Sending 0 Irtertace u s p 1 0 37 037 Unk Down 1 0 37 Spenning Tree Topology Change Inteted 0 Interface wis p 8 0 37 Spenning Tree Topology Change Sending 0 trterface w s p 1 0 37 Link uoe 1 0 37 Link Opan 1 0 37 Spenning Tree Topology Chenge Received imerfece u a p 1 0 37 Spenning Tree Topology Charge Received Interface u s p 1 0 37 Spenning Tree Topology Change Received Interfocelu s p 1 O 3 Spenning Tree Topology Charge Received Interface u s p 1 0 37 Sperning Tree Topology Change Received interfece u s p 1 0 37 Spenning Tree Topology Charge Received Interfece w s p 1 0 37 Sperning Tree Topology Charge Received interface u s p 1 0 37 Spenning Tree Topology Change Received Interfece u s p 1 0 37 Sparring Tree Topelegy Charge Received Interface u s p 1 0 37 oso we wuss P HN on wboces Mocs sme GSM73525 48 Port Gigabit Loyer dere os Stechable Switch with 4 19 Gigabit Slots Index iogour v gt Cakar atretan 566 Chapter7 Monitoring the System ProSafe
384. gs 1 Select the check box and click the APPLY button to have all configuration parameters reset to their factory default values All changes you have made will be lost even if you have issued a save You will be shown a confirmation screen after you select the button 582 Chapter8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Password Reset Use the Password Reset page to reset all user passwords to defaults To access the Password Reset page click Maintenance gt Reset gt Password Reset i GSM73525S N E TG A R Port Gigabit Layer Managed s 4 Stackable Switch with 4 1O Gigabit Stor Index xocour Wnauton Babaoe Password Reset Factory Cofeut Password Reset Password Reset Check this box and click APPLY below te reset all user passwords C 1 Select the check box and click the APPLY button to have all user passwords reset to their factory default values All changes you have made will be lost even if you have issued a save Upload File From Switch Use the File Upload page to upload configuration ASCII log ASCII and image binary files from the switch to the TFTP server The Upload menu contains links to the following options e File Upload on page 583 e HTTP File Upload on page 586 e USB File Upload on page 587 File Upload To display the File Upload page click Maintenance gt Upload gt File Upload Chapter 8 Maintenance 583
385. guration gt Protocol Based VLAN Group Comfiguraben Prosscol Based VLAN Group Membershp Voce VLAN GVRP Mode Corfiguratien CARP Sate Configuration GARP Port Configuration 1 Use GVRP Mode to choose the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol administrative mode for the switch by selecting enable or disable from the radio button The factory default is disable 2 Use GMRP Mode to choose the GARP Multicast Registration Protocol administrative mode for the switch by selecting enable or disable from the radio button The factory default is disable Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 149 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual GARP Port Configuration Note It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take effect To display the GARP Port Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt GARP Port Configuration NETGEAR VLAN Configuration VLAN Membership VLAN Status Por PvID Configuration MAC Bases WLAN Group Configuration Protocol Based VUAN Group Membersho Voce VLAN Corfiguratien GARP Swtch Configuration CARP Pot GSM7352S 4 Port Gigab Layer 3 Maw Stockable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Slon Routing Monitoring Maintenance osout GARP Port Configuration GARP Port Configuration 1 an Leave All Timer centisecs 9 2 5 s 1009 1009 Pi biti bil 1009 1005 100
386. guring Switching Information 137 VLAN Status ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Use this page to display the status of all currently configured VLANs To display the VLAN Status page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt VLAN Status NETGEAR VLAN Configuration VAN Membership VLAN Status Port PVED Configuration MAC Based VLAN 1P Subnet Based Protocol Based VLAN Grouse Configurator gt Protocol Based VLAN Grove Membership Voice VLAN Configuration GARE Surch Configuration GARP Pott Configuration Table 3 49 Field GSM7352S 48 Pert Gigabe Layer J Managed Stackable tench wth 4 10 Gigebs Vom sooo aeration Definition VLAN ID The VLAN Identifier VID of the VLAN The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093 VLAN Name VLAN Type The name of the VLAN VLAN ID 1 is always named Default The VLAN type e Default VLAN ID 1 always present e Static a VLAN you have configured e Dynamic a VLAN created by GVRP registration that you have not converted to static and that GVRP may therefore remove Routing Interface The interface associated with the VLAN in the case that VLAN routing is configured for this VLAN Member Ports The ports that are included in the VLAN 138 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switc
387. h the web page to show the latest MAC address learned on a specific port The Dynamic MAC Address Table shows the MAC addresses and their associated VLANs learned on the selected port Use the Port List menu to select the interface for which you want to display data Table 6 98 Description MAC Address Displays the number of dynamically learned MAC addresses on a specific port Displays the VLAN ID corresponding to the MAC address Displays the MAC addresses learned on a specific port 488 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Static MAC Address To display the Static MAC Address page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Port Security gt Static MAC Address NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigokit Loyer J Monoged Srockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Slom System Switching QoS Monitoring Maintenance Help Index sosour gt MAC Filter Static MAC Address Configuration Port Security Port Administration Interface Ieterface Corfiguraton Static MAC Address Table Oynamic MAC Port List Static MAC Address VLAN ID address T T Static MAC Address gt Private Group gt Protected Port Storm Control Interface Select the physical interface for which you want to display data Static MAC Address Accepts user input for the MAC address to be deleted Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID corresponding to
388. h to be compared to a packet s destination IP Address as a match criteria for the selected IPv6 ACL rule Prefix length can be in the range 0 to 128 13 Use Destination L4 Port to specify a packet s destination layer 4 port as a match condition for the selected IPv6 ACL rule Destination port information is optional Destination port information can be specified in two ways a Select keyword other from the drop down menu and specify the number of the port in the range from 0 to 65535 b Select one of the keyword from the list DOMAIN ECHO FTP FTPDATA HTTP SMTP SNMP TELNET TFTP and WWW Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of the port range 14 Flow label is 20 bit number that is unique to an IPv6 packet used by end stations to signify quality of service handling in routers Flow label can specified within the range 0 to 1048575 15 Use IPv6 DSCP Service to specify the IP DiffServ Code Point DSCP field The DSCP is defined as the high order six bits of the Service Type octet in the IPv6 header This is an optional configuration Enter an integer from 0 to 63 The IPv6 DSCP is selected by possibly selection one of the DSCP keyword from a dropdown box If a value is to be selected by specifying its numeric value then select the Other option in the dropdown box and a text box will appear where the numeric value of the DSCP can be entered 16 Click ADD t
389. h with 4 10 Gigobit Slots System Switching Qo Monitoring Maintenance Help Index socour gt DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard Binding Configuration IP Source Guard gt Imerface Corfiguration Interface MAC Address _ VLAN ID IP Address Filter Type Dynamic Binding Configuration Intertace MAC Address VLAN ID IP Address Fitter Type Static Binding Configuration gt Captive Portal Static Binding Configuration Interface Selects the interface to add a binding into the IPSG database Use MAC Address to specify the MAC address for the binding Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN from the list for the binding rule Use IP Address to specify valid IP Address for the binding rule Click ADD to add IPSG static binding entry into the database Click DELETE to delete selected static entries from the database oR Se PS Table 6 102 Fes escrito O O Interface Displays the interface to add a binding into the IPSG database MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the binding entry ANID Displays the VLAN from the list for the binding entry IP Address Displays valid IP Address for the binding entry Filter Type Filter Type using on the interface one is source IP address filter type the other is source IP address and MAC address filter type Click CLEAR to clear all the dynamic binding entries 504 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software
390. he ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval Default burst size is 100 packets When burst interval is 0 then configuring this field is not a valid operation Valid Burst Size must be in the range 1 to 200 Chapter 4 Routing 231 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Route Table Use the IPv6 Route Table page to display all active IPv6 routes and their settings To display the IPv6 Route Table page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Basic gt Route Table GSM7352S Kon IPv6 Route Table IPvo houte Tabie Restes iapiered Mem ter ot Basten 1 Use Routes Displayed to choose from e Configured Routes Shows the routes configured by the user e Best Routes Shows only the best active routes All Routes Shows all active IPv6 routes Table 13 Field Description Number of Routes Displays the total number of active routes in the route table IPv6 Prefix Displays the Network Prefix for the Active Route Prefix Length Displays the Prefix Length for the Active Route Protocol Displays the Type of Protocol for the Active Route Next Hop Interface Displays the Interface over which the Route is Active For a Reject Route the next hop would be a Nullo interface Next Hop IP Address Displays the Next Hop IPv6 Address for the Active Route Displays the Route Preference of the Configure
391. he admin account always has Read Write access and all other accounts have Read Only access 3 Use Authentication Protocol to specify the SNMPv3 Authentication Protocol setting for the selected user account The valid Authentication Protocols are None MD5 or SHA e If you select None the user will be unable to access the SNMP data from an SNMP browser e f you select MD5 or SHA the user login password will be used as the SNMPv3 authentication password and you must therefore specify a password and it must be eight characters long 4 Use Encryption Protocol to specify the SNMPv3 Encryption Protocol setting for the selected user account The valid Encryption Protocols are None or DES e If you select the DES Protocol you must enter a key in the Encryption Key field e If None is specified for the Protocol the Encryption Key is ignored 5 Encryption Key If you selected DES in the Encryption Protocol field enter the SNMPv3 Encryption Key here otherwise this field is ignored Valid keys are 0 to 15 characters long The Apply checkbox must be checked in order to change the Encryption Protocol and Encryption Key 6 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 7 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately LLDP The IEEE 802 1AB defined standard Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP allows
392. he name of the file you want to download from the server You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank 6 Use User Name to enter the username for remote login to SFTP SCP server where the file resides This field is visible only when SFTP or SCP transfer modes are selected 7 Use Password to enter the password for remote login to SFTP SCP server where the file resides This field is visible only when SFTP or SCP transfer modes are selected 8 The last row of the table is used to display information about the progress of the file transfer The screen will refresh automatically until the file transfer completes HTTP File Download Use the HTTP File Download page to download files of various types to the switch using an HTTP session for example via your Web browser To display this page click Maintenance gt Download gt HTTP File Download Chapter 8 Maintenance 589 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NETGEAR GSM73525 ot w 48 Port Gigabit Layer J Managed Stackable Switch with 4 1O Gigabit Siors soGour gt File Download HTTP File Download v HTTP File Downboad HTTP File Download File Type Image Name magal Lelect I de Browse_ To download a file to the switch by using HTTP 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to transfer e Archive Specify archive STK code when you want to upgrade the operational flash e I
393. he network 0 indicates limit not enforced Range 0 536870911 Use Max Bandwidth Up to specify the maximum rate Rate in bytes per seconds at which a Client can send data into the network 0 indicates limit not enforced Range 0 536870911 Use Max Input to specify the maximum number of octets the user is allowed to transmit After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates limit not enforced Range 0 4294967295 Use Max Output to specify the maximum number of octets the user is allowed to receive After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates limit not enforced Range 0 4294967295 Use Max Total to specify the maximum number of octets the user is allowed to transfer i e the sum of octets transmitted and received After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates limit not enforced Range 0 4294967295 Click ADD to add a new CP instance Click DELETE to remove the currently selected CP instance 516 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Captive Portal Binding Configuration You can associate a configured captive portal with a specific network SSID The CP feature only runs on the interfaces you specify A CP can have multiple interfaces associated with it but an interface can be associated to only one CP at atime To display the Capti
394. hentication list to use when you login through telnet The default value is networkList 2 Use Enable Authentication List to specify which authentication list you are using when going into the privileged EXEC mode The default value is enableList 462 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Inbound Telnet Configuration This page regulates new telnet sessions If Allow New Telnet Sessions are enabled new inbound telnet sessions can be established until there are no more sessions available If Allow New Telnet Sessions are disabled no new inbound telnet sessions are established An established session remains active until the session is ended or an abnormal network error ends the session 1 2 3 4 Use Allow New Telnet Sessions to specify whether the new Inbound Telnet session is Enabled or Disabled Default value is Enabled Use Session Timeout to specify how many minutes of inactivity should occur on a telnet session before the session is logged off You may enter any number from 1 to 160 The factory default is 5 Use Maximum Number of Sessions to select how many simultaneous telnet sessions will be allowed The maximum is 5 which is also the factory default Current Number of Sessions Displays the number of current sessions Outbound Telnet Client Configuration This page regulates new outbound telnet connections If Allow New Telnet
395. her and to their directly connected LANs The SSM service model can be implemented with a strict subset of the PIM SM protocol mechanisms Both regular IP Multicast and SSM semantics can coexist on a single router and both can be implemented using the PIM SM protocol A range of multicast addresses currently 232 0 0 0 8 in IPv4 is reserved for SSM To display the PIM SSM Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast PIM SM gt SSM Configuration GSM7352S y orks Lon Use SSM Group Address to enter the source specific multicast group ip address Use SSM Group Mask to enter the source specific multicast group ip address mask Click ADD to add a new source specific group Click DELETE to delete an existing source specific group e PA Chapter 4 Routing 363 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SM Interface Configuration To display the PIM SM Interface Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast PIM SM gt Interface Configuration NETGEAR GSM73525 daft rg 00 Peet eget Loot bumbai Jumi oot 4 I Cpt them PIM SM Interlace Configuration 3 5 F T Es tg T hetz BP Corfigemer Srst bastes Contingent ven Bofors Boren dary cmtagmer ative Hit 3 F ing 113171553171515171 e e co e u Ld pm e u s oe u a ta th te th 364 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed
396. her authentication processes TACACS provides the following services Authentication Provides authentication during login and via user names and user defined passwords e Authorization Performed at login When the authentication session is completed an authorization session starts using the authenticated user name The TACACS server checks the user privileges The TACACS protocol ensures network security through encrypted protocol exchanges between the device and TACACS server The TACACS folder contains links to the following features Configuring TACACS on page 440 e TACACS Server Configuration on page 442 440 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual TACACS Configuration The TACACS Configuration page contains the TACACS settings for communication between the switch and the TACACS server you configure via the inband management port To display the TACACS Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt TACACS gt TACACS Configuration GSM7352S Stackable Switch w ocour gt Local User TACACS Configuration gt Enable Password TACACS Aa gt Line Password gt RADIUS Key String TACACS Commectios Nmeost TACACS Cohr ston TACACS Server Corgurason gt Authentication List Login Sessions To configure global TACACS settings 1 In the Key String field specify the authenticatio
397. hes Software Administration Manual Port PVID Configuration The Port PVID Configuration screen lets you assign a port VLAN ID PVID to an interface There are certain requirements for a PVID e All ports must have a defined PVID e If no other value is specified the default VLAN PVID is used e If you want to change the port s default PVID you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as a member e Use the Port VLAN ID PVID Configuration page to configure a virtual LAN on a port To access the Port PVID Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt Port PVID Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S a sc isdie aunk gure apy vag ad scour gt Baste Port PVID Configuration CAER PVID Configuration VLAN Configuration gt VLAN Memberstep Co te Interface VLAN Status for PADO Interface PVID Configuration Acceptable frame MAC Based VLAN IP Subnet Based RAN Port DAAN Corhguraticn Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration gt Protocol Based VLAN Group Membershep Voice VLAN Configuration GARP Swich Oogogogogogogp Confgurancn GARP Port Conhguraten Jog Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 139 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure PVID information 1 2 Click ALL to display information for all Physical ports and LAGs Select the check box next to the interfaces to configu
398. hets Iramemutted UNOPLO Reply Packets Trenemitted ONCEVE Bar vahy Portete Tramametted DM Prt Relay Forward Packers Iremememtad DHCP SO Reley raphy Uoehets Trememitted 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured On selecting all data will be shown for all interfaces Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 77 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the DHCPv6 Server Statistics fields Table 2 26 Fig escrito O O Messages Received Specifies the aggregate of all interface level statistics for received messages Total DHCPv6 Packets Received Specifies the total number of Packets Received DHCPV 6 Solicit Packets Received Specifies the number of Solicits DHCPv6 Request Packets Received Specifies the number of Requests DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received Specifies the number of Confirms DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received Specifies the number of Renews DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received Specifies the number of Rebinds DHCPv6 Release Packets Received Specifies the number of Releases DHCPv 6 Decline Packets Received Specifies the number of Declines DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received Specifies the number of Informs DHCPv6 Relay forward Packets Received Specifies the number of Relay forwards DHCPv6 Relay reply Packets Received Specifies the number of Relay Replies DHCPv6 Mal
399. his interface Number of Groups The current number of membership entries for the selected interface in the cache table 388 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest MLD routing interface statistics MLD Groups To display the MLD Groups page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast MLD gt MLD Groups MLD Groups D Creme seost Oy GSM73525 ot ingens Laru gt Monago Table 78 Field Description Interface Indicates the interface on which data is displayed Group IP Indicates the address of the Mgmd members Last Reporter The IP Address of the source of the last membership report received for this multicast group address on the interface Up Time Time elapsed in seconds since the multicast group has been known Expiry Time Time left in seconds before the entry is removed from the MLD membership table of this interface Filter Mode The filter mode of the multicast group on this interface The values it can take are INCLUDE and EXCLUDE Version1 Host Timer The time remaining until the router assumes there are no longer any MLD version 1 Hosts on the specified interface Group Compat Mode The compatibility mode of the multicast group on the interface The values it can take are MLDv1 and MLDv2 Chapter 4 Routing 389 ProSafe Gigabit L
400. his problem The switch uses the information in the IGMP packets as they are being forwarded throughout the network to determine which segments should receive packets directed to the group address From the IGMP Snooping link you can access the following pages e IGMP Snooping Configuration on page 173 e IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration on page 174 e IGMP VLAN Configuration on page 176 e Multicast Router Configuration on page 178 e Multicast Router VLAN Configuration on page 179 e IGMP Snooping Querier on page 180 e IGMP Snooping Querier Configuration on page 180 e IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration on page 182 172 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Snooping Configuration Use the IGMP Snooping Configuration page to configure the parameters for IGMP snooping which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic Note that only a user with Read Write access privileges may change the data on this screen To access the IGMP Snooping Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 44 Pon Gigabit Layer J Managed Srochoble Swich with 4 10 Cogab Vom tocon IGMP Snooping Configuration IGMP Smooping Configuration Ataun Mode Unksows Multicast Fitering Melticast Control Frame Count Interfaces Enabled for IGMP Snooping Data Frames Forwarded by the CPU
401. ible to become the designated router on this particular network State of the relationship with this neighbor Number of seconds since last Hello was received from Adjacent Neighbors Set to 0 for neighbors in a state less than or equal to Init The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred Retransmission Queue Length Length of the selected neighbor s retransmit queue 1 Click REFRESH to refresh the page with the latest OSPFv3 neighbor information for the selected interface 2 Click CLEAR to clear all the neighbor in the table Chapter 4 Routing 317 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Link State Database Use the OSPF v3 Link State Database page to display the link state database To display the Link State Database page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Link State Database GSM73525 a Gigubis layer 2 HMenaped Link State Database OSPE Unk State Detsdase arco ts Table 44 Fes escrito O O Router ID The 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS The Router ID is set on the OSPFv3 Configuration page If you want to change the Router ID you must first disable OSPFv3 After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPFv3 to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not
402. ic directed towards it is lost until the failure is detected Though static configuration of default routes is popular such an approach is susceptible to a single point of failure when the default router fails VRRP advocates the concept of a virtual router associated with one or more IP Addresses that serve as default gateways In the event that the VRRP Router controlling these IP Addresses formally known as the Master fails the group of IP Addresses and the default forwarding role is taken over by a Backup VRRP Router From the VRRP link you can access the following pages e Basicon page 325 e Advanced on page 329 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e VRRP Configuration on page 325 VRRP Configuration Use the VRRP Configuration page to enable or disable the administrative status of a virtual router To display the VRRP Configuration page click Routing gt VRRP gt Basic gt VRRP Configuration Chapter 4 Routing 325 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Porr Giga Loyer J Menaged Stochable Switch with 4 10 Gigebst Sots Conner aS aree System Switching Routing Security Monitoring Maintenance Help Index Intertace Pp i Interface IP hd Mode Address Address abo i onau i canci 326 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 10 11 VRID is
403. ication server and the supplicant the system that requests authentication as well as between the authenticator and the authentication server The Gigabit L3 switches support a guest VLAN which allows unauthenticated users to have limited access to the network resources Note You can use QoS features to provide rate limiting on the guest VLAN to limit the network resources the guest VLAN provides Another 802 1X feature is the ability to configure a port to Enable Disable EAPoL packet forwarding support You can disable or enable the forwarding of EAPoL when 802 1X is disabled on the device The ports of an 802 1X authenticator switch provide the means in which it can offer services to other systems reachable via the LAN Port based network access control allows the Appendix B ConfigurationExamples 617 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual operation of a switch s ports to be controlled in order to ensure that access to its services is only permitted by systems that are authorized to do so Port access control provides a means of preventing unauthorized access by supplicants to the services offered by a system Control over the access to a switch and the LAN to which it is connected can be desirable in order to restrict access to publicly accessible bridge ports or to restrict access to departmental LANs Access control is achieved by enforcing authentication of supplicants that are atta
404. ice Type octet in the IP header This is an optional configuration Enter an integer from 0 to 7 IP TOS The IP TOS field in a packet is defined as all eight bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header The TOS Bits value is a hexadecimal number from 00 to FF The TOS Mask value is a hexadecimal number from 00 to FF The TOS Mask denotes the bit positions in the TOS Bits value that are used for comparison against the IP TOS field in a packet For example to check for an IP TOS value having bits 7 and 5 set and bit 1 clear where bit 7 is most significant use a TOS Bits value of OxAO and a TOS Mask of OxFF This is an optional configuration 3 To delete an IP ACL rule select the check box associated with the rule and then click Delete 4 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 To modify an existing IP Extended ACL rule click the Rule ID The number is a hyperlink to the Extended ACL Rule Configuration page Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 537 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 ACL An IP ACL consists of a set of rules which are matched sequentially against a packet When a packet meets the match criteria of a rule the specified rule action Permit Deny is taken and the additional rules are not checked for a match On this menu the interfaces to which an IP ACL applies must be specifi
405. ices gt DHCP L2 Relay gt DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM7352S 48 Pert Gogoda Lever 2 Managed Srechable bwixh wh 410 Gigebs Porm Maintenance Help Index Liosow DHCP L Relay Configuration DHCP L2 Relay Configuration 2 an Ca To Enterlave i o EEE TEE ES 7 s Fei s s a Da a o o o a Disable C ca a Disable O a sab o Disable oO a O 3 a Da a Oa 1 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the selected interface Default is disable 2 Use 82 Option Trust Mode to enable or disable an interface to be trusted for DHCP L2 Relay Option 82 received Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 65 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics To display the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics page click System gt Services gt DHCP L2 Relay gt DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics A screen similar to the following displays GSM7352S ets tens DHCP L Relay Interface Statistics DHOP L Rekay Interface Stativtics a The following table describes the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics fields Table 2 22 Field Description Interface Shows the interface from which the DHCP message is received UntrustedServerMsgsWithOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted se
406. ich a trap is sent if consumed power is greater than threshold power 3 Use Power Management Mode to describe or control the power management algorithm used by the PSE to deliver power to the requesting PDs Static value means that power allocated for each port depends on the type of power threshold configured on the port Dynamic value means that power consumption of each port is measured and calculated in real time Use Auto Reset Mode to specify Enable or Disable When set to Enable the PSE port is reset without administrator intervention whenever a fault condition occurs When set to Disable the administrator has to reset the PSE port whenever a fault condition is detected Use Traps to enable or disable activation of PoE traps by selecting the corresponding check box The factory default is enabled Table 3 Field Definition Firmware Version Power Status Version of the PoE controller s firmware image Indicates the power status Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 87 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 3 Field Definition Total Power Main AC Maximum amount of power the system can deliver to all ports when the PoE unit is powered up by Main AC Supply Total Power RPS Maximum amount of power the system can deliver to all ports when the PoE unit is powered up by RPS unit Power Source The power source There ar
407. id packet Specifies the reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 41 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 2 11 Field Description Server Mode Specifies the mode of the server for the last received valid packet entries that can be configured on this client Unicast Server Max Entries Specifies the maximum number of unicast server Unicast Server Current Entries Specifies the number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this client Broadcast Count Specifies the number of unsolicited broadcast SNTP messages that have been received and processed by the SNTP client since last reboot 42 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual SNTP Server Configuration Use the SNTP Server Configuration page to view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP servers To display the SNTP Server Configuration page click System gt Management gt Time gt SNTP Server Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S ort Gegabel Layer oe b mch with 4 10 Gage aie SNTP Server Configuration Information gt Switch Statistics gt System Resource gt Slot Information gt Loopback SMTP Server Configuration Interface Network To configure a new SN
408. id values are entered an alert message will be displayed with the list of all the valid values To display the Route Redistribution page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Route Redistribution 1 Use Source to list available source routes that have not previously been configured for redistribution by OSPF The valid values are Static Connected and RIP 2 Use Redistribute Option to enable or disable the redistribution for the selected source protocol 3 Use Metric to set the metric value to be used as the metric of redistributed routes This field displays the metric if the source was pre configured and can be modified The valid values are 0 to 16777214 4 Use Metric Type to set the OSPF metric type of redistributed routes 5 Use Tag to set the tag field in routes redistributed This field displays the tag if the source was pre configured otherwise 0 and can be modified The valid values are 0 to 4294967295 6 Use Subnets to set whether the subnetted routes should be redistributed 7 Use Distribute List to set the Access List that filters the routes to be redistributed by the destination protocol Only permitted routes are redistributed If this command refers to a non existent access list all routes are permitted The valid values for Access List IDs are 1 to 199 When used for route filtering the only fields in an access list that get used are e Source IP Address and netmask e Destination IP Addr
409. ides for the creation deletion and management of tunnel interfaces These are dynamic interfaces that are created and deleted via user configuration ProSafe Managed Switches support configured IPv6 over IPv4 tunnels to facilitate the transition of IPv4 networks to IPv6 networks With configured tunnels the user specifies the endpoints of the tunnel Tunnels operate as point to point links Tunnels can be created configured and deleted from this page To display the Tunnel Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Tunnel Configuration 10 11 12 Use Tunnel ID to select from a list of all of available tunnel IDs Use Mode to select the Tunnel mode The supported modes are 6 in 4 configured and 6 to 4 Use IPv6 Mode to enable IPv6 on this interface using the IPv6 address This option is only configurable prior to specifying an explicit IPv6 address Use IPv6 Unreachables to specify the Mode of Sending ICMPv6 Destination Unreachables on this interface If Disabled then this interface will not send ICMPv 6 Destination Unreachables By default IPv6 Destination Unreachables mode is enable Use IPv6 Address to select a list of configured IPv6 addresses for the selected interface Address must be entered in the format prefix length Use EUI64 to specify the 64 bit extended unique identifier EUI 64 For 6to4 tunnels configure the ipv6 address with first 48 bits in the format 2002 tunnel source ipv4 address 4
410. ies the destination MAC address to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid format is xx xx xx xx xx xx The BPDU keyword may be specified using a Destination MAC address of 01 80 C2 xx xx xx Destination MAC Mask Specifies the destination MAC address mask specifying which bits in the destination MAC to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid format iS XX XX XX XX XX XX The BPDU keyword may be specified using a Destination MAC mask of 00 00 00 ff ff ff VLAN Specifies the VLAN ID to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid range of values is 0 to 4095 Either VLAN Range or VLAN can be configured Logging When set to Enable logging is enabled for this ACL rule subject to resource availability in the device If the Access List Trap Flag is also enabled this will cause periodic traps to be generated indicating the number of times this rule was hit during the current report interval A fixed 5 minute report interval is used for the entire system A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval This field is only supported for a Deny Action Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch To delete a rule select the check box associated with the rule and click Delete To change a rule select the check box associated with the rule change the desired fields and click Apply Configuration changes take effect immediatel
411. iffserv Wizard Auto VoIP Basic Ditfserv Wizard Advanced 1 Use Traffic Type to define the DiffServ Class Traffic type options VOIP HTTP FTP Telnet and Every 2 Ports displays the ports which can be configured to support a DiffServ policy The DiffServ policy will be added to selected ports 3 Use Enable Policing to add policing to the DiffServ Policy The policing rate will be applied 4 Committed Rate e When Policing is enabled the committed rate will be applied to the policy and the policing action is set to conform e When Policing is disabled the committed rate is not applied and the policy is set to markdscp 5 Outbound Priority e When Policing is enabled Outbound Priority defines the type of policing conform action where High sets action to markdscp ef Med sets action to markdscp af31 and Low sets action to send e When Policing is disabled Outbound Priority defines the policy where High sets policy to mark ipdscp ef Med sets policy to mark ipdscp af31 Low set policy to mark ipdscp be 410 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Auto VoIP Configuration To display the Auto VoIP Configuration page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Auto VoIP GSM73525 tb Pon 7 oye Srechadte Switth with 4 10 Gigabet Sen vocour gt Diffserv Wizard Auto VoIP Configuration Auto Vorr Auto VoIP z Configuration
412. ified group on this interface Source Hosts This parameter shows source addresses which are members of this multicast address Expiry Time This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address which are members of this multicast group This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with latest IGMP member information Chapter 4 Routing 353 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Proxy Interface Configuration To display the IGMP Proxy Interface Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt Proxy Interface Configuration GSM73525S r Vapo Managed D Gagodt slows IGMP Proxy Intertace Configuration ICMP Proxy etertece eediguration tetertere Renae Mate Least ted Megeet iotory ai 1P address bateas meea pet tenet Made Merter ol creaga Verne Verses 1 peores femeeat a Preep tart Pregeo y 1 Use Interface to select the port for which data is to be configured You must have configured at least one router interface before configuring or displaying data for an IGMP Proxy interface and it should not be a IGMP routing interface 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of IGMP Proxy on the selected interface The default is disable Routing IGMP and Multicast global admin modes should be enabled to enable IGMP Proxy interf
413. ig escrito O O Operational Mode Specifies operational state of an interface Default value is disable 236 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Prefix Configuration To display the IPv6 Prefix Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Prefix Configuration GSM73525 IPv6 Prefia Configuration IP et intentions Sete toe 1 Use Interface to select the interface to be configured When the selection is changed a screen refresh will occur causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected port All physical interfaces are valid 2 Use IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length to specify the IPv6 prefix with prefix length for an interface 3 Use EUI 64 to specify 64 bit unicast prefix 4 Use Valid Lifetime to specify router advertisement per prefix time to consider prefix valid for purposes of on link determination Valid lifetime must be in the range 0 to 4294967295 5 Use Preferred Lifetime to specify router advertisement per prefix time An auto configured address generated from this prefix is preferred Preferred lifetime must be in range 0 to 4294967295 6 Use OnLink Flag to specify selected prefix can be used for on link determination Default value is enable This selector lists the two options for on link flag enable and disable 7 Use Autonomous Flag to specify selected prefix can be used for autonomous address configuration Defa
414. igabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 38 Field Description External Routing A definition of the router s capabilities for the area including whether or not AS external LSAs are flooded into throughout the area SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum Import Summary LSAs The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers The summary LSAs will be enabled disabled imported into this area Chapter 4 Routing 303 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Stub Area Configuration To display the Stub Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Stub Area Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S wi
415. igabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 8 Fes escrito O O lplnReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces including those received in error lplnHdrErrors lplnAddrErrors lpForwDatagrams lplnUnknownProtos lplnDiscards The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers including bad checksums version number mismatch other format errors time to live exceeded errors discovered in processing their IP options etc The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity This count includes invalid addresses e g 0 0 0 0 and addresses of unsupported Classes e g Class E For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP destination as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination In entities which do not act as IP Gateways this counter will include only those packets which were Source Routed via this entity and the Source Route option processing was successful The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupport
416. iguration Examples 609 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e For the default VLAN with VLAN ID 1 specify the following members port 7 U and port 8 U e For the VLAN with VLAN ID 10 specify the following members port 1 U port 2 U and port 3 T e For the VLAN with VLAN ID 20 specify the following members port 4 U port 5 T and port 6 U 3 Inthe Port PVID Configuration screen see Port PVID Configuration on page 3 139 specify the PVID for ports g1 and g4 so that packets entering these ports are tagged with the port VLAN ID e Portgi PVID 10 e Port g4 PVID 20 4 With the VLAN configuration that you set up the following situations produce results as described e Ifan untagged packet enters port 1 the switch tags it with VLAN ID 10 The packet has access to port 2 and port 3 The outgoing packet is stripped of its tag to leave port 2 as an untagged packet For port 3 the outgoing packet leaves as a tagged packet with VLAN ID 10 e If atagged packet with VLAN ID 10 enters port 3 the packet has access to port 1 and port 2 If the packet leaves port 1 or port 2 it is stripped of its tag to leave the switch as an untagged packet e Ifan untagged packet enters port 4 the switch tags it with VLAN ID 20 The packet has access to port 5 and port 6 The outgoing packet is stripped of its tag to become an untagged packet as it leaves port 6 For port 5 the outgoing pa
417. iguration on page 65 e DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics on page 66s DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration To display the DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCP L2 Relay gt DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays N E T Gace GSM7352S od 44 Port Gegober Laver Mens ible Seic with 4 trottal O Cegabs Hon adex sooowt 3 DHCP Server DHCP L Relay Configuration gt OHOP Reley onfigue DHCP La Raley DHCP L Relay Global C ation DHCP L2 Relay Admin Hodo Globe Corfigeraton DHCP L2 Reley VLAN Configuration OHOP L2 Relay Irtertace Configuration DPCP L2 Relay Irtertace Stebsbcs VDP Relay gt DHCPV6 Server ONCPV6 Relay DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration 1 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the switch The default is Disable DHCP L2 Relay VLAN Configuration VLAN ID shows the VLAN ID configured on the switch Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the selected VLAN Use Circuit ID Mode to enable or disable the Circuit ID suboption of DHCP Option 82 Use Remote ID String to specify the Remote ID when Remote ID mode is enabled o he 64 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration To display the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration page click System gt Serv
418. iguration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S P pa Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration Configuration MAC Based VAN IP Subnet Based VLAN Port OVLAN Configuration Protocol Based VLAN Grove Configuraten Protocol Based VLAN Gove Membersho Voice VIAN Configuraten 144 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Group Name to assign a name to a new group You may enter up to 16 characters 2 Use Protocol s to select the protocols you want to be associated with the group There are three configurable protocols IP IPX ARP e IP IP is a network layer protocol that provides a connectionless service for the delivery of data ARP Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a low level protocol that dynamically maps network layer addresses to physical medium access control MAC addresses e IPX The Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX is a connectionless datagram Network layer protocol that forwards data over a network 3 Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID It can be any number in the range of 1 to 4093 All the ports in the group will assign this VLAN ID to untagged packets received for the protocols you included in this group 4 Click ADD to add a new Protocol Based VLAN group to the switch 5 Clic
419. imilar to the following displays GSM73525S 48 Port Gigebit Loyer 3 Mow Sockable Swikh wth 4 190 tocour DHCPv6 Server Configuration gt DHCP Server gt ONCP Aalay DHCPV6 Server Configuration gt DHCP L2 Relay Admon Mote OHCPV6 intertace Configuration e ORCPNE Bendings Information OrecPv Server Statics gt DHCPV6 Relay Use Admin Mode to specify DHCPv6 operation on the switch Value is enabled or disabled Use Relay Option to specify Relay Agent Information Option value The values allowed are between 54 to 65535 The default value is 54 Use Remote id Sub option to specify the Relay Agent Information Option Remote ID Sub option type value The values allowed are between 1 and 65535 The default value is 1 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 71 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCPv 6 Pool Configuration To display the DHCPv6 Pool Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCPv6 Pool Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525S tan Cigeb te re honap A wih 4 1D gaia Slats 1 Pool Name For a user with read write permission this field would show names of all the existing pools along with an additional option Create When the user selects Create another text box Pool Name appears where the user may enter name for the Pool to be created For a user with read onl
420. imple you will be prompted to enter an authentication key This key will be included in the clear in the RIP header of all packets sent on the network All routers on the network must be configured with the same key Encrypt If you select Encrypt you will be prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID Encryption uses the MD5 Message Digest algorithm All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID 6 Use Authentication Key to enter the RIP Authentication Key for the specified interface If you do not choose to use authentication you will not be prompted to enter a key If you choose simple or encrypt the key may be up to 16 octets long The key value will only be displayed if you are logged on with Read Write privileges 7 Use Authentication Key ID to enter the RIP Authentication Key ID for the specified interface If you choose not to use authentication or to use simple you will not be prompted to enter the key ID If you choose encrypt the key ID may be in range from 0 to 255 The key ID value will be displayed only if you are logged on with Read Write privileges 8 Click CANCEL to display a new screen where you can select the authentication method for the virtual link Chapter 4 Routing 263 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual RIP Status Table 26 Field Description Interface Displays the interfac
421. ing GSM73525 48 Pert Gigabot Layer I Managed Srechable Swixh vah 4 10 Gigabir Slon tocourt IP DSCP to Queue Mapping Intertace Selection Interface IP DSCP to Queue Mapping lt e ieii ie iik 1e lt e e e ie ik i ie e EA lt iele eie eile eike eiki eik lt lelle ie ieie e ieee ce k ei k iy im sy i i Ds 0 v o iw oy oy o x ow o x To map DSCP values to queues 1 Use Interface to specify CoS configuration settings based per interface or specify all CoS configurable interfaces 2 The IP DSCP field displays an IP DSCP value from 0 to 63 3 For each DSCP value specify which internal traffic class to map the corresponding IP DSCP value The queue number depends on specific hardware 4 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 If you make changes to the page click Apply to apply the changes to the system Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 403 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual CoS Interface Configuration Use the CoS Interface Configuration page to apply an interface shaping rate to all interfaces or to a specific interface To display the CoS Interface Configuration page click QoS gt CoS gt Advanced gt CoS Interface Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigab Layer 3 monaged Srechabte Switth
422. ing Specification TCS and the Service Level Specification SLS operation respectively Traffic Conditioning Policy Traffic conditioning pertains to actions performed on incoming traffic There are several distinct QoS actions associated with traffic conditioning 614 Appendix B Configuration Examples ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Dropping Drop a packet upon arrival This is useful for emulating access control list operation using DiffServ especially when DiffServ and ACL cannot co exist on the same interface e Marking IP DSCP or IP Precedence Marking re marking the DiffServ code point ina packet with the DSCP value representing the service level associated with a particular DiffServ traffic class Alternatively the IP Precedence value of the packet can be marked re marked e Marking CoS 802 1p Sets the three bit priority field in the first only 802 1p header toa specified value when packets are transmitted for the traffic class An 802 1p header is inserted if it does not already exist This is useful for assigning a layer 2 priority level based on a DiffServ forwarding class i e DSCP or IP Precedence value definition to convey some QoS characteristics to downstream switches which do not routinely look at the DSCP value in the IP header e Policing A method of constraining incoming traffic associated with a particular class so that it conforms to the terms of the
423. ink you can access the following pages System Information on page 20 Switch Statistics on page 26 System Resource on page 29 Slot Information on page 30 Loopback Interface on page 32 Network Interface on page 33 Time on page 38 DNS on page 46 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 19 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual System Information After a successful login the System Information page displays Use this page to configure and view general device information To display the System Information page click System gt Management gt System Information A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM73525 Correa wih larovaten 48 Peet Gigabit Layer 3 Menoged ms Stackable Seitch with 4 10 Gigabit Slots System Monitoring Maintenance Help Index vooour v System System Information Information gt Switch Statistics Switch Status gt System Product Name GSM73525 NetGear GZN7J925 40 GE amp TENGIG Resource System N gt Slot Information eR gt Loopback System Location Interface System Contact Network Logis Timeout Interface 1Pv4 Network Interface gt Time IPvO Network Interface TPv4 Loopback Interface TPv6 Loopback Interface System Oste JUN 30 21 35 01 2020 UTC 0 00 System Up Time daya 23 houra 30 mins 5 secs System SNMP OID 2 6 1 4 1 4526 100 5 4 System MAC Address 00109108107 06005 Supported Jeve Phegin Version 14 FAN
424. interface in seconds This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network Valid values range from 1 to 65 535 The default is 10 seconds 7 Use Dead Interval to enter the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network This value should a multiple of the Hello Interval e g 4 Valid values range from 1 to 2147483647 The default is 40 8 Use Iftransit Delay Interval to enter the OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default value is 1 second 9 Use MTU Ignore to disable OSPF MTU mismatch detection on received database description packets Default value is Disable MTU mismatch detection is enabled 10 Use Passive Mode to make an interface passive to prevent OSPF from forming an adjacency on an interface OSPF advertises networks attached to passive interfaces as stub networks Interfaces are not passive by default 11 Use Network Type to set the OSPF network type on the interface to broadcast or point to point OSPF only selects a designated router and originates network LSAs for broadcast networks No more than two OSPF routers m
425. ion User Passeord Corfigerenon Pareword Mnmum Length gt Enable Password Password Aging deve gt Line Password Paseword History gt RADIUS gt TACACS gt Authentication List Login Sessions Lechowt Attempts Use Password Minimum Length to specify the minimum character length of all new local user passwords Use Password Aging days to specify the maximum time that user passwords are valid in days from the time the password is set Once a password expires the user will be required to enter a new password following the first login after password expiration A value of 0 indicates that passwords never expire Use Password History to specify the number of previous passwords to store for prevention of password reuse This ensures that each user does not reuse passwords often A value of 0 indicates that no previous passwords will be stored Use Lockout Attempts to specify the number of allowable failed local authentication attempts before the user s account is locked A value of 0 indicates that user accounts will never be locked 430 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Enable Password Configuration This page prompts you to change the Privileged EXEC password Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters The password is case sensitive To display the Enable Password Configuration page click Security gt Management Security
426. ion gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP L2 Relay gt UOP Relay gt OHOPv Server DHCPv6 Relay prepress 1 Choose All Dynamic Bindings to specify all dynamic bindings to be deleted e Specific Dynamic Binding to specify specific dynamic binding to be deleted The following table describes the DHCP Bindings Information fields Table 2 19 Field Description IP Address Specifies the Client s IP Address Hardware Address Specifies the Client s Hardware Address Lease Time Left Specifies the Lease time left in Days Hours and Minutes dd hh mm format Type Specifies the Type of Binding Dynamic Manual 60 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Conflicts Information To display the DHCP Conflicts Information page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Conflicts Information A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR System Mano Y DHOP Server DHCP Conflicts Information DHCP Server Reset F AR Address Conftcts O Specific Address Confit Corfigu ston DHCP Pool DHCP Coaflicts Information Search By Confct IP Address Detection Method 1 Choose GSM7352S 44 Port Gigabit Layer Managed Srochable Switch with 4 10 Gagabar Shem ader i0007 e All Address Conflicts to specify all address conflicts to be deleted e Specific Address Conflict to specify a
427. ion of this MIB The version string must have the following structure MIB Version Organization Software Revision where e MIB Version 1 3 the version of this MIB e Organization NETGEAR Inc e Revision 1 0 Agent Address The IP address associated with this agent Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest sFlow agent information Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 575 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual sFlow Receiver Configuration To display the sFlow Receiver Configuration page click Monitoring gt sFlow gt Advanced gt sFlow Receiver Configuration GSM73525 lomi Som a Ib Ogia Blom 1 Receiver Index Selects the receiver for which data is to be displayed or configured Allowed range is 1 to 8 2 Use Receiver Owner to specify the entity making use of this sFlowRcvrTable entry The empty string indicates that the entry is currently unclaimed and the receiver configuration is reset to default values An entity wishing to claim an sFlowRevrTable entry must ensure that the entry is unclaimed before trying to claim it The entry is claimed by setting the owner string The entry must be claimed before any changes can be made to other sampler objects 3 Use Receiver Timeout to specify the time in seconds remaining before the sampler is released and stops sampling A management entity wanting to maintain control of the sampler is responsible for settin
428. ion page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Storm Control gt Storm Control Interface Configuration 7 i i i tif i iit t i tif ttihitil tif KENNT i if if if i EEIE iii 7 i HARTUNE KARNET lt tae e eos am tes ran e iii i i Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 495 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 6 100 id escrito O O Broadcast Storm Recovery Mode Enable or disable this option by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field When you specify Enable for Broadcast Storm Recovery and the broadcast traffic on the specified Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the broadcast traffic The factory default is disabled Broadcast Storm Recovery Level Type Specify the Broadcast Storm Recovery Level as a percentage of link speed or as packages per second Broadcast Storm Recovery Level Specify the threshold at which storm control activates The factory default is 5 percent of port speed for pps type Multicast Storm Recovery Mode Enable or disable this option by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field When you specify Enable for Multicast Storm Recovery and the multicast traffic on the specified Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the multicast t
429. ionality DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay functions are mutually exclusive 3 Use Relay Interface to specify an interface to reach a relay server 4 Use Destination IP Address to specify an IPv6 Address to reach a relay server 5 Use Remote ID to specify the relay agent information option Remote ID needs to be derived from the DHCPv6 server DUID and the relay interface number or it can be specified as a user defined string Stacking From the Stacking link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 80 e Advanced on page 83 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 79 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e Stack Configuration on page 80 Stack Configuration This page moves the Primary Management Unit functionality from one unit to another Upon execution the entire stack including all interfaces in the stack is unconfiugred and reconfigured with the configuration on the new Primary Management Unit After the reload is complete all stack management capability must be performed on the new Primary Management Unit To preserve the current configuration across a stack move save the current configuration to the NVRAM before performing the stack move A stack move causes all routes and layer 2 addresses to be lost The administrator is prompted to confirm the management move 80 Chapter 2 Configuring Syst
430. is bons mt 4 19 gata tien rare 526 Chapter6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure MAC ACL rules 1 2 From the ACL Name field specify the existing MAC ACL to which the rule will apply To set up a new MAC ACL use the lt pdf gt MAC Binding Table on page 6 530 To add a new rule enter a whole number in the range of 1 to 12 that will be used to identify the rule configure the following settings and click Add Action Specify what action should be taken if a packet matches the rule s criteria The choices are permit or deny Assign Queue ld Specifies the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all packets matching this ACL rule Valid range of Queue Ids is 0 to 6 CoS Specifies the 802 1p user priority to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid range of values is 0 to 7 Ethertype User Value Specifies the user defined customized Ethertype value to be used when the user has selected User Value as Ethertype Key to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid range of values is 0x0600 to OxFFFF Source MAC Specifies the Source MAC address to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid format is xx XX XX XX XX XX Source MAC Mask Specifies the Source MAC address mask specifying which bits in the Source MAC to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid format is XX XX XX XX XX XX Destination MAC Specif
431. is copying a transmitted packet the copied packet is VLAN tagged or untagged as it is being transmitted on the source port Use the Multiple Port Mirroring page to define port mirroring sessions To access the Multiple Port Mirroring page click Monitoring gt Mirroring gt Port Mirroring Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 571 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NETGEAR GSM7352S weet wth mv 48 Pert Gigabit Leye 2 Managed Srochabie Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Slots System Switching Routing enitoring Maintenance Help index Losour Port Mirroring Multiple Port Mirroring 2658 gt a 0 D a o 0 Oo o O woe a oO g o o o o o 572 Chapter7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure Port Mirroring 1 Select the check box next to a port to configure it as a source port e Mode Specifies the Mode for mirroring By default Mode is disabled 2 Use Source Port to specify the configured port s as mirrored port s Traffic of the configured port s is sent to the probe port 3 In the Destination Port field specify the port to which port traffic is be copied Use the unit slot port format to specify the port You can configure only one destination port on the system Acts as a probe port and will receive all the traffic from configured mirrored port s Default value is blan
432. is is the 237th message logged with system IP 0 0 0 0 and task id 1 Format of the messages e lt 15 gt Aug 24 05 34 05 STKO MSTP 2110 mspt_api c 318 237 Interface 12 transitioned to root state on message age timer expiry The above example indicates a user level message 1 with severity 7 debug ona system that is not stack and generated by component MSTP running in thread id 2110 on Aug 24 05 34 05 by line 318 of file mstp_api c This is the 237th message logged Messages logged to a collector or relay via syslog have an identical format to the above message e Total number of Messages For the message log only the latest 200 entries are displayed on the webpage 562 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Command Log Configuration To access the Command Log Configuration page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Command Log Configuration GSM7352S 48 Pert Gigabit Leye 2 Mon Srechable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Slots LoGeour Command Log Configuration Command Log Configuration Adron Disabile O Enable gt Trap Logs gt Event Logs gt Porsistent Logs 1 Use Admin Mode to enable disable the operation of the CLI Command logging by selecting the corresponding radio button Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 563 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Console Log Configuration This
433. istics Table 16 Field Description Total Datagrams Received The total number of input datagrams received by the interface including those received in error Received Datagrams Locally Delivered The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 user protocols including ICMP This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the datagrams Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Header The number of input datagrams discarded due to Errors errors in their IPv6 headers including version number mismatch other format errors hop count exceeded errors discovered in processing their IPv6 options etc Received Datagrams Discarded Due To MTU The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because their size exceeded the link MTU of outgoing interface Received Datagrams Discarded Due To No Route The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination Received Datagrams With Unknown Protocol The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the datagrams Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Invalid The number of input datagrams discarded be
434. it L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Interface The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of IGMP on the selected interface The default is disable 3 Use Version to enter the version of IGMP you want to configure on the selected interface Valid values are 1 to 3 and the default value is 3 This field is configurable only when IGMP interface mode is enabled 4 Use Robustness to enter the robustness value This variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet If you expect the subnet to be lossy you should enter a higher number for this parameter IGMP is robust to robustness variable 1 packet losses Valid values are from 1 to 255 The default value is 2 5 Use Query Interval to enter the frequency in seconds at which IGMP host query packets are to be transmitted on this interface Valid values are from 1 to 1800 The default value is 125 6 Use Query Max Response Time to enter the maximum query response time to be advertised in IGMPv2 queries on this interface in tenths of a second The default value is 100 Valid values are from 0 to 255 7 Use Startup Query Interval to enter the number of seconds between the transmission of startup queries on the selected interface The valid values are from 1 to 300 The default value is 31 8 Use Startup Query Count to enter the number of queries to be sent on startup Th
435. it Layer 9 Managed Stackable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Sem Help Index 1oG0ur Dowslsad File Management gt File Upload HTTP File Upload HTTP File HTTP File Upload Upload Fie Type image Name 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to upload e Archive Specify archive STK code when you want to retrieve from the operational flash e Image1 Specify the code image1 when you want to retrieve e Image2 Specify the code image2 when you want to retrieve e CLI Banner Specify CLI Banner when you want retrieve the CLI banner file Startup Configuration Specify configuration when you want to retrieve the stored configuration e Text Configuration Specify configuration in text mode when you want to retrieve the stored configuration e Script File Specify script file when you want to retrieve the stored configuration e Error Log Specify error log to retrieve the system error persistent log sometimes referred to as the event log e Trap Log Specify trap log to retrieve the system trap records e Buffered Log Specify buffered log to retrieve the system buffered in memory log e Tech Support Specify Tech Support to retrieve the switch information needed for troubleshooting The factory default is Archive 2 Use Local File Name to specify the local script file name you want to upload 586 Chapter 8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Softwa
436. itch with 4 10 Gigebit Siete tosout Policy Configuration gt Diffserv Wizard gt Auto VolP 5 Policy Configuration 1 Use Policy Name to uniquely identify a policy using a case sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters 2 Member Class This lists all existing DiffServ classes currently defined as members of the specified Policy from which one can be selected This list is automatically updated as a new class is added to or removed from the policy This field is a selector field only when an existing policy class instance is to be removed After removal of the policy class instance this becomes a non configurable field 3 Policy Type Indicates the type is specific to inbound traffic direction Click ADD to add a new policy to the switch 5 Click DELETE to delete the currently selected policy from the switch gt 420 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure the policy attributes 1 Click the name of the policy NETGEAR GSM73525 Aa 48 Port Gigabit Layer J Managed _ Stechable vinh wah 4 10 Gigabir Slon ooour System Switching Marstenance The policy name is a hyperlink The following figure shows the configuration fields for the policy NETGEAR GSM7352 6 with 48 Pert Gigeb Layer 3 z aiibi Srocheble Seikh wah 4 10 Gagabsr Slon System Switching Routing Monitoring Maintenance
437. ito O O Protocol State The state of PIM SM in the router either operational or non operational IPv6 Prefix Length The IPv6 Address Prefix and the Length of the selected interface Designated Router The Designated Router on the selected PIM interface Neighbor Count The number of PIM neighbors on the selected interface 380 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SM Neighbor To display the IPv6 PIM SM Neighbor page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt PIM SM gt PIM SM Neighbor PIM SM Neighbor FIM SM neighbor GSM73525 n gt pret I Managat oe Gig Inectable bout wt 6 10 6 Table 74 Field Description Interface The interface on which neighbor is displayed Neighbor IP The IP address of the PIM neighbor for this entry Up Time The time since this PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the local router Expiry Time The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor will be aged out Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with latest PIM SM neighbor information Chapter 4 Routing 381 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SM Candidate RP Configuration To display the IPv6 PIM SM Candidate RP Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast PIM SM gt Candidate RP Configuration GSM73525 4 tow Gigot inre Managed 41D
438. ity ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The 802 1X network has three components e Authenticators Specifies the port that is authenticated before permitting system access e Supplicants Specifies the host connected to the authenticated port requesting access to the system services e Authentication Server Specifies the external server for example the RADIUS server that performs the authentication on behalf of the authenticator and indicates whether the user is authorized to access system services From the Port Authentication link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 467 e Advanced on page 470 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e 802 1X Configuration on page 468 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 467 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 802 1X Configuration Use the 802 1X Configuration page to enable or disable port access control on the system To display the 802 1X Configuration page click Security gt Port Authentication gt Basic gt 802 1X Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pert Gigoba loye 3 Moseged Stackable Switch with 4 1 gt Gigabit Slots wecour 802 1X Configuration 802 1X Configuration Adrremmtrative Mote VLAN Anasgament Mote Users lege Autheotic ation Liat 468 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed S
439. ity Monitoring Maintenonce Help Index sooo J sFlow Agent Information sFlow Agent Information Agent Version 1 3 Netgear Inc 8 Agent Address 10 27 7 74 gt LIAL Se Table 7 119 Field Description Agent Version Uniquely identifies the version and implementation of this MIB The version string must have the following structure MIB Version Organization Software Revision where e MIB Version 1 3 the version of this MIB e Organization NETGEAR Inc e Revision 1 0 Agent Address The IP address associated with this agent Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest sFlow agent information 574 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e sFlow Agent on page 575 e sFlow Receiver Configuration on page 576 e sFlow Interface Configuration on page 577 sFlow Agent To display the sFlow Agent page click Monitoring gt sFlow gt Advanced gt sFlow Agent GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Loye 3 Moseged Stackable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Slon vocour Baste sFlow Agent Information v Advanced sFlow Agent Intormation son Agent Pioa Receiver Aquat Vesuion Cemfguraber Agent Address sflow Interfoce Configuration atrata Table 7 120 Field Description Agent Version Uniquely identifies the version and implementat
440. k 4 From the Session Mode menu select the mode for port mirroring on the selected port e Enable Multiple Port Mirroring is active on the selected port e Disable Port mirroring is not active on the selected port but the mirroring information is retained 5 Direction Specifies the direction of the Traffic to be mirrored from the configured mirrored port s Default value is Tx and Rx 6 Click Apply to apply the settings to the system If the port is configured as a source port the Mirroring Port field value is Mirrored 7 To delete a mirrored port select the check box next to the mirrored port and then click Delete 8 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Table 7 118 Field Description Mirroring Port Indicates the port to be in a mirrored state sFlow From the sFlow link under the Monitoring tab you can access the following pages e Basic on page 573 e Advanced on page 575 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e sFlow Agent on page 573 sFlow Agent To display the sFlow Agent page click Monitoring gt sFlow gt Basic gt sFlow Agent Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 573 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigobir Loyer J Mosoged Stockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Slory System Switching Routing Secur
441. k DELETE to remove the Protocol Based VLAN group identified by the value in the Group ID field Table 3 50 Field Description Group ID A number used to identify the group created by the user Group IDs are automatically assigned when a group is created by the user Ports Display all the member ports which belong to the group Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 145 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership To display the Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership GSM7352S NETGEAR at ton outs ines aap Stechable Switch with 4 Basic Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership Advanced gt VLAN Configuration Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership VLAN Membertho I tus Gro CARINI malmal ts e tron MAC Based VLAN 1P Subnet Based VLAN Port OVLAN Configuration Protocol Based VLAN 1 Use Group ID to select the protocol based VLAN Group ID for which you want to display or configure data 2 Use Port List to add the ports you selected to this Protocol Based VLAN Group Note that a given interface can only belong to one group for a given protocol If you have already added a port to a group for IP you cannot add it to another group that also includes IP although you could add it to a new group for IPX Table 3 51
442. k state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers This field is the normal TOS associated with the stub metric Chapter 4 Routing 275 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NSSA Area Configuration To display the NSSA Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt NSSA Area Configuration Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects Use Import Summary LSAs to select enable or disable If you select enable summary LSAs will be imported into NSSA areas The Default Information Originate area displays the default Route Information These options will permit a user to advertise a default route into the NSSA when Import Summary LSAs is disabled They can also be applied by the CLI command area area id nssa de fault info originate in the ip router OSPF config mode e Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the default information originate Valid values are True or False e Use Metric Value to set the Default Metric value for default information originate The valid range of values is 1 to 16777214 Use Metric Type to select the type of metric specified in the Metric Value field e Comparable Cost External Type 1
443. l describes how to use the Web based interface to manage and monitor the system Using the Web Interface To access the switch by using a Web browser the browser must meet the following software requirements e HTML version 4 0 or later e HTTP version 1 1 or later e Java Runtime Environment 1 6 or later Use the following procedures to log on to the Web interface 1 Open a Web browser and enter the IP address of the switch in the Web browser address field 10 Chapter 1 Getting Started ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 2 The default username is admin default password is none no password Type the username into the field on the login screen and then click Login Usernames and passwords are case sensitive 3 After the system authenticates you the System Information page displays The figure below shows the layout of the Managed Switch Web interface NETGEARNavigation Tab Feature Link sence GSM73525 v Devt batee bona osn 4 10 Ogeta Een Logout Button Configuration Status and Options Chapter 1 Getting Started 11 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Navigation Tabs Feature Links and Page Menu The navigation tabs along the top of the Web interface give you quick access to the various switch functions The tabs are always available and remain constant regardless of which feature you configure When you select a
444. lay the VLAN Routing Configuration page click Routing gt VLAN gt VLAN Routing GSM73525 0 gt or Gigee gt lover Managed VLAN Renting VLAN Routing Configuration Wicart 1 Use VLAN ID to enter the ID of a VLAN you want to configure for VLAN Routing The field will display the all IDs of the VLAN configured on this switch 2 Use IP Address to enter the IP Address to be configured for the VLAN Routing Interface 3 Use Subnet Mask to enter the Subnet Mask to be configured for the VLAN Routing Interface 4 Click ADD to add the VLAN Routing Interface specified in the VLAN ID field to the switch configuration 5 Click DELETE to remove the VLAN Routing Interface specified in the VLAN ID field from the switch configuration Table 21 Field Description The interface assigned to the VLAN for routing MAC Address The MAC Address assigned to the VLAN Routing Interface ARP The ARP protocol associates a layer 2 MAC address with a layer 3 IPv4 address ProSafe Managed Switches software features both dynamic and manual ARP configuration With manual ARP configuration you can statically add entries into the ARP table ARP is a necessary part of the internet protocol IP and is used to translate an IP address to a media MAC address defined by a local area network LAN such as Ethernet A station needing to send an IP packet must learn the MAC address of the IP destination or of the next 252 Chapter 4 Routi
445. lays Supported Cards information Table 2 8 Field Description Card Model Displays the list of models of all cards that can be supported Card Index Displays the index assigned to the selected card type Card Type Displays the hardware type of this supported card This is a 32 bit data field Card Descriptor Displays a data field used to identify the supported card Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 31 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Loopback Interface Use this page to create configure and remove Loopback interfaces To display the Loopback Interface page click System gt Management gt Loopback Interface A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525 says Loopback Interface Configuration IPvt Loopia Intertace Configuration each Premary IP 1 Use the Loopback Interface Type field to select IPv4 or IPv6 loopback interface to configure the corresponding attributes 2 Use the Loopback ID field to select list of currently configured loopback interfaces 3 Use the Primary Address field to input the primary IPv4 address for this interface in dotted decimal notation This option only visible when IPv4 loopback is selected 4 Use the Primary Mask field to input the primary IPv4 subnet mask for this interface in dotted decimal notation This option only visible when IPv4 loopback is selected 5 Use the Secondary IP Addr
446. le The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093 Use IP Address to specify valid IP Address for the binding rule Click ADD to add DHCP snooping binding entry into the database Click DELETE to delete selected static entries from the database Dynamic Binding Configuration 1 Interface Displays the interface to which a binding entry in the DHCP snooping database Use MAC Address to display the MAC address for the binding in the binding database Use VLAN ID to display the VLAN for the binding entry in the binding database The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093 IP Address Displays IP Address for the binding entry in the binding database Lease Time Displays the remaining Lease time for the Dynamic entries Click CLEAR to delete all DHCP Snooping binding entries 500 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration To display the DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration page click Security gt Control gt DHCP Snooping gt Persistent Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pon Gigodit Layer J Monoged Srockobie Switch with 4 10 Gigobir Silor Monitoring Maintenance Help index sosour puce Seoopisg DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration Global Configuration Interface Store Ce lex al Q Remote Corfiguration Remote IP Address 9 0 0 0 Binding Remete File Hame Cerfiguraton Write Delay Persisten
447. le Management 2 206 diegicccniasenticina KCER SIRENELE PETE ENA 592 CODY s5 idee ae ce eaa AE A red ped ene A AES 593 Dual Image Configuration 0 0c eee ee 594 TrOUDIGSHOOLING 2 202c2ceee cee ceed ei dene eed dene eee bears 595 PINGUPVA oi 0 piesa th bie ones eee eked i 595 Ping PYG s22 taecbteesea seca obey Ghd Se hee Deed Meese os 598 Traceroute IPV4 cs 2 2286 2b 2 edd tiga sistrin tata diraa dee 599 Traceroute IPVG 22 cicciiegerigeeeaeged eae PP IERA ease ees 601 Chapter9 Help OnING HElPio css otheteggede bttw dare ta dees dake ah daGary aes 602 SUPPO eane da amp ayaa ne ft Gon a ee en wea aie T E E 602 User GUE iaus su iced tatna de Ghd ae eld dee tabs EENEN 603 Appendix A Default Settings Appendix B Configuration Examples Virtual Local Area Networks VLANS 0 0000 e ee eee eee 608 VLAN Example Configuration 0 00 0 cece eee 609 Access Control Lists ACLS 0ccc20ccaucateadonn tech pe aE a 610 MAC ACL Example Configuration 0000 0c eee eee 611 Standard IP ACL Example Configuration 000 612 Differentiated Services DiffServ 0 20 000 c eee eee ee 613 VBS E e e a a Cone sand dentate a a E okabia toe Back aad 613 DitiServ Traffic ClaSseS 24 cirsGsuiavdaeedebeseee ed yeaa ees 614 Grealing PollCieSis i bce erkeiuege E sega eee eee 614 DiffServ Example Configuration 0 000 eee eee eee 616 SOZIA 2 sc ardetievece aia dialing a eee antes uti a da ie
448. learned e Learned the value of the corresponding instance was learned and is being used e Management the value of the corresponding instance is also the value of an existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress 194 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e Dynamic Addresses on page 195 e Address Table on page 196 Dynamic Addresses This page allows the user to set the Address Aging Interval for the specified forwarding database To display the Address Table page click Switching gt Address Table gt Advanced gt Dynamic Addresses _ GSM7352S 4 10 Gigobit Slots gt Basie Dynamic Address Table Advenced Dynamic Address Table Oynarme ade es Address Aging Femeout seconds Address Tobie 1 Use Address Aging Timeout seconds to specify the time out period in seconds for aging out dynamically learned forwarding information 802 1D 1990 recommends a default of 300 seconds The value may be specified as any number between 10 and 1000000 seconds The factory default is 300 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 195 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Address Table This table contains information about unicast entries for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information This i
449. led this will cause periodic traps to be generated indicating the number of times this rule was hit during the current report interval A fixed 5 minute report interval is used for the entire system A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval This field is visible for a Deny Action Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 535 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Assign Queue Specifies the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all packets matching this IP ACL rule Valid range of Queue Ids is 0 to 6 Mirror Interface Specifies the specific egress interface where the matching traffic stream is copied in addition to being forwarded normally by the device This field cannot be set if a Redirect Interface is already configured for the ACL rule This field is visible for a Permit Action Match Every Select true or false from the pull down menu True signifies that all packets will match the selected IP ACL and Rule and will be either permitted or denied In this case since all packets match the rule the option of configuring other match criteria will not be offered To configure specific match criteria for the rule remove the rule and re create it or re configure Match Every to False for the other match criteria to be visible Protocol Keyword Specify that a packet s IP protocol is a match condition for the selected IP ACL rule The
450. lid values are from 0 to 128 Default value is 126 Table 75 Field Description IP Address Displays the IP address of the Elected BSR Next bootstrap Message Time in hours minutes and seconds in which the next bootstrap message is due from this BSR Next Candidate RP Advertisement Time in hours minutes and seconds in which the next candidate RP advertisement will be sent Chapter 4 Routing 383 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SM Static RP Configuration This page is used to statically configure the RP address for one or more multicast groups To display the IPv6 PIM SM Static RP Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt PIM SM gt Static RP Configuration GSM73525 4 te Gigab inym d Managed a 1 Gasta ou 1 Use RP Address to specify the IP Address of the RP to be created or deleted 2 Use Group Address to specify the Group Address of the RP to be created or deleted 3 Use Prefix Length to specify the Group IPv6 Prefix Length of the RP to be created or deleted 4 Use Override to indicate that if there is a conflict the RP configured with this option prevails over the RP learned by BSR 5 Click ADD to add a new static RP address for one or more multicast groups 6 Click DELETE to delete the RP address selected 384 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD
451. lue 4 Use UDP Port Other Value to specify UDP Destination Port that lies between 0 and 65535 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 69 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 5 Use Discard to enable disable dropping of matched packets Enable can be chosen only when a user enters 0 0 0 0 IP address Discard mode can be set to Disable when user adds a new entry with a non zero IP address 6 Click ADD to create an entry in UDP Relay Table with the specified configuration 7 Click DELETE to remove all entries or a specified one from UDP Relay Interface Configuration Table The following table describes the UDP Relay Interface Configuration fields Table 2 24 Field Description OOOO O Hit Count Show the number of UDP packets hitting the UDP port 70 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCPv 6 Server From the DHCPV6 Server link you can access the following pages DHCPV6 Server Configuration on page 71 DHCPV 6 Pool Configuration on page 72 DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation Configuration on page 73 DHCPV 6 Interface Configuration on page 75 DHCPV6 Bindings Information on page 76 DHCPV6 Server Statistics on page 77 DHCPv 6 Server Configuration To display the DHCPv6 Server Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCPv6 Server Configuration A screen s
452. ly untagged frames e GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared Internal VLAN Configuration This page displays the allocation base and the allocation mode of internal VLAN The internal VLAN is reserved by port based routing interface and invisible to the end user Once these internal VLANs are allocated by port based routing interface they are cannot be assigned to a routing VLAN interface 1 Use Internal VLAN Allocation Base to specify the VLAN Allocation Base for the routing interface The default base of the internal VLAN is 1 to 4093 2 Use the optional Internal VLAN Allocation Policy field to specify a policy for the internal VLAN allocation There are two policies supported ascending and descending Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 135 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual VLAN Membership To display the VLAN Membership page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt VLAN Membership NETGEAR GSM7352S lgebe 9 MAC Bases VLAN IP Subnet Based To configure VLAN membership 1 Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID for which you want to display or configure data 2 Use Group Operation to select all the ports and configure them e Untag All Select all the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN will be untagged All the ports will be included in the VLAN e Tag All Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for
453. m o m gp 472 Chapter6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual x 0d 2000 dene 405 wad dee 00 woe mor wx 308 TT wW z wot To configure 802 1X settings for the port 1 Select the check box next to the port to configure You can also select multiple check boxes to apply the same settings to the select ports or select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all ports 2 For the selected port s specify the following settings e Control Mode This selector lists the options for control mode The control mode is only set if the link status of the port is link up The options are e force unauthorized The authenticator port access entity PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to unauthorized e force authorized The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to authorized e auto The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant authenticator and the authentication server mac based The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant authenticator and the authentication server on a per supplicant basis e Quiet Period This input field allows the user to configure the quiet period for the selected port This command sets the
454. mage1 Specify the code image1 you want to download e Image2 Specify the code image2 you want to download e CLI Banner Specify CLI Banner when you want a banner to be displayed before the login prompt e Configuration Specify configuration when you want to update the switch s configuration If the file has errors the update will be stopped e Text Configuration Specify configuration in text mode when you want to update the switch s configuration If the file has errors the update will be stopped e Use Config Script to specify script configuration file e Use SSH 1 RSA Key File to specify SSH 1 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File e Use SSH 2 RSA Key PEM File to specify SSH 2 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File PEM Encoded e Use SSH 2 DSA Key PEM File to specify SSH 2 Digital Signature Algorithm DSA Key File PEM Encoded e Use SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File to specify SSL Trusted Root Certificate File PEM Encoded e Use SSL Server Certificate PEM File to specify SSL Server Certificate File PEM Encoded e Use SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File to specify SSL Diffie Hellman Weak Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded e Use SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File to specify SSL Diffie Hellman Strong Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded 590 Chapter 8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e License Key Specify license key in order to
455. min 36 sec 9 day 23 he 35 min 36 sec 9 day 23 he 35 min 36 sec 9 Gay 23 he 35 min 36 sec 9 day 23 he 35 min 36 sec 9 dey 23 he 35 min 36 sec 9 dey 23 he 35 me 36 sec 9 day 23 hr 35 min 36 sec 9 dey 23 hr 35 mn 36 sec 9 dey 23 hr 35 min 36 sec 9 dey 23 hr 35 mn 36 sec 9 dey 23 hr 35 min 36 sec 9 dey 23 hr 35 mn 36 sec 9 day 23 hr 35 min 36 sec 9 day 23 hr 35 min 36 sec 9 day 23 he 35 min 36 sec 9 dey 23 hr 35 min 36 sec 9 Sey 23 be 35 min 36 sec 9 day 23 he 35 min 36 sec o D o a 0 a 0 Oo o 0 o oO o oO o a o a 0 ia ose ceoe cecoceoeaocaeaoceoeos eseeesececocoseecoeeseoseeseeoseeo eo oeeoeeoeoeoeoeoeoee eeeceece oe oe oG ono nop o osos osono soco n onono ososososononon onon o Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 547 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the per port statistics displayed on the screen Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions e Toclear all the counters for all ports on the switch select the check box in the row heading and click Clear The button resets all statistics for all ports to default values e Toclear the counters for a specific port select the check box associated with the port and click Clear e Click Refresh to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current statistics Table 7 111 Interface This object indicates the iflndex of the interf
456. ministration Manual PIM SSM Configuration While PIM SM employs a specially configured RP router that serves as a meeting junction for multicast senders and listeners Protocol Independent Multicast Source Specific Multicast PIM SSM does not use an RP It supports only source route deliver trees It is used between routers so that they can track which multicast packets to forward to each other and to their directly connected LANs The SSM service model can be implemented with a strict subset of the PIM SM protocol mechanisms Both regular IP Multicast and SSM semantics can coexist on a single router and both can be implemented using the PIM SM protocol A range of multicast addresses currently FF3x 96 in IPv6 is reserved for SSM To display the PIM SSM Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast PIM SM gt SSM Configuration GSM73525S Stee Sieh bees Skeet FIM SSM Configuration Use SSM Group Address to enter the source specific multicast group ip address Use SSM Group Mask to enter the source specific multicast IPv6 group prefix length Click ADD to add a new source specific group Click DELETE to delete an extant source specific group Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch o FY YS 378 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SM Interface Configuration To dis
457. mitted Displays the ISDPv2 packets transmitted ISDP Bad Header ISDP Checksum Error Displays the ISDP bad packets received Displays the number of the checksum error ISDP Transmission Failure Displays the number of the transmission failure ISDP Invalid Format ISDP Table Full ISDP Ip Address Table Full Displays the number of the invalid format ISDP packets received Displays the table size of the ISDP table Displays the table size of the ISDP IP address table Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 129 Configuring Switching Information Use the features in the Switching tab to define Layer 2 features The Switching tab contains links to the following features e VLANs on page 130 e Spanning Tree Protocol on page 151 e Multicast on page 168 e Address Table on page 192 e Ports on page 197 e Link Aggregation Groups on page 201 VLANs Adding Virtual LAN VLAN support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both bridging and routing Like a bridge a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2 header which is fast and like a router it partitions the network into logical segments which provides better administration security and management of multicast traffic By default all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain VLANs electronically separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast packets are not s
458. n GSM7352S 45 Port Gigabit Layer 2 Managed Stackable Switth with 4 10 Gigubit Slon wocourt gt Basic MST Port Status v Advanced STP Corfiguration CST Corfigeration CST Port MST ID Selection one Wo MSTs Ava Configueabon CST Port Status gt MST Cortigerabon MST Port Status STP Statistics Note If no MST instances have been configured on the switch the page displays a No MSTs Available message and does not display the fields shown in the field description table that follows To configure MST port settings 1 Use MST ID to select one MST instance from existing MST instances 2 Use Interface to select one of the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the selected MST instance 3 Use Port Priority to specify the priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance The port priority is set in multiples of 16 For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 15 it will be set to O If it is tried to be set to any value between 16 and 2 16 1 it will be set to 16 and so on 4 Use Port Path Cost to set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected MST instance It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 165 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the read only MS
459. n gt Bulfered Logs Command Log Syslog Configuration Conf guration gt Console Log Confeguration Admon Staten gt Trap Logs gt Event Logs gt Persistent Logs 1 Use Admin Status to enable disable logging to configured syslog hosts Setting this to disable stops logging to all syslog hosts Disable means no messages will be sent to any collector relay Enable means messages will be sent to configured collector relays using the values configured for each collector relay Enable Disable the operation of the syslog function by selecting the corresponding radio button 2 Use Local UDP Port to specify the port on the local host from which syslog messages are sent The default port is 514 Specify the local port in the text field Table 7 115 Description Messages Relayed The count of syslog messages relayed Messages Ignored The count of syslog messages ignored Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 565 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Trap Logs This screen lists the entries in the trap log The information can be retrieved as a file by using System Utilities Upload File from Switch To access the Trap Logs page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Trap Logs NETGEAR System Switchiag Routing Trap Logs Trap Logs Maintenonce Help Member of Traps Since Last Reset Trap Log Capacity Member of Traps Since Log Last Viewed Sperneg Tree Topology Char
460. n This field displays Termination Action set by the Radius Server for the selected port This field is displayed only when the port control mode of the selected port is not mac based Possible values are e Default e Reauthenticate If the termination action is default then at the end of the session the client details are initialized Otherwise re authentication is attempted 478 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 6 94 Field Description Port Status This field shows the authorization status of the specified port The possible values are Authorized Unauthorized and N A If the port is in detached state the value will be N A since the port cannot participate in port access control Port Method This field shows the authorization mode of the specified port The possible values are Mac based Port based Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 479 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Client Summary To access the Client Summary page click Security gt Port Authentication gt Advanced gt Client Summary NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigab Leyser 3 Maneged Stackable Swish with 4 10 Gigebit Slam Routing o5 Security Monitoring Maintenance Help Index iocour T Dan Client Summary v Advanced 002 1X Configuration an Client Summary
461. n Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately A gl gt 52 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Excluded Address Configuration 1 Use the IP Range From field to specify the low address if you want to exclude a range of addresses Specify the address to be excluded in case you want to exclude a single address 2 Use the IP Range To field to specify the high address if you want to exclude a range of addresses To exclude a single address enter the same IP address as specified in IP range from or leave as 0 0 0 0 3 Click ADD to add the exclude addresses configured on the screen to the switch 4 Click DELETE to delete the exclude address from the switch Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 53 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Pool Configuration To display the DHCP Pool Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Pool Configuration A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Loyer 3 Stockable Switch with 4 19 Gigobit Sien Help ndes LoGouT v DNCP Server DHCP Pool Configuration gt OHCP Server DHCP Pool Configuration Configuration DHCP Poo Configuration Pool Name
462. n T4 Security Interface Configuration Port Administration 1 Al Interface Max Allowed Se ee ax o ed Sta c Contguration Security Mode Dynamically eae cae aris Violation Trap Oynamic MAC Learned MAC ceii pe e Static MAC Oisatle Address gt Private Group Disable gt Protected Port Onable Disable Storm Control Disable Dvsable Ouable Disable Orsoble Onable Oisatle Disable Onable Dusable Mieahie e gt Disable Disable Ouable Disable Disable Disable Ovwable Disable Disabile Disable Disable Disable Oisable Disable eae 2 oGoGo0G0G0G0g s 812 818 812 es as BB 1006 33 r 5 T 486 Chapter6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure port security settings 1 Port Selects the interface to be configured 2 Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure Select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected interfaces Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 3 Specify the following settings e Security Mode Enables or disables the Port Security feature for the selected interface e Max Allowed Dynamically Learned MAC Sets the maximum number of dynamically learned MAC addresses on the selected interface Max Allowed Statically Locked MAC Sets the maximum number of statically locked MAC addresses
463. n Data If you selected simple authentication enter the password Use Status to select active or inactive to start or stop the operation of the Virtual Router The default is inactive Click ADD to add a new Virtual Router to the switch configuration Click DELETE to delete the selected Virtual Router Note that the router can not be deleted if there are secondary addresses configured Chapter 4 Routing 327 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 46 Fig escrito O O Interface IP Address Indicates the IP Address associated with the selected interface Owner VMAC Address Set to True if the Virtual IP Address and the Interface IP Address are the same otherwise set to False If this parameter is set to True the Virtual Router is the owner of the Virtual IP Address and will always win an election for master router when it is active The virtual MAC Address associated with the Virtual Router composed of a 24 bit organizationally unique identifier the 16 bit constant identifying the VRRP address block and the 8 bit VRID State The current state of the Virtual Router e State e Initialize e Master e Backup 328 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e VRRP Configuration on page 329 e VRRP Sec
464. n Manual PIM SM BSR Candidate Configuration To display the PIM SM BSR Candidate Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast PIM SM gt BSR Candidate Configuration GSM73525 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Priority to enter the priority of C BSR 3 Use Hash Mask Length to enter the C BSR hash mask length to be advertised in bootstrap messages This hash mask length will be used in the hash algorithm for selecting the RP for a particular group The valid values are from 0 to 32 Default value is 30 4 Click DELETE to delete the RP address selected 5 Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest PIM SM neighbor information Table 69 Fig escrito O O IP Address Displays the IP address of the Elected BSR Next bootstrap Message Time in hours minutes and seconds in which the next bootstrap message is due from this BSR Next Candidate RP Advertisement Time in hours minutes and seconds in which the next candidate RP advertisement will be sent 368 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SM Static RP Configuration This page is used to statically configure the RP address for one or more multicast groups To display the PIM SM Static RP Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast PIM SM gt Static RP Configuration GSM73525 rai Som 4 b Spee tle Use
465. n and encryption key for TACACS communications between the Managed Switch and the TACACS server The valid range is 0 128 characters The key must match the key configured on the TACACS server 2 Inthe Connection Timeout field specify the maximum number of seconds allowed to establish a TCP connection between the Managed Switch and the TACACS server 3 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 4 If you make any changes to the page click Apply to apply the new settings to the system Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 441 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual TACACS Server Configuration Use the TACACS Server Configuration page to configure up to five TACACS servers with which the switch can communicate To display the TACACS Server Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt TACACS gt TACACS Server Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S en Goda Lover Moseged able Switch with 4 1 gt Gigabit Slon ocour TACACS Server Configuration gt Local User gt Enable Password TACACS Server Configuration gt Line Password gt RADIUS TACACS TACACS Configuration TACACS Server Corfigwaton gt Authentication List gt togia Sosvons To configure TACACS server settings 1 Use TACACS Server to enter the configured TACACS server IP address 2 Us
466. n of the Internet Protocol With 128 bit addresses versus 32 bit addresses for IPv4 IPv6 solves the address depletion issues seen with IPv4 and removes the requirement for Network Address Translation NAT which is used in IPv4 networks to reduce the number of globally unique IP addresses required for a given network Its aggregate addresses can dramatically reduce the size of the global routing table through well known address combinations Security is more integrated and network configuration is simplified yet more flexible IPv6 can coexists with IPv4 As with IPv4 IPv6 routing can be enabled on physical and VLAN interfaces Each L3 routing interface can be used for IPv4 IPv6 or both IP protocols running over L3 for example UDP and TCP do not change with IPv 6 For this reason a single CPU stack is used for transport of both IPv4 and IPv6 and a single sockets interface provides Chapter 4 Routing 229 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual access to both Routing protocols are capable of computing routes for one or both IP versions From the IPv6 link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 230 e Advanced on page 233 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e IPv6 Global Configuration on page 231 e IPv6 Route Table on page 232 230 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv
467. n selected to be the Designated Router and Backup Designated Router either The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the Designated Router and the Backup Designated Router 282 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 32 Field Description Designated Router Backup Designated Router The identity of the Designated Router for this network in the view of the advertising router The Designated Router is identified here by its router ID The value 0 0 0 0 means that there is no Designated Router This field is only displayed if the OSPF admin mode is enabled The identity of the Backup Designated Router for this network in the view of the advertising router The Backup Designated Router is identified here by its router ID Set to 0 0 0 0 if there is no Backup Designated Router Number of Link Events This is the number of times the specified OSPF interface has changed its state Local Link LSAs Local Link LSA Checksum The number of opaque LSAs whose flooding scope is the link on this interface The sum of the checksums of local link LSAs for this link Chapter 4 Routing 283 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual OSPF Interface Statistics This screen displays statistics for the selected interface The information will be displayed only if OSPF is enabled To display
468. naged oble Switch with 4 1 O Oeg Iod abe Horn toov IGMP Snooping Querier Configuration IGMP Saooping Querier Configuration Quener Adimu Mode Querer 1P Address ICMP Version Query tntervall secs Querer t apoy interval sexs VLAN Ids Enabled for IGMP Snooping Querier 180 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure IGMP Snooping Querier settings 1 Use Querier Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for IGMP Snooping for the switch The default is disable 2 Use Querier IP Address to specify the Snooping Querier Address to be used as source address in periodic IGMP queries This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which query is being sent 3 Use IGMP Version to specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries IGMP queries 4 Use Query Interval secs to specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries sent by the snooping querier The Query Interval must be a value in the range of 1 and 1800 The default value is 60 5 Use Querier Expiry Interval secs to specify the time interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed The Querier Expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 and 300 The default value is 60 Table 3 64 Field Description VLAN Ids Enabled For IGMP Snooping Querier Displays VLAN Ids enabled for IGMP snooping
469. nal Block Captive Portal Status Status CP Global Configuration CP Configuration Captive Portal Binding Table CP Binding Configuration CP Binding Table CP Group Configuration CP User Configuration CP Trao Plage CP Chent GSM7352S 48 Pon Gigab Layer J Mosoged Siochoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Slon Maintenance Help index soseur Authentic ated users autin Click DELETE to remove the currently selected interface Table 6 106 Field Description Interface The interface for which you want to view information CP ID The ID of captive portal instance Operational Status Shows whether the portal is active on the specified interface Block Status Indicates whether the captive portal is temporarily blocked for authentications Authenticated users Displays the number of authenticated users using the captive portal instance on this interface 518 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Captive Portal Group Configuration When you click Add from the CP Group Configuration page the screen refreshes and you can add a new group to the User Group database To display the Captive Portal Group Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Group Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S act with 48 Port Gigab Layer J Mosoged Srochoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit
470. nevoice videoconferencing streammingvideo vidoesignalling Each application type that is received has the VLAN id priority DSCP tagged bit status and unknown bit status A port may receive one or many such application types If a network policy TLV has been receive on this port only then would this information be displayed VLAN Id Specifies the VLAN id associated with a particular policy type Priority Specifies the priority associated with a particular policy type DSCP Specifies the DSCP associated with a particular policy type Unknown Bit Status Specifies the unknown bit associated with a particular policy type Tagged Bit Status Specifies the tagged bit associated with a particular policy type Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 119 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 2 41 Field Description Inventory Information Specifies if inventory TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port Hardware Revision Specifies hardware version of the remote device Firmware Revision Specifies Firmware version of the remote device Software Revision Specifies Software version of the remote device Serial Number Manufacturer Name Model Name Specifies serial number of the remote device Specifies manufacturers name of the remote device Specifies model name of the remote device Asset ID Specifies a
471. nfigure the logical interfaces by using the software Table 3 describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch Table 3 Interface Description Example Physical Link Aggregation Group LAG CPU Management Interface The physical ports are gigabit Ethernet interfaces and are numbered sequentially starting from one LAG interfaces are logical interfaces that are only used for bridging functions This is the internal switch interface responsible for the switch base MAC address This interface is not configurable and is always listed in the MAC Address Table 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 and so on lag 1 lag 2 lag 3 and so on 0 5 1 Routing VLAN Interfaces This is an interface used for routing functionality Vlan 1 Vlan 2 Vlan 3 and so on 18 Chapter 1 Getting Started Configuring System Information Use the features in the System tab to define the switch s relationship to its environment The System tab contains links to the following features Management on page 19 Device View See Device View on page 14 License on page 49 Services on page 50 Stacking on page 79 PoE on page 86 SNMP on page 93 LLDP on page 102 ISDP on page 121 Management This section describes how to display the switch status and specify some basic switch information such as the management interface IP address system clock settings and DNS information From the Management l
472. nformation is used by the transparent bridging function in determining how to propagate a received frame To display the Address Table page click Switching gt Address Table gt Advanced gt Address Table NETGEAR GSM7352S 44 Port Gigabit Layer 2 teockoble Switch with 4 1O Cigaber tem Monitoring Help Index toso Address Table MAC Address Tabie Search Dy Total MAC Addresses status 00 09 08 07 06 05 00 08 C0 67 C1 54 00 0F FE 00 91 99 00 0F FE 01 EE 23 QLAR kirtis 196 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Search By to search for MAC Addresses by MAC Address VLAN ID and port Searched by MAC Address Select MAC Address from pull down menu enter the 6 byte hexadecimal MAC Address in two digit groups separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB Then click on the Go button If the address exists that entry will be displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining greater mac addresses An exact match is required e Searched by VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from pull down menu enter the VLAN ID for example 100 Then click on the Go button If the address exists the entry will be displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining greater mac addresses e Searched by Port Select Port from pull down menu enter the port ID in Unit Slot Port for example 2 1 1 Then click on
473. ng ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual hop router if the destination is not on the same subnet This is achieved by broadcasting an ARP request packet to which the intended recipient responds by unicasting an ARP reply containing its MAC address Once learned the MAC address is used in the destination address field of the layer 2 header prepended to the IP packet The ARP cache is a table maintained locally in each station on a network ARP cache entries are learned by examining the source information in the ARP packet payload fields regardless of whether it is an ARP request or response Thus when an ARP request is broadcast to all stations on a LAN segment or virtual LAN VLAN every recipient has the opportunity to store the sender s IP and MAC address in their respective ARP cache The ARP response being unicast is normally seen only by the requestor who stores the sender information in its ARP cache Newer information always replaces existing content in the ARP cache The number of supported ARP entries is platform dependent Devices can be moved in a network which means the IP address that was at one time associated with a certain MAC address is now found using a different MAC or may have disappeared from the network altogether i e it has been reconfigured disconnected or powered off This leads to stale information in the ARP cache unless entries are updated in reaction to new in
474. ng bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 256 511 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 512 1023 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 1024 1518 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received gt 1518 Octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Total Packets Received Without Errors The total number of packets received that were without errors Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Multicast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address Broadcast Packets Received Total Packets Received with MAC Errors Jabbers Recei
475. ng bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 65 127 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 128 255 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 256 511 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 512 1023 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 1024 1518 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted gt 1518 Octets The total number of packets transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed This counter has a max increment rate of 815 counts per sec at 10 Mb s Maximum Frame Size
476. nistration Manual Table 54 Fes escrito O O Protocol State The operational state of the DVMRP protocol on the selected interface either operational or non operational Local Address The IP address used as a source address in packets sent from the selected interface Generation ID The DVMRP generation ID used by the router for the selected interface This value is reset every time an interface is re started and is placed in prune messages A change in generation ID informs the neighbor routers that any previous information about this router should be discarded Received Bad Packets The number of invalid packets received on the selected interface Received Bad Routes The number of invalid routes received on the selected interface Sent Routes The number of routes sent on the selected interface 340 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DVMRP Neighbor To display the DVMRP Neighbor page click Routing gt Multicast DVMRP gt DVMRP Neighbor GSM73525 vegan pr agi vA rra ang aen Neowe Tabia DVMRP Neighbor Chabal C mtigur atsoa DVMRP Meight 1 Interface Select the interface for which data is to be displayed or all interfaces will be displayed 2 Use Neighbor IP to specify the IP address of the neighbor whose information is displayed Chapter 4 Routing 341 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Adminis
477. nning Stack Mode Displays the run time mode of the stackable interface Link Status Displays the link status UP DOWN of the port Link Speed Gbps Transmit Data Rate Mbps Total Transmit Errors Displays the maximum speed of the stacking port Displays the approximate transmit rate on the stacking port Displays the total number of errors in transmit packets since boot The counter may wrap Receive Data Rate Mbps Displays the approximate receive rate on the stacking port Total Receive Errors Displays the total number of errors in receive packets since boot The counter may wrap Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 85 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Stack Port Diagnostics This page displays the diagnostics for all the stackable interfaces in the given stack To display the Stack Port Diagnostics page click System gt Stacking gt Advanced gt Stack Port Diagnostics A screen similar to the following displays GSM7352S baas sam a oigas Sion Stack Port Degnostics Sack Port Disgeustk a ta tert m A 79 a ie are trot AAGO RIBES ALES ROVA 3 ke SS RTT 0 RATE TETE TEAT OORS RART AES RAOS ROVECTICS 4 TIREE ort os s are POS tert at poe fret perrncer r TT ereti Prrepreja are R STS OTT SPET OE TETTE TORT ORFS et PESO 882 AAS ROVE TTPCS 6 TERE The following table describes the Stack Port
478. nored The number of received Hello packets that were ignored by this router from the new neighbors after the limit has been reached for the number of neighbors on an interface or on the system as a whole Hellos Sent The number of Hello packets sent on this interface by this router Hellos Received The number of Hello packets received on this interface by this router DD Packets Sent The number of Database Description packets sent on this interface by this router DD Packets Received The number of Database Description packets received on this interface by this router LS Requests Sent The number of LS Requests sent on this interface by this router LS Requests Received The number of LS Requests received on this interface by this router LS Updates Sent The number of LS updates sent on this interface by this router 286 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 33 Field Description LS Updates Received The number of LS updates received on this interface by this router LS Acknowledgements Sent The number of LS acknowledgements sent on this interface by this router LS Acknowledgements Received The number of LS acknowledgements received on this interface by this router Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen to show the latest interface statistics Click CLEAR to clear all the statistics of the OSPF inter
479. nstance table Policy Attributes table Service table Displays the number of configured policy class instances out of the total allowed on the switch Displays the number of configured policy attributes attached to the policy class instances out of the total allowed on the switch Displays the number of configured services attached to the policies on specified interfaces out of the total allowed on the switch Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 415 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Class Configuration Use the Class Configuration page to add a new DiffServ class name or to rename or delete an existing class The page also allows you to define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class As packets are received these DiffServ classes are used to prioritize packets You can have multiple match criteria in a class The logic is a Boolean logical and for this criteria After creating a Class click the class link to the Class page To display the page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Advanced gt Class Configuration NETGEAR _ GSM73525 Stackable Seth Sah 4 TO Gopeber Slon vocout gt Olffsery Wizard Class Name gt Auto VoiP Class N Basic To configure a DiffServ class 1 To create a new class enter a class name select the class type and click Add This field also lists all the existing DiffServ class names from which one can be sel
480. ntained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers This field is the normal TOS associated with the stub metric Chapter 4 Routing 305 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NSSA Area Configuration To display the NSSA Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt NSSA Area Configuration 10 11 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects Use Import Summary LSAs to select enable or disable If you select enable summary LSAs will be imported into areas Defaults to Enable Use Default Information Originate to advertise a default route into the NSSA when Import Summary LSAs is disabled This can also be applied by the CLI command area lt areaid gt nssa default info originate in the IPv6 router OSPF config mode Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the default information originate Valid values are True or False Use Metric Value to set the Default Metric value for default information originate The valid range of values is 1 to 16777214 Use Metric Type to select the type of metric specified in the Metric Value field
481. ntil congestion occurs At this point any additional packets queued are dropped 4 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 If you make changes to the page click Apply to apply the changes to the system Differentiated Services The QoS feature contains Differentiated Services DiffServ support that allows traffic to be classified into streams and given certain QoS treatment in accordance with defined per hop behaviors Standard IP based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service Best effort service implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion although there is no guarantee that it will During times of congestion packets may be delayed sent sporadically or dropped For typical Internet applications such as e mail and file transfer a slight degradation in service is acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable Conversely any degradation of service has undesirable effects on applications with strict timing requirements such as voice or multimedia Defining DiffServ To use DiffServ for QoS the Web pages accessible from the Differentiated Services menu page must first be used to define the following categories and their criteria Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 407 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Class Create classes and defin
482. nual 802 1X Example Configuration This example shows how to configure the switch so that 802 1X based authentication is required on the ports in a corporate conference room 1 0 5 1 0 8 These ports are available to visitors and need to be authenticated before granting access to the network The authentication is handled by an external RADIUS server When the visitor is successfully authenticated traffic is automatically assigned to the guest VLAN This example assumes that a VLAN has been configured with a VLAN ID of 150 and VLAN Name of Guest 1 2 From the Port Authentication screen select ports 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 and 1 0 8 From the Port Control menu select Unauthorized The Port Control setting for all other ports where authentication is not needed should Authorized When the Port Control setting is Authorized the port is unconditionally put in a force Authorized state and does not require any authentication When the Port Control setting is Auto the authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode In the Guest VLAN field for ports 1 0 5 1 0 8 enter 150 to assign these ports to the guest VLAN You can configure additional settings to control access to the network through the ports See Port Security Interface Configuration on page 6 486 for information about the settings Click Apply From the 802 1X Configuration screen set the Port Based Authentication State and Guest VLAN Mode to Enable and then click Apply
483. number of multicast route entries currently present in the Multicast route table 336 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Multicast Interface Configuration To display the Multicast Interface Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt Interface Configuration GSM73525 0 Pes Gugah Lepor 2 Managed Hraste tabte Interface Configuration kinbe aetigeration Contigar ainn 1 Interface The routing interface you want to configure or displayed 2 Use TTL Threshold to enter the TTL threshold below which a multicast data packet will not be forwarded from the selected interface You should enter a number between 0 and 255 If you enter 0 all multicast packets for the selected interface will be forwarded You must configure at least one router interface before you will see this field Chapter 4 Routing 337 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DVMRP From the DVMRP link you can access the following pages e DVMRP Global Configuration on page 338 e DVMRP Interface Configuration on page 339 e DVMRP Neighbor on page 341 e DVMRP Next Hop on page 343 e DVMRP Prune on page 344 e DVMRP Route on page 345 DVMRP Global Configuration To display the Global Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast DVMRP gt Global Configuration GSM73525S 48 bors nee layer Meneged Gogeta dian D
484. o a single logical link Network devices treat the aggregation as if it were a single link which increases fault tolerance and provides load sharing You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG The LAG by default becomes a member of the management VLAN A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic but not both All members of a LAG must participate in the same protocols A static port channel interface does not require a partner system to be able to aggregate its member ports Static LAGs are supported When a port is added to a LAG as a static member it neither transmits nor receives LACPDUs ProSafe Managed Switches support up to 64 LAGs From the LAGs link you can access the following pages e LAG Configuration on page 201 e LAG Membership on page 203 LAG Configuration Use the LAG Port Channel Configuration page to group one or more full duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group which is also known as a port channel The switch treats the LAG as if it were a single link To access the LAG Configuration page click Switching gt LAG gt LAG Configuration To configure LAG settings 1 Use LAG Name to enter the name you want assigned to the LAG You may enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters A valid name has to be specified in order to create the LAG 2 Use Hash Mode to select the load balancing mode used on a port channel LAG Traffic is balanced
485. o add an IPv6 rule 17 Use DELETE to select the checkbox of the rule you want to delete and click DELETE Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 541 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IP Binding Configuration When an ACL is bound to an interface all the rules that have been defined are applied to the selected interface Use the IP Binding Configuration page to assign ACL lists to ACL Priorities and Interfaces To display the IP Binding Configuration page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IP Binding Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigedit Lever 2 Managed Srochable Switch with 4 1O Gigobit Slots IP Binding Configuration Binding Configuration 542 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure IP ACL interface bindings 1 Select an existing IP ACL from the ACL ID menu The packet filtering direction for ACL is Inbound which means the IP ACL rules are applied to traffic entering the port 2 Specify an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list relative to other access lists already assigned to this interface and direction A low number indicates high precedence order If a sequence number is already in use for this interface and direction the specified access list replaces the currently attached access list using that sequence number If the
486. o confirm that you entered it correctly e The Encrypted option allows the administrator to transfer the privileged EXEC password between devices without having to know the password The Password field must be exactly 128 hexidecimal characters 5 Use SSH Password to enter the SSH password Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters 6 Use Confirm SSH Password to enter the password again to confirm that you entered it correctly e The Encrypted option allows the administrator to transfer the privileged EXEC password between devices without having to know the password The Password field must be exactly 128 hexidecimal characters 432 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual RADIUS RADIUS servers provide additional security for networks The RADIUS server maintains a user database which contains per user authentication information The switch passes information to the configured RADIUS server which can authenticate a user name and password before authorizing use of the network RADIUS servers provide a centralized authentication method for e Web Access e Access Control Port 802 1X The RADIUS folder contains links to the following features Global Configuration on page 433 e RADIUS Server Configuration on page 435 e Accounting Server Configuration on page 438 Global Configuration Use the RADIUS Configuration page to add info
487. o the Time To Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch if a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol Maximum Next Hops The maximum number of hops supported by the switch This is a compile time constant 214 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Statistics The statistics reported on this screen are as specified in RFC 1213 To display the Statistics page click Routing gt IP gt Basic gt Statistics IP Statistics IP Statistics IpiaRereives Iptettdrfrrors IptnAd rtrrors IpforwDetegrams IpletichnewnPretes IpinDiscards IptaDelivers IpUuthequests IpOutDiecards IpUutWoKoutes IpReasmTineuut IpReasmReqds IpReasmOKs IpReaent ails IpfragOKs IpFragFails IpFragCreates IpRoutingDiscards TempInttsgs Templotrrors lempinDestUereachs Temp nTeneExeds TempInParmProbs TempInSecQuenchs lempinRedwects fempintchos TempInEchoReps Tempinimestamps TempInTimestampReps TempInAddritasks Temp nAddrMaskheps lempOutMegs IcmpOutErrors TempOutDestUnreachs TempOutTinefxcds TempOutParmProbs TempOutsrcQvenchs lempOutRedirects TempOutEchos TempOuttchoReps TempOutTenestamps TempOutTimestamptepe TempOutAddritasks TempOutAddrMaskReps 530150 27163 9 o 9 9 9 0 Q o is 9 o o 9 9 tS 9 9 ts 9 e o ie 9 9 z 0 a is 9 9 6 o Chapter 4 Routing 215 ProSafe G
488. oS Interface Configuration on page 404 Advanced Interface Queue Configuration on page 406 Advanced CoS Configuration To display the CoS Configuration page click QoS gt CoS gt Advanced gt CoS Configuration CoS Configuration Cas Contigaration o Geet Letertace Use Global to specify all CoS configurable interfaces The option Global represents the most recent global configuration settings Use Interface to specify CoS configuration settings based per interface Use Global Trust Mode to specify whether to trust a particular packet marking at ingress Global Trust Mode can only be one of the following Default value is trust dotip e untrusted e trust dotip e trust ip dscp Use Interface Trust Mode to specify whether to trust a particular packet marking at ingress Interface Trust Mode can only be one of the following Default value is untrusted e untrusted e trust dotip e trust ip dscp Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 401 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 802 1p to Queue Mapping The 802 1p to Queue Mapping page also displays the Current 802 1p Priority Mapping table To display the 801 p to Queue Mapping page click QoS gt CoS gt Advanced gt 802 1p to Queue Mapping NETGEAR PO ater Sn ye Seechabte Switch wah 4 10 Gogabir Slon rosou 802 1p to Queue Mapping Intertace Setection To map 802 1p priorities to queues 1
489. ode Mette ast Control Frame Court Interfaces Enabled for LD Sacopieg Date Frames Forwarded by the CPU VLAN IDs Enabled for MLO Snooping 1 Use MLD Snooping Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for MLD Snooping for the switch The default is disable Table 3 66 Field Definition Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU Interfaces Enabled for MLD Snooping A list of all the interfaces currently enabled for MLD Snooping Data Frames Forwarded by the CPU The number of data frames forwarded by the CPU VLAN Ids Enabled For MLD Snooping Displays VLAN Ids enabled for MLD snooping Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 185 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD Snooping Interface Configuration To access the MLD Snooping Interface Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Interface Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S tobe Har oe y tari i ia MLD Snooping Interface Configuration MLD Snooping Interface Configuration 1 LAGS Al Co Te letertace 1 Interface Displays all physical VLAN and LAG interfaces Select the interface you want to configure 2 Use Admin Mode to select the interface mode for the selected interface for MLD Snooping for the switch The default is disable 3 Use Group Membership Interval secs to specify the amount of time you
490. of the Virtual Router Chapter 4 Routing 331 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Tracking Configuration Use Tracking Configuration to track specific route IP states within the router that can alter the priority level of a virtual router for a VRRP group To display the Tracking Configuration page click Routing gt VRRP gt Advanced gt Tracking Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S sph nate Op Shoo vosour VRRP Tracking Configuration Routing Imertace ayp VRRP Interface VRRP ID VRRP Tracking Interface Configuration 1 Use VRRP ID and Interface to select one of the existing Virtual Routers listed by interface number and VRRP ID 2 Use Tracked Interface to select a routing interface which is not yet tracked for this VRRP ID and interface configuration Exception loopback and tunnels could not be tracked 3 Use Tracked Interface Priority Decrement to specify the priority decrement for the tracked interface The valid range is 1 254 default value is 10 4 Use Tracked Route Prefix to specify the Prefix of the route 5 Use Tracked Route Prefix Length to specify the prefix length of the route 6 Use Tracked Route Priority Decrement to specify the priority decrement for the Route The valid range is 1 254 Default value is 10 7 Click ADD to add a new tracked interface or tracked route to the VRRP 8 Click DELETE to delete a selected tracked interface
491. of the messages e Total number of Messages Number of persistent log messages displayed on the switch e lt 15 gt Aug 24 05 34 05 STKO MSTP 2110 mspt_api c 318 237 Interface 12 transitioned to root state on message age timer expiry The above example indicates a user level message 1 with severity 7 debug ona system that is not stack and generated by component MSTP running in thread id 2110 on Aug 24 05 34 05 by line 318 of file mstp_api c This is the 237th message logged Messages logged to a collector or relay via syslog have an identical format to the above message Port Mirroring The page under the Mirroring link allows you to view and configure port mirroring on the system Multiple Port Mirroring Port mirroring selects the network traffic for analysis by a network analyzer This is done for specific ports of the switch As such many switch ports are configured as source ports and one switch port is configured as a destination port You have the ability to configure how traffic is mirrored on a source port Packets that are received on the source port that are transmitted on a port or are both received and transmitted can be mirrored to the destination port The packet that is copied to the destination port is in the same format as the original packet on the wire This means that if the mirror is copying a received packet the copied packet is VLAN tagged or untagged as it was received on the source port If the mirror
492. of this object for consecutively burst interval seconds the port will be shutdown If this value is None there is no limit The factory default is 15pps packets per second The range of Rate Limit is 0 to 300 5 Use Burst Interval secs to specify the burst interval value for rate limiting purpose on this interface If the rate limit is None burst interval has no meaning shows it as N A The factory default is 1 second The range of Burst Interval is 1 to 15 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 499 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Snooping Binding Configuration To display the DHCP Snooping Binding Configuration page click Security gt Control gt DHCP Snooping gt Binding Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigab Layer 3 monopod Srockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobir Siors index togour v DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Binding Configuration gt Global Static Binding Configuration Configuration Interface Configuration Binding Canhguranon Persistent Configuration VLAN ID Statistics gt IP Source Guard gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt Captive Portal Static Binding Configuration Interface Selects the interface to add a binding into the DHCP snooping database Use MAC Address to specify the MAC address for the binding to be added This is the Key to the binding database Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN from the list for the binding ru
493. ols an is displayed Chapter 4 Routing 373 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 PIM DM From the IPv6 PIM DM link you can access the following pages e PIM DM Global Configuration on page 374 e PIM DM Interface Configuration on page 375 e PIM DM Neighbor on page 376 PIM DM Global Configuration To display the IPv6 PIM DM Global Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast PIM DM gt Global Configuration GSM7352S anh Loves shemngad Provable Sonn ont 6 10 Gupete Bom eont FIM DM Global Configuration PIM DM Chobel Configuration Aima Mote 1 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM DM in the router The default is disable 374 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM DM Interface Configuration To display the IPv6 PIM DM Interface Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast PIM DM gt Interface Configuration GSM73525 Pen Giant ioyos 1 anegaa PIM DM Interface Configuration PIM DM Interface Configuration eer Deste seie sates Deere Deste Deste setor Debe seise Loeat e sere Deane Teatse Maere 1 Interface The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured You must have configured at least one router interface before configuring or displaying data for a PIM DM interface 2 Use Admin Mo
494. on The range is from 1 to 10 secs Default value is 2 seconds Use Notification Interval to specify the interval in seconds for transmission of notifications The range is from 5 to 3600 secs Default value is 5 seconds Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch and cause the changes to take effect on the switch but these changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed 104 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LLDP Interface Configuration To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP gt Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays ea re nN gt GSM7352S O hers Doge bare gt emnged so eae pees Kens LLDP Interface Configuration imesta w emfigerstion l i Pigititi s Li i HERENEN BE treme toon om tere trete tere tee toate tow tree trabee tom taare toe HERRENE HERNNNHH FFH Use Port to specify the list of ports on which LLDP 802 1AB can be configured Link Status indicates whether the Link is up or down Use Transmit to specify the LLDP 802 1AB transmit mode for the selected interface Use Receive to specify the LLDP 802 1AB receive mode for the selected interface Use Notify to specify the
495. on changes take effect immediately To disable Snooping Querier on a VLAN select the VLAN ID and click Delete Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click Refresh to update the page with the latest information from the switch e o 182 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 3 65 Field Description Operational State Operational Version Last Querier Address Displays the operational state of the IGMP Snooping Querier on a VLAN It can be in any of the following states e Querier Snooping switch is the Querier in the VLAN The Snooping switch will send out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query interval If the snooping switch sees a better querier in the VLAN it moves to non querier mode e Non Querier Snooping switch is in Non Querier mode in the VLAN If the querier expiry interval timer is expires the snooping switch will move into querier mode e Disabled Snooping Querier is not operational on the VLAN The Snooping Querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP Snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is also not configured Displays the operational IGMP protocol version of the querier Displays the IP addre
496. on the selected interface e Violation Traps Enables or disables the sending of new violation traps designating when a packet with a disallowed MAC address is received on a locked port Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 487 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Dynamic MAC Address Use the Dynamic MAC Address page to convert a dynamically learned MAC address to a statically locked address To display the Dynamic MAC Address page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Port Security gt Dynamic MAC Address NETGEAR gt MAC Filter Port Security Port Administration trterface Coefiguration Oynamic MAC Address Static MAC Address gt Private Group gt Protected Port gt Storm Control GSM7352S 48 Pon Gigabir Layer J Mosoged Siochobie Switch wih 4 10 Gigobit Slon tocour Dynamic MAC Address Table Port Security Settings C convert Oynamic Address to Static Number Of Oyaemn MAC Addresses Learned E Dynamic MAC Address Table Port List RURE S To convert learned MAC addresses 1 Port List Select the physical interface for which you want to display data 2 Use Convert Dynamic Address to Static to convert a dynamically learned MAC address to a statically locked address The Dynamic MAC address entries are converted to Static MAC address entries in a numerically ascending order until the Static limit is reached 3 Click REFRESH to refres
497. ondary IP on page 331 e Tracking Configuration on page 332 e Virtual Router Statistics on page 333 VRRP Configuration Use the VRRP Configuration page to enable or disable the administrative status of a virtual router To display the VRRP Configuration page click Routing gt VRRP gt Advanced gt VRRP Configuration G5M73525 Global Configuration 1 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of VRRP in the router to active or inactive Select enable or disable from the radio button The default is disable 2 VRID is only configurable if you are creating new Virtual Router in which case enter the VRID in the range 1 to 255 3 Use Interface to select the Unit Slot Port for the new Virtual Router from the pull down menu 4 Use Pre empt Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable a backup router will preempt the master router if it has a priority greater than the master virtual router s priority provided the master is not the owner of the virtual router IP address The default is enable 5 Use Priority to enter the priority value to be used by the VRRP router in the election for the master virtual router If the Virtual IP Address is the same as the interface IP Address the priority gets set to 255 no matter what the user enters If the user enters a priority of 255 when the Virtual and interface IP Addresses are not the same the priority gets set to the default value of 100 6 Use Advertisement Interval
498. onfiguration A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525 pres gow br IPv4 Network Interface Configuration Pus Network lntertace Configuration it Abtone bewees eee Detest Catwwey barned io MAL adress lot oDy Atemmmetored RAC Address Mac andas Pepe Cames Wet meb C emagan ation Prete af De D ventas iien i tenn tue DLP Vemde idees Ibenta tirme mesepemaeni nian EL The network interface is the logical interface used for in band connectivity with the switch via any of the switch s front panel ports The configuration parameters associated with the switch s network interface do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed To access the switch over a network you must first configure it with IP information IP address subnet mask and default gateway You can configure the IP information using any of the following e BOOTP e DHCP e Terminal interface via the EIA 232 port Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 33 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Once you have established in band connectivity you can change the IP information using any of the following e Terminal interface via the EIA 232 port e Terminal interface via telnet e SNMP based management e Web based management 1 Use IP Address to specify the IP address of the interface The factory default value is 169 254 100 100 2 Use Subnet Mask
499. onfiguration page click Maintenance gt File Management gt Dual Image Configuration NETGEAR GSM73525S 48 Port Gigabit Layer J Managed Stackable Switch with 4 10 Gigabit Sion Holp Index socour Dual Image Configuration Dual Image Configuration Unit Image Name To configure Dual Image settings 1 Use Unit to select the unit whose code image you want to activate update or delete 2 Use Image Description to specify the description for the image that you have selected 3 Use Next Active Image to make the selected image the next active image for subsequent reboots 4 Use Update Bootcode to update the bootloader with the selected image 5 Click DELETE to delete the selected image from permanent storage on the switch 6 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Note After activating an image you must perform a system reset of the switch in order to run the new code 594 Chapter 8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 8 122 Field Description Image Name This displays the image name for the selected unit Active Image Displays the current active image of the selected unit Version Displays the version of the image1 code file Troubleshooting The Troubleshooting menu contains links to the following options e Ping IPv4 on page 595 e Ping IPv6 on page
500. onfigure all switch features such as VLANs QoS and ACLs by using the Web based management interface Web Access To access the ProSafe Managed Switches management interface e Open a Web browser and enter the IP address of the switch in the address field You must be able to ping the IP address of the ProSafe Managed Switches management interface from your administrative system for Web access to be available If you did not change the IP address of the switch from the default value enter 169 254 100 100 into the address field Accessing the switch directly from your Web browser displays the login screen shown below Chapter 1 Getting Started 9 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Manoged Stochoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobat Slots Understanding the User Interfaces ProSafe Managed Switches software includes a set of comprehensive management functions for configuring and monitoring the system by using one of the following methods e Web user interface e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP e Command Line Interface CLI Each of the standards based management methods allows you to configure and monitor the components of the ProSafe Managed Switches software The method you use to manage the system depends on your network size and requirements and on your preference The ProSafe Managed Switch Web Management User Manua
501. only configurable if you are creating new Virtual Router in which case enter the VRID in the range 1 to 255 Use Interface to select the Unit Slot Port for the new Virtual Router from the pull down menu Use Pre empt Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable a backup router will preempt the master router if it has a priority greater than the master virtual router s priority provided the master is not the owner of the virtual router IP address The default is enable Use Priority to enter the priority value to be used by the VRRP router in the election for the master virtual router If the Virtual IP Address is the same as the interface IP Address the priority gets set to 255 no matter what the user enters If the user enters a priority of 255 when the Virtual and interface IP Addresses are not the same the priority gets set to the default value of 100 Use Advertisement Interval to enter the time in seconds between the transmission of advertisement packets by this virtual router Enter a number between 1 and 255 The default value is 1 second Use Primary IP Address to enter the IP Address associated with the Virtual Router The default is 0 0 0 0 Use Authentication Type to select the type of Authentication for the Virtual Router from the pull down menu The default is None The choices are 0 None No authentication will be performed e 1 Simple Authentication will be performed using a text password Authenticatio
502. or on page 366 PIM SM Candidate RP Configuration on page 367 PIM SM BSR Candidate Configuration on page 368 PIM SM Static RP Configuration on page 369 PIM SM Global Configuration To display the PIM SM Global Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt PIM SM gt Global Configuration GSM7352S 0 ne Gigh beyer Managed twoute table PIM SM Global Configuration Ulemal Comhgurataen PIM SM Global Configuration tatertase Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM SM in the router The default is disable Use Data Threshold Rate kbps to enter the rate in K bits second above which the last hop router will switch to a source specific shortest path tree The valid values are from 0 to 2000 The default value is 0 Use Register Threshold Rate kbps to enter the rate in K bits second above which the Rendezvous Point router will switch to a source specific shortest path tree The valid values are from 0 to 2000 The default value is 0 362 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM SSM Configuration While PIM SM employs a specially configured RP router that serves as a meeting junction for multicast senders and listeners Protocol Independent Multicast Source Specific Multicast PIM SSM does not use an RP It supports only source route deliver trees It is used between routers so that they can track which multicast packets to forward to each ot
503. orm the following procedures on each switch to configure MSTP 1 2 Use the VLAN Configuration screen to create VLANs 300 and 500 see VLAN Configuration on page 3 132 Use the VLAN Membership screen to include ports 1 0 1 1 0 8 as tagged T or untagged U members of VLAN 300 and VLAN 500 see VLAN Configuration on page 3 132 From the STP Configuration screen enable the Spanning Tree State option see STP Configuration on page 3 153 Use the default values for the rest of the STP configuration settings By default the STP Operation Mode is MSTP and the Configuration Name is the switch MAC address From the CST Configuration screen set the Bridge Priority value for each of the three switches to force Switch 1 to be the root bridge e Switch 1 4096 e Switch 2 12288 e Switch 3 20480 Note Bridge priority values are multiples of 4096 If you do not specify a root bridge and all switches have the same Bridge Priority value the switch with the lowest MAC address is elected as the root bridge see CST Configuration on page 3 157 From the CST Port Configuration screen select ports 1 0 1 1 0 8 and select Enable from the STP Status menu see CST Port Configuration on page 3 159 Click Apply 622 Appendix B Configuration Examples ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 10 11 12 Select ports 1 0 1 1 0 5 edge ports and selec
504. ormation on configuring Common STP see lt pdf gt CST Port Configuration on page 3 159 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP supports multiple instances of Spanning Tree to efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces Each instance of the Spanning Tree behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree RSTP with slight modifications in the working but not the end effect chief among the effects is the rapid transitioning of the port to Forwarding The difference between the RSTP and the traditional STP IEEE 802 1D is the ability to configure and recognize full duplex connectivity and ports which are connected to end stations resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to Forwarding state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification These features are represented by the parameters pointtopoint and edgeport MSTP is compatible to both RSTP and STP Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 151 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual It behaves appropriately to STP and RSTP bridges A MSTP bridge can be configured to behave entirely as a RSTP bridge or a STP bridge Note For two bridges to be in the same region the force version should be 802 1s and their configuration name digest key and revision level should match For additional information about regions and their effect on network topology refer to the IEEE 802 1Q st
505. ors or signature attributes received from this server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response The number of authentication timeouts to this server 436 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 6 83 Field Description Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication port Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 437 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Accounting Server Configuration Use the RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration page to view and configure various settings for one or more RADIUS accounting servers on the network To access the RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt RADIUS gt Accounting Server Configuration GSM73525 e d seeped yia lon To configure the RADIUS accounting server 1 In the Accounting Server IP Address field specify the IP address of the RADIUS accounting server to add 2 In the Accounting Server Name field enter the Name of the accounting server to add 3 In the Port field specify the
506. ort to retrieve the switch information needed for trouble shooting The factory default is Archive 2 Use Transfer Mode to specify what protocol to use to transfer the file e TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol e SFTP Secure File Transfer Program e SCP Secure Copy 3 Use Server Address Type to specify either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate the format of the Server Address field The factory default is IPv4 4 Use Server Address to enter the IP address of the server in accordance with the format indicated by the Seer Address Type The factory default is the IPv4 address 0 0 0 0 5 Use Remote File Name to enter the name of the file you want to download from the server You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank 6 Use User Name to enter the username for remote login to SFTP SCP server where the file will be sent This field is visible only when SFTP or SCP transfer modes are selected 7 Use Password to enter the password for remote login to SFTP SCP server where the file will be sent This field is visible only when SFTP or SCP transfer modes are selected 8 The last row of the table is used to display information about the progress of the file transfer Chapter 8 Maintenance 585 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual HTTP File Upload To display the HTTP File Upload page click Maintenance gt Upload gt HTTP File Upload NETGEAR GSM73525 48 Port Gigob
507. ost MSTID cst Windex 1 Normal not a lag member Enable Enable Enable Auto Unknown Unk States Unk Down Link Trap Enable Packets RX and TX 64 Octets Packets RX aad TX 65 127 Octets Packets RX and TX 128 255 Octets Packets KX aed TX 230 311 Octets Packets RX and TX 512 1023 Octets Pachets RX and TX 1024 1518 Octets Packets RX and TX 1519 2047 Octets Packets RX and TX 2048 4095 Octets Packets RX and TX 4006 0216 Oxtets Octets Received Pachets Received 64 Octets Packets Received 65 127 Octets Packets Received 128 255 Octets Packets Received 256 511 Oxtets Packets Received 512 1073 Octets Pachets Received 1024 1518 Oxtets Packets Received gt 1510 Octets Total Packets Received Without Errors Unicast Packets Received Multicast Packets Received Broadcast Packets Received Total Packets Received with MAC Errors lahbers Received Fragments Received Undersize Received Aligament Errors Rx FCS Errors Overrens 802 3x Pause Frames Received Broadcast Storm Recovery Total Packets Transmitted Octets Packets Transmitted 04 Octets Packets Transmitted 65 127 Octets Pachets Transmitted 128 255 Octets Packets Transmitted 256 511 Octets Packets Transmitted 512 1023 Octets eeocececooeoeocecseeeeeceeeeseeceeeeseeeeeseeeeeseese ec Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 549 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Packets Received 512 1022 Ortets Packets Received 1024 1518 Octets Packet
508. ot retained across a power cycle MaxFail Enter the maximum Failures allowed in the session The initial value is default value The MaxFail you enter is not retained across a power cycle Interval secs Enter the Time between probes in seconds The initial value is default value The Interval you enter is not retained across a power cycle Port Enter the UDP Dest port in probe packets The initial value is default value The port you enter is not retained across a power cycle Size Enter the Size of probe packets The initial value is default value The Size you enter is not retained across a power cycle 3 Click Cancel to cancel the operation on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 4 Click Apply to initiate the traceroute The results display in the TraceRoute area 600 Chapter 8 Maintenance ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Traceroute IPv6 Use this screen to tell the switch to send a TraceRoute request to a specified IP address or Hostname You can use this to discover the paths packets take to a remote destination Once you Click the Apply button the switch will send traceroute and the results will be displayed below the configurable data If a reply to the traceroute is received you will see e 1 a b c d e f g 9869 usec 9775 usec 10584 usec e 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 usec 0 usec 0 usec e Hop Count w Last TTL z Test attempt
509. ou Lompintchokeps lomplntimestamps lomelatimestampiteps TompInAddritasks TempInAddrHaskReps TompOutMsgs TompOuwtErrors TompOutDestUnreachs LompOutTimetxcds LompOutParmProbe eee oe ee eee ee eoeeeoee ee oe eo ee eo eo eo oe oO eo eo Me eo Oo 222 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 10 Field Description lpInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from IpInHdrErrors interfaces including those received in error The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers including bad checksums version number mismatch other format errors time to live exceeded errors discovered in processing their IP options etc IpInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity This count includes invalid addresses e g 0 0 0 0 and addresses of unsupported Classes e g Class E For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address lpForwDatagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP destination as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination In entities which do not act as IP Gat
510. ou can access the following pages e 802 1X Configuration on page 470 Port Authentication on page 471 e Port Summary on page 476 802 1X Configuration Use the 802 1X Configuration page to enable or disable port access control on the system To display the 802 1 X Configuration page click Security gt Port Authentication gt Advanced gt 802 1X Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pert Gigebit Lover 3 Maseged Stackable Switch with 4 19Gigobit Slon ioco 802 1X Configuration 802 1X Configuration Adrremetr etree Mote VLAN Anssgament Mode Users lege Authestk ation Liat 1 Use Administrative Mode to select one of the options for administrative mode enable and disable The default value is disable 2 Use VLAN Assignment Mode to select one of the options for VLAN Assignment mode enable and disable The default value is disable 3 Use Users to select the user name that will use the selected login list for 802 1x port security 4 Use Login to select the login to apply to the specified user All configured logins are displayed Table 6 93 Field Description Authentication List Displays the authentication list which is used by 802 1X 470 Chapter6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Port Authentication Use the Port Authentication page to enable and configure port access control on one or more ports To access the Port
511. oute to be Redistributed by RIP Metric The Metric of redistributed routes for the given Source Route Displays Unconfigured when not configured Match List of Routes redistributed when OSPF is selected as Source The list may include one or more of e Internal Sets Internal OSPF Routes to be redistributed e External Type 1 Sets External Type 1 OSPF Routes to be redistributed e External Type 2 Sets External Type 2 OSPF Routes to be redistributed e NSSA External Type 1 Sets NSSA External Type 1 OSPF Routes to be redistributed e NSSA External Type 2 Sets NSSA External Type 2 OSPF Routes to be redistributed Distribute List The Access List that filters the routes to be redistributed by the Destination Protocol Displays 0 when not configured OSPF From the OSPF link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 267 e Advanced on page 268 266 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e OSPF Configuration on page 267 OSPF Configuration Use the OSPF Configuration page to enable OSPF on a router and to configure the related OSPF settings To display the OSPF Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Basic gt OSPF Configuration GSM7352S Segebit imor 3 temeged Sree bathe bet eh d OSPF Configuration OSPE Cantiguration Atman Mode Rester ID 1
512. outer itself did not appear in the neighbor s Hello packet All neighbors in this state or greater are listed in the Hello packets sent from the associated interface e 2 Way In this state communication between the two routers is bidirectional This has been assured by the operation of the Hello Protocol This is the most advanced state short of beginning adjacency establishment The Backup Designated Router is selected from the set of neighbors in state 2 Way or greater e Exchange Start This is the first step in creating an adjacency between the two neighboring routers The goal of this step is to decide which router is the master and to decide upon the initial DD sequence number Neighbor conversations in this state or greater are called adjacencies e Exchange In this state the router is describing its entire link state database by sending Database Description packets to the neighbor In this state Link State Request Packets may also be sent asking for the neighbor s more recent LSAs All adjacencies in Exchange state or greater are used by the flooding procedure These adjacencies are fully capable of transmitting and receiving all types of OSPF routing protocol packets e Loading In this state Link State Request packets are sent to the neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that have been discovered but not yet received in the Exchange state e Full In this state the neighboring routers are fully adjacent These adjacen
513. oxy was brought up Chapter 4 Routing 355 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics To display the IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics page click Routing gt Multicast IGMP gt Proxy Interface Statistics GSM7352S iat pr a Eor Pirewte tabte IGMP Proxy Intertace Statistics vccaperbariegtaaneretssy IGMP Proxy Intertace Statistics trtertere peas Table 63 Fig escrito O O Interface Displays the interface on which IGMP packets received Version The version of IGMP packets received Queries Receved The number of IGMP queries received Report Received The number of IGMP reports received Reports Sent The number of IGMP reports sent Leaves Received The number of IGMP leaves received Leaves Sent The number of IGMP leaves sent Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest IGMP Proxy interface statistics 356 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Proxy Membership To display the IGMP Proxy Membership page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt Proxy Membership GSM73525 Par Gag inpe managed wih 6 1D Gageha Sou Chapter 4 Routing 357 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 64 Fes escrito O O Group IP Displays the IP multicast group addres
514. packet is retransmitted The valid range is 1 15 Consideration to maximum delay time should be given when configuring RADIUS maxretransmit and RADIUS time out If multiple RADIUS servers are configured the max retransmit value on each will be exhausted before the next server is attempted A retransmit will not occur until the configured time out value on that server has passed without a response from the RADIUS server Therefore the maximum delay in receiving a response from the RADIUS application equals the sum of retransmit times time out for all configured servers If the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt all user interfaces will be blocked until the RADIUS application returns a response 2 Inthe Timeout Duration field specify the time out value in seconds for request retransmissions The valid range is 1 30 Consideration to maximum delay time should be given when configuring RADIUS maxretransmit and RADIUS time out If multiple RADIUS servers are configured the max retransmit value on each will be exhausted before the next server is attempted A retransmit will not occur until the configured time out value on that server has passed without a response from the RADIUS server Therefore the maximum delay in receiving a response from the RADIUS application equals the sum of retransmit times time out for all configured servers If the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt all user interfaces will be
515. page 61 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 51 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Server Configuration To display the DHCP Server Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Server Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525S 44 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Manoped achable Switch with 41 gt Gigaber Slon sosour v ONC Server DHCP Server Configuration gt CNP Seve DHCP Server Configuration Configuration DHCP Pool Adran Mode Comfiguraben Ping Packet Cont DHCP Poo Confhet h tes Resty Automate Mode txcluded Address gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP L Relay gt UDP Relay gt DWCPV6 Server gt OHCPV6 Relay To enable or disable DHCP service 1 Use Admin Mode to specify whether the DHCP Service is to be Enabled or Disabled Default value is Disable 2 Use Ping Packet Count to specify the number of packets a server sends to a Pool address to check for duplication as part of a ping operation Default value is 2 Valid Range is 0 2 to 10 Setting the value to 0 will disable the function 3 Use Conflict Logging Mode to specify whether conflict logging on a DHCP Server is to be Enabled or Disabled Default value is Enable Use Bootp Automatic Mode to specify whether Bootp for dynamic pools is to be Enabled or Disabled Default value is Disable Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the scree
516. parameters without enabling OSPF Admin Mode but they will have no effect until you enable Admin Mode The following information will be displayed only if the Chapter 4 Routing 279 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Admin Mode is enabled State Designated Router Backup Designated Router Number of Link Events LSA ACK Interval and Metric Cost For OSPF to be fully functional you must enter a valid IP Address and Subnet Mask via the Interface IP Configuration page or through the CLI command ip address lt ipaddr gt lt subnet mask gt Note Once OSPF is initialized on the router it will remain initialized until the router is reset 4 Use Router Priority to enter the OSPF priority for the selected interface The priority of an interface is specified as an integer from 0 to 255 The default is 1 which is the highest router priority A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network 5 Use Retransmit Interval to enter the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default is 5 seconds 6 Use Hello Interval to enter the OSPF hello interval for the specified
517. particular MAC Service Access Point MSAP has been deleted from tables associated with the remote systems Total Drops Specifies the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point MSAP could not be entered into tables associated with the remote systems because of insufficient resources 106 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information Table 2 34 Field ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Description Total Age outs Interface Specifies the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point MSAP has been deleted from tables associated with the remote systems because the information timeliness interval has expired Specifies the unit slot port for the interfaces Transmit Total Specifies the number of LLDP frames transmitted by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port Receive Total Specifies the number of valid LLDP frames received by this LLDP agent on the corresponding port while the LLDP agent is enabled Discards Specifies the number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port Errors Specifies the number of invalid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port while the LLDP agent is enabled Age outs TLV Discards TLV Unknowns TLV MED TLV 802 1 TLV 802
518. pe be ta he tm oe eer ee ee OTIN a er eee Ot meee n Semmes a ma r naas ot ewe ma smes lt mmes s me ma putos E emaa na tamed n ot eqegraee n m m name EDOTI Ia yoma D oe E3 EEU Te T te te E te i gt os pa wu a wu Ie te Pee ONENESS LOLA AER ELSES EET LD EELS De AEN TT Ee Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 161 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the screen Table 3 57 Fig escrito O O Interface Identify the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the CST It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port Port Forwarding State The Forwarding State of this port Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree The port role will be one of the following values Root Port Designated Port Alternate Port Backup Port Master Port or Disabled Port Designated Root Root Bridge for the CST It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Designated Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port It is made up using the bridge p
519. play the IPv6 PIM SM Interface Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt PIM SM gt Interface Configuration GSM73525 A Peer Ceste iayer J momeged 6 1b gebe Eon a PIM SM Interface Configuration ewe rin on Pim sm Imteriace Configuration Hro mm y Bethel Crdye m e be Chee was Mate tP Corfigewher D Sot Bowes Cepatager mt eee r3 5 gt H E g e ti ih i F tS tS U f 2 s s i i f p s Esir eSeScesSssecec esas f i i Ses Bx Ms Chapter 4 Routing 379 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Interface The interface for which data is to be configured or to be displayed 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM SM in the router The default is disable 3 Use Hello Interval secs to enter the time in seconds between the transmission of which PIM Hello messages on this interface The valid values are from 0 to 18000 The default value is 30 4 Use Join Prune Interval secs to enter the frequency at which PIM Join Prune messages are transmitted on this PIM interface The valid values are from 0 to 18000 The default value is 60 5 Use BSR Border to set BSR border status on the selected interface 6 Use DR Priority to enter the DR priority for the selected interface The valid values are from 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 1 Table 73 Fig escr
520. pping table shows host name to IP address entries that the switch has learned The following table describes the dynamic host fields Table 2 14 Field Description Host Lists the host name you assign to the specified IP address Total Amount of time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table Elapsed Amount of time since the dynamic entry was last updated Type The type of the dynamic entry Addresses Lists the IP address associated with the host name License The License link is available only for models GSM7328Sv1 GSM7352Sv1 GSM7328FS GSM7228PS and GSM7252PS From the License link you can access the following pages e Show License on page 49 e License Features on page 50 Show License To display the Show License page click System gt License gt Show License A screen similar to the following displays Show License License features License Key License Key License Key License Date License Copy License States Deacreton GSM7352S 48 Pon Gost Msesged Joach with b laper 3 toriotie Je 4 10 Gagab Sots sosowt This page provides information about available License Keys for various features By default those License Keys are not available If License Key for feature is not available user will not Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 49 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual be allowed to configure this functionality Avail
521. quires that the Mark CoS value field be set 422 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Send These packets are presented unmodified by DiffServ to the system forwarding element e Mark IP Precedence These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified IP Precedence value before being presented to the system forwarding element This selection requires that the Mark IP Precedence value field be set 5 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 6 If you change any of the settings on the page click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Table 5 77 Field Description Policy Name Displays name of the DiffServ policy Policy Type Displays type of the policy as In Member Class Name Displays name of each class instance within the policy Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 423 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Service Interface Configuration Use the Service Interface Configuration page to activate a policy on an interface To display the page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Advanced gt Service Interface Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabst Layer I Masoged irechable Switch wah 4 10 Gigabit diets tosout
522. r another device e N A Indicates that PoE is not supported by the unit Click REFRESH to refresh the system information of the switch Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 25 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Switch Statistics Use this page to display the switch statistics To display the Switch Statistics page click System gt Management gt Switch Statistics A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigob Loyer Ee me Stackable Switch wih 4 10 Gigsbe Sor Mointenonce Help adex sosout j Octets Recowed Packets Recowed Without Errore Unicant Packets Recenwed Mudie ast Parhets Rer ovest Broads ant Packets Reserved Res eve Packets Oma arded Octets Trasamitted Packets Transmitted Without Errors Unicast Packets Transmitted Pultmast Packets trensretted Breads ant Packets transenated Trensma Packets Discarded Most Address Emtrses Ever Used Address Entries is Use Maximum VLAN Entrees Most VLAN Eetries Ever Used State VLAN Fetries Oyaamis VLAN Fairies VLAN Deletes Time Since Counters Last Cleared 3 day 23 hr 56 eran 26 set 26 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes Switch Statistics information Table 2 5 Field Description iflndex This object indicates the iflndex of the interface
523. r each GARP participant for each port 5 Use Leave Time centiseconds to specify the time to wait after receiving an unregister request for a VLAN or multicast group before deleting the associated entry in centiseconds This allows time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute in order to maintain uninterrupted service Enter a number between 20 and 600 0 2 to 6 0 seconds The factory default is 60 centiseconds 0 6 seconds An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port 6 Use Leave All Time centiseconds to control how frequently LeaveAll PDUs are generated A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will shortly be deregistered Participants will need to rejoin in order to maintain registration The Leave All Period Timer is set to a random value in the range of LeaveAllTime to 1 5 LeaveAllTime The timer is specified in centiseconds Enter a number between 200 and 6000 2 to 60 seconds The factory default is 1000 centiseconds 10 seconds An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port Spanning Tree Protocol The Spanning Tree Protocol STP provides a tree topology for any arrangement of bridges STP also provides one path between end stations on a network eliminating loops Spanning tree versions supported include Common STP Multiple STP and Rapid STP Classic STP provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops For inf
524. r for the network by monitoring received Hello Packets The router is not allowed to elect a Backup Designated Router or a Designated Router until it transitions out of Waiting state This prevents unnecessary changes of Backup Designated Router e Designated Router This router is itself the Designated Router on the attached network Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node The network LSA will contain links to all routers including the Designated Router itself attached to the network e Backup Designated Router This router is itself the Backup Designated Router on the attached network It will be promoted to Designated Router if the present Designated Router fails The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network The Backup Designated Router performs slightly different functions during the Flooding Procedure as compared to the Designated Router e Other Designated Router The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers have been selected to be the Designated Router and Backup Designated Router either The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the Designated Router and the Backup Designated Router The State is only displayed if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled The identity of the Designated Router for this network in the view of the advertising router The Designate
525. r of LS updates received on this interface by this router The number of LS acknowledgements sent on this interface by this router The number of LS acknowledgements received on this interface by this router Chapter 4 Routing 315 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Neighbor Table This screen shows the OSPFv3 Neighbor Table This information is displayed only if OSPFv3 is enabled and there exists at least on OSPF v3 enabled interface having a valid neighbor To display the Neighbor Table page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Neighbor Table GSM73525 Gay at Pee Bascdshis homi wot a 1 Gigis Doty senut OSPFvV3 Neighbor Table OSPI Neighbor Table Rearh By letartoce 316 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 43 Field Description Interface The Interface for which the data needs to be displayed Router ID A 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format representing the Router ID of the neighbor on the selected Interface Area ID A 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format representing the area common to the neighbor selected Options A Bit Mask corresponding to the neighbor s options State Dead Time Events field Router Priority The priority of this neighbor in the designated router election algorithm A value of 0 signifies that the neighbor is not elig
526. r the ARP Response packets will be enabled The factory default is disable Use Validate IP to choose the DAI IP Validation Mode for the switch by selecting Enable or Disable radio button If you select Enable IP Address validation for the ARP packets will be enabled The factory default is disable Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 505 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DAI VLAN Configuration To display the DAI VLAN Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI VLAN Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigabit Loyer 3 Mosoged Srockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Siors aintenance Help Index 1osour J DHCP Snooping Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration IP Source Guard VLAN Configuration Corhguration DAI VLAN Configuration DAI Interface Configuration DAI ACL Corhigurabon DAI ACL Rule Configuration OA Statistics gt Captive Portal 1 VLAN ID Select the DAI Capable VLANs for which information has to be displayed or configured 2 Use Dynamic ARP Inspection to indicate whether the Dynamic ARP Inspection is enabled on this VLAN If this object is set to Enable Dynamic ARP Inspection is enabled If this object is set to Disable Dynamic ARP Inspection is disabled 3 Use Logging invalid Packets to indicate whether the Dynamic ARP Inspection logging is enabled on this VLAN If this object is set to Enable
527. raffic The factory default is disabled Multicast Storm Recovery Level Type Specify the Multicast Storm Recovery Level as a percentage of link speed or as packages per second Multicast Storm Recovery Level Specify the threshold at which storm control activates The factory default is 5 percent of port speed for pps type Unicast Storm Recovery Mode Enable or disable this option by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field When you specify Enable for Unicast Storm Recovery and the unicast traffic on the specified Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the unicast traffic The factory default is disabled Unicast Storm Recovery Level Type Specify the Unicast Storm Recovery Level as a percentage of link speed or as packages per second Unicast Storm Recovery Level Specify the threshold at which storm control activates The factory default is 5 percent of port speed for pps type Control To display the page click the Security gt Control tab The Control folder contains links to the following features 496 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e DHCP Snooping on page 497 e IP Source Guard on page 503 e Dynamic ARP Inspection on page 505 e Captive Portal on page 512 DHCP Snooping The DHCP Snooping folder contains links to the following features e DHCP Snooping Global
528. rating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter FCC Declaration Of Conformity We NETGEAR Inc 350 East Plumeria Drive San Jose CA 95134 declare under our sole responsibility that the GSM7352S ProSafe 48 4 Gigabit Ethernet L3 Managed Stackable Switch complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules Appendix C Notification of Compliance 624 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC Radio Frequency Interference Warnings amp Instructions This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
529. ration View interlace Configuration 1 Interface Interface for this flow poller and sampler This Agent will support Physical ports only 2 Use Receiver Index to specify the allowed range for the sFlowReceiver associated with this counter poller Allowed range is 1 to 8 3 Use Poller Interval to specify the maximum number of seconds between successive samples of the counters associated with this data source A sampling interval of 0 disables counter sampling Allowed range is 0 to 86400 secs 4 Use Receiver Index to specify the sFlow Receiver for this flow sampler If set to 0 the sampler configuration is set to default and the sampler is deleted Only active receivers can be set If a receiver expires then all samplers associated with the receiver will also expire Allowed range is 1 to 8 5 Use Sampling Rate to specify the statistical sampling rate for packet sampling from this source A sampling rate of 1 counts all packets A sampling rate of 0 disables sampling Allowed range is 1024 to 65536 6 Use Maximum Header Size to specify the maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet Allowed range is 20 to 256 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 577 Maintenance Use the features available from the Maintenance tab to help you manage the switch The Maintenance tab contains links to the following features e Save Configuration on page 578 e Reseton page 580 e Upload File From Switch on page 5
530. re You can select multiple interfaces to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces Use Interface to select the interface you want to configure Use PVID to specify the VLAN ID you want assigned to untagged or priority tagged frames received on this port The factory default is 1 Use Acceptable Frame Types to specify the types of frames that may be received on this port The options are VLAN only and Admit All e When set to VLAN only untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port are discarded e When set to Admit All untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of the Port VLAN ID for this port With either option VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802 1Q VLAN specification Ingress Filtering e When enabled the frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which this frame is associated In a tagged frame the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in the tag In an untagged frame the VLAN is the Port VLAN ID specified for the port that received this frame e When disabled all frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802 1Q VLAN bridge specification The factory default is disabled Use Port Priority to specify the default 802 1p priority assigned to untagged packets arriving at the port The possible value is from
531. re Administration Manual USB File Upload Use this menu to upload a file from the switch to USB device To display the Upload File to USB page click Maintenance gt Upload gt USB File Upload NETGEAR GSM73525 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Stackable Managed Switch with 2 106 SIPs Ports System tocou Fils Manogement Trowbleshootieg File Upload Upload File To USB gt HTTP Pile Upload USB File Upload menye Image Name USO Fie Upload File To USB 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to upload a Use Archive to specify archive STK code when you want to retrieve from the operational flash e Image1 Specify the code image1 when you want to retrieve e Image2 Specify the code image2 when you want to retrieve b Use Text Configuration to specify configuration in text mode when you want to retrieve the stored configuration The factory default is image1 2 Use USB File to specify a name along with path for the file you want to upload You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank 3 The last row of the table is used to display information about the progress of the file transfer Download File To Switch The switch supports system file downloads from a remote system to the switch by using either TFTP or HTTP The Download menu contains links to the following options e File Download on page 588 HTTP File Download on page 589 e USB File Download on page 592
532. re valid One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up buffer space for other routing entries The total number of ICMP messages which the entity received Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors 224 Chapter 4 Routing Table 10 Field ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Description IcmpInErrors The number of ICMP messages which the entity received but determined as having ICMP specific errors bad ICMP checksums bad length etc IcmpInDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received IcmpInTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received IcmpInParmProbs IcmpInSrcQuenchs IcmpInRedirects The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received The number of ICMP Redirect messages received IcmpInEchos The number of ICMP Echo request messages received IcmpInEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received IcmpInTimestamps IcmpInTimestampReps IcmpInAddrMasks IcmpInAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP Timestamp request messages received The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received IcmpOutMsgs The total number of ICMP message
533. received Last Updated Time since the address was confirmed to be reachable Chapter 4 Routing 245 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Route Configuration To display the IPv6 Route Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Static Route Configuration 1 Use IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length to enter the Network Prefix and Prefix Length for the Configured Route 2 Use Next Hop IPv6 Address Type to specify if the Next Hop IPv6 Address is a Global IPv6 Address or a Link local IPv6 Address or a Static Reject IPv6 Address If the Next Hop IPv6 address specified is a Link Local IPv6 Address specify the Interface for the Link local IPv6 Next Hop Address Select Static Reject from this menu to create a static reject route for a destination prefix No next hop address is specified in that case 3 Use Next Hop IPv6 Address to enter the Next Hop IPv6 Address for the Configured Route 4 Use Interface to specify the unit slot and port number for the Link local IPv6 Next Hop Address This field is enabled only if the Link local is selected 5 Use Preference to specify the Route Preference of the Configured Route 6 Click ADD to configure a new route 7 Click DELETE to delete the corresponding route 246 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Route Table To display the
534. red e DeliveringPower indicates power is being drawn by device e Fault indicates a problem with the port e Test indicates port is in test mode e otherFault indicates port is idle due to error condition e Searching indicates port is not in one of the above states Fault Status Describes the error description when the PSE port is in fault status No Error value specifies that the PSE port is not in any error state MPS Absent value specifies that the PSE port has detected an absence of main power supply Short value specifies that the PSE port has detected a short circuit condition Overload value specifies that the pd connected to the PSE port had tried to provide more power than it is permissible by the hardware Power Denied value specifies that the PSE port has been denied power because of shortage of power or due to administrative action SNMP From SNMP link under the System tab you can configure SNMP settings for SNMP V1 V2 and SNMPvs From the SNMP link you can access the following pages e SNMPV1 V2 on page 93 e SNMP V3 on page 101 SNMPV1 V2 The pages under the SNMPV1 V2 menu allow you to configure SNMP community information traps and trap flags From the SNMP V1 V2 link you can access the following pages e Community Configuration on page 94 e Trap Configuration on page 96 e Trap Flags on page 97 e Supported MIBs on page 99 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information
535. ress in XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Or a hostname starting with an alphabet to receive SNMP traps from this device Length of address can not exceed 158 characters e Status Select the receiver s status from the pull down menu Enable Send traps to the receiver Disable Do not send traps to the receiver 2 To modify information about an existing SNMP recipient select the check box next to the recipient change the desired fields and then click Apply Configuration changes take effect immediately 3 To delete a recipient select the check box next to the recipient and click Delete 4 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 96 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Trap Flags Use the Trap Flags page to enable or disable traps When the condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch a trap message is sent to any enabled SNMP Trap Receivers and a message is written to the trap log To access the Trap Flags page click System gt SNMP gt SNMP V1 V2 gt Trap Flags Trap Flags Trap Flags Authentication Unk Up Down Multiple Users panning Iree ACL Captive Portal DVMRP PIM OSPI v Traps errors authentication ailure bad packet config error virt authentication failure viet bad packet virt
536. ress in EUI 64 format Default value is false 8 Click ADD to add a new IPv6 address in global format 9 Click DELETE to delete a selected IPv6 address 36 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv Network Neighbor Use this page to display IPv6 Network Port Neighbor entries To display the IPv6 Network Neighbor page click System gt Management gt Network Interface gt IPv6 Network Neighbor A screen similar to the following displays Syrien Inhermetun Saiid Statisties System besusu e Sst intormatioa Lowghert imtertee Renaawt utertars Ped meteors Lage tte IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table SPv6 Network lstertace Meighther Tabie The following table displays IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table information Table 2 10 Field Description IPv6 address The Ipv6 Address of a neighbor switch visible to the network interface MAC address The MAC address of a neighbor switch IsRtr Neighbor State True 1 if the neighbor machine is a router false 2 otherwise The state of the neighboring switch e reachable 1 The neighbor is reachable by this switch e stale 2 Information about the neighbor is scheduled for deletion e delay 3 No information has been received from neighbor during delay period e probe 4 Switch is attempting to probe for this neighbor e unknown
537. rface When an IGMPv2 membership report is received this timer is reset to the group membership timer While this timer is non zero the local router ignores any IGMPv1 and IGMPv3 leave messages for this group that it receives on the selected interface This field is displayed only if the interface is configured for IGMP version 2 Compatibility This parameter shows group compatibility mode v1 v2 and v3 for this group on the specified interface Filter Mode The source filter mode Include Exclude NA for the specified group on this interface When NA mode is active the field is blank Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with latest IGMP groups information 352 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Membership To display the IGMP Membership page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt IGMP Membership NETGEAR touta tobie IGMP Membership llets Coatiquratan taterface Canbqur eaten ovnar GSM73525 ba Per Gigsbt ape 2 Managed Table 61 Field Description Group IP The IP multicast group address for which data is to be displayed Interface This parameter shows the interface on which Compatibility Mode multicast packets are forwarded This parameter shows group compatibility mode v1 v2 and v3 for this group on the specified interface Source Filter Mode The source filter mode Include Exclude NA for the spec
538. ring gt Logs gt Event Logs NETGEAR GSM7352S araa wih nee srachakte Sok Sit 4 1E Gigon Sion System Switching Routing Manitoring Mainmaonce Help Index 1osour Event Logs Event Loos 2465328 006 ooos 0006 0076s 9006 001132 ooo6 1816234 ooo6 0084 oo06 seo 3184838 v gt Cakar A MPR E SH 568 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the Event Log information displayed on the screen Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions e Click Clear to clear the messages out of the Event Log e Click Refresh to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current information Table 7 117 Field Description Entry The sequence number of the event Type The type of the event File Name The file in which the event originated Line The line number of the event Task Id The task ID of the event Code The event code Time The time this event occurred Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 569 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Persistent Logs A persistent log is a log that is stored in persistent storage Persistent storage survives across platform reboots The first log type is the system startup log The system startup log stores the first N messages received after system reboot The second log type is th
539. ring gt Ports gt Cable Test GSM7352 gt Port Statistics gt Port Detailed Statistics gt CAP Statistics Cable Test Interface Cable Status Cable Length failure Location m ogogog Ooobcogcoco0o Open Open Open Oper Oper Oper Open Open Oper Oper Oper Opes Oper Oper Oper Open Open Oper Oper Oper Oper Jogo 1 Interface Indicates the interface to which the cable to be tested is connected 2 Click Apply to perform a cable test on the selected interface The cable test may take up to 2 seconds to complete If the port has an active link then the link is not taken down and the cable status is always Normal The command returns a cable length estimate if this feature is supported by the PHY for the current link speed Note that if the link is down and a cable is attached to a 10 100 Ethernet adapter then the cable status may be Open or Short because some Ethernet adapters leave unused wire pairs unterminated or grounded Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 559 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 7 114 Field Description Cable Status This displays the cable status as Normal Open or Short e Normal the cable is working correctly e Open the cable is disconnected or there is a faulty connector e Short there is an electrical short in the cable e Cable Test Failed The cable status could not be determined The cable
540. riority and the base MAC address of the bridge Designated Port Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port Topology Change Acknowledge Identifies whether the next BPDU to be transmitted for this port would have the topology change acknowledgement flag set It is either True or False Edge port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port It takes the value Enabled or Disabled Point to point MAC Derived value of the point to point status CST Regional Root Bridge Identifier of the CST Regional Root It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge CST Path Cost Path Cost to the CST Regional Root Port Up Time Since Counters Last Cleared Time since the counters were last cleared displayed in Days Hours Minutes and Seconds 162 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MST Configuration Use the Spanning Tree MST Configuration page to configure Multiple Spanning Tree MST on the switch To display the Spanning Tree MST Configuration page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt MST Configuration GSM7352S Se bom om 6 Ti pta Blas MST Configuration DEST Configuration To configure an MST instance 1 To add an MST instance configur
541. rmation about one or more RADIUS servers on the network To access the RADIUS Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt RADIUS gt Radius Configuration GSM7352S 48 Port Gigodit Loye 3 Managed Srechable Switch with 4 12Gigebit Slots wooout qre Radius Configuration gt Enable Password Radius Configuration gt Line Password RADIUS Current Server Address Rasus Member of Configured Servers Configuration Max Number of Hetraseauts gt Server Teneout Duration secs Corhiguraton Accourting Mode Accourhng Server Configuration Radies Altribeete 4 Mente gt TACACS gt Authentication List gt Login Sessions The Current Server IP Address field is blank if no servers are configured see lt pdf gt RADIUS Server Configuration on page 6 435 The switch supports up to three configured RADIUS servers If more than one RADIUS servers are configured the current server is the server configured as the primary server If no servers are configured as the primary server the current server is the most recently added RADIUS server Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 433 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure global RADIUS server settings 1 In the Max Number of Retransmits field specify the value of the maximum number of times a request packet is retransmitted to the RADIUS server The value of the maximum number of times a request
542. rochable Switch with 4 10 Cegabe tom ft m nan fap Shy pf ne toso IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration IGMP Saooping Interface Coafiguration Configuration Interface a LAGS All Go To tetertace Corbo aban IGMP VLAN Maw Response Configuration od soe Time secs gt Multicast Router Corfiguraton Multicast Router VLAN Configuraton Querier Corfiguration Querier VLAN Corfiguraten gt MLD Snooping F g ii o gt 9 tit 3 4 5 2 5 z HE 9 pi g s gt 9 H g 3 z 5 Ho EE EE eee2e288 5 9 9 s jo o o oo 0000H pipi 1 s E 9 174 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure IGMP Snooping interface settings 1 2 Interface Lists all physical VLAN and LAG interfaces Select the interface you want to configure Use Admin Mode to select the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP Snooping for the switch from the pull down menu The default is disable Use Group Membership Interval to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group Enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds The default is 260 seconds Use Max Response Time to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait after sending a query on an interfa
543. rochoble Switch with 4 1O Cigabet tem Maintenance Help Index toso a IGMP VLAN Configuration v IGHP Snooping IGMP VLAN Configuration Configurabon Intertace Group Admin a lt Maximum Multecast Router Mo Corfou awon VLAN 10 gt IGMP VLAN Corfiguranon Multicast Router Corfiguration Mulpcest Router VLAN Corfigur ebon Quaner Configuration Quener VLAN Corfiguraten MLD Snooping Membership odr Response Time Expiry Time 176 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure IGMP snooping settings for VLANs 1 To enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN enter the VLAN ID in the appropriate field and configure the IGMP Snooping values Use Admin Mode to enable or disable IGMP Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to enable or disable the IGMP Snooping Fast Leave Mode for the specified VLAN ID Use Group Membership Interval to set the value for group membership interval of IGMP Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is Maximum Response Time 1 to 3600 seconds Use Maximum Response Time to set the value for maximum response time of IGMP Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is 1 to Group Membership Interval 1 Its value should be greater than group membership interval value Use Multicast Router Expiry Time to set the value for multicast router expiry time of
544. rom the VLAN Enable routing on the VLAN using the IP address and subnet mask entered To display the VLAN Routing Wizard page click Routing gt VLAN gt VLAN Routing Wizard gt GSM73525 An em VLAN Routing Wizard wert FL AM Bouteng VLAN Kouting Wizard Use VLAN ID to specify the VLAN Identifier VID associated with this VLAN The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093 Use Ports to display selectable physical ports and LAGs if any Selected ports will be added to the Routing VLAN Each port has three modes Tagged Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN will be tagged The ports that are selected will be included in the VLAN e U Untagged Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN will be untagged The ports that are selected will be included in the VLAN e BLANK Autodetect Select the ports that may be dynamically registered in this VLAN via GVRP This selection has the effect of excluding a port from the selected VLAN Use the LAG Enabled option to add selected ports to VLAN as a LAG The default is No Use IP Address to define the IP address of the VLAN interface Use Network Mask to define the subnet mask of the VLAN interface Chapter 4 Routing 251 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual VLAN Routing Configuration Use the VLAN Routing Configuration page to configure VLAN Routing interfaces on the system To disp
545. rotected port Group IDs supported for the current platform The valid range of the Group ID is 0 to 2 Use the optional Group Name field to associate a name with the protected ports group used for identification purposes It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long including blanks The default is blank This field is optional Click the orange bar to display the available ports Click the box below each port to configure as a protected port The selection list consists of physical ports protected as well as unprotected The protected ports are tick marked to differentiate between them No traffic forwarding is possible between two protected ports If left unconfigured the default state is unprotected No traffic forwarding is possible between two protected ports Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch If you make changes to the page click Apply to apply the changes to the system Configuration changes take effect immediately 492 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Storm Control A broadcast storm is the result of an excessive number of broadcast messages simultaneously transmitted across a network by a single port Forwarded message responses can overload network resources and or cau
546. rship on page 353 IGMP Proxy Interface Configuration on page 354 IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics on page 356 IGMP Proxy Membership on page 357 IGMP Global Configuration To display the IGMP Global Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast IGMP gt Global Configuration GSM73525S bt tet Gagne ahr new tanaged A 6 1D Gagehen Sau fonta table IGMP Global Configuration toleteal Conliquretven IOMP Global Conf n Interface C antigus otros Admintaie owner hohe ee ye botry Irtertecs Crhgr wos Roateng Irvertecw Vetus 1 ore Pe eee tte were Dotetece Cote wer Petey besteca etatas Petey Mer te th rin on Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of IGMP in the router to active or inactive The default is disable 346 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Routing Interface Configuration To display the IGMP Routing Interface Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast IGMP gt Routing Interface Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S sped g Somah Dik ri y are a IGMP Routing Interlace Configuration ICMP Rostting tntertece Configas ation Boateng vectors Biotita kre ree Law Mente the Perey beete Cartige ster res brtetece Setatas res Marte HRERNNNENHH PSSSSSSSSSSESSsSasss s to to te te te te td PERSRSBERERSRS E te e Fe FSF 5 Chapter 4 Routing 347 ProSafe Gigab
547. rt 802 3x Pause Frames Transmitted A count of MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in half duplex mode GVRP PDUs Received The count of GVRP PDUs received in the GARP layer GVRP PDUs Transmitted GVRP Failed Registrations The count of GVRP PDUs transmitted from the GARP layer The number of times attempted GVRP registrations could not be completed GMRP PDUs Received The count of GMRP PDUs received from the GARP layer GMRP PDUs Transmitted GMRP Failed Registrations The count of GMRP PDUs transmitted from the GARP layer The number of times attempted GMRP registrations could not be completed EAPOL Frames Received The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this authenticator EAPOL Frames Transmitted The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this authenticator Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time in days hours minutes and seconds since the statistics for this port were last cleared 556 Chapter 7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual EAP Statistics Use the EAP Statistics page to display information about EAP packets received on a specific port To display the EAP Statistics page click Monitoring gt
548. rted in order to enable operation over tunnels It is possible to enable OSPF and OSPF v3 at the same time OSPF works with IPv4 and OSPF v3 works with IPv6 From the OSPF link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 296 e Advanced on page 298 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e OSPFv3 Configuration on page 297 296 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual OSPFv3 Configuration Use the OSPFv3 Configuration page to activate and configure OSPFv3 for a switch To display the OSPFv3 Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Basic gt OSPFv3 Configuration GSM73525S Locout OSPFv3 Configuration OSPFv3 Configuration Adee Mode Roster ID 1 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable OSPFv3 will be activated for the switch The default value is disable You must configure a Router ID before OSPFv3 can become operational This can also be done by issuing the CLI command router id in the IPv6 router OSPF mode 2 Use Router ID to specify the 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS If you want to change the Router ID you must first disable OSPFv3 After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPFv3 to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not a valid Router ID Note On
549. rv Class Contigeration Match Overy any x O Reference Clase ryeuyr O Class Of Service Overs ttherset Type O Soure MAC Destinstion MAC Pretecel type source 1P Sewrce U4 Port O Gestation 19 O Destinstion L4 Port Opos O Precedence Value OP tos Class Summary Monitoring Marntenance GSM73525 48 Port Gigabit Layer 2 monaged Wechodte Swikh wath 4 10 Gegabe Slon tosour Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service 417 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Class Name Displays the name for the configured DiffServ class Class Type Displays the DiffServ class type Options All Only when a new class is created this field is a selector field After class creation this becomes a non configurable field displaying the configured class type Define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class Match Every This adds to the specified class definition a match condition whereby all packets are considered to belong to the class Reference Class This lists the class es that can be assigned as reference class es to the current class Class of Service This lists all the values for the class of service match criterion in the range 0 to 7 from which one can be selected VLAN This is a value in the range of 0 4095 Ethernet Type This lists the keywords for the Ethertype from which one can be selected Source MAC Address This is
550. rver UntrustedClientMsgsWithOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted client TrustedServerMsgsWithoutOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted server TrustedClientMsgsWithoutOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted client 66 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual UDP Relay From the UDP Relay link you can access the following pages e UDP Relay Global Configuration on page 67 e UDP Relay Interface Configuration on page 69 UDP Relay Global Configuration To display the UDP Relay Global Configuration page click System gt Services gt UDP Relay gt UDP Relay Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM7352S y 19 gra Han Sacre UDP Retay ONC Relay UDP Relay Configeration DHCP L Relay A ss 1 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the UDP Relay on the switch The default value is disable 2 Use Server Address to specify the UDP Relay Server Address in x x x x format 3 Use UDP Port to specify the UDP Destination Port These ports are supported DefaultSet Relay UDP port 0 packets This is specified if no UDP port is selected when creating the Relay server e dhcp Relay DHCP UDP port 67 packets e domain Relay DNS UDP port 53 packets e isakmp Relay I
551. rver Malformed Messages Specifies the number of the malformed messages DHCPDISCOVER DHCPREQUEST DHCPDECLINE Specifies the number of DHCPDISCOVER messages received by the DHCP Server Specifies the number of DHCPREQUEST messages received by the DHCP Server Specifies the number of DHCPDECLINE messages received by the DHCP Server DHCPRELEASE Specifies the number of DHCPRELEASE messages received by the DHCP Server DHCPINFORM Specifies the number of DHCPINFORM messages received by the DHCP Server DHCPOFFER Specifies the number of DHCPOFFER messages sent by the DHCP Server DHCPACK Specifies the number of DHCPACK messages sent by the DHCP Server DHCPNAK Specifies the number of DHCPNAK messages sent by the DHCP Server Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 59 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Bindings Information To display the DHCP Bindings Information page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Bindings Information A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pert Gigabit Loyer 3 Moseged Stochable Swinh with 4 1O Gigabit Slon System Help index iocour DHCP Bindings Information Reset AB Dynamic Bindings Aperita Dynan fimdng Opbors DHCP Bindings Information OMCP Server Sates Search By ndng IP ONCE Bandings Hardware Address Information ONCE Conficts Informat
552. ry default is enabled 3 Use Multiple Users to enable or disable activation of multiple user traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is enabled This trap is triggered when the same user ID is logged into the switch more than once at the same time either via telnet or the serial port 4 Use Spanning Tree to enable or disable activation of spanning tree traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is enabled 5 Use ACL to enable or disable activation of ACL traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is disabled 6 Use DVMRP to enable or disable activation of DVMRP traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is disabled 7 Use PIM to enable or disable activation of spanning tree traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is disabled 8 Use OSPF to enable or disable activation of OSPF traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is enabled This field can be configured only if the OSPF admin mode is enabled 9 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 10 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 98 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual
553. s Proxy Interface Displays the interface on which IGMP proxy is enabled Source Hosts Last Reporter Uptime Expiry Time State This parameter shows source addresses which are members of this multicast address The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for the IP Multicast group address on the IGMP Proxy interface The time elapsed since this entry was created This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address which is a member of this multicast group This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out The state of the host entry A Host can be in one of the state Non member state does not belong to the group on the interface Delaying member state host belongs to the group on the interface and report timer running The report timer is used to send out the reports Idle member state host belongs to the group on the interface and no report timer running Filter Mode The group filter mode Include Exclude None for the specified group on the IGMP Proxy interface Number of Sources The number of source hosts present in the selected multicast group Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with latest IGMP proxy member information 358 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual PIM DM From the PIM DM link you can access the following p
554. s The default is enable Use Default Information Originate to enable or disable Default Route Advertise Use Default Metric to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes This field displays the default metric if one has already been set or blank if not configured earlier The valid values are 1 to 15 Table 25 Field Description Global Route Changes The number of route changes made to the IP Route Database by RIP This does not include the refresh of a route s age Global queries The number of responses sent to RIP queries from other systems Chapter 4 Routing 261 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Interface Configuration Use the RIP Interface Configuration page to enable and configure or to disable RIP ona specific interface To display the Interface Configuration page click Routing gt RIP gt Advanced gt Interface Configuration Intertace Configuration beterie e om fuger sikon testets bead vereme Bereme verema wir aamu mase Revert orma lype pig JEg H HE zer ien 6628 tess zer ien 6624 tess zer ren 624 ttz zer ren 624 ttz zen wu ren icis zers ien 6024 aces zere iera TEN ttz zer ter TEN aces fens teas ip Hugt HE f BPRBRHA EH AE 4 bb 262 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual RI
555. s Ethernet 9 Use Proxy Arp to disable or enable proxy Arp for the specified interface from the pull down menu 10 Use Local Proxy Arp to disable or enable Local Proxy ARP for the specified interface from the pull down menu 11 Use Bandwidth to specify the configured bandwidth on this interface This parameter communicates the speed of the interface to higher level protocols OSPF uses bandwidth to compute link cost Valid range is 1 to 10000000 12 Use ICMP Destination Unreachables to specify the Mode of Sending ICMP Destination Unreachables on this interface If this is Disabled then this interface will not send ICMP Destination Unreachables By default Destination Unreachables mode is enable 13 Use ICMP Redirects to enable disable ICMP Redirects Mode The router sends an ICMP Redirect on an interface only if Redirects are enabled both globally and on the interface By default ICMP Redirects Mode is enable 14 Use IP MTU to specify the maximum size of IP packets sent on an interface Valid range is 68 bytes to the link MTU Default value is 0 A value of 0 indicates that the IP MTU is unconfigured When the IP MTU is unconfigured the router uses the link MTU as the IP MTU The link MTU is the maximum frame size minus the length of the layer 2 header Table 11 Field Description VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID for the interface Link State The state of the specified interface is either Active or Inactive An interfac
556. s Received gt 1510 Octets Total Packets Received Without Errors Unicast Packets Received Multicast Packets Received Broadcast Pachets Received Total Packets Received with MAC Errors 802 3 Pause Frames Received Uroadcast Storm Recovery Total Packets Transmitted Octets Packets Transmitted 64 Octets Packets Transmitted 65 127 Octets Packets Transmitted 128 255 Octets Packets Transmitted 230 311 Octets Packets Transmitted 512 1023 Octets Packets Transmitted 1024 1518 Octets Packets Transmitted gt 1518 Octets Total Packets Transmitted Successfully Total Transmit Packets Discarded Single Collision Frames Mutuple Collision Franes Excessive Collision Frames Port Membership Distards Dropped Transmit Frames STP APDUs Recowed STP BPDUs Transmitted RSTP BPOUS Received RSTP BPOUs Transmitted MSTP BPOUs Received MSTP NP OUs Transmitted 802 3 Pause Frames Transmitted GVRP PDUs Received GVRP POUs Transmitted GVRP Failed Registrations GMRP POUS Received GMRP PDUs Transmitted CMRP Failed Registrations FAPOL Frames Received EAPOL Frames Transmitted Time Since Counters Last Cleared i ba o ie 9 o o i i o o o 0 is o 0 o 9 o o o o 0 i Q 9 o o 0 o i o o 0 o o ooo oo ooo oooooooo day 23 hr 41 min 52 sec 550 Chapter7 Monitoring the System ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the detailed
557. s Soa Ss mae eae 134 Spanning Tree Protocol sarie ctokecidieed Ledddewia dhe eae 151 Eee E ot cto tan ee eeds ashe eek oes TEE EEEN ETAT 152 ADVANCE o05 tee ct dew neea Meee Coa See bbe Beer Ee ees 155 MUNICAST Ac 28 othe tlds Cea le ee teny Got eeN MEAG eten ee eee 168 MEDB ties cueecageeatwadawewt agenane mes na aE ES 168 GMP SMOODING aie a ctx etait pace a wok doped doe Goes Penelae ede ee 172 MEDS SMOODINO e252 i prisene app ga aegis Eia ree E E cop ave ene 184 Address Table sa ccurserswuchebicee Ghee ene bb eee asa 192 DASICr sce pest ANaG SARE als LGR RRS Aaa RR aed 192 ADVANCE 25 cc ced iv tesa nieve beeteetive bbteewed eb ewe enews 195 PONS ccocachhaticedt TE E E teehee ata ee eed agen hae gas 197 Pont Configurations saeni nera Leds Ges cae stae OaE 198 Porn DSSCHDNON crnisss spisi Seta AES gees ENER aha Rs 200 Link Aggregation GroupS 00 000 e eee ee 201 LAG COMMUPANOM ie caa oiana enone Me nee ea ea E 201 LAG Membership pe s cecicae an iaaa eee eaeein Mangia aes lt 203 Chapter 4 Routing FRUITING TANG suis cc duce ice heohid os Senet Ghee eed sg Fh PEER ead PES Gee ghee EENEN 205 Basies ish stent ected oh oes dre tind aa Bo uke Gs aed he el aes 205 AOVONC CO rack Gs ce eae cates eg Gus Ra ea Oo eRe See ea 209 IP ea ra ah a doet on cuter ane aeaea pokeath E chieidicn doetantoe doth da 213 BASIC someting ws ddim fos Gog E EAE Gia aA eS ae als wa 213 AVANCE isn ge Sh od SG PPS Heke GAN ah eGR Pub Ra AES 220 DF
558. s no limit When the number of non default AS external LSAs in a router s link state database reaches the external LSDB limit the router enters overflow state The router never holds more than the external LSDB limit none default AS external LSAs in database The external LSDB limit MUST be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPF backbone and or any regular OSPF area The range for limit is 1 to 2147483647 Use Default Metric to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes This field is blank if a default metric has not been configured The range of valid values is 1 to 16777214 Use Maximum Paths to set the number of paths that OSPF can report for a given destination The range of valid values is 1 to 4 Use AutoCost Reference Bandwidth to configure the auto cost reference bandwidth to control how OSPF calculates link cost Specify the reference bandwidth in megabits per 270 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual second Unless a link cost is configured the link cost is computed by dividing the reference bandwidth by the interface bandwidth The range is 1 to 4294967 12 Use Default Passive Setting to configure the global passive mode setting for all OSPF interfaces Configuring this field overwrites any present interface level passive mode setting OSPF does not form adjacencies on passive interfaces but does advertise attached networks as stub ne
559. s only configurable if OSPFVv3 is initialized on the interface 310 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 41 Field Description IPv6 Address The IPv6 address of the interface LSA Ack Interval State Designated Router The number of seconds between LSA Acknowledgment packet transmissions which must be less than the Retransmit Interval The current state of the selected router interface One of e Down This is the initial interface state In this state the lower level protocols have indicated that the interface is unusable In this state interface parameters will be set to their initial values All interface timers will be disabled and there will be no adjacencies associated with the interface e Loopback In this state the router s interface to the network is looped back either in hardware or software The interface is unavailable for regular data traffic However it may still be desirable to gain information on the quality of this interface either through sending ICMP pings to the interface or through something like a bit error test For this reason IP packets may still be addressed to an interface in Loopback state To facilitate this such interfaces are advertised in router LSAs as single host routes whose destination is the IP interface address e Waiting The router is trying to determine the identity of the Backup Designated Route
560. s sent by the interface ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Echo request messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Router Advertisement Messages The number of ICMP Router Advertisement Transmitted messages sent by the interface Chapter 4 Routing Table 17 Field ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Description ICMPV6 Neighbor Solicit Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Redirect Messages Transmitted ICMPv6 Group Membership Query Messages Transmitted ICMPv6 Group Membership Response Messages Transmitted The number of Redirect messages sent The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages sent The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages sent ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction Messages Transmitted The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages sent ICMPv 6 Duplicate Address Detects The number of duplicate Addresses detected by the interface Chapter 4
561. s to the interface or through something like a bit error test For this reason IP packets may still be addressed to an interface in Loopback state To facilitate this such interfaces are advertised in router LSAs as single host routes whose destination is the IP interface address e Waiting The router is trying to determine the identity of the Backup Designated Router for the network by monitoring received Hello Packets The router is not allowed to elect a Backup Designated Router or a Designated Router until it transitions out of Waiting state This prevents unnecessary changes of Backup Designated Router Designated Router This router is itself the Designated Router on the attached network Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node The network LSA will contain links to all routers including the Designated Router itself attached to the network Backup Designated Router This router is itself the Backup Designated Router on the attached network It will be promoted to Designated Router if the present Designated Router fails The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network The Backup Designated Router performs slightly different functions during the LSA flooding as compared to the Designated Router Other Designated Router The interface is connected to a broadcast on which other routers have bee
562. s which this entity attempted to send Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors IcmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages which this entity did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter s value IcmpOutDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent IcmpOutTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent Chapter 4 Routing 225 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 10 Field Description The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent IcmpOutSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP Source Quench messages IcmpOutParmProbs sent IcmpOutRedirects The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent For a host this object will always be zero since hosts do not send redirects IcmpOutEchos The number of ICMP Echo request messages sent IcmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent IcmpOutTimestamps The number of ICMP Timestamp request IcmpOutTimestampReps The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent IcmpOutAddrMasks The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent IcmpOutAddrMaskReps The number of
563. scheme is used e 802 3af 4point and Legacy value means that the IEEE 802 3af 4point detection scheme is used and when it fails to detect a connected PD legacity capacity detection is used e 802 3af 2point Only value means that the IEEE 802 3af 2point detection scheme is used e 802 3af 2point and Legacy value means that the IEEE 802 3af 2point detection scheme is used and when it fails to detect a connected PD legacity capacity detection is used 8 Click RESET to forcibly reset the PSE port Table 5 Field Definition Port The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured High Power Enabled when particular port supports High Power Mode Max Power The maximum power in Watts that can be provided by the port Class The class of the Powered Device PD defines the range of power a PD is drawing from the system Class definitions e 60 0 44 12 95 watts 1 0 44 3 83 watts 2 0 44 6 48 watts 3 0 44 12 95 watts 4 0 44 25 5 watts Output Voltage Current voltage being delivered to device in volts Output Current Current being delivered to device in mA Output Power Current power being delivered to device in Watts 92 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 5 Field Definition Status Operational status of the port PD detection e Disabled indicates no power being delive
564. scribe or control the power management algorithm used by the PSE to deliver power to the requesting PDs Static value means that power allocated for each port depends on the type of power threshold configured on the port Dynamic value means that power consumption of each port is measured and calculated in real time 4 Use Auto Reset Mode to specify Enable or Disable When set to Enable the PSE port is reset without administrator intervention whenever a fault condition occurs When set to Disable the administrator has to reset the PSE port whenever a fault condition is detected 5 Use Traps to enable or disable activation of PoE traps by selecting the corresponding check box The factory default is enabled Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 89 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 4 Fig efit O O Firmware Version Version of the PoE controller s firmware image Power Status Indicates the power status Total Power Main AC Maximum amount of power the system can deliver to all ports when the PoE unit is powered up by Main AC Supply Total Power RPS Maximum amount of power the system can deliver to all ports when the PoE unit is powered up by RPS unit Power Source The power source There are two possible power sources Main AC or RPS Threshold Power System can powerup one port if consumed power is less than this power i e Consumed power can be
565. se the network to time out The switch measures the incoming broadcast multicast unknown unicast packet rate per port and discards packets when the rate exceeds the defined value Storm control is enabled per interface by defining the packet type and the rate at which the packets are transmitted The Storm Control folder contains links to the following features e Storm Control Global Configuration on page 494 e Storm Control Interface Configuration on page 495 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 493 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Storm Control Global Configuration To display the Storm Control Global Configuration page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Storm Control gt Storm Control Global Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Port Gigetit Layer J Mosoged Srockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Siors tocour gt MAC Filter Storm Control gt Port Security Port Settings Private Group gt Protected Port Global Flow Costrol IEEE 802 42 Mode Storm Control Broadcast Storm Control All Storm Control Multicast Storm Control AN Global Configuration Storm Control Interface Corfiguration Unhnowe Unicast Sterm Control Al The following four control radio buttons provide an easy way to enable or disable each type of packets be rate limited on every port in a global fashion The effective storm control state of each port can be viewed by going to the port con
566. selected interface MED Capabilities To transmit the capabilities TLV in LLDP frames Network Policy To transmit the network policy TLV in LLDP frames Location Identification To transmit the location TLV in LLDP frames Extended Power via MDI PSE To transmit the extended PSE TLV in LLDP frames Extended Power via MDI PD To transmit the extended PD TLV in LLDP frames Inventory Information To transmit the inventory TLV in LLDP frames The following table describes the LLDP MED Interface Configuration fields Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 115 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 2 39 Field Description O O Link Status Specifies the link status of the ports whether it is Up Down Operational Status Specifies the LLDP MED TLVs are transmitted or not on this interface LLDP MED Local Device Information To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Local Device Information A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S aang PI ged om yh tbe ry my Monitoring Maintenance Help Index seeour gt UDP LLDP MED Local Device Information teres LLDP MED Interface Selection Global Configuration Iatertace Interface Network Policies Information 1 Use Interface to select the ports on which LLDP MED frames can be transmitted 116 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3
567. sequence number is not specified by the user a Sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for this interface and direction will be used The valid range is 1 4294967295 3 Click the appropriate orange bar to expose the available ports or LAGs The Port Selection Table specifies list of all available valid interfaces for ACL mapping All non routing physical interfaces and interfaces participating in LAGs are listed e To add the selected ACL to a port or LAG click the box directly below the port or LAG number so that an X appears in the box e To remove the selected ACL from a port or LAG click the box directly below the port or LAG number to clear the selection An X in the box indicates that the ACL is applied to the interface 4 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click Apply to save any changes to the running configuration Table 6 109 Field Description Interface Displays selected interface Direction Displays selected packet filtering direction for ACL ACL Type Displays the type of ACL assigned to selected interface and direction ACL ID Name Displays the ACL Number in the case of IP ACL or ACL Name in the case of named IP ACL and IPv6 ACL identifying the ACL assigned to selected interface and direction Sequence Number Displays the Sequence Number signifying th
568. ser group by default Use Session Timeout to enter the number of seconds a user is permitted to remain connected to the network Once the Session Timeout value is reached the user is logged out automatically A value of O0 means that the user does not have a Session Timeout limit The valid range is 0 to 86400 seconds and the default value is 0 Use Idle Timeout to enable Logout once idle time out is reached seconds If the attribute is 0 or not present then use the value configured for the captive portal Use Max Bandwidth Down to specify the maximum rate Rate in bits per seconds at which a client can receive data from the network 0 indicates use global configuration Range 0 536870911 bps Use Max Bandwidth Up to specify the maximum rate Rate in bits per seconds at which a client can send data into the network 0 indicates to use the global limit Range 0 536870911 bps Use Max Output to specify the number of octets the user is allowed to transmit After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates to use the global limit Range 0 4294967295 Use Max Input to specify the number of octets the user is allowed to receive After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates to use the global limit Range 0 4294967295 Use Max Total to specify the number of bytes the user is allowed to transmit and receive The maximum number of octets is the sum of octets transmi
569. server was used to update the system clock Last Attempt Time Specifies the local date and time UTC that this SNTP server was last queried Last Attempt Status Requests Specifies the status of the last SNTP request to this server If no packet has been received from this server a status of Other is displayed e Other None of the following enumeration values e Success The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated e Request Timed Out A directed SNTP request timed out without receiving a response from the SNTP server e Bad Date Encoded The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid e Version Not Supported The SNTP version supported by the server is not compatible with the version supported by the client e Server Unsynchronized The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers This is indicated via the leap indicator field on the SNTP message e Server Kiss Of Death The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to be sent to this server This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message received from a server Specifies the number of SNTP requests made to this server since last agent reboot Failed Requests Specifies the number of failed SNTP requests made to this server since last reboot Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 45 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DNS Yo
570. ses hardware queue 0 which is designated as a best effort queue Also the confirmed action on this flow is to send the packets with a committed rate of 1000000 Kbps and burst size of 128 KB Packets that violate the committed rate and burst size are dropped 802 1X Local Area Networks LANs are often deployed in environments that permit unauthorized devices to be physically attached to the LAN infrastructure or permit unauthorized users to attempt to access the LAN through equipment already attached In such environments it may be desirable to restrict access to the services offered by the LAN to those users and devices that are permitted to use those services Port based network access control makes use of the physical characteristics of LAN infrastructures in order to provide a means of authenticating and authorizing devices attached to a LAN port that has point to point connection characteristics and of preventing access to that port in cases in which the authentication and authorization process fails In this context a port is a single point of attachment to the LAN such as ports of MAC bridges and associations between stations or access points in IEEE 802 11 Wireless LANs The IEEE 802 11 standard describes an architectural framework within which authentication and consequent actions take place It also establishes the requirements for a protocol between the authenticator the system that passes an authentication request to the authent
571. source was pre configured and can be modified The valid values are 0 to 16777214 e Use Metric Type to set the OSPFv3 metric type of redistributed routes e Use Tag to set the tag field in routes redistributed This field displays the tag if the source was pre configured else a default tag value of 0 is displayed The valid values are 0 to 4294967295 Router Discovery The Router Discovery protocol is used by hosts to identify operational routers on the subnet Router Discovery messages are of two types Router Advertisements and Router Solicitations The protocol mandates that every router periodically advertise the IP Addresses it is associated with Hosts listen for these advertisements and discover the IP Addresses of neighboring routers From the Router Discovery tab you can access the following pages Chapter 4 Routing 323 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Router Discovery Configuration on page 324 Router Discovery Configuration Use the Router Discovery Configuration page to enter or change Router Discovery parameters To display the Router Discovery Configuration page click Routing gt Router Discovery gt Router Discovery Configuration GSM73525 tmertable Seini wth 4 10 G Router Discovery Router Olscowery Configuration Dash Desne Terase Terate Lasai eat cevatee Terane cesetee treatee Tesalio loeaie i pggggugdgddg BEA oOoOG
572. specific dynamic binding to be deleted The following table describes the DHCP Conflicts Information fields Table 2 20 Field Description IP Address Specifies the IP Address of the host as recorded on Detection Method the DHCP server Specifies the manner in which the IP address of the hosts were found on the DHCP Server Detection Time Specifies the time when the conflict was detected in N days NNh NNm NNs format with respect to the system up time Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 61 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Relay To display the DHCP Relay page click System gt Services gt DHCP Relay A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM7352S 8 Port Gigode Loyer Managed able twitch with 4 10 Gigabit Slots tocour DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Maniam Mop Count Boron Mode gt DHCPV6 Relay Minima Walt Time secs Grut 1D Option Mode DHCP Status Requests Kec erred Requests Releyed Parhets Diss arded DHCP Relay Configuration 1 2 Use Maximum Hop Count to enter the maximum number of hops a client request can take before being discarded The range is 1 to 16 The default value is 4 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable radio button When you select enable DHCP requests will be forwarded to the IP address you entered in the Server Address field Use Minimum Wait Time to enter a
573. specified interface and direction The value is either Up or Down Member Classes List of all DiffServ classes currently defined as members of the selected Policy Name Choose one member class name at a time to display its statistics If no class is associated with the chosen policy then nothing will be populated in the list Offered Packets Octets A count of the total number of packets octets offered to all class instances in this service policy before their defined DiffServ treatment is applied This is the overall count per interface per direction Discarded Packets Octets A count of the total number of packets octets discarded for all class instances in this service policy for any reason due to DiffServ treatment This is the overall count per interface per direction Sent Packets Octets A count of the total number of packets octets forwarded for all class instances in this service policy after their defined DiffServ treatments were applied In this case forwarding means the traffic stream was passed to the next functional element in the data path such as the switching or routing function of an outbound link transmission element This is the overall count per interface per direction 426 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service Managing Device Security Use the features available from the Security tab to configure management security settings for port user and server security The Security tab contains links
574. ss of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN Last Querier Version Displays the IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN Operational Max Response Time Displays maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the Snooping Querier Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 183 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD Snooping From the MLD Snooping link you can access the following pages MLD Snooping Configuration on page 185 MLD Snooping Interface Configuration on page 186 MLD VLAN Configuration on page 187 Multicast Router Configuration on page 188 Multicast Router VLAN Configuration on page 189 MLD Snooping Querier Configuration on page 190 MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration on page 191 184 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD Snooping Configuration Use this menu to configure the parameters for MLD Snooping which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic Note that only a user with Read Write access privileges may change the data on this screen To access the MLD Snooping Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Configuration GSM7352S MLD Snooping Configuration MLD Snooping Configuration FLD bevopeng Admn M
575. ss range for the selected area 4 Use LSDB Type to select the type of Link Advertisement associated with the specified area and address range The default type is Network Summary 5 Use Advertise to select Enable or Disable If you select Enable the address range will be advertised outside the area via a Network Summary LSA The default is Enable 6 Click ADD to add the new address range to the switch 7 Click DELETE to remove the specified address range from the area configuration 278 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Interface Configuration Use the OSPF Interface Configuration page to configure an OSPF interface To display the Interface Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Interface Configuration ts i ts te te te te Beer Reece Reha hese keee ees ipp i t i i i iii e mas te a ia a we s nn tate nm ia tn SUPCE GE TS TEES 08 EEIE te f t MERNIH i t 1 Interface The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured 2 Use Area ID to enter the 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the OSPF area to which the selected router interface connects If you assign an Area ID which does not exist the area will be created with default values 3 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable The default value is disable You can configure OSPF
576. sset id of the remote device Location Information Specifies if location TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port Sub Type Specifies type of location information Location Information Specifies the location information as a string for given type of location id Extended POE Specifies if remote device is a PoE device i Device Type Extended POE PSE Specifies if extended PSE TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port Specifies remote device s PoE device type connected to this port Available Specifies the remote ports PSE power value in tenths of watts Source Specifies the remote ports PSE power source Priority Specifies the remote ports PSE power priority Extended POE PD Specifies if extended PD TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port Required Specifies the remote port s PD power requirement Source Specifies the remote port s PD power source Priority Specifies the remote port s PD power priority 120 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual LLDP MED Remote Device Inventory To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Remote Device Inventory A screen similar to the following displays LLDP MED Remote Device Inventory LLOP HED Remete Device inventory The following table describes the LLDP MED Remote Device Inventory fields Table 2 42
577. ssociated with this binding Prefix Type Specifies the type of prefix associated with this binding Expiry Time Specifies the number of seconds until the prefix associated with a binding will expire Valid Lifetime Specifies the valid lifetime value in seconds of the prefix associated with a binding Prefer Lifetime Specifies the preferred lifetime value in seconds of the prefix associated with a binding 76 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCPv6 Server Statistics To display the DHCPv6 Server Statistics page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCPV6 Server Statistics A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR _ GSM73525 Watbabie eink sim a 10 Orgain Som DHCPv6 Server Statistics OHCP 6 Intertace Selection lateris Messages Heceived Tote DC Pee Packets Recereed ONCE LO sobet Packets tex orrod DONC P LO Rewerst Packets Revered DOC Pet notme Pockets Mecewed Cartage oem DNCPLE Nemom Pecbets fevered lt ONCPv itatfoce DM Pee Retend Po bats Roe emed 7 eae OCP rt Release Pockets Recawed Emret Devkne Packets Revered tresmacan DUC e tetera Pechets Recewed Teac DPO Reley formerd Pec bets Ren erred Oucrvs fsioy ONCE VO Relay reety Caches Revetwed DC Pe Maf ereed Perbets Rer ewed Bercewed DE PS Packets Dacar ed Messages Semt Fatol D Pet Par tet test DUCE rt Adrertmamant Pec
578. t To access the Port Summary page click Security gt Port Authentication gt Advanced gt Port Summary ne a nn in TET TED SPIEL ELELELELEL EL EEBL ELE PEILLLIRLREELELEELEE FiFi REE The following table describes the fields on the Port Summary page Table 6 94 Feis escrito O O Port Specifies the port whose settings are displayed in the current table row Control Mode This field indicates the configured control mode for the port Possible values are e Force Unauthorized The authenticator port access entity PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to unauthorized e Force Authorized The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to authorized e Auto The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant authenticator and the authentication server 476 Chapter6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 6 94 Field Description Operating Control Mode Reauthentication Enabled This field indicates the control mode under which the port is actually operating Possible values are e ForceUnauthorized e ForceAuthorized e Auto e N A If the port is in detached state it cannot participate in port access control This field shows whether reauthentication of the supplicant for the specified port is allowe
579. t Configuration Stavstees gt IP Source Guard gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt Captive Portal DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration 1 Use Store to select the local store or remote store Local selection disable the Remote objects like Remote File Name and Remote IP address 2 Use Remote IP Address to configure Remote IP Address on which the snooping database will be stored when Remote is selected 3 Use Remote File Name to configure Remote file name to store the database when Remote is selected 4 Use Write Delay to configure the maximum write time to write the database into local or remote The range of Write Delay is 15 to 86400 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 501 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Snooping Statistics To display the DHCP Snooping Statistics page click Security gt Control gt DHCP Snooping gt Statistics NETGEAR DHCP Snooping Global Configuration Interface Corfiguration Binding Configuration Perustent Coefiguration Statisncs gt IP Source Guard gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt Captive Portal Table 6 101 Security Monitoring Maintenance Help Index Trofiis Control DHCP Snooping Statistics DHCP Snooping Statistics 1 AN Interface UES 1 0 2 1 073 vos 10 5 vole vo vos 1 0 79 1 0 10 LUTERI 1 0 12 1 0 13 EULESS 1 0 25 1 0 16 1 0 37 MAC Verify Failures eececsecseocoesveceoso
580. t IP Configuration sama SM73325 aars h ean as IP Configuration IP C figer atise Botean tame te ime a a nae Chapter 4 Routing 213 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Routing Mode to select enable or disable You must enable routing for the switch before you can route through any of the interfaces The default value is disable 2 Use ICMP Echo Replies to select enable or disable If it is enable then only the router can send ECHO replies By default ICMP Echo Replies are sent for echo requests 3 Use ICMP Redirects to select enable or disable If it is enabled globally and on interface level then only the router can send ICMP Redirects 4 Use ICMP Rate Limit Interval to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval By default Rate limit is 100 packets sec i e burst interval is 1000 msec To disable ICMP Rate limiting set this field to 0 Valid Rate Interval must be in the range 0 to 2147483647 5 Use ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval By default burst size is 100 packets When burst interval is 0 then configuring this field is not a valid operation Valid Burst Size must be in the range 1 to 200 Table 7 Fig escrito O O Default Time to Live The default value inserted int
581. t Changed Time Software Version Displays the time since last entry is changed Displays the software version on the neighbor Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 127 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual ISDP Statistics To display this page click System gt ISDP gt Advanced gt Statistics A screen similar to the following displays GSM7352S Snethabiea Seach Sim 4 TO Gogatit So ISDP Statistics ISDP Statistics 150P Pockets Recenwed SDP Pasbets tremsersttod TSDP61 Packets Received 1SDPwi Packets Transmitted 150Pw2 Packets Received INDO 62 Packets Tremseretiod 15DP Dad Header 150P Checksum Error ISDE trenseression P odere ISDP Invadd torest 150P Table Full ISOP 1P Address Table Full 128 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the ISDP Statistics fields Table 2 46 Field ISDP Packets Received ISDP Packets Transmitted Description Displays the ISDP packets received including ISDPv1 and ISDPv2 packets Displays the ISDP packets transmitted including ISDPv1 and ISDPv2 packets ISDPv1 Packets Received Displays the ISDPv1 packets received ISDPv1 Packets Transmitted ISDPv2 Packets Received Displays the ISDPv1 packets transmitted Displays the ISDPv2 packets received ISDPv2 Packets Trans
582. t Enable from the Fast Link menu Since the edge ports are not at risk for network loops ports with Fast Link enabled transition directly to the Forwarding state Click Apply You can use the CST Port Status screen to view spanning tree information about each port From the MST Configuration screen create a MST instances with the following settings e MST ID 1 e Priority Use the default 32768 e VLAN ID 300 For more information see MST Configuration on page 3 163 Click Add Create a second MST instance with the following settings e MSTID 2 e Priority 49152 e VLAN ID 500 Click Add In this example assume that Switch 1 has become the Root bridge for the MST instance 1 and Switch 2 has become the Root bridge for MST instance 2 Switch 3 has hosts in the Sales department ports 1 0 1 1 0 2 and 1 0 3 and in the HR department ports 1 0 4 and 1 0 5 Switches 1 and 2 also have hosts in the Sales and Human Resources departments The hosts connected from Switch 2 use VLAN 500 MST instance 2 to communicate with the hosts on Switch 3 directly Likewise hosts of Switch 1 use VLAN 300 MST instance 1 to communicate with the hosts on Switch 3 directly The hosts use different instances of MSTP to effectively use the links across the switch The same concept can be extended to other switches and more instances of MSTP Appendix B Configuration Examples 623 N otification of Compliance NETGEAR Wired Products
583. t Gogo layer thenaged wit a t Gogebit Sete OVMRP Next Hop Table 56 Field Description Source IP The IP address used with the source mask to identify the source network for this table entry Source Mask The network mask used with the source IP address Next Hop Interface The outgoing interface for this next hop Type The next hop type Leaf means that no downstream dependent neighbors exist on the outgoing interface Otherwise the type is branch Chapter 4 Routing 343 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DVMRP Prune To display the DVMRP Prune page click Routing gt Multicast DVMRP gt DVMRP Prune NETGEAR GSM73525 44 Pore Gegete layer Meneged A with a tO Gogebit Siete Table 57 Field Description OOOO OSOS Group IP The group address which has been pruned Source IP The address of the source or source network which has been pruned Source Mask The subnet mask to be combined with the source IP address to identify the source or source network which has been pruned Expiry Time The amount of time remaining before this prune should expire at the upstream neighbor If no prune messages have been received from downstream neighbors this is set to value of the default prune lifetime timer otherwise it is set to the smallest received value or the default timer whichever is less 344 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gi
584. t L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MFDB Statistics To display the MFDB Statistics page click Switching gt Multicast gt MFDB gt MFDB Statistics NETGEAR vnrob MFDB Statistics MFO Table air MECE IOMP Seeoping Most MF OD Entries Since Last Reset MLD Snooping Corrent Entries MFDB Statistics Mex MEDD Tabie Entries Table 3 62 Field GSM7352S 44 For Gigabit Layer J Managed Srochoble deutch with 4 10 Gegabe Yom oso aL tLe Description Max MFDB Table Entries The maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding Database table can hold Most MFDB Entries Since Last Reset The largest number of entries that have been present in the Multicast Forwarding Database table since last reset This value is also known as the MFDB high water mark Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 171 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IGMP Snooping Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping is a feature that allows a switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently on the switch Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses which range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forw
585. t policy is found To display the DiffServ Configuration page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Advanced gt Diffserv Configuration NETGEAR GSM73525S 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 menaged Srechebte with vah 4 10 Gigebir Slon vocout gt Offsery Wizard Diffserv Configuration gt Auto VolP out Coatig Basic v Advanced OF ere Adran Monde OvtiServ Configuration Class Configuration 414 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure the global DiffServ mode 1 Select the administrative mode for DiffServ e Enable Differentiated Services are active e Disable The DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed but it is not active 2 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 3 If you make changes to the page click Apply to apply the changes to the system The following table describes the information displayed in the Status table on the DiffServ Configuration page Table 5 76 Field Description Class table Displays the number of configured DiffServ classes out of the total allowed on the switch Class Rule table Displays the number of configured class rules out of the total allowed on the switch Policy table Displays the number of configured policies out of the total allowed on the switch Policy I
586. ta received from the server is based on Coordinated Universal Time UTC which is the same as Greenwich Mean Time GMT This may not be the time zone in which the switch is located Use Time Zone Name to configure a timezone specifying the number of hours and optionally the number of minutes difference from UTC with Offset Hours and Offset Minutes The time zone can affect the display of the current system time The default value is UTC 8 Use Offset Hours to specify the number of hours difference from UTC See Time Zone Name step 7 previous for more information Allowed range is 24 to 24 The default value is 0 9 Use Offset Minutes to specify the number of Minutes difference from UTC See Time Zone Name step 7 previous for more information Allowed range is 0 to 59 The default value is 0 40 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual SNTP Global Status The following table displays SNTP Global Status information Table 2 11 Field Description Version Specifies the SNTP Version the client supports Supported Mode Specifies the SNTP modes the client supports Multiple modes may be supported by a client Last Update Time Specifies the local date and time UTC the SNTP client last updated the system clock Last Attempt Time Specifies the local date and time UTC of the last SNTP request or receipt of an unsolicited messa
587. table Octets Received Packets Received Without Errors Unicast Packets Received entry associated with the Processor of this switch The total number of octets of data received by the processor excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including broadcast packets and multicast packets received by the processor The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Multicast Packets Received Broadcast Packets Received Receive Packets Discarded Octets Transmitted Packets Transmitted Without Errors Unicast Packets Transmitted Multicast Packets Transmitted Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets received that were directed to a multicast address Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested
588. tackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure global 802 1 X settings 1 Select the appropriate radio button in the Port Based Authentication State field to enable or disable 802 1X administrative mode on the switch e Enable Port based authentication is permitted on the switch Note If 802 1X is enabled authentication is performed by a RADIUS server This means the primary authentication method must be RADIUS To set the method go to Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List and select RADIUS as method 1 for defaultList For more information see lt pdf gt Authentication List Configuration on page 6 443 e Disable The switch does not check for 802 1X authentication before allowing traffic on any ports even if the ports are configured to allow only authenticated users Default value 2 Use VLAN Assignment Mode to select one of options for VLAN Assignment mode enable and disable The default value is disable 3 Use Users to select the user name that will use the selected login list for 802 1x port security 4 Use Login to select the login to apply to the specified user All configured logins are displayed Table 6 92 Field Description Authentication List Displays the authentication list which is used by 802 1X Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 469 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Advanced From the Advanced link y
589. tagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams which meet this no route criterion Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down IpReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity lpReasmReqds The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity IpReasmOKs lpReasmFails The number of IP datagrams successfully re assembled The number of failures detected by the IP re assembly algorithm for whatever reason timed out errors etc Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received IpFragOKs The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity lpFragFails The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be e g because their Don t Fragment flag was set lpFragCreates The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity IpRoutingDiscards IcmpInMsgs The number of routing entries which were chosen to be discarded even though they a
590. tal number of Autonomous System border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs IP Address Interface Events Virtual Events Neighbor Events The IP address of the interface The number of times the specified OSPF interface has changed its state or an error has occurred The number of state changes or errors that have occurred on this virtual link The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred External LSA Count The number of external LS type 5 link state advertisements in the link state database Sent packets The number of OSPF packets transmitted on the interface Received packets Discards Bad Version Source Not On Local Subnet Virtual Link Not Found The number of valid OSPF packets received on the interface The number of received OSPF packets discarded because of an error in the packet or an error in processing the packet The number of received OSPF packets whose version field in the OSPF header does not match the version of the OSPF process handling the packet The number of received packets discarded because the source IP address is not within a subnet configured on a local interface The number of received OSPF packets discarded where the
591. tance of the Spanning Tree behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree with slight modifications in the working but not the end effect chief among the effects is the rapid transitioning of the port to the Forwarding state The difference between the RSTP and the traditional STP IEEE 802 1D is the ability to configure and recognize full duplex connectivity and ports that are connected to end stations resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to the Forwarding state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification These features are represented by the parameters pointtopoint and edgeport MSTP is compatible to both RSTP and STP It behaves appropriately to STP and RSTP bridges A MSTP bridge can be configured to behave entirely as a RSTP bridge or a STP bridge So an IEEE 802 1s bridge inherently also supports IEEE 802 1w and IEEE 802 1D The MSTP algorithm and protocol provides simple and full connectivity for frames assigned to any given VLAN throughout a Bridged LAN comprising arbitrarily interconnected networking devices each operating MSTP STP or RSTP MSTP allows frames assigned to different VLANs to follow separate paths each based on an independent Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI within Multiple Spanning Tree MST Regions composed of LANs and or MSTP Bridges These Regions and the other Bridges and LANs are connected into a single Common Spanning Tree CST IEEE DRAFT P802 1s D13 MSTP connec
592. tatistics gt Captive Portal 1 ACL Name Selects the DAI ARP ACL for which information want to be displayed or configured 2 Click ADD to add a new Rule to the selected ACL 3 Click DELETE to remove the currently selected Rule from the selected ACL Table 6 103 Field Description Source IP Address This indicates Sender IP address match value for the DAI ARP ACL Source MAC Address This indicates Sender MAC address match value for the DAI ARP ACL Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 509 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DAI Statistics This screen shows the Statistics per VLAN To display the DAI Statistics page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI Statistics NETGEAR GSM7352S Conadi with lence 48 Port Gigobit Layer J Mosoged Stockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Slory System Switching Routing Security Monitoring Maintenance Help index rosour DHCP Snooping Dynamic ARP Inspection Statistics IP Source Guard Dynamic ARP Inspection DHCP DHCP ACL AG sad twelid DAI VLAN Orops Permits Orops Permits Dest ip Forwarded Dropped f HAC Corefigurahon DAI VLAN Coefiguration OAL Interface Configuration DAI ACL Corfiguration DAI ACL Rule Configuration gt OAJ Statisties gt Captive Portal DAI Statistics Sitas dl neraca 510 Chapter6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gig
593. ter Advertisement Interval Errors The total number of VRRP advertisement packets received for which the advertisement interval was different than the one configured for the local virtual router Authentication Failure The total number of VRRP packets received that did not pass the authentication check IP TTL Errors The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with IP TTL Time To Live not equal to 255 Chapter 4 Routing 333 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 50 Field Description Zero Priority Packets Received The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with a priority of 0 Zero Priority Packets Sent The total number of VRRP packets sent by the virtual router with a priority of 0 Invalid Type Packets Received The number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with an invalid value in the type field Address List Errors The total number of packets received for which the address list does not match the locally configured list for the virtual router Invalid Authentication Type The total number of packets received with an unknown authentication type Authentication Type Mismatch The total number of packets received with an authentication type different to the locally configured authentication method Packet Length Errors The total number of packets receive
594. ter router when it is active VMAC Address The virtual MAC Address associated with the Virtual Router composed of a 24 bit organizationally unique identifier the 16 bit constant identifying the VRRP address block and the 8 bit VRID State The current state of the Virtual Router e Initialize e Master e Backup 330 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual VRRP Secondary IP To display the VRRP Secondary IP page click Routing gt VRRP gt Advanced gt VRRP Secondary IP GSM7352S ort Gigabit Loye mosen a Sona Sit 4 1 Digebir Stem Se VRRP Secondary IP Address Advanced Routing Interface VRAP Configuration s VRRP Seconisry IP VRAP Laterface VRRP 10 Tracking Corhguraten VRRP Secondary IP Address Statetcs 1 Use VRRP ID and Interface to select one of the existing Virtual Routers listed by interface number and VRRP ID 2 Use Secondary IP Address to enter the IP address for the interface This address must be a member of one of the subnets currently configured on the interface This value is read only once configured 3 Click ADD to add a new secondary IP address to the selected VRRP interface 4 Click DELETE to delete the selected secondary IP address Table 48 Field Description Virtual Router ID The Virtual Router ID for which data is to be displayed or configured Primary IP Address The Primary IP Address
595. teria is forwarded normally or discarded Additionally you can assign traffic that matches the criteria to a particular queue or redirect the traffic to a particular port A default deny all rule is the last rule of every list 2 Apply the access list to an interface in the inbound direction ProSafe Managed Switches allow ACLs to be bound to physical ports and LAGs The switch software supports MAC ACLs and IP ACLs MAC ACL Example Configuration The following example shows how to create a MAC based ACL that permits Ethernet traffic from the Sales department on specified ports and denies all other traffic on those ports 1 From the MAC ACL screen create an ACL with the name Sales ACL for the Sales department of your network See MAC ACL on page 6 524 By default this ACL will be bound on the inbound direction which means the switch will examine traffic as it enters the port 2 From the MAC Rules screen create a rule for the Sales ACL with the following settings e ID 1 e Action Permit e Assign Queue ID 0 e Match Every False e CoS 0 e Destination MAC 01 02 1A BC DE EF e Destination MAC Mask 00 00 00 00 FF FF e EtherType User Value e Source MAC 02 02 1A BC DE EF e Source MAC Mask 00 00 00 00 FF FF e VLAN ID 2 For more information about MAC ACL rules see MAC Rules on page 6 526 3 From the MAC Binding Configuration screen assign the Sales_ACL to the interface gigabit ports 6 7 and 8 and th
596. test PIM DM neighbor information 376 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 PIM SM From the IPv6 PIM SM link you can access the following pages PIM SM Global Configuration on page 377 PIM SSM Configuration on page 378 PIM SM Interface Configuration on page 379 PIM SM Neighbor on page 381 PIM SM Candidate RP Configuration on page 382 PIM SM BSR Candidate Configuration on page 383 PIM SM Static RP Configuration on page 384 PIM SM Global Configuration To display the IPv6 PIM SM Global Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast PIM SM gt Global Configuration GSM73525 iai oak a 1b Oair Hon sot PIM SM Global Configuration PIM SM Cheha Contigeration Adres Hate ete Theeahent Gate Ghee Regeeter Merwetentd Mabel thes Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM SM in the router The default is disable Use Data Threshold Rate kbps to enter the rate in K bits second above which the last hop router will switch to a source specific shortest path tree The valid values are from 0 to 2000 The default value is 0 Use Register Threshold Rate kbps to enter rate in K bits second above which the Rendezvous Point router will switch to a source specific shortest path tree The valid values are from 0 to 2000 The default value is 0 Chapter 4 Routing 377 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Ad
597. th 4 1O Gigabit Slots tocout The IP ACL area shows the current size of the ACL table versus the maximum size of the ACL table The current size is equal to the number of configured IPv4 plus the number of configured MAC ACLs The maximum size is 100 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 531 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure an IP ACL 1 Inthe IP ACL ID field specify the ACL ID or IP ACL name The ID is an integer in the following range e 1 99 Creates an IP Basic ACL which allows you to permit or deny traffic from a source IP address e 100 199 Creates an IP Extended ACL which allows you to permit or deny specific types of layer 3 or layer 4 traffic from a source IP address to a destination IP address This type of ACL provides more granularity and filtering capabilities than the standard IP ACL e IP ACL Name Create a Named IP ACL which provides alternate to configure the IP Extended ACL IP ACL Name string which includes alphanumeric characters only and must start with an alphabetic character Each configured ACL displays the following information e Rules Displays the number of rules currently configured for the IP ACL e Type Identifies the ACL as a basic IP ACL extended IP ACL and named IP ACL 2 To delete an IP ACL select the check box next to the IP ACL ID field then click Delete Click ADD to add a new IP ACL to the switch configuration 532
598. the Go button If the address exists the entry will be displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining greater mac addresses Table 3 70 Field Description Total MAC Address Displaying the number of total MAC addresses learned or configured MAC Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information The format is a 6 byte MAC Address that is separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the MAC Address Port The port upon which this address was learned Status The status of this entry The meanings of the values are e Static the value of the corresponding instance was added by the system or a user and cannot be relearned e Learned the value of the corresponding instance was learned and is being used e Management the value of the corresponding instance is also the value of an existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress Ports The pages on the Ports tab allow you to view and monitor the physical port information for the ports available on the switch From the Ports link you can access the following pages e Port Configuration on page 198 Port Description on page 200 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 197 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Port Configuration Use the Port Configuration page to configure the physical interfaces on the switch
599. the ACL criteria e Deny Drops packets which meet the ACL criteria Logging When set to Enable logging is enabled for this ACL rule Subject to resource availability in the device If the Access List Trap Flag is also enabled this will cause periodic traps to be generated indicating the number of times this rule was hit during the current report interval A fixed 5 minute report interval is used for the entire system A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval This field is visible for a Deny Action Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 533 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual e Assign Queue ID Specifies the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all packets matching this ACL rule Enter an identifying number from 0 6 in the appropriate field e Match Every Select true or false from the pull down menu True signifies that all packets will match the selected IP ACL and Rule and will be either permitted or denied In this case since all packets match the rule the option of configuring other match criteria will not be offered To configure specific match criteria for the rule remove the rule and re create it or re configure Match Every to False for the other match criteria to be visible e Mirror Interface Specifies the specific egress interface where the matching traffic stream is copied in addition to being forwarded norm
600. the ARP table Maximum Static Entries Maximum number of Static Entries that can be defined RIP RIP is an Interior Gateway Protocol IGP based on the Bellman Ford algorithm and targeted at smaller networks network diameter no greater than 15 hops The routing information is propagated in RIP update packets that are sent out both periodically and in the event of a network topology change On receipt of a RIP update depending on whether the specified route exists or does not exist in the route table the router may modify delete or add the route to its route table From the RIP link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 258 e Advanced on page 260 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages RIP Configuration on page 259 258 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual RIP Configuration Use the RIP Configuration page to enable and configure or disable RIP in Global mode To display the RIP Configuration page click Routing gt RIP gt Basic gt RIP Configuration GSM7352 5 P mena Use RIP Admin Mode to enable or disable RIP for the switch The default is enable Use Split Horizon Mode to select none simple or poison reverse from the radio buttons Split horizon is a technique for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was originally learned The options ar
601. the Option Code configured for the selected Pool 3 Use Option Type to specify the Option Type against the Option Code configured for the selected pool e ASCII e Hex IP Address 4 Option Value specifies the Value against the Option Code configured for the selected pool 5 Click ADD to add a new Option Code for the selected pool 6 Click DELETE to delete the Option Code for the selected pool Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 57 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCP Server Statistics To display the DHCP Server Statistics page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Server Statistics A screen similar to the following displays NETGEAR GSM73525 ws ee 48 Port Gigabit Loyer 3 Srecbable Seith wih 4 10Gigabit Silon Index 1ocour DHCP Server Statistics Binding Details Automata Mindiags bopred Mendimgs Malheomed Messages Message Received ONCPOISCOVER ONCPREQUEST ONCPOECLING ONCPRELEASE ONCPINFORM Message Sent gt SALAS sirttin 58 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual The following table describes the DHCP Server Statistics fields Table 2 18 Field Automatic Bindings Expired Bindings Description Specifies the number of Automatic Bindings on the DHCP Server Specifies the number of Expired Bindings on the DHCP Se
602. the source MAC address specified as six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons Source MAC Mask This is a bit mask in the same format as MAC Address indicating which part s of the source MAC Address to use for matching against packet content Destination MAC Address This is the destination MAC address specified as six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons Destination MAC Mask This is a bit mask in the same format as MAC Address indicating which part s of the destination MAC Address to use for matching against packet content Protocol Type This lists the keywords for the layer 4 protocols from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the remaining values Source IP Address This is a valid source IP address in the dotted decimal format Source Mask This is a bit mask in IP dotted decimal format indicating which part s of the source IP Address to use for matching against packet content Source L4 Port This lists the keywords for the known source layer 4 ports from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the unnamed ports Destination IP Address This is a valid destination IP address in the dotted decimal format DestinationMask This is a bit mask in IP dotted decimal format indicating which part s of the destination IP Address to use for matching against packet content Destination L4 Port This lists the keywords for the known d
603. the subnet network mask this indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network Protocol This field tells which protocol created the specified route The possibilities are one of the following e Local e Static e OSPF e RIP Next Hop IP Address Next Hop Interface The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router if any in the path towards the destination The next router will always be one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the destination Metric Administrative cost of the path to the destination If no value is entered default is 1 The range is 0 255 Preference The preference is an integer value from 0 to 255 The user can specify the preference value sometimes called administrative distance of an individual static route Among routes to the same destination the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database By specifying the preference of a static route the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest learned ro
604. the switch This field is configurable for administrative users and read only for other users The following table describes IPv4 Network Configuration information Table 2 9 Feis escrito O O Burned In MAC Address The burned in MAC address used for in band connectivity if you choose not to configure a locally administered address 34 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Network Configuration To display the IPv6 Network Configuration page click System gt Management gt Network Interface gt IPv6 Network Configuration A screen similar to the following displays GSM73525 B ter gaht apor J henge Sysiem Iniorsi tiss The IPv6 network interface is the logical interface used for in band connectivity with the switch via any of the switch s front panel ports The configuration parameters associated with the switch s network interface do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed To access the switch over an IPv6 network you must first configure it with IPv6 information IPv6 prefix prefix length and default gateway You can configure the IP information using any of the following e IPv6 Auto Configuration e DHCPv6 e Terminal interface via the EIA 232 port Once you have established in band connectivity you can change the IPv6 information using any of the followin
605. ting to configure the global passive mode setting for all OSPF interfaces Configuring this field overwrites any present interface level passive mode setting OSPF does not form adjacencies on passive interfaces but does advertise attached networks as stub networks 300 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 37 Field Description ASBR Mode Reflects whether the ASBR mode is enabled or disabled Enable implies that the router is an autonomous system border router Router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is configured to redistribute routes learnt from other protocol ABR Status The values of this are enabled or disabled Enabled External LSA Count implies that the router is an area border router Disabled implies that it is not an area border router The number of external LS type 5 LSAs link state advertisements in the link state database External LSA Checksum New LSAs Originated The sum of the LS checksums of the external LSAs link state advertisements contained in the link state database This sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state databases of two routers In any given OSPF v3 area a router will originate several LSAs Each router originates a router LSA If the router is also the Designated Router for any of the area s networks it will originate n
606. tion Examples ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Differentiated Services DiffServ Standard IP based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service Best effort service implies that the network deliver the data in a timely fashion although there is no guarantee that it will During times of congestion packets may be delayed sent sporadically or dropped For typical Internet applications such as e mail and file transfer a slight degradation in service is acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable However any degradation of service has undesirable effects on applications with strict timing requirements such as voice or multimedia Quality of Service QoS can provide consistent predictable data delivery by distinguishing between packets that have strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of delay Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS capable network With this in mind all elements of the network must be QoS capable If one node is unable to meet the necessary timing requirements this creates a deficiency in the network path and the performance of the entire packet flow is compromised There are two basic types of QoS e Integrated Services network resources are apportioned based on request and are reserved resource reservation according to network management policy RSVP for example e Differentiated Servic
607. tion page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt OSPF Configuration OSPF Configuration Default Route Advertise Configuration Default aformation Driqeate Always Metric Metrix Type OSPF Conliguration Router ID Admin Mode ASIR Mode RFC 1583 Compatibility ABR Status Opaque LSA Status Exit Overflow Interval secs SPF Delay Time secs SPT Hold Time secs External LSA Count External LSA Checksum AS OPAQUL LSA Count AS_OPAQUE LSA Chechsem New LSAs Originated L3As Kecorved External LSOB Limit Default Metric Maximum Paths AutoCost Reference Bandwidth Default Passive Setting Default Route Advertise Configuration Disable Enable True False y gt External Type t External Type 2 0 0 0 9 Enable Disable Enable mt Enable 0 5 10 0 oe 100 Disable x 1 When Default Information Originate is enabled OSPF originates an external LSA advertising a default route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 Always If Default Information Originate is enabled but the Always option is FALSE OSPF will only originate a default route if the router already has a default route in its routing table Set Always to TRUE to force OSPF to originate a default route regardless of whether the router has a default route 3 Use Metric to specify the metric of the default route The range of valid values is O to 16777214 4 Use Metric Type to set the OSPF metric type of the default route Two types
608. to enter the IP subnet mask for the interface The factory default value is 255 255 0 0 3 Use Default Gateway to specify the default gateway for the IP interface The factory default value is 0 0 0 0 4 Use Locally Administered MAC Address to configure a locally administered MAC address for in band connectivity instead of using the burned in universally administered MAC address In addition to entering an address in this field you must also set the MAC address type to locally administered Enter the address as twelve hexadecimal digits 6 bytes with a colon between each byte Bit 1 of byte 0 must be set to a 1 and bit 0 to a 0 in other words byte 0 must have a value between x 40 and x 7F 5 Use MAC Address type to specify whether the burned in or the locally administered MAC address should be used for in band connectivity The factory default is to use the burned in MAC address 6 Use Current Network Configuration Protocol to specify what the switch should do following power up transmit a Bootp request transmit a DHCP request or do nothing none The factory default is DHCP 7 Use DHCP Vendor Class Identifier to enable DHCP Vendorld option on the client 8 Use DHCP Vendor Class Identifier String to specify DHCP Vendorld option string on the client 9 Use Management VLAN ID to specify the management VLAN ID of the switch It may be configured to any value in the range of 1 4093 The management VLAN is used for management of
609. to the following features Management Security Settings on page 427 Configuring Management Access on page 450 Port Authentication on page 466 Traffic Control on page 481 Control on page 496 Configuring Access Control Lists on page 524 Management Security Settings From the Management Security Settings page you can configure the login password Remote Authorization Dial In User Service RADIUS settings Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS settings and authentication lists To display the page click the Security gt Management Security tab The Management Security folder contains links to the following features Local User on page 428 Enable Password Configuration on page 431 Line Password Configuration on page 432 RADIUS on page 433 Configuring TACACS on page 440 Authentication List Configuration on page 443 Login Sessions on page 450 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 427 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Local User From the Local User link you can access the following pages e User Management on page 428 e User Password Configuration on page 430 User Management By default two user accounts exist e admin with Read Write privileges e guest with Read Only privileges By default both of these accounts have blank passwords The names are not case sensitive If you logon with a user account with Read Write privileges i e as a
610. tration Manual Table 55 Fes escrito O O State The state of the specified neighbor router on the selected interface either active or down Up Time The DVMRP uptime for the specified neighbor on the selected interface This is the time since the neighbor entry was learned Expiry Time The DVMRP expiry time for the specified neighbor on the selected interface This is the time left before this neighbor entry will age out and is not applicable if the neighbor router s state is down Generation ID The DVMRP generation ID for the specified neighbor on the selected interface Major Version The DVMRP Major Version for the specified neighbor on the selected interface Minor Version The DVMRP Minor Version for the specified neighbor on the selected interface Capabilities The DVMRP capabilities of the specified neighbor on the selected interface Received Routes The number of routes received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface Received Bad Packets The number of invalid packets received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface Received Bad Routes The number of invalid routes received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface 342 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DVMRP Next Hop To display the DVMRP Next Hop page click Routing gt Multicast DVMRP gt DVMRP Next Hop GSM7352S 44 For
611. ts all Bridges and LANs with a single Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST supports the automatic determination of each MST region choosing its maximum possible extent The connectivity calculated for the CIST provides the CST for interconnecting these Regions and an Internal Spanning Tree IST within each Region MSTP ensures that frames with a given VLAN ID are assigned to one and only one of the MSTIs or the IST within the Region that the assignment is consistent among all the networking devices in the Region and that the stable connectivity of each MSTI and IST at the boundary of the Region matches that of the CST The stable active topology of the Bridged LAN with respect to frames consistently classified as belonging to any given VLAN thus simply and fully connects all LANs and networking devices throughout the network though frames belonging to different VLANs can take different paths within any Region per IEEE DRAFT P802 1s D13 All bridges whether they use STP RSTP or MSTP send information in configuration messages via Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs to assign port roles that determine each port s participation in a fully and simply connected active topology based on one or more spanning trees The information communicated is known as the spanning tree priority vector The BPDU structure for each of these different protocols is different A MSTP bridge will transmit the appropriate BPDU depending on the received type of
612. tted and received After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates to use the global limit Range 0 4294967295 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 521 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Captive Portal Trap Flags Use this page to configure whether or not SNMP traps are sent from the Captive Portal and to specify captive portal events that will generate a trap All CP SNMP traps are disabled by default To display the Captive Portal Trap Flags page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Trap Flags GSM73525S o Moraget 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Stackable Switch with 4 10 Gigebit Siete sooout gt DHCP Snooping CP Trap Flags gt IP Source Guard Trap Flags Dyasmic ARP Inspection CP Trap Mode v Captive Portal Cheat Acth fature CP Global Chant Connect Configurador CP Configuration CP Dading Cent DO ful Cent Dacoanect Configurabon CP Bedeng Tobie CP Group 1 CP Trap Mode Displays the captive portal trap mode status To enable or disable the mode use the System gt SNMP gt SNMPv1 v2 gt Trap Flags page 2 If you enable the Client Auth Failure field the SNMP agent sends a trap when a client attempts to authenticate with a captive portal but is unsuccessful 3 If you enable the Client Connect field the SNMP agent sends a trap when a client authenticates with and connects to a captive portal
613. tworks Table 28 Field Description ASBR Mode The router is an Autonomous System Boundary Router if it is configured to redistribute routes from another protocol or if it is configured to originate an external LSA advertising the default route ABR Status The router is an Area Border Router if it has active non virtual interfaces in two or more OSPF areas External LSA Count The number of external LS type 5 LSAs link state advertisements in the link state database External LSA Checksum AS _ OPAQUE LSA Count The sum of the LS checksums of the external LSAs link state advertisements contained in the link state database This sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state databases of two routers This value is in hexadecimal The number of opaque LSAs with domain wide flooding scope AS _ OPAQUE LSA Checksum New LSAs Originated The sum of the LS checksums of the opaque LSAs with domain wide flooding scope This sum can be used to determine if there has been a change ina router s link state database and to compare the link state databases of two routers This value is in hexadecimal In any given OSPF area a router will originate several LSAs Each router originates a router LSA If the router is also the Designated Router for any of the area s networks it will originate network LSAs for those networks This value
614. u can use these pages to configure information about DNS servers the network uses and how the switch operates as a DNS client DNS Configuration Use this page to configure global DNS settings and DNS server information To access this page click System gt Management gt DNS gt DNS Configuration GSM73525 per managed A 4 10 Grgabs Siem ONS Configuration DNS Comtiqer ation OMS Statws OMS Oot ent Rome Retry Member Metgonse Terewet tece DNS Server Comtiguration To configure the global DNS settings 1 Specify whether to enable or disable the administrative status of the DNS Client e Enable Allow the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS domain name Default value is Enable e Disable Prevent the switch from sending DNS queries 2 Enter the DNS default domain name to include in DNS queries When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified hostname this field is provided as the domain name for example if default domain name is netgear com and the user enters test then test is changed to test netgear com to resolve the name The length of the name should not be longer than 255 characters 3 Use Retry Number to specify the number of times to retry sending DNS queries to DNS server This number ranges from 0 to 100 The default value is 2 4 Use Response Timeout secs to specify the amount of time in seconds to wait for a response to a DNS query This timeout ranges from
615. ult value is disable This selector lists the two options for autonomous flag enable and disable Table 15 Field Description Current State Indicates the state of the IPV6 address The state is TENT if routing is disabled or DAD fails The state is Active if interface is active and DAD is successful e Click ADD to add a new IPv6 address to the interface e Click DELETE to delete a existing IPv6 address entry from the interface Chapter 4 Routing 237 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual IPv6 Statistics Use the IPv6 Statistics page to display IPv6 traffic statistics for one or all interfaces To display the IPv6 Statistics page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Statistics Pyh Statin Reba Detegremes Res erred Revered Datageeers on aly Detrered Hecntend Catagroms Dim arded tue te Wander Ermers Rossie Dategrams Ovecarded Ose te MTU Recereed Uatagrenns Over erted Ove lo Me Boste Revered Ueteer eens Wan undanam Proto of o Rev ereed Oetegrerme Don erted Oue ts Inyotd Address Rev erred Detegrecss Dm ented Chee te Tros sted Dale Morerod Detegr errs Oom arded Ciee TL MOA Desteotme uere o hotte Meecoges te awed LiMELe Meraeges Prottetend Atmmmntretrnmly Ram amet Eiend Seme es eeded Morcepes Re emed LO We Poremeter Prvbterm Mesroges te eret EL MOYO Portes Tow fag Meseeger Her erred bimeut ihe Reyeest Messepee Rererred himene Iit Reply Ressoges her err
616. utes Chapter 4 Routing 211 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Route Preferences Use this panel to configure the default preference for each protocol e g 60 for static routes 120 for RIP These values are arbitrary values in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics Most routing protocols use a route metric to determine the shortest path known to the protocol independent of any other protocol The best route to a destination is chosen by selecting the route with the lowest preference value When there are multiple routes to a destination the preference values are used to determine the preferred route If there is still a tie the route with the best route metric will be chosen To avoid problems with mismatched metrics i e RIP and OSPF metrics are not directly comparable you must configure different preference values for each of the protocols To display the Route Preferences page click Routing gt Routing Table gt Advanced gt Route Preferences GSM7352S Route Preferences Noste Preferwnces OSPT inter OSPE Caternat 1 Use Static to specify the static route preference value in the router The default value is 1 The range is 1 to 255 2 Use RIP to specify the RIP route preference value in the router The default value is 120 The range is 1 to 255 3 Use OSPF Intra to specify the OSPF intra route preference value in the router The de
617. ve Portal Global Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Binding Configuration NETGEAR GSM7352S oct with 49 Port Gigobi Layer J Mosoged Stockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Siors Monitoring Maintenance Help ndex Locour gt DHCP Snooping Captive Portal Binding Configuration gt IP Source Guard Dynamic ARP Captive Portal Binding Configuration Inspection v Captive Portal CP Global Configuration CP Configuration 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 CP Binding Configuration 49 50 51 52 CP Binding Tabie CP Group Configuration CP User Configuration CP Trap Flags CP Client Poti 2 J 4 5 G 7 O 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 19 2021 22 25 24 1 Use the CP ID pull down list to select the CP ID for which to create or update a CP instance 2 Use CP Name to enter the name of the configuration Name can contain 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters 3 Use Port List to select the interface or interfaces Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 517 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Captive Portal Binding Table To display the Captive Portal Binding Table page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Binding Table NETGEAR System Switching Routing Ox Security DHCP Snooping Captive Portal Binding Table gt IP Source Guard gt Dynamic ARP I jon w Interfoce Operatio
618. ved Fragments Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets The total number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE 802 3 section 8 2 1 5 10BASE5 and section 10 3 1 4 10BASE2 These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length with ERROR CRC excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Undersize Received The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length with GOOD CRC excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Chapter 7 Monitoring the System 553 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Table 7 112 Field Description Alignment Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS o
619. ver type SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels e 71 Time at which the original request was sent by the client e 72 Time at which the original request was received by the server 73 Time at which the server sent a reply e 74 Time at which the client received the server s reply The device can poll Unicast server types for the server time Polling for Unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known SNTP servers that have been configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for synchronization information T1 through T4 are used to determine server time This is the preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method If this method is selected SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the device using the SNTP Server Configuration page The device retrieves synchronization information either by actively requesting information or at every poll interval 38 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual SNTP Global Configuration Use the SNTP Global Configuration page to view and adjust date and time settings To display the SNTP Global Configuration page click System gt Management gt Time gt SNTP Global Configuration NETGEAR GSM73525 n Gigabit layer 2 Managed h with 4 10 Cogebit Slate Syst
620. very to False for the other match criteria to be visible 9 Use Protocol to configure IPv6 protocol a Specify an integer ranging from 0 to 255 after selecting protocol keyword other This number represents the IP protocol b Select name of a protocol from the existing list of Internet Protocol IP Transmission Control Protocol TCP User Datagram Protocol UDP Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP and Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP 10 Use Source Prefix PrefixLength to specify IPv6 Prefix combined with IPv6 Prefix length of the network or host from which the packet is being sent Prefix length can be in the range 0 to 128 11 Use Source L4 Port to specify a packet s source layer 4 port as a match condition for the selected IPv6 ACL rule Source port information is optional Source port information can be specified in two ways a Select keyword other from the drop down menu and specify the number of the port in the range from 0 to 65535 b Select one of the keyword from the list DOMAIN ECHO FTP FTPDATA HTTP SMTP SNMP TELNET TFTP and WWW Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of the port range 540 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 12 Use Destination Prefix PrefixLength to enter up to 128 bit prefix combined with prefix lengt
621. w the latest IP information 256 Chapter 4 Routing ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual ARP Table Configuration You can use this screen to change the configuration parameters for the Address Resolution Protocol Table You can also use this screen to display the contents of the table To display the ARP Table Configuration page click Routing gt ARP gt Advanced gt ARP Table Configuration GSM73525S O Pet Gigne lover Managed ARP Table Configuration ARP Table Configuration 1 Use Age Time to enter the value for the switch to use for the ARP entry ageout time You must enter a valid integer which represents the number of seconds it will take for an ARP entry to age out The range for this field is 15 to 21600 seconds The default value for Age Time is 1200 seconds 2 Use Response Time to enter the value for the switch to use for the ARP response time out You must enter a valid integer which represents the number of seconds the switch will wait for a response to an ARP request The range for this field is 1 to 10 seconds The default value for Response Time is 1 second 3 Use Retries to enter an integer that specifies the maximum number of times an ARP request will be retried The range for this field is 0 to 10 The default value for Retries is 4 4 Use Cache Size to enter an integer that specifies the maximum number of entries for the ARP cache The range for this
622. want the switch to wait for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group The valid range is from 2 to 3600 seconds The configured value must be greater than Max Response Time The default is 260 seconds 4 Use Max Response Time secs to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the Group Membership Interval in seconds The default is 10 seconds The configured value must be less than the Group Membership Interval 5 Use Present Expiration Time to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait to receive a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds The default is 0 seconds A value of zero indicates an infinite time out i e no expiration 6 Use Fast Leave Admin mode to select the Fast Leave mode for the a particular interface from the pull down menu The default is disable 186 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MLD VLAN Configuration To access the MLD VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt MLD VLAN Configuration GSM7352S MLD VLAN Configuration MLD VLA
623. ward its egress traffic to any other members in the same group By default the mode is community mode that each member port can forward traffic to other members in the same group but not to members in other groups 4 Click ADD to create a new private group in the switch 5 Click DELETE to delete a selected private group from the switch 490 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Private Group Membership To display the Private Group Membership page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Private Group gt Private Group Membership NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pon Gigabir Layer 3 Mosoged Srockoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobir Slors ioaowr Maintenance Help Index gt MAC Filter Private Group Membership Port Security Private Group Private Group Membership Private Group Coefiguration Prvete Group Membership Protected Port Storm Control 1 Use Group ID to select the Group ID for which you want to display or configure data 2 Use Port List to add the ports you selected to this private group Table 6 99 Field Description Group Name This field identifies the name for the Private Group you selected It can be up to 24 non blank characters long Group Mode This field identifies the mode of the Private Group you selected The modes are e community e isolated The group mode can be either isolated or communit
624. whether to send a trap when link status changes The factory default is enabled Use Maximum Frame Size to specify the maximum Ethernet frame size the interface supports or is configured including ethernet header CRC and payload 1518 to 9216 The default maximum frame size is 1518 198 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 8 Click CANCEL to update the switch with the values you entered If you want the switch to retain the new values across a power cycle you must perform a save 9 Click APPLY to update the switch with the values you entered If you want the switch to retain the new values across a power cycle you must perform a save Table 3 71 Field Description Port Type For normal ports this field will be normal Otherwise the possible values are e Mirrored The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic will be copied to the probe port e Probe Use this port to monitor mirrored port e Trunk Number The port is a member of a Link Aggregation trunk Look at the LAG screens for more information Physical Status Link Status Indicates the port speed and duplex mode Indicates whether the Link is up or down iflndex The iflndex of the interface table entry associated with this port Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 199 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable S
625. wing pages e Address Table on page 193 192 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Address Table This table contains information about unicast entries for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information This information is used by the transparent bridging function in determining how to propagate a received frame To display the Address Table page click Switching gt Address Table gt Basic gt Address Table NETGEAR GSM7352S 44 Fort Gigabit Layer J Mans Srochoble Switch with 4 1O Gegabet tom Maintenance Help Index sosour Address Table MAC Address Table Search Dy Total MAC Addresses 00 00 66 94 59 4C 1 0 37 Learned 00 01 02 03 04 00 Learned 00 01 03 05 07 08 Learned OO 01 F 4232081140 Learned 00 01 F4 32 81 90 vow Learned QOIOLF4cSF LOCO Learned GOOL FAF LDO 3 0 37 Learned OOO F4 5P 1F 20 Learned 00 01 F4 5F 17 38 1707 37 Learned 00 02 BC09 7F 28 Lesrned 00 02 8C 00 96 C0 3170 37 Learned 00 02 83 40 7 3 67 Lesrned 00 04 SA 60 80 54 170 37 Learned 00 06 29 56 94 09 Um 00 09 08 07 0 0 os Management 00 00 CO 67 C1 4 Larned 00 0F PE 00 91 99 1 0 37 Learned LLAR Ot Oh er Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information 193 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Search By to search for MAC Addresses by MAC Address VLAN ID and port e
626. witches Software Administration Manual Port Description This screen configures and displays the description for all ports in the box To access the Port Description page click Switching gt Ports gt Port Description NETGEAR Port Description Port Description 1 LAGS All Portisst Bit Offset O9 0 08 07 06 07 O 09 08 07 96 07 O9 05 08 07 06 07 09208207 06 07 09509 08 07 06 07 00 09 08 07 06 07 00 09208 07 06 07 00 09 08 07 06 67 09 09 08207 06 07 00209208 07 06 07 00 09208207 06 07 00 09 08 07 06 6 00 09 08 07 06 07 00 09 08 07 06 0 09 09 08 07 06 07 00 09208207 06 07 ae ae rtd Jopogogogogogogo a 1 Use Port Description to enter the description string to be attached to a port It can be up to 64 characters in length Table 3 72 Field Description Selects the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured MAC Address Displays the physical address of the specified interface PortList Bit Offset Displays the bit offset value which corresponds to the port when the MIB object type PortList is used to manage in SNMP ifIndex Displays the interface index associated with the port 200 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Link Aggregation Groups Link aggregation groups LAGs which are also known as port channels allow you to combine multiple full duplex Ethernet links int
627. with 4 10 Gigobi Slon System Switching oS Security Monitoring Mointenonce Help vocout CoS Interface Configuration CoS Interface Configuration 1 all Go To letestace Interface Interface Trust Mode Imertace Shaping Rate eo Interface Queve Configuration a o g T 0 o a o g r o o o C g ogogiog voe oc oboc oson oS ononon o gaja 404 Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual To configure CoS settings for an interface 1 Use Interface to specify all CoS configurable interfaces 2 Use Interface Trust Mode to specify whether to trust a particular packet marking at ingress Interface Trust Mode can only be one of the following Default value is trust dot1p e untrusted e trust dotip e trust ip dscp 3 Use Interface Shaping Rate to specify the maximum bandwidth allowed typically used to shape the outbound transmission rate This value is controlled independently of any per queue maximum bandwidth configuration It is effectively a second level shaping mechanism Default value is 0 Valid Range is 0 to 100 in increments of 1 The value 0 means maximum is unlimited 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Chapt
628. y Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 527 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual MAC Binding Configuration When an ACL is bound to an interface all the rules that have been defined are applied to the selected interface Use the MAC Binding Configuration page to assign MAC ACL lists to ACL Priorities and Interfaces To display the MAC Binding Configuration page click Security gt ACL gt Basic gt MAC Binding Configuration GSM7352S 44 Por Gigabit Layer Menoged trochable Switch with 4 10 Cgabe tom toco Sequence Number 528 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Select an existing MAC ACL from the ACL ID menu You can select one and bind it to the interfaces you wanted The packet filtering direction for ACL is Inbound which means the MAC ACL rules are applied to traffic entering the port 2 Specify an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list relative to other access lists already assigned to this interface and direction A low number indicates high precedence order If a sequence number is already in use for this interface and direction the specified access list replaces the currently attached access list using that sequence number If the sequence number is not specified by the user a Sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number curr
629. y When in isolated mode the member port in the group cannot forward its egress traffic to any other members in the same group By default the mode is community mode that each member port can forward traffic to other members in the same group but not to members in other groups Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 491 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Protected Ports Configuration If a port is configured as protected it does not forward traffic to any other protected port on the switch but it will forward traffic to unprotected ports Use the Protected Ports Configuration page to configure the ports as protected or unprotected You need read write access privileges to modify the configuration To display the Protected Ports Configuration page click the Security gt Traffic Control gt Protected Ports NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Por Gigedit Layer 3 Managed Stochoble Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Siors wocour gt MAC Filter Protected Ports Configuration Port Security gt Private Group Protected Ports Configuration Protected Port gt Storm Control To configure protected ports 1 N Md A D o Use Group ID to identify a group of protected ports that can be combined into a logical group Traffic can flow between protected ports belonging to different groups but not within the same group The selection box lists all the possible p
630. y page to view the MAC filters that are configured on the system To display the MAC Filter Summary page click Security gt Traffic Control gt MAC Filter gt MAC Filter Summary NETGEAR GSM7352S 48 Pon Gigabit Layer J Mosoged Siochobie Switch with 4 10 Gigobit Siors Maintenance Help Index tosowr v MAC Filter MAC Filter Summary MAC Filter MAC filter Summary MAC Address VLAN ID Source Port Members Destination Port Members Port Security gt Private Group Protected Port Storm Control MAC Filter Summary The following table describes the information displayed on the page Table 6 96 Field Description MAC Address The MAC address of the filter in the format 00 01 1A B2 53 4D VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the filter Source Port Members A list of ports to be used for filtering inbound packets Chapter 6 Managing Device Security 483 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual Port Security The Port Security folder contains links to the following features Port Security Configuration on page 484 e Port Security Interface Configuration on page 486 e Dynamic MAC Address on page 488 e Static MAC Address on page 489 Port Security Configuration Use the Port Security feature to lock one or more ports on the system When a port is locked only packets with an allowable source MAC addresses can be forwarded All other packets are discarded
631. y permission this field would show names of the existing pools only 2 Use Pool Name to specify a unique name for DHCPv6 pool It may be up to 31 alphanumeric characters 3 Use Domain Name to specify a DNS domain server name It may be up to 255 alphanumeric characters 4 Use DNS Server Address to specify the IPv6 address of a DNS server 72 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual DHCPv 6 Prefix Delegation Configuration To display the DHCPVv6 Prefix Delegation Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCPVv6 Prefix Delegation Configuration A screen similar to the following displays Chapter 2 Configuring System Information 73 ProSafe Gigabit L3 Managed Stackable Switches Software Administration Manual 1 Use Pool Name to select one DHCPV6 pool to be configured 2 Use Prefix Prefix Length to specify the delegated IPv6 prefix 3 Use DUID to identify the client s unique duid value The format is XX XX XX XX XX XX RFC3315 defines three types a Link layer address plus time 00 01 hardware type time link layer address hardware type 16 bit hardware type reserved by IANA 1 means an Ethernet device time 32 bit unsigned integer The time in seconds when this DUID was generated since 00 00 00 1 1 2000 _ link layer address The link layer address of a device generating the DUID b
632. y selecting the static route and editing this field 5 Use RPF Interface to select the interface number from the drop dead menu This is the interface that connects to the neighbor router for the given source IP address 6 Click ADD to add a new static route to the switch 7 Click DELETE to delete the multicast static routes selected Chapter 4 Routing 397 Configuring Quality of Service Use the features in the QoS tab to configure Quality of Service QoS settings on the switch The QoS tab contains links to the following features e Class of Service on page 398 e Differentiated Services on page 407 In a typical switch each physical port consists of one or more queues for transmitting packets on the attached network Multiple queues per port are often provided to give preference to certain packets over others based on user defined criteria When a packet is queued for transmission in a port the rate at which it is serviced depends on how the queue is configured and possibly the amount of traffic present in the other queues of the port If a delay is necessary packets get held in the queue until the scheduler authorizes the queue for transmission As queues become full packets have no place to be held for transmission and get dropped by the switch QoS is a means of providing consistent predictable data delivery by distinguishing between packets that have strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of delay

ProSafe Managed Switch Web Management User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents